Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

In the shadows of the underworld, there are stories whispered, legends that have grown with each retelling. One such tale is about a ruthless assassin whose actions sent shockwaves through the mafia families, forever cementing his place as a fearsome, cold-blooded killer. It’s a story that chills even the most hardened hearts—a myth that has almost become a ghost story among the underworld’s elite. It begins five years ago, with a massacre that still haunts the memories of those who survived to tell the tale.

The night was unforgiving, cloaked in darkness as heavy rain pounded against the ground. Lightning flashed intermittently, illuminating the figure that moved with the precision and grace of a predator. His steps were silent, his breath controlled, his eyes cold. He was a shadow, a phantom that passed through the heavily guarded perimeter without a sound. No one saw him until it was too late.

Inside the mafia mansion, the air was thick with the scent of expensive cigars and the low murmur of voices discussing the night’s business. The group gathered there had no idea that death was coming for them. They were men who had spilled blood for power, who had made enemies they couldn’t remember. But tonight, they were the targets. They were the ones who would pay for their sins with their lives.

Aguero’s heart pounded in his chest, each beat synchronized with the rain’s relentless assault on the mansion’s roof. A year ago, he had been a different person, or so he liked to think. But standing there, looking at the men who had a hand in Bam’s death, he felt something dark and cold take hold of him. It was rage, but it was more than that. It was the searing pain of loss, the unbearable weight of grief, and the unrelenting desire for revenge. 

His blade was an extension of his will, slicing through the air with deadly accuracy. The first man didn’t even have time to scream before he crumpled to the floor, blood pooling beneath him. The others scrambled for their weapons, panic setting in as they realized they were under attack. But Aguero was relentless. He moved with the speed and precision of someone who had trained for this moment his entire life. His eyes, once filled with a quiet, contemplative intelligence, now gleamed with a madness that had consumed him completely.

Each kill was a release, a momentary reprieve from the agony that tore at his insides. The sounds of their screams, the sight of their blood staining the once-pristine walls, the feeling of their life slipping away under his hands—it all brought him closer to something he couldn’t name. Perhaps it was closure, or perhaps it was the realization that no amount of bloodshed could ever bring Bam back.

By the time the last body hit the ground, the mansion was silent except for the rain and the heavy breathing of the lone survivor—the assassin himself. Aguero stood amidst the carnage, his chest heaving, his hands stained with the blood of those he had slaughtered. His eyes, once a clear and striking blue, now seemed darker, clouded by the horrors he had unleashed. He should have felt something—satisfaction, relief, even guilt—but all he felt was emptiness.

The rain continued to fall, washing away the blood but not the memories. Aguero’s thoughts drifted back to the moment that had brought him to this point, the moment he witnessed Bam's death. It was as if his life had ended that day as well. Bam had been his light, the one person who had seen through the cold exterior Aguero had built around himself. Bam had made him feel things he never thought possible—hope, happiness, love. And then, in an instant, it had all been taken away.

Aguero had returned to the Khun family mansion in a daze, the shock of Bam’s death still fresh in his mind. He hadn’t slept peacefully in months or eaten in days, for the past months, as he was too consumed by the need to find out who was responsible. When he finally confronted his father, Eduan, it was with a desperation that bordered on madness.

Eduan had been a pillar of strength, a figure of authority that Aguero had respected but never fully understood. That night, though, Aguero saw something in his father’s eyes that is opposite of his own—a deep, unspoken happiness. Without a word, Eduan had handed over the classified information Aguero demanded, knowing that there would be no stopping his son once he had what he needed.

The documents detailed the involvement of a small group under a mafia family in the train explosion that had killed Bam. It was enough to send Aguero into a frenzy, his grief morphing into a burning desire for revenge. The need to make them pay for what they had done to Bam—to him—consumed every thought, every breath. And so, he had set out on a mission that would change him forever.

Back in the mansion, surrounded by the bodies of those who had taken Bam from him, Aguero felt a strange sense of finality. He had done what he set out to do, but it hadn’t brought the closure he had hoped for. Instead, it had left him with an emptiness that threatened to swallow him whole. He was no longer the person he had been a few months ago, on that tragic summer day. The boy who had once been able to smile, to laugh, to care, because of Bam, was gone. In his place stood a man who had nothing left but his rage and the hollow satisfaction of revenge.

As the rain continued to pour, Aguero’s thoughts were drawn back to the one person who had mattered most. He could see Bam’s face in his mind, the way his eyes sparkled when he smiled, the warmth in his voice when he called Aguero’s name. Bam had been his anchor, the one thing that kept him grounded. Now, without him, Aguero felt adrift, lost in a sea of his own making.

He had tried to bury his emotions, to focus on the mission, but they always found a way to resurface. He could still hear Bam’s laughter in his ears, feel the warmth of his touch, see the light in his eyes. It was all gone now, snuffed out by the cruelty of the world they lived in. And no matter how many people Aguero killed, no matter how much blood he spilled, he could never bring Bam back.

The mansion was eerily quiet, the storm outside the only sound that remained. Aguero’s mind was a whirlwind of thoughts, memories, and regrets. He had wanted to avenge Bam’s death, to make the people responsible pay for what they had done. But now, standing amidst the carnage, he realized that he had lost something more valuable than he could ever reclaim—himself.

His descent into madness had been gradual, fueled by his obsession with finding those responsible for Bam’s death. It had started with sleepless nights, the constant replaying of that fateful day in his mind. The guilt, the anger, the helplessness—it all festered inside him until it became unbearable. He had tried to push it down, to ignore it, but it always found a way to surface. 

And now, as he stood in the aftermath of his own wrath, Aguero could feel the weight of his actions pressing down on him. He had become the very thing he despised—a monster, no better than the men he had just killed. The realization hit him like a ton of bricks, and for the first time in years, Aguero felt something other than anger. He felt a deep, soul-crushing sorrow that threatened to tear him apart.

He knew that this was only the beginning. The path he had chosen was a dark one, filled with danger and death. But it was the only path he could see, the only way to honor Bam’s memory. He couldn’t stop now, not when there was still so much left to do. He would continue to hunt down those responsible, to make them pay for what they had done. And if it meant losing himself in the process, then so be it.

But even as he made that vow, a part of him wondered if Bam would have wanted this. Would he have wanted Aguero to become a killer, to sacrifice his own humanity for the sake of revenge? The answer eluded him, lost in the storm that raged inside his mind. But deep down, Aguero knew that Bam wouldn’t have wanted this. He wouldn’t have wanted Aguero to lose himself, to become consumed by darkness. But it was too late for that now.

Aguero had crossed a line, one that he could never come back from. The massacre at the mafia mansion was only the first step in a journey that would take him further into the abyss. He could feel it calling to him, the darkness that had taken root in his soul. It whispered to him, promising power, revenge, and the satisfaction he craved. And Aguero, lost and broken, had no choice but to listen.

As the night wore on and the storm began to subside, Aguero turned and walked away from the mansion, leaving the bodies and the blood behind him. The rain had washed away the physical evidence of his actions, but the memories would haunt him forever. He was no longer the person he had been a year ago, and he knew that he could never go back. The only thing he could do now was move forward, to continue down the path he had chosen, no matter where it led.

But as he disappeared into the darkness, a small part of him couldn’t help but wonder if he had made a mistake. If, in his quest for revenge, he had lost the very thing that made him who he was. And as the first light of dawn began to break through the clouds, Aguero knew that the answer to that question would come with time. But for now, all he could do was keep moving, keep fighting.

Aguero stirred from his sleep, the remnants of a dream clinging to his consciousness like the fading tendrils of a morning mist. He could still hear the soft, melodic sound of Bam's laughter, echoing in his mind as if it had only just happened. The warmth of that laughter, the way it had always managed to break through his cold exterior, filled him with a fleeting sense of comfort. But as his eyes opened to the dim light of his grand chamber, reality set in, and the familiar emptiness returned. Bam was gone. He had been gone for five long years, and all that remained were these cruel, fleeting dreams.

Sighing, Aguero sat up in bed, rubbing a hand across his face as if to wipe away the remnants of sleep—and the memories that came with it. The chamber around him was lavish, filled with ornate furniture and priceless art, but it felt more like a gilded cage than a sanctuary. The Khun family mansion was vast and imposing, a symbol of their power and influence in the underworld. And as the upcoming successor of Eduan, Aguero now held a significant place within it, a place he had earned through years of relentless ambition and ruthless determination.

But even as he solidified his role within the family, there were times when Aguero felt like a stranger in his own life. The boy who had once been consumed by grief and rage was now a man of power and authority, yet the emptiness inside him had only grown. Every decision, every action, was a step further down the path he had chosen, a path that had taken him far from who he used to be. But it was too late to turn back now. Too much had happened, too much had changed.

As Aguero dressed for the day, his thoughts drifted to the others who had grown alongside him in these five years. Asensio and Hachuling had taken on much more responsibility, their roles within the family expanding as they proved themselves capable leaders. Asensio, with his sharp mind and calculating nature, had quickly become one of the most trusted advisors in the family. Hachuling, on the other hand, had taken on a more hands-on role, often dealing with the more physical aspects of their operations. They were both formidable in their own right, and Aguero had come to rely on them more than he would ever admit.

Ran, Aguero’s younger brother, had chosen a different path. Once, he had followed Maschenny, eager to learn from her and carve out his own place within the family. But that had changed. Ran had grown restless, realizing that he needed to forge his own way, to gain experience firsthand rather than living in his sister’s shadow. Aguero understood that desire all too well. Aguero respected his brother’s decision and had taken him under his wing. 

As for Maschenny, she had become more distant over the years, absorbed in her own work and ambitions. She had always been a force to be reckoned with, and her drive to succeed had only intensified. Aguero didn’t bother keeping tabs on her anymore—he had his own responsibilities, and truth be told, he couldn’t care less what she was up to. The Khun family was vast, and each member had their own part to play. Aguero’s role was clear, and he had no time to worry about anyone else.

With his mind made up, Aguero decided to leave the mansion and get some fresh air. The grand chamber, with its opulence and isolation, was starting to feel suffocating. He needed to get out, to walk among the city streets and clear his head. It was something he did often, though he rarely admitted it to anyone. There was something calming about blending into the crowd, about being just another face among the masses.

The city was alive with the hustle and bustle of the morning rush. People moved with purpose, hurrying to their destinations, completely unaware of the man walking among them. Aguero moved with the crowd, his hands in his pockets as he let his thoughts wander. The past five years had been a whirlwind, filled with more challenges and changes than he could have ever anticipated.

As he walked, Aguero found himself reminiscing about some of the more significant moments that had shaped these years. He remembered a time when Hockney had confided in him about his desire to become a mechanical engineer. Hockney had been passionate about it, but the reality of their world made such dreams seem impossible. Time, after all, was a luxury few could afford in their line of work.

But Aguero had seen something in Hockney’s determination, something that reminded him of his own drive. It wasn’t long before Aguero decided to take matters into his own hands, using his influence to cheat the system. He had pulled strings, made deals, and manipulated the right people until Hockney was able to obtain his license without having to go through the usual channels. It was a risky move, one that could have backfired if anyone found out, but Aguero had never been one to shy away from a challenge.

He could still remember the conversation they had after Hockney received his license, the disbelief and gratitude in his friend’s eyes.

“You actually did it,” Hockney had said, shaking his head in disbelief. “I thought you were just messing with me.”

Aguero had smirked, leaning back in his chair. “When have I ever said something I didn’t mean?”

Hockney had laughed then, a genuine, carefree laugh that was rare in their world. “I owe you one, Aguero. Seriously, this means more than you know.”

“You’ll pay me back by becoming the best damn engineer out there,” Aguero had replied, his tone light but his words sincere. “Don’t make me regret this.”

Now, five years later, Hockney was one of the most prominent young engineers in their society, his skills and expertise in high demand. It was one of the few things that still brought a smile to Aguero’s face, the knowledge that he had helped someone achieve their dreams, even if it meant bending the rules to do so.

As Aguero continued walking, his thoughts drifted to Elaine, who had taken a not-so-different path from the rest of them. Elaine had always been strong-willed and independent, but she had grown even more so over the years. After Bam’s death, Elaine had found herself drawn to Endorsi, who had become something of a mentor to her. Endorsi, with her sharp tongue and fierce spirit, had taken Elaine under her wing, and the two had become nearly inseparable.

Elaine had decided to follow in Endorsi’s footsteps, training to become a powerful and influential figure in their society. She had become more confident, more assertive, and Aguero had no doubt that she would one day become a force to be reckoned with. The bond between Elaine and Endorsi was something that Aguero respected, even if he didn’t fully understand it. They were both strong in their own ways, and together, they were nearly unstoppable.

As for Hatz, Shibisu, and Rak, they were still up to their own things, each of them pursuing their own goals and ambitions. Hatz had continued to hone his skills as a swordsman, his dedication to his craft unwavering. He was often seen training, pushing himself to become stronger, faster, better. Aguero had sparred with him on more than one occasion, each time finding himself impressed by Hatz’s relentless drive.

Shibisu, on the other hand, had taken a different route. He had always been the brains of the group, the one who could think on his feet and come up with a plan when things went south. Over the years, he had become more involved in the family’s operations, using his intelligence and quick wit to navigate the complex world of politics and alliances. Aguero had come to rely on Shibisu’s insights, often turning to him for advice when he needed a different perspective.

And then there was Rak, the loyal, fierce warrior who had remained a constant presence in Aguero’s life. Rak had never been one for subtlety or finesse, but his strength and loyalty were unmatched. He had taken on the role of protector, always watching Aguero’s back, always ready to fight for him. Rak’s presence was a comfort, a reminder that no matter how much had changed, some things remained the same.

The past five years had been anything but easy. Aguero had been tested in ways he never imagined, forced to confront the darkest parts of himself. But through it all, he had emerged stronger, more determined, and more focused on his goal. He had solidified his place within the Khun family, earned the respect of his peers, and built a network of allies who would stand by him no matter what.

But despite all of this, there was still a part of him that longed for something more. Something he couldn’t quite put into words, something that had been missing since the day Bam died. It was a void that nothing could fill, no matter how much power or success he achieved. And as Aguero walked by and watched the world pass by, Aguero couldn’t help but wonder if he would ever find what he was looking for.

The dreams of Bam’s laughter still haunted him, a reminder of a time when he had felt something more than just ambition and drive. It was a cruel twist of fate, one that he had never fully come to terms with. But life went on, and so did he. There was no room for regret, no time for mourning. The world they lived in was unforgiving, and only the strong survived.

Aguero continued his walk through the city, his thoughts a mixture of memories and the present moment. As he passed by familiar streets and bustling storefronts, he noticed a small diner on the corner. The sight of it brought a faint smile to his lips—this was where Endorsi and Elaine worked.

The memory of when Elaine had first revealed their decision to work at a morning diner flashed in his mind. It had been an unexpected revelation, one that had taken everyone by surprise. Elaine, with her calm and collected demeanor, had explained that she and Endorsi had taken up the job as a way to pass the time, something recreational to help them move on from everything that had happened. It was a way to feel a sense of normalcy, a distraction from the weight of their world.

He remembered that day clearly. They were all gathered in a dimly lit room, the atmosphere heavy with the tension that always seemed to linger around them. Endorsi had been leaning against the wall, her arms crossed, a small smirk on her face as if she was daring anyone to question her decision. Elaine had been the one to speak, her voice steady and matter-of-fact.

“We’ve decided to work at a diner in the mornings,” Elaine had said, her gaze sweeping across the room. “It’s just something to do, a way to keep ourselves busy.”

The room had fallen silent for a moment, everyone processing the unexpected announcement. Then, Shibisu had been the first to break the silence, a smug grin spreading across his face.

“Endorsi, working at a diner?” he had said, the disbelief evident in his tone. “I can’t picture it. You’re way too bossy for that.”

Endorsi had shot him a glare, but the others had found themselves nodding in agreement. Hatz had been the next to speak, his voice laced with amusement.

“Yeah, I’ve seen you in action, Endorsi,” Hatz had said, a rare smile tugging at the corners of his mouth. “I can’t imagine you taking orders from anyone.”

Even Aguero had joined in, a rare moment of levity breaking through his usually stoic demeanor. “You might scare the customers away before they even order,” he had said, his tone teasing but not unkind.

Rak, ever the blunt one, had simply grunted in agreement. “She’s a warrior, not a waitress.”

Hockney, who had been quietly observing the exchange, had finally chimed in, his voice thoughtful. “But maybe that’s the point,” he had said, his gaze lingering on Endorsi. “Maybe she needs something different, something that doesn’t involve fighting.”

Endorsi had rolled her eyes at their comments, but there had been a hint of amusement in her expression. “You all think you’re so funny,” she had retorted, though there was no real bite to her words. “But I’ll have you know, I’m excellent at whatever I put my mind to.”

“Sure you are,” Shibisu replied, his grin widening. “Just don’t try to kill any of the customers, okay?”

The memory faded as Aguero found himself standing in front of the diner. It was a modest establishment, with large windows that allowed the morning light to stream in. Through the glass, he could see the tables already filled with customers enjoying their breakfast. The atmosphere inside was warm and welcoming, a stark contrast to the cold, calculating world they usually inhabited.

Aguero pushed open the door and stepped inside, the familiar chime of the bell announcing his arrival. The scent of freshly brewed coffee and sizzling bacon filled the air, and for a moment, Aguero allowed himself to relax. This place, with its simple comforts, had become a small refuge for him—a place where he could momentarily escape the pressures of his life.

As he entered, Elaine was the first to notice him. She was standing behind the counter, taking an order from a customer, but as soon as she saw him, a warm smile spread across her face.

“Aguero,” she greeted, her voice soft but welcoming. “Good morning. Take your usual spot, I’ll be right with you.”

Aguero nodded, offering her a small smile in return, and made his way to his usual table by the window. The diner was already bustling with the morning crowd, but there was something calming about the routine of it all. People eating, talking, laughing—it was a slice of normal life that Aguero rarely allowed himself to partake in.

He took his seat and gazed out the window, his thoughts drifting once again. This diner, with its unassuming charm, had become a significant part of his mornings. It was where he could sit, sip his tea, and for a few moments, let his guard down. And it was also where he could see his friends in a different light, away from the battles and the bloodshed.

After a few minutes, Endorsi approached his table, holding a cup of Earl Grey tea on a small tray. She set it down in front of him with a flourish, her usual confident demeanor in full display.

“Your tea, sir,” she said with a mock formality, a playful glint in her eyes.

Aguero smirked, shaking his head slightly at her antics. “You know, Endorsi, you’re surprisingly good at this,” he remarked, lifting the cup to his lips.

Endorsi raised an eyebrow, taking a seat across from him. “Surprising? I told you I’m excellent at whatever I do,” she replied, her tone light but her eyes sharp.

Aguero took a sip of his tea, savoring the warmth that spread through him. “I never doubted you,” he said after a moment, his gaze meeting hers. “But this... it’s different from what we’re used to.”

Endorsi leaned back in her chair, her expression softening as she nodded. “Yeah, it is,” she agreed. “That’s why we do it. It’s a way to remind ourselves that there’s more to life than just... surviving.”

Aguero understood what she meant. Their lives were filled with danger, with the constant threat of betrayal and violence. It was easy to forget that there was a world outside of that, a world where people lived ordinary lives, where they didn’t have to constantly look over their shoulders. The conversation between them began to shift, the lighthearted banter giving way to something more serious. Endorsi’s usual playful demeanor faded, replaced by a look of contemplation that Aguero rarely saw on her.

“Aguero,” she began, her voice uncharacteristically hesitant, “you know, there’s something I’ve been meaning to say. Something I should have said a long time ago.”

Aguero set his cup down, his attention fully on her now. He could see the weight of her words before she even spoke them, the way her eyes seemed to carry the burden of something unresolved.

Endorsi took a deep breath, as if steeling herself for what was to come. “I just… I wanted to apologize,” she said, her voice quiet but steady. “For everything that happened five years ago. For the way I acted, for the things I said... I was wrong.”

Aguero felt a pang in his chest, the mention of that time bringing a flood of memories he had tried so hard to suppress. But he remained silent, letting her continue.

“I couldn’t process what happened back then,” Endorsi admitted, her gaze dropping to the table. “It was too much, too fast. Bam’s death... it felt like everything was falling apart. And I didn’t know how to deal with it. I guess... I wanted you to feel the same way, to share in my anger and my grief in silence. But that wasn’t fair to you.” She paused, her hands clenched in her lap as she struggled to find the right words. “I questioned your love for Bam, and that was wrong of me. I was hurting, and I took it out on you. And for that, I’m truly sorry.”

Aguero’s heart tightened at her words, the sincerity in her voice cutting through the walls he had built around himself. He had never expected this from Endorsi, had never thought she would acknowledge the pain of that time in such a direct way. For a moment, he didn’t know how to respond. He wanted to tell her that it was alright, that they had all been hurting in their own way. But the truth was, those words wouldn’t do justice to the complexity of what they had all gone through.

Finally, he spoke, his voice calm and even. “Endorsi, we were all lost back then. None of us knew how to deal with what happened. You don’t have to apologize.”

Endorsi looked up at him, her eyes searching his eyes for any sign of resentment or anger. But all she found was understanding, a quiet acceptance of the pain they had both carried for so long.

“Maybe not,” she said softly, “but I needed to say it. I needed you to know that I’m sorry for how I treated you.”

Aguero nodded, the tightness in his chest loosening slightly. “Thank you,” he said simply, his gaze never leaving hers. “But we can’t change the past. We can only focus on what’s in front of us now.”

Endorsi nodded, a small, bittersweet smile forming on her lips. “You’re right. We’ve all changed so much since then. But I just... I needed you to know that I’m here for you, Aguero. Whatever happens, I’ve got your back.”

Aguero felt a warmth spread through him at her words, a warmth he hadn’t felt in a long time. It wasn’t just the tea, or the comfort of the diner—it was the realization that despite everything, they were still here, still standing. And they weren’t alone.

“Thank you, Endorsi,” Aguero said, his voice sincere. “That means a lot.”

Endorsi nodded, her expression softening even further. For a moment, they sat in silence, the unspoken understanding between them stronger than any words could convey. The diner, with its simple charm and warmth, had become more than just a place to eat—it was a place of healing, of mending the cracks in their fractured lives.

As the morning crowd continued to bustle around them, Aguero and Endorsi shared a quiet moment of peace, a moment that reminded them both of the strength they found in each other. The world outside was still as dangerous and unforgiving as ever, but here, in this small corner of the city, they could be themselves—no masks, no pretenses, just two friends finding solace in each other’s company.

When Elaine returned to the table to check on them, Aguero felt a sense of calm that had eluded him for so long. He wasn’t sure what the future held, but for the first time in a long time, he felt that maybe, just maybe, they could face it together.

As he finished his tea, Aguero looked around the diner, taking in the sights and sounds of the morning. This was their world now, a world where they could still find moments of light even in the darkest of times. And as he stood to leave, with Endorsi and Elaine waving him off, Aguero felt a sense of hope that he hadn’t felt in years.

Maybe the past couldn’t be changed, and maybe the scars they carried would never fully heal. But they were still here, still fighting, and as long as they had each other, there was still something worth fighting for.

Because after all, Aguero’s life didn’t end on that one tragic summer day, when he was eighteen. 

Chapter Text

The world Aguero lived in was a labyrinth of shadows, where every corner held the potential for danger, and trust was a luxury few could afford. In such an environment, building a team wasn’t just about skill; it was about loyalty, understanding, and the ability to see through the lies that shaped their reality. The decision to expand his team was not made lightly, but rather out of necessity. To survive and thrive, they needed people who could be trusted, but trust itself was a rare commodity in their world.

It had taken countless discussions, debates, and arguments for Aguero’s group to finally reach a consensus on recruitment. The memory of that final conversation, where they had all laid their cards on the table, lingered in Aguero’s mind.

“Look, we all know how dangerous this is,” Elaine had said, her voice was steady yet tinged with concern. “Bringing in someone we don’t know could be the beginning of the end. We’ve seen it happen before, and I don’t want us to become another cautionary tale.”

Hatz, who was never one to mince words, had leaned forward, his expression was serious. “I agree with Elaine. We’ve made it this far because we know each other, and we know what to expect from each other. A new person changes the dynamics. It’s a risk, and we need to be damn sure it’s worth it.”

Rak, his massive form taking up more than his share of the space, had grunted in agreement. “Trust is earned, not given. We don’t have time to babysit someone who might turn on us.”

Aguero had listened to them all, his sharp mind was processing their concerns, weighing the risks against the potential benefits. He knew they were right. Trusting someone new in their line of work was a gamble, one that could easily backfire. But he also knew that if they were going to survive the coming storms, they needed to be stronger, more versatile. And that meant bringing in fresh blood.

“There’s no denying the risks,” Aguero had said finally, his voice was calm but authoritative. “But there’s also no denying that we need to adapt if we want to keep ahead of the threats that are coming our way. I’m not suggesting we bring in just anyone. We’ll be thorough in our vetting process. If we do this, we do it right. No mistakes.”

Hockney nodded thoughtfully. “Aguero’s right. We need more hands, but they have to be the right ones. We can’t afford to be reckless. But if we find someone who fits, who can add to our strength rather than weaken it, then we should consider it.”

There had been a moment of silence as everyone absorbed Hockney’s words. He wasn’t someone who spoke often, but when he did, the group listened. It was a testament to the respect he commanded, a respect that had been earned over years of standing by each other’s side.

In the end, it was Aguero who made the final call, as he so often did. “We move forward with the recruitment,” he had decided, his tone leaving no room for doubt. “But we proceed with caution. We’ll take our time, make sure that whoever we bring in is someone we can trust. No shortcuts.”

That had been years ago, and since then, Aguero had been quietly assessing potential recruits, looking for the right fit. It was during this time that Ran had approached him with a suggestion.

“Hey, A.A,” Ran had said one evening, his tone was casual but carrying an undercurrent of seriousness. They had been in one of the Khun mansion’s many grand chambers, a place where even a whisper could echo off the marble walls. “I know you’re looking to recruit, and I’ve got a name for you to check out.”

Aguero had looked up from the stack of reports he had been going through, one eyebrow raised. “Who?”

“Novick,” Ran replied, leaning against the doorframe. “Hachuling and I crossed paths with him during a mission a while back. The guy’s sharp, resourceful, and he knows how to get things done. He could be a valuable asset to the team.”

Aguero had set down the papers, giving his full attention to Ran. “You know I don’t like being told to investigate someone, especially when it’s not related to our current work.”

Ran smirked, knowing full well how Aguero operated. “Yeah, I know. But trust me on this one. You’ll want to look into him. Novick’s got potential, and I think you’ll appreciate what he brings to the table.”

Aguero had studied Ran’s expression, searching for any hint of doubt, but there had been none. Ran was someone he trusted implicitly, someone who wouldn’t waste his time with a pointless lead. If Ran believed Novick was worth considering, then there was merit in it.

“I’ll take your word for it,” Aguero had finally said, nodding. “But if he turns out to be a problem, it’s on you.”

Ran had chuckled. “Fair enough. But I don’t think you’ll be disappointed.”

Aguero had filed Novick’s name away in the back of his mind, intending to look into the man when he had the time. However, before he could delve deeper into Novick’s background, another lead had come his way, this time from an unexpected source.

It had been an ordinary day when Aguero received a call from Asensio. They weren’t in constant contact, but when Asensio reached out, it was usually important.

“A.A,” Asensio’s voice crackled through the phone, a hint of urgency in his tone.

“What is it?” Aguero had asked, immediately alert.

“You know, there’s a rumor going around down there,” Asensio had begun, clearly not wasting any time. “About a certain ‘ghost courier.’ It’s still low-profile. I’ve heard from Ran that you’re now recruiting. This might be someone worth looking into.”

Aguero had frowned, though he was intrigued. “Ghost courier? Sounds like a fairy tale.”

Asensio had chuckled. “Maybe. But from what I’ve heard, this person is the real deal. They’ve been flying under the radar, but they’ve got skills that could be useful. And from what I can gather, they’re not tied to any major players. Yet.”

Aguero had considered this information carefully. The underworld was filled with rumors and half-truths, but Asensio wasn’t one to bring something like this to his attention unless he thought it had potential.

“I’ll check it out,” Aguero had finally said, his curiosity piqued. “Thanks for the heads-up.”

“No problem,” Asensio had replied. “Just thought you’d want to know.”

With these two leads in hand, Aguero had found himself with more work than he had anticipated. But he was nothing if not thorough, and he knew that if he wanted to build the team he envisioned, he needed to put in the effort.

For the next few days, Aguero immersed himself in the task of gathering information on both Novick and the ghost courier. He reached out to contacts, sifted through underground networks, and pieced together what little he could find.

Novick, as it turned out, was a man who operated on the fringes of the underworld, never quite aligning himself with any one group. He was skilled, that much was clear, with a reputation for being resourceful and adaptable. But what intrigued Aguero the most was the fact that Novick had managed to survive in a world where most either found a master or met an early end. That kind of independence was rare and valuable.

The ghost courier, on the other hand, was much more elusive. Information was scarce, and what little Aguero could find was shrouded in mystery. Whoever they were, they had managed to stay under the radar, which in itself was impressive. But it also made them a wildcard—someone who could either be a great asset or a potential threat.

Aguero knew that if he wanted to bring them into the fold, he would need to be careful. This wasn’t just about finding someone who could follow orders; it was about finding someone who could be molded into a member of the team, someone who could be trusted in the long run.

By the end of the week, Aguero had gathered enough information to make a decision. He knew that the rest of the team would be meeting up soon, and he wanted to have these new recruits in place by then. It was time to act.

The recruitment was about to begin, and with it, the next phase of their journey. Aguero could feel the weight of the decisions he was about to make, but he also knew that they were necessary. If they wanted to survive, they needed to evolve, to adapt to the ever-changing landscape of the underworld.

As he prepared for the upcoming meetings with Novick and the ghost courier, Aguero couldn’t help but feel a sense of anticipation. This was the beginning of something new, something that could shape the future of their team. And while the road ahead was uncertain, he knew that they were ready to face it.

The next few days would determine the direction they would take, the people who would join them, and the challenges they would face together. Aguero was ready, and so was his team. Now, all that remained was to take the first step.

The town was a maze of dimly lit streets and crumbling facades, where shadows seemed to stretch endlessly, mingling with the haze of cigarette smoke that hung in the air. Aguero’s investigation into Novick had led him here, to a place where normalcy was a distant memory and danger lurked around every corner. It was in this gritty, unwelcoming environment that Aguero had been observing Novick for days, piecing together the man’s routine and understanding his habits.

Novick was a fixture in this rough bar, a place where no questions were asked and no one cared to know who you were. It was a place where people came to disappear, and for Novick, it was a haven. Aguero had followed him discreetly, noting every movement, every pattern. Novick was meticulous about his visits, arriving at the same time each night and following a predictable routine. It was almost too easy to keep track of him, but that was exactly what Aguero wanted. It made the planning for the eventual confrontation simpler.

The time had come for Aguero to make his move. He had donned a sleek white long sleeve shirt and beige pants, an outfit that helped him blend in with the crowd of indifferent patrons. As he entered the bar, he moved with casual confidence, giving off the impression of just another regular drinker. His eyes, however, were sharp, constantly scanning the room for Novick’s unmistakable figure. When he spotted him, Aguero took note of the way Novick’s demeanor shifted. The man was always on edge, but today, there was a heightened sense of caution.

Aguero chose a seat at the far end of the bar, deliberately keeping a distance but staying within Novick’s line of sight. The two were separated by a number of other patrons, but the air between them was thick with unspoken tension. Aguero could see Novick’s eyes darting occasionally in his direction, wary and calculating. It was clear that Novick had picked up on the fact that he was being watched, and that made Aguero’s task all the more delicate.

Time passed slowly, and Aguero made sure to keep his movements casual, ordering a drink and engaging in light conversation with the bartender. But his attention was solely on Novick. He watched as the man finished his drink and, after a few minutes, made his way to the restroom. Aguero waited a few seconds before following, his movements were deliberate and silent.

The restroom was a small, grimy space with flickering fluorescent lights that cast eerie shadows on the cracked tiles. Aguero entered quietly, closing the door behind him and locking it with a practiced twist of the latch. He watched as Novick approached the sink, washing his hands with a rhythm that suggested a habitual routine. When their eyes met in the dim light, the recognition was immediate. They both understood that this was not just an ordinary encounter.

The lights above them suddenly flickered and then went out completely, plunging the restroom into darkness. Aguero didn’t hesitate. He sprang into action, tackling Novick from behind with a force that drove the man against the wall. Novick struggled, his size and strength presenting a challenge, but Aguero’s training and resolve kept him in control.

In the darkness, Aguero wrapped a rope around Novick’s neck, pulling it tight. The struggle was intense, Novick gasping for air as he tried to push Aguero off. Aguero could feel the man’s powerful hands pressing against him, but he kept his grip firm, the rope cutting off Novick’s air supply.

Aguero’s breath came in controlled bursts as he tightened the rope, feeling the resistance of Novick’s attempts to break free. “You’re quite the fighter, aren’t you?” Aguero taunted, his voice low and steady. “But you’re not getting out of this so easily.”

Novick’s gasps grew more desperate, his strength was waning as the rope constricted further. He began tapping out, his movements growing weaker. Aguero kept up the pressure, watching the man’s reflection in the grimy mirror across from them. The flickering light returned, casting an unsettling glow over their struggle.

When Aguero saw the telltale signs of Novick’s impending unconsciousness, he finally released the rope. Novick crumpled to the floor, gasping for air, as his hand was clutching his chest. Aguero stood over him, his expression unreadable.

“What do you want?” Novick managed to croak, his voice was hoarse and strained. “Who the hell are you?”

Aguero looked down at him, his gaze was steady. “I’m Aguero, and I’m here to offer you a chance to join my group. We could use someone with your skills.”

Novick, still struggling to catch his breath, shook his head slowly. “There’s no way you’re leading a group. You’ve got to be kidding me.”

Before Aguero could respond, his phone buzzed in his pocket. He pulled it out, glancing at the screen. It was Ran. Aguero answered the call, keeping his eyes on Novick.

“Hey, A.A,” Ran’s voice came through the line, casual but with an undertone of curiosity. “How’s the recruitment going?”

Aguero glanced back at Novick, who was now watching him with a mix of disbelief and curiosity. “It’s happening right here,” Aguero said into the phone, keeping his voice calm. “I’ve got Novick right where I want him.”

As Aguero spoke, Novick took advantage of the distraction, reaching for a ben’s knife he had concealed. He hurled it toward Aguero with surprising speed, aiming for his head, but Aguero’s reflexes were sharper. Without breaking stride, he caught the knife between two fingers, holding it up for Novick to see.

Ran’s voice crackled through the phone, laced with surprise. “Wait, are you in the middle of the recruitment?”

“Yeah,” Aguero looked back at Novick, a smirk playing on his lips. “Would you join us then?” he asked, his tone both challenging and inviting.

Novick’s eyes widened in shock, the knife he had thrown now useless in Aguero’s grasp. The man’s resistance seemed to falter, his earlier bravado replaced by uncertainty. Aguero could see the gears turning in Novick’s mind, weighing his options.

Aguero continued to hold Novick’s gaze, the knife still held casually between his fingers. “You’ve seen what I’m capable of,” Aguero said, his voice firm. “And you’ve seen what I can offer. So, what’s it going to be? Will you join us or stay here and risk everything?”

Novick’s expression shifted from defiance to contemplation. The reality of Aguero’s abilities and the offer on the table was sinking in. It was clear that Novick was caught between his natural wariness and the potential for a new opportunity.

Finally, Novick sighed, his shoulders slumping slightly. “Alright,” he said reluctantly. “I’ll hear you out. But I’m not making any promises until I see what you’re really offering.”

Aguero nodded, his smirk widening. “Fair enough. We’ll discuss the details when we’re somewhere more secure.”

As Aguero led Novick out of the restroom and back into the bar, the man’s demeanor had changed. The earlier tension had eased, replaced by a cautious curiosity. Aguero knew that gaining Novick’s trust would take time, but the first step had been taken. The recruitment had begun, and with it, a new chapter in Aguero’s quest for a stronger, more capable team. The night was far from over, and Aguero still had another lead to follow. But for now, he had achieved what he had set out to do. Novick was on board, and that was a significant victory. As Aguero left the bar with Novick in tow, he felt a sense of satisfaction, knowing that the groundwork for the future was being laid, one recruit at a time.

The “ghost courier” was a figure cloaked in whispers and shadows, a phantom of the underworld known for his speed and elusive nature. Dan Edin was his name, but to those in the know, he was simply the ghost—a man who slipped through fingers like smoke and vanished before anyone could get a handle on him. His reputation for last-minute escapes and quick disappearances made him an enigma, one that Aguero knew would require more than just traditional methods to capture.

Aguero had gathered enough resources to piece together the outline of Dan Edin’s background. The courier’s movements were a mystery, but Aguero had managed to track the patterns and routines of his known operations. Dan Edin’s skill at evading capture was legendary, and Aguero knew that conventional methods would be useless. To lure him out, Aguero needed something enticing enough to draw Dan out of the shadows.

Aguero turned to Hachuling for assistance. Hachuling was known for his expertise in crafting believable but misleading information, a talent that would be crucial for this operation. Aguero and Hachuling sat in a dimly lit room, surrounded by a clutter of papers and electronic devices. 

“Hachuling,” Aguero began, “we need to set a trap for Dan Edin. I want you to help me spread some false information about a valuable treasure that he might be interested in.”

Hachuling raised an eyebrow, clearly intrigued. “You want to fake a treasure? That’s risky. If we get this wrong, it could blow up in our faces.”

Aguero nodded, his expression was serious. “I know the stakes are high. But Dan Edin is too elusive to catch any other way. If we can make him believe this treasure is real, he’ll come to us. Once he’s in our grasp, we’ll handle the rest.”

Hachuling considered this for a moment, then nodded. “Alright. I’ll set up the information and make sure it looks convincing. Where should we plant this treasure?”

Aguero handed over a file with details on a location—a seemingly random warehouse on the outskirts of town, perfect for a treasure hunt. “This place is ideal. It’s secluded but not too remote. Make sure the story about the treasure is compelling enough to draw him in.”

Hachuling took the file and started working on the plan. Over the next few days, Aguero and Hachuling worked tirelessly to spread the false lead. They created fake documents, hacked into various systems to leak information, and planted rumors in the right circles. The treasure was described as a priceless artifact with a rich history, something that would intrigue someone like Dan Edin.

The trap was set, and Aguero waited, monitoring the situation closely. The days passed, and the buzz about the treasure grew. It wasn’t long before Dan Edin’s name started popping up in connection with the rumors. Aguero’s plan was working. Dan was intrigued.

The night of the “heist” arrived. Aguero positioned himself strategically around the warehouse, hidden in the shadows, watching for any sign of Dan Edin. The warehouse was a nondescript building, its exterior worn and unremarkable. Inside, the treasure—an old, dusty box filled with fake valuables—was set up as bait.

Dan Edin arrived at the warehouse just as Aguero had anticipated. He moved with the confidence of someone who was used to this kind of work, his steps light and quick. Aguero watched as Dan broke into the building, bypassing the security systems with practiced ease. The ghost was here, and Aguero was ready.

Dan approached the box, his eyes scanning the area for any signs of a trap. Aguero could see the moment Dan’s face lit up with the realization that he had found what he was looking for. The courier’s hand reached for the box, and in that instant, Aguero moved.

With stealth and precision, Aguero slipped into the warehouse, his movements silent. Dan had just begun to open the box when Aguero was upon him. The confrontation was swift and intense. Dan’s agility was impressive, but Aguero’s skills were superior. They fought in the dim light of the warehouse, Dan’s movements quick and erratic as he tried to evade capture. 

Aguero’s strikes were calculated, each one designed to disarm and overpower. Dan fought back fiercely, but Aguero’s experience gave him the upper hand. The fight was a blur of motion and sound, with Dan’s attempts to escape thwarted at every turn.

Finally, after a particularly fierce struggle, Aguero managed to subdue Dan. With a final decisive move, Aguero pinned Dan to the ground, his breath heavy but controlled. Dan, panting and exhausted, looked up at Aguero with a mix of anger and defeat.

“Who are you?” Dan gasped, trying to catch his breath. “What do you want?”

Aguero, still holding Dan down, looked at him with a calm expression. “My name is Aguero. I’m here to offer you a place in my group.”

Dan’s eyes widened in disbelief. “You think you can just catch me and expect me to join you? There’s no way I’m working for you.”

Aguero remained unfazed. “You’re here now. I’ve been tracking you for a while. You’re skilled, and you’re exactly what we need. If you refuse, you’ll be left with nothing but your pride.”

Dan struggled against Aguero’s hold, but the effort was futile. Aguero had him pinned, and he was not going to let go easily. 

Aguero looked at Dan with a smirk. “So, Dan, are you ready to join us? Or do you want to continue resisting?”

Dan’s expression shifted from defiance to contemplation. He saw the determination in Aguero’s eyes and realized that resistance was futile. With a resigned sigh, Dan nodded slowly.

“Alright,” he said reluctantly. “I’ll join you. But I want to know exactly what I’m getting into.”

Aguero released Dan, helping him to his feet. “You’ll find out soon enough. For now, let’s get out of here and discuss the details.”

As they left the warehouse, Dan looked back at the now-empty treasure box, a mix of relief and curiosity on his face. Aguero knew that gaining Dan’s trust would be a process, but the first step was complete. The ghost courier was now part of the team, and Aguero was one step closer to building a stronger, more capable group.

With Dan in tow, Aguero felt a sense of accomplishment. The trap had worked perfectly, and the new recruit was on board. With Novick and Dan joining up the list, Aguero felt ready to meet with the other members the next week. 

The hideout had always been a place that carried memories, both bitter and sweet, buried beneath layers of time and dust. Aguero led Dan and Novick through the narrow, dimly lit corridors that seemed to stretch endlessly, every step echoing off the cold, stone walls. The air was thick with the scent of damp earth and aged wood, a smell that took Aguero back to a time when the world was different—simpler, perhaps, though no less dangerous.

Aguero’s lips curled into a slight smile as he walked, his fingers brushing lightly against the walls. “Sure brings back memories,” he murmured, more to himself than to his companions.

Dan and Novick trailed behind him, their footsteps cautious and their eyes darting around, taking in the details of the place. The hideout was old, that much was clear, but it was also meticulously maintained. There was a sense of history in the way the walls were worn in places, the way the light flickered unevenly, casting shadows that seemed to dance to some unseen rhythm.

“This place is... something,” Dan commented, his voice breaking the silence. “What is this, some kind of ancient fortress?”

“Feels like it,” Novick added, his tone light, though there was an undercurrent of unease in his words. “You could get lost in here.”

Aguero remained silent, letting them speculate. He could hear the curiosity in their voices, mixed with a hint of apprehension. They had no idea what they were walking into, no idea who he truly was or the gravity of the situation. Even though he had introduced himself by name, Aguero knew that to them, he was still a mystery. 

As they approached the large, heavy door at the end of the corridor, Aguero came to a stop. He turned to face Dan and Novick, his expression calm but with an air of authority that instantly commanded their attention. 

“Before we go any further, there’s something you need to know,” Aguero began, his voice steady and measured. He watched as Dan and Novick exchanged glances, their curiosity piqued. “The group you’re joining in isn’t something for casual conversations and fun. It’s the real deal. And… I know you two know me by my first name but I guess this is the right time to introduce myself more formally. I am Khun Aguero Agnis.”

Dan blinked, confusion flickering in his eyes. “Khun Aguero Agnis? As in... the successor of Khun Eduan?”

Novick’s eyes widened in realization, and Aguero could see the pieces falling into place in their minds. The shock was evident on their faces, a mix of disbelief and sudden understanding.

“If you’re really the one successor of Khun Eduan,” Novick started, his voice almost a whisper, “then the group you’re talking about...”

Aguero allowed himself a small smirk, watching their reactions with a touch of amusement. He reached for the door handle and pushed it open, the heavy wood creaking as it swung inward. The room beyond was large, dimly lit, and filled with an overwhelming presence that immediately suffocated the air.

“Welcome to TFN,” Aguero announced, stepping aside to allow Dan and Novick to see inside.

The two men peered into the room, and what they saw froze them in place. Inside, a group of individuals were scattered around the room, some sitting casually, others standing. Yet, despite their relaxed postures, there was an undeniable tension in the air, an aura of power that was impossible to ignore.

Elaine was seated cross-legged on a low couch, her gaze sharp as she observed the newcomers. Endorsi leaned against the wall, her arms crossed, an air of confidence surrounding her. Hatz stood by the pillar, his back straight, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword as if it was a natural extension of his body. Hockney was perched on a stool near a table cluttered with blueprints and tools, his attention shifting between his work and the new arrivals. Rak towered in the corner, his muscular frame casting a large shadow, while Ran sat on the floor, seemingly uninterested, though his eyes betrayed a readiness for action at a moment’s notice. Shibisu stood near the entrance, his expression unreadable but his mind undoubtedly racing through various scenarios.

Dan and Novick could feel the weight of their gazes, the sharpness of their eyes cutting through the air. It was as if the room itself was alive, watching, waiting. For a moment, neither of them could breathe, overwhelmed by the sheer presence of the people before them.

“Holy...” Dan muttered under his breath, his voice barely audible.

“This is TFN?” Novick managed to say, though his voice was laced with awe and a hint of fear.

Aguero stepped forward, his smirk fading into a more serious expression as he addressed the group. “Elaine, Endorsi, Hatz, Hockney, Rak, Ran, Shibisu,” he listed, his voice calm yet commanding. “These are the members of Twenty-Fifth Night.”

Dan and Novick looked at each member in turn, recognizing the names from whispered rumors and stories passed around in the underworld. TFN was not just a group; it was a legend, a force to be reckoned with. They were feared, respected, and often spoken of in hushed tones, as if saying their name too loudly would invoke their presence. About five years ago, TFN rose swiftly to the pinnacle of the underworld as the most feared team of assassins under the Khun family's ruthless banner. Their ascent was marked by a series of high-profile hits that left their targets dead and their rivals trembling in fear. Each mission they undertook ended in absolute success, leaving behind no trace but terror and silence. Over time, TFN's name became synonymous with death itself, a specter that haunted every corner of the underworld, cementing the Khun family's dominance and making them untouchable in a world where alliances crumbled and enemies vanished without a trace.

Elaine, the master of martial arts, had honed her karate skills to the point of perfection. Her strikes were precise, deadly, and delivered with such speed that her opponents often didn’t realize they had been hit until it was too late. Endorsi, known for her freestyle assassination techniques, moved with a grace that belied the lethal intent behind her every action. Her kills were clean, efficient, and always left a lasting impression on those who witnessed them.

Hatz’s swordsmanship was unmatched, his blade moving with a fluidity that made him seem almost untouchable in combat. His dedication to his craft was evident in every swing, every thrust of his sword. Hockney, the group’s strategist and engineer, was the mastermind behind many of their operations. His mind worked like a machine, always calculating, always planning, ensuring that TFN was always several steps ahead of their enemies.

Rak’s physical strength was legendary, his combat training rigorous. He was a one-man army, capable of taking down multiple opponents with ease. Ran, with his ruthless assassination techniques, was the silent shadow that struck fear into the hearts of those who crossed TFN. His methods were brutal, his results undeniable. Shibisu, the adaptable chameleon of the group, could fit into any situation, his intelligence and combat skills making him a versatile and invaluable member.

TFN had not risen to the top of the underworld by chance. Their journey was one of calculated risks, strategic alliances, and an unwavering commitment to their goals. They complemented each other perfectly, each member’s strengths balancing the others’ weaknesses, creating a unit that was nearly invincible.

As Dan and Novick absorbed all of this, Aguero watched them carefully, noting the mix of awe and trepidation on their faces. He had seen this reaction before—the realization that they were in the presence of something far greater, far more dangerous than they had anticipated.

“Introduce yourselves,” Aguero prompted, his voice breaking through their thoughts.

Dan was the first to step forward, his nervousness evident but his voice steady. “I’m Dan Edin,” he said, trying to keep his tone light. “I’m... well, I’m known as the Ghost Courier, I guess.”

A flicker of recognition passed through the room, though no one commented. Dan swallowed, feeling the weight of their silence.

Novick followed suit, his posture more relaxed but his eyes betraying his caution. “Novick. I... don’t have any fancy titles, but I’m good with a blade.”

There was a brief pause, the atmosphere still heavy, until Endorsi let out a soft chuckle. “Ghost Courier and a swordsman, huh? Interesting combination.”

Elaine smiled slightly, though there was a sharpness to it. “Welcome, then. You’ll find we don’t bite... much.”

Dan and Novick exchanged a glance, sensing the thinly veiled menace behind the group’s welcoming words. It was clear that while they were being accepted, they were also being tested, evaluated, and weighed.

“So,” Novick began, trying to steer the conversation into safer territory, “why is the group called Twenty-Fifth Night? It’s an interesting name.”

Endorsi’s expression softened, a touch of sadness crossed her eyes. “Twenty-Fifth is a reference to the day our friend died,” she explained as her voice lost its usual edge. “He was... someone important to all of us. The night represents the scenery he loved the most. So, in a way, the name is a tribute to him. A way to honor his memory.”

Dan and Novick listened in silence, sensing the depth of emotion behind her words. They hadn’t expected such a story, and it added another layer to the group’s mystique.

Before they could ask more, Hockney spoke up, his tone was businesslike. “Well. There’s something you need to know if you’re going to be part of TFN. Each member here has a number. It’s a symbol of your commitment to the group, a mark of belonging. These numbers don’t indicate rank, but they do represent your place among us.”

Dan and Novick nodded, understanding the gravity of what Hockney was saying. There was no turning back once they accepted the number.

“Novick,” Hockney continued, “you’re number nine. Dan, you’re number ten. These numbers will be tattooed on your bodies, permanently.”

Hatz, who had remained silent until now, stepped forward, a small tattoo kit in hand. “I’ll do the honors,” he said simply, his voice devoid of emotion.

Dan and Novick followed Hatz to a side room, the air heavy with anticipation. Dan chose to have his tattoo placed on his left shoulder, while Novick opted for the back of his right hand. Hatz worked with a steady hand, the traditional Japanese symbols taking shape on their skin, a permanent mark of their new allegiance.

As the ink dried, the weight of their decision settled in. They were now part of something far larger than themselves, something dangerous and powerful. There was no going back.

When they returned to the main room, the atmosphere had shifted slightly. The group seemed more at ease, the initial tension easing into a more comfortable camaraderie. But beneath the surface, Dan and Novick could still feel the undercurrent of danger that permeated the room.

Aguero stood at the head of the table, his expression serious as he looked at each member of TFN. “Now that we’re all here, it’s time to discuss our next steps.”

The room fell silent, every eye focused on Aguero. The weight of what was to come hung in the air, thick with anticipation and the promise of action. As Aguero began to outline the details of the mission, Dan and Novick couldn’t help but feel a sense of both dread and exhilaration. They were now part of TFN, and there was no turning back. The Twenty-Fifth Night was about to move, and the underworld would tremble in their wake.

Chapter Text

Morning had barely broken over the horizon when the stillness of the hideout was disrupted by an uneasy tension. Endorsi’s eyes fluttered open, her instincts kicking in before her mind fully registered the absence that hung in the air like a thick fog. Aguero was gone. It wasn’t unusual for him to disappear now and then, but today felt different. The pit in her stomach told her this wasn’t one of his typical walks to clear his head.

She quickly sat up, pushing the covers aside, and walked briskly to the common area where the rest of the TFN members were slowly waking up or already immersed in their morning routines. Her unease must have been evident because as soon as she entered the room, Shibisu glanced up from the book he was reading and frowned.

“Endorsi? You look like you’ve seen a ghost,” Shibisu remarked, closing his book and sitting up straighter. His casual tone didn’t match the worry growing in her chest.

“It’s Aguero,” she said, not bothering with any introduction. “He’s gone.”

Shibisu blinked, his brows furrowing slightly. “Gone? He probably just went out for a walk. You know how he is, always brooding.”

“No, it’s not that,” Endorsi snapped, her voice tighter than she intended. She saw the concerned looks from the others who were listening now. “He’s gone. I checked his room. His black tuxedo coat is missing.”

That seemed to catch everyone’s attention. Aguero’s black tuxedo coat was more than just a piece of clothing; it was his armor, something he only wore when he was heading to places tied to deep, painful memories. It meant he wasn’t just going for a walk—he was revisiting something from the past.

“Then he must have gone to that place,” Hockney continued, his voice dropping to a whisper. “It must be one of those days…”

Elaine, who had been quietly observing the conversation from her spot near the window, stood up. “We should find him. He shouldn’t be alone, not today.”

“I’m telling you, he’s fine,” Shibisu said, though there was less certainty in his voice now. “He just needs time.”

“No,” Endorsi insisted, shaking her head as if to rid herself of the doubts creeping in. “We’re going after him. All of us.”

Dan and Novick, who had been silent up until now, exchanged puzzled glances. It hadn’t been long since they joined TFN, and they were still learning the dynamics of the group. But even they could sense the shift in atmosphere, the gravity of whatever was happening.

“Are we really going to chase after him?” Dan asked hesitantly, not wanting to step on any toes but also curious about the urgency.

“Of course,” Endorsi replied sharply. “You’re part of TFN now. You need to understand what it means when Aguero disappears like this.”

“Understand what, exactly?” Novick asked, his tone was more cautious. “What’s so special about this place he’s gone to?”

Endorsi didn’t answer immediately, her mind already focused on getting to Aguero. “You’ll see when we get there. Just… just follow me.”

The group quickly gathered what they needed and set off, the urgency of their mission fueling their pace. Endorsi led them through familiar paths, her steps were quick and determined. Despite the tension, no one spoke, the only sounds being the crunch of leaves underfoot and the occasional rustle of wind through the trees.

After what felt like hours, the group finally arrived at a small hilltop cottage, a place that seemed frozen in time. The cottage was nestled among tall, swaying trees, with a garden that had long since dried up, its former beauty now reduced to brittle, brown remnants. It was a stark contrast to the vibrancy it once held, but even in its current state, it held a quiet dignity, a testament to the memories it sheltered.

Aguero was there, sitting on a wooden bench in the middle of the garden, his back to the approaching group. His black tuxedo coat blended into the shadows, making him seem like a ghostly figure lost in thought. He was still, almost too still, as if he was a statue carved out of the sorrow that filled the air around him.

Endorsi motioned for the others to stop, her heart was heavy with the sight before her. She didn’t want to disturb him, but they had to let him know they were there. 

Dan and Novick, who had been following closely, finally voiced the questions that had been gnawing at them since they left the hideout. “What is this place?” Dan asked, his voice was low as if afraid to shatter the silence. “Who is Aguero visiting here?”

Elaine, who was standing nearby, sighed softly, the weight of her memories making her voice thick with emotion. “It’s Bam,” she said, her words carrying the sorrow that had settled into her soul over the years.

“Bam?” Novick repeated, confused. “Who… who’s Bam?”

Elaine didn’t answer immediately, her eyes were fixed on Aguero’s distant figure. “Bam was… no, he is someone very important to Aguero. They found something in each other, something real and true. But…” She trailed off, her gaze was turning melancholic. “After that, it’s just sad. Seeing Aguero like this, living the rest of his life longing for someone who will never return…”

Dan and Novick exchanged glances, the pieces slowly coming together in their minds. They could see the deep connection, the love, and the pain that was etched into every line of Aguero’s face as he sat there, staring into the distance. It was a side of him they hadn’t seen before, a vulnerability that contrasted sharply with the cold, calculating exterior he usually presented.

Shibisu, who had been standing a little further back, finally spoke up, his voice was soft and almost resigned. “It’s good that they found true love in each other, but after that… it’s just been one long stretch of pain. Aguero’s never really been the same since.”

The group fell silent again, watching as Aguero stood up slowly from the bench. He walked toward the edge of the garden, his steps deliberate and slow, as if each one carried the weight of a thousand memories. Then, with a deep breath, he spread his arms wide, his head tilted back as if to embrace the sky. There was a gentle smile on his lips, one that spoke of an imagined reunion, of a moment of joy that only he could see.

To the founding members of TFN, this was a familiar sight—a ritual, almost, of Aguero’s grief. They understood it, respected it, and, in their own ways, shared in it. Dan and Novick, however, were struck by the depth of emotion they were witnessing. It was one thing to hear about loss; it was another to see it laid bare in front of them.

Finally, Endorsi couldn’t stand it any longer. She stepped forward, approaching Aguero cautiously, as if not to startle him from his thoughts. When she was close enough, she gently placed a hand on his shoulder, her voice soft but steady.

“Aguero,” she said, her tone carrying both comfort and concern. “Next time you decide to disappear, at least leave a word before you go off somewhere.”

Aguero didn’t respond immediately. He kept his gaze fixed on the sky above, his smile was fading into a more pensive expression. When he finally spoke, his voice was quiet, almost distant, as if he was speaking to the sky itself rather than to the woman standing beside him.

“The sky really is beautiful,” he murmured, his eyes reflecting the clear blue above. “Especially when you’ve got someone you love up there.”

Endorsi bit her lip, holding back the tears that threatened to spill over. She knew what he meant, knew the depth of his pain. She simply nodded, squeezing his shoulder gently, a silent show of support.

Aguero continued to stare at the sky, his thoughts seemingly a million miles away. “You know, Endorsi,” he began after a long pause, “life is like a coin with two sides. If you toss a coin and get heads, there’s a universe out there where you get tails. Every decision we make branches out into another universe, each one different from the last.”

Endorsi remained silent, listening to him as she felt her heart aching for him.

“My heart breaks,” Aguero continued, his voice was growing softer, “for every universe where Bam and I didn’t end up together.”

Endorsi finally let out a shaky breath, unable to hold back the tears any longer. “Aguero…” she whispered, her voice was trembling with the weight of her emotions.

But Aguero didn’t look at her. His eyes were still fixed on the sky, lost in thoughts of what could have been, of the countless other realities where maybe—just maybe—he and Bam had found a way to be together, where the cruel hand of fate hadn’t torn them apart.

The others watched from a distance, the scene before them was both heartbreaking and deeply personal. Dan and Novick, in particular, felt a strange mix of emotions. They had seen Aguero as a leader, a strategist, a cold and calculating force in the underworld. But this… this was something different. This was a man mourning the loss of his other half, a man whose soul had been fractured and who now wandered through life carrying the weight of that emptiness.

Shibisu, unable to bear the silence any longer, finally spoke up, his voice cutting through the tension. “It’s a cruel world, isn’t it? To find something so perfect, only to have it ripped away… and to live with that every day.

No one replied, the truth of his words hanging heavily in the air. They all felt it, the ache of lost love, the burden of memories that couldn’t be erased.

After what felt like an eternity, Aguero finally turned away from the sky, his expression now carefully neutral, the walls he had let down for that brief moment quickly being rebuilt. He glanced at Endorsi, offering her a small, almost apologetic smile.

“Let’s go back,” he said simply, his tone now back to its usual calm and controlled self. “We have work to do.”

Endorsi nodded, wiping her eyes quickly before anyone else could see. “Yeah… let’s go.”

The group began to make their way back down the hill, the weight of what they had witnessed following them like a shadow. Dan and Novick, though silent, were deep in thought, trying to process everything they had learned about their enigmatic leader. They had been recruited into a world they barely understood, into a group with bonds that ran deeper than they could have imagined. And now, they had seen the heart of their leader, the man behind the mask, and it had left them both awed and saddened.

As they walked, the tension slowly began to ease, the familiar camaraderie of the group starting to resurface. Aguero, always the master of compartmentalization, seemed to have pushed aside the vulnerability he had shown as his focus now was back on the mission ahead. But the others knew better. They knew that the pain was still there, just beneath the surface, a constant companion that would never fully go away.

When they finally reached the hideout, the mood had shifted back to something more normal, though the memory of what had just happened lingered in the back of everyone’s mind. Aguero didn’t say much as they re-entered the hideout, his mind was clearly on other things. Endorsi, still feeling the weight of the morning’s events, couldn’t help but glance over at Aguero every so often, her concern for him was evident in her eyes. But she knew better than to push him. Aguero had his ways of coping, and they all had to respect that.

The group’s return to the hideout was marked by a mix of quiet reflection and an unspoken understanding of what had transpired at the hilltop cottage. Aguero had bared a part of his soul that was usually kept hidden behind layers of strategic thinking and cold resolve. It was a side of him that few had seen, and it left the newer members, Dan and Novick, with more questions than answers. 

As they reached the hideout, the tension that had built up during their search for Aguero slowly dissipated. The familiar environment of their base brought with it a sense of security and routine, a welcome respite after the emotional weight of the morning. Aguero was the first to break the silence, his usual smirk returning as he glanced over at Dan and Novick.

“So, Dan, Novick,” Aguero began, his tone was light but carrying an unmistakable edge of teasing, “just because you saw me looking all sentimental back there, don’t get any ideas about trying to beat me. It’s not gonna happen.”

Dan and Novick exchanged a look before bursting into laughter, the tension that had followed them from the hilltop cottage finally breaking. “Yeah, yeah, we’ll try not to get too full of ourselves,” Dan replied with a grin, shaking his head. “But you’ve gotta admit, Aguero, it’s nice to know you’ve got a softer side.”

“Soft, huh?” Aguero’s eyes narrowed, though there was a playful glint in them. “Let’s see how soft I am when we’re in the middle of our next mission.”

Novick chuckled, crossing his arms. “We’ll be ready. Just don’t go disappearing on us again. I’m not sure Endorsi can handle another scare like that.”

Endorsi, who had been leaning against the wall with her arms crossed, rolled her eyes. “I wasn’t scared,” she said, though the others could hear the defensiveness in her voice. “I was just… concerned. There’s a difference.”

Hatz, who had been quietly watching the exchange, let out a low chuckle. “Sure, sure. Let’s just say you were concerned and leave it at that.”

The others joined in the laughter, the camaraderie in the room growing stronger as they settled back into their usual rhythm. Aguero watched them, a small smile playing on his lips. Despite the heavy emotions they had all experienced that day, it was moments like these that reminded him why they were a team, why they fought together, and why they would always have each other’s backs.

After a few moments, the conversation naturally shifted towards the upcoming missions. Aguero moved towards the large table in the center of the room, where maps, documents, and notes were scattered, evidence of the careful planning that had been underway. The others gathered around, the mood in the room shifting from light-hearted banter to focused determination.

“As much as I’d like to jump straight into planning our next move,” Aguero began, his tone now more serious, “I think we need to take a break. Asensio hasn’t fully acquired all the necessary documents for the next mission, so there’s no point in rushing. We need to be at our best when the time comes.”

The suggestion was met with a mix of nods and relieved expressions. It wasn’t often that Aguero called for a break, so when he did, they knew it was something to be taken seriously. 

However, the moment was interrupted by Dan, who, with a characteristic lack of tact, blurted out, “So, uh, are we gonna get paid for all this? I mean, it’s cool and all, but… you know, gotta keep the lights on.”

There was a beat of silence as everyone turned to stare at Dan. Then, as if on cue, laughter erupted around the room, filling the space with a warmth that had been missing for some time. Even Aguero, who usually didn’t indulge in such displays, couldn’t help but shake his head, a smile tugging at the corners of his mouth.

“Of course, you freaking moron,” Aguero said, his voice carrying a mix of exasperation and amusement. “We’re not doing this for charity work. You’ll get paid, don’t worry.”

Dan grinned sheepishly, rubbing the back of his neck. “Just checking,” he said, the embarrassment clear in his voice as he joined in the laughter. 

Novick, still chuckling, clapped Dan on the shoulder. “You really know how to lighten the mood, don’t you?”

The laughter eventually died down, and Aguero took a deep breath, leaning against the edge of the table as he addressed the group. “In all seriousness,” he began, his tone more measured now, “we’ve been through a lot lately, and there’s still more to come. But I want you all to take the next few days to rest, clear your heads. We’ll regroup once Asensio has everything we need.”

Endorsi raised an eyebrow. “You’re telling us to rest? Who are you, and what have you done with Aguero?”

“Very funny,” Aguero replied dryly. “But yes, even I need to take a step back now and then. It doesn’t do us any good to burn out before the real work begins.”

Elaine, who had been quiet for most of the conversation, nodded in agreement. “He’s right. We need to be at our best if we’re going to succeed. Besides, it’s not like Asensio will wait for us to be ready. We’ll have to be prepared the moment he gives the green light.”

Hatz, leaning back in his chair, sighed. “I guess a break wouldn’t be the worst thing. We’ve been going non-stop for weeks now.”

Rak, who had been uncharacteristically silent throughout the discussion, finally spoke up. “Break or no break, I’m ready for whatever comes next. But if the blue turtle says we need to rest, then we rest. It’s that simple.”

Shibisu added, “Plus, it’s not like resting means we’ll be sitting around doing nothing. We can still train, sharpen our skills, and make sure we’re ready when the time comes.”

Aguero nodded, satisfied with the way the conversation was going. “Exactly. Use this time wisely. We’re not out of the woods yet, and when the next mission comes, I expect all of you to be at the top of your game.”

Dan, still trying to make up for his earlier blunder, nodded enthusiastically. “You got it, boss. We’ll be ready.”

Novick, sensing an opportunity to lighten the mood once more, grinned. “And by ready, Dan means he’ll be practicing his aim. You know, so he doesn’t miss anything important.”

“Hey!” Dan protested, though he was clearly not offended. “I’ve gotten better, okay? Just you wait.”

The group shared another round of laughter, the atmosphere in the room lifting once more. Aguero allowed himself a moment to enjoy the camaraderie, knowing that these were the moments that kept them all grounded, that reminded them of the bonds they had formed over the years.

As the conversation continued, the group naturally began to disperse, each member going off to do their own thing. Hatz and Elaine started discussing their training plans, Rak moved to his usual spot to meditate, and Endorsi, never one to sit still for long, began planning a quick sparring session with Shibisu. Dan and Novick, eager to prove themselves, followed Aguero as he made his way to his room, bombarding him with questions about the missions, their roles, and everything in between.

“Hey, Aguero,” Dan started, his tone a mix of curiosity and admiration, “how do you come up with all these plans? Like, you’re always ten steps ahead. It’s kinda freaky.”

Aguero glanced at Dan, raising an eyebrow. “It’s not about being ten steps ahead,” he replied, his tone was even. “It’s about knowing your enemy, understanding their moves, and being prepared for every possible outcome. You don’t always have to be ahead—you just have to make sure they can’t catch up.”

Novick nodded thoughtfully. “Makes sense. So it’s more about staying adaptable, right?”

“Exactly,” Aguero confirmed. “No plan is perfect. You have to be ready to change course if things don’t go as expected.”

Dan, still trying to wrap his head around it all, scratched his head. “And that’s why you wanted us to join TFN? Because you think we’re adaptable?”

Aguero paused for a moment, considering his response. “Partly,” he said finally. “You both have potential, and I see qualities in you that will be valuable to the team. But more importantly, I trust that you’ll be able to handle whatever comes our way. That’s why you’re here.”

Dan and Novick exchanged a glance, the weight of Aguero’s words settling in. It was clear that being part of TFN wasn’t just about skills or experience; it was about trust, about being part of something bigger than themselves.

“Thanks, Aguero,” Novick said, his tone sincere. “We won’t let you down.”

“I know you won’t,” Aguero replied, his voice firm. “Just remember—this isn’t just a job. It’s a commitment. To each other, and to the mission. That’s what being part of TFN means.”

The gravity of his words hung in the air for a moment, and Dan and Novick both nodded in understanding. They had been recruited into a world that was far more complex and demanding than anything they had known before, but they were ready. They had to be.

As they reached Aguero’s room, the trio paused outside the door, the conversation naturally coming to a close. Aguero turned to Dan and Novick, his expression serious once more.

“Get some rest, both of you,” he instructed. “We’ll get together in a few days once Asensio has everything we need. Until then, stay sharp.”

Dan saluted playfully, grinning. “You got it, boss.”

Novick chuckled, giving Aguero a nod. “See you later, Aguero.”

With that, they turned and made their way down the hallway, their voices fading as they went. Aguero watched them go, a faint smile on his lips. He had made the right choice bringing them into TFN, he was sure of it. They had a lot to learn, but they had the right attitude—and that was half the battle.

He entered his room, closing the door behind him. The familiar space was a welcome sight, offering a sense of solitude that he hadn’t realized he needed until now. As he moved to sit at his desk, he couldn’t help but think back to the hilltop cottage, to the memories that had resurfaced there, and to the pain that still lingered in his heart. But as much as those memories hurt, they also reminded him of what he was fighting for. Bam’s memory was a part of him, and it drove him to keep pushing forward, to keep fighting, even when the odds were stacked against them.

For a moment, Aguero allowed himself to close his eyes, to let the memories wash over him. The laughter, the warmth, the love they had shared—it was all still there, etched into his soul. And though it hurt to remember, it was a pain he welcomed, a reminder of everything that had been lost, and everything that was still worth fighting for.

When he finally opened his eyes, his resolve was stronger than ever. He had a team to lead, missions to complete, and a promise to keep. He would honor Bam’s memory by continuing to fight, by protecting those he cared about, and by never giving up, no matter how difficult the path ahead might be. And so, with a deep breath, Aguero pushed the memories aside, focusing on the tasks at hand. He had work to do, and he would not let anything—or anyone—stand in his way.

As the days passed, the members of TFN took the opportunity to rest, train, and prepare for what was to come. There was an unspoken understanding among them all that the next mission would be a turning point, a test of everything they had been working towards. And while they didn’t know exactly what awaited them, they knew they would face it together, as a team.

Dan and Novick, now more comfortable in their roles within TFN, spent their time honing their skills, eager to prove themselves to Aguero and the others. They had quickly learned that being part of TFN meant more than just following orders; it meant being ready for anything, and they were determined to show that they were up to the challenge.

Elaine, Hockney, and Hatz continued their training, their sessions intense and focused, as they pushed each other to their limits. Rak, acting as the silent guardian, kept a watchful eye on the group, his presence a constant reminder of the strength and loyalty that bound them all together. Endorsi, never one to back down from a challenge, took it upon herself to organize sparring matches, ensuring that everyone stayed sharp and ready for whatever was to come.

Shibisu balanced his training with strategy sessions, working closely with Aguero to ensure that every possible outcome was accounted for. He knew better than anyone that a well-thought-out plan was their best defense against the chaos that awaited them.

As for Aguero, he spent his time preparing for the mission ahead, working tirelessly to ensure that every detail was in place. The memories of the hilltop cottage, of Bam, remained with him, but they no longer weighed him down. Instead, they fueled his determination, driving him to ensure that TFN would succeed, no matter what obstacles they faced.

“By the time we have everything we need,” Aguero began, his voice strong and steady, “it’s time to move forward. This mission will be one of the most challenging we’ve faced, but I have no doubt that we will succeed. We’ve trained for this, prepared for every possibility, and now it’s time to put all of that to the test.”

The room was silent, every member of TFN hanging on Aguero’s words. They knew that what lay ahead would not be easy, but they also knew that they were ready.

“This mission will require all of us to be at our best,” Aguero continued, his gaze sweeping over the group. “There will be no room for mistakes. But I trust each and every one of you. We’ve been through a lot together, and we’ve always come out on top. This time will be no different.”

Dan and Novick exchanged a glance, the weight of Aguero’s words not lost on them. They had been welcomed into this group, into this family, and they were determined to prove that they belonged. 

“We’re ready, Aguero,” Novick said, his voice firm. “Whatever comes our way, we’ll handle it.”

Dan nodded in agreement, his usual playful demeanor replaced with a look of determination. “Yeah, we’ve got this.”

Aguero allowed himself a small smile, pleased with their response. “Good,” he said simply. “Then I will count on you.”

In the quiet aftermath of the previous days’ intense emotions, training, and discussions, the members of TFN found themselves with something they hadn't had in a long time: a rest day. The morning sun filtered through the windows of their hideout, casting warm, golden light across the rooms. It was a peaceful, almost serene atmosphere—a stark contrast to the tension and danger that usually filled their lives.

Elaine was the first to emerge from her room, already dressed in her usual training gear, though there was no immediate need for it. She stretched her arms above her head, feeling the comforting pull of her muscles, and decided to head to the kitchen to start the day with a cup of tea. As she walked down the hallway, she passed by Hatz’s room, where the distinct sound of clashing swords echoed faintly. She smiled to herself, knowing that Hatz never truly took a day off, even when he was supposed to be resting.

In the living area, Endorsi was already sprawled out on the couch, flipping through channels on the TV with a bored expression. When she spotted Elaine, she waved a hand lazily in greeting.

"Morning, Elaine," Endorsi drawled, settling on some random nature documentary. "Want to join me watching lions tear each other apart?"

Elaine rolled her eyes as she poured herself a cup of tea. "Thanks, but I'll pass. But I see you're really getting into the whole 'rest' thing."

Endorsi smirked. "What can I say? Sometimes it’s nice to watch someone else do all the fighting for a change."

Elaine shook her head, taking a sip of her tea as she leaned against the counter. "You're hopeless."

"And you love me for it," Endorsi retorted, winking at her.

The light-hearted banter was a welcome change of pace, and it wasn’t long before more members of TFN began to filter into the common area, drawn by the smell of freshly brewed coffee and the sound of laughter.

Rak was next, his massive form barely fitting through the doorway as he made his way to the kitchen. He grunted in acknowledgment of Elaine and Endorsi before reaching for the largest mug he could find.

"Good morning, Rak," Elaine greeted him, her tone warm. "You ready for a day of relaxation?"

Rak huffed, pouring himself a generous amount of coffee. "Relaxation is for weaklings. But… it’s good to take a break sometimes."

Endorsi chuckled, raising an eyebrow at Rak. "So, what’s the plan for your not relaxing today?"

Rak took a long sip of his coffee before answering, his voice gruff. "I’m going to train. Just because we’re resting doesn’t mean I’ll let my guard down."

Elaine and Endorsi exchanged a knowing look, both of them used to Rak’s relentless dedication. Before they could respond, Shibisu sauntered in, looking more relaxed than usual in a pair of sweatpants and a loose T-shirt.

"Morning, everyone!" Shibisu greeted them with a wide grin, grabbing a banana from the fruit bowl on the counter. "What’s on the agenda today? I’m thinking we should finally get that board game tournament going."

Endorsi perked up at the suggestion, her competitive spirit immediately ignited. "You’re on, Shibisu. But just so you know, I don’t plan on losing."

"We’ll see about that," Shibisu replied with a playful wink. "What do you say, Ran? Want to join in?"

Ran snorted, shaking his head. "I have better things to do than play games."

Shibisu shrugged, unfazed. "Your loss."

Elaine, watching the exchange with amusement, took another sip of her tea. "You know, a board game tournament doesn’t sound like a bad idea. It’s been a while since we all did something together that didn’t involve life-or-death situations."

Endorsi grinned, already mentally preparing for the competition. "I like the sound of that. We’ll get everyone involved—even Aguero. No excuses."

As the group continued to chat, the atmosphere in the hideout grew more relaxed and comfortable. It wasn’t often that they had the chance to unwind like this, and they were determined to make the most of it.

Meanwhile, in another part of the hideout, Dan had cornered Hockney in his workshop, eyes wide with excitement. The workshop was filled with various mechanical parts, blueprints, and gadgets in various stages of completion. It was Hockney’s sanctuary, a place where he could immerse himself in his work and let his mind wander.

"Man, I can’t believe I’m actually here," Dan said, his voice filled with awe as he looked around at the organized chaos. "I’ve heard so much about you, Hockney. You’re like… a legend in the engineering field."

Hockney, who was in the middle of adjusting a small mechanical device, glanced up with a bemused expression. "Legend, huh? That’s a bit of an exaggeration."

"No way!" Dan insisted, leaning closer to get a better look at what Hockney was working on. "I mean, you’ve designed some of the most advanced tech out there. People talk about you like you’re some kind of genius."

Hockney chuckled softly, returning his attention to his work. "I’m just someone who enjoys tinkering with things. It’s nothing special."

Dan shook his head in disbelief. "Are you kidding? This is amazing! Can I ask you some questions? I’ve always wanted to pick your brain about your designs."

Hockney paused for a moment, considering the request, before nodding. "Sure, why not? It’s not everyday someone’s this enthusiastic about what I do."

And so, Dan began bombarding Hockney with questions, eager to learn everything he could about the young engineer’s work. Hockney, patient and good-natured, answered each question in turn, explaining his thought process and the challenges he faced in his designs. The more they talked, the more Dan’s admiration for Hockney grew. It was clear to him that Hockney was not only talented but also incredibly passionate about his work.

"How do you come up with all these ideas?" Dan asked at one point, his curiosity piqued. "I mean, some of the stuff you’ve designed is way ahead of its time."

Hockney leaned back in his chair, thoughtful. "Inspiration can come from anywhere. Sometimes it’s a problem that needs solving, other times it’s just a 'what if' scenario. I like to think about how things could be improved, how technology can be used to make life easier or more interesting."

Dan nodded eagerly, soaking in every word. "That’s so cool. I wish I had a mind like yours."

Hockney smiled, a hint of modesty in his expression. "Everyone has their own talents, Dan. I’m sure there are things you’re good at that I wouldn’t have a clue about."

Dan nodded, clearly impressed. “Well, yeah. So, what’s the most complicated thing you’ve ever built?”

Hockney thought for a moment before responding. “Probably the multi-layered surveillance system we use. It’s a combination of hardware, software, and a bit of creativity. It’s designed to be undetectable, adaptable, and nearly impossible to breach. Took me months to get it just right.”

“Sounds like you’re the guy we need if anything breaks around here,” Dan said with a grin. “I might have to keep you on speed dial.”

“Just make sure you don’t break anything too valuable,” Hockney quipped, returning to his work with a focused expression.

Meanwhile, across the room, Novick found himself in a surprisingly pleasant conversation with Elaine and Rak. The three of them had started with casual small talk, but the conversation soon turned to Bam, the mysterious figure who seemed to be at the heart of TFN’s dynamics.

"Hey, Elaine, Rak," Novick began, his tone careful. "I was wondering… could you tell me more about Bam? I’ve heard bits and pieces, but… I’d like to know more about him, if that’s okay."

Elaine’s eyes widened in surprise at the question, but her expression quickly softened into a smile. “Bam? He’s… well, he’s something special. We actually went to high school together—me, Hockney, and Bam. We were the best of friends back then.”

“Really?” Novick leaned forward, intrigued. “I didn’t expect that. What was he like?”

Elaine chuckled softly, her eyes reflecting a mix of fondness and nostalgia. “He was quiet and loud at the same time, but there was always something about him that drew people in. He wasn’t flashy or anything, but he had this way of making you feel like you mattered, like he genuinely cared. And let me tell you, he’s full of surprises. Did you know he’s an excellent archer?”

“An archer?” Novick repeated, surprised. “That’s not something you hear everyday. He doesn’t seem like the type.”

“Oh, he’s more than just an archer,” Rak interjected, his deep voice carrying a note of pride. “That turtle had a natural talent for it. I’ve seen him hit targets that most people wouldn’t even dream of aiming for.  He was always the guy who could pick up any skill effortlessly. And he had this way of making everyone around him feel better, just by being himself."

"And he’s got a motorcycle he rides to school. It’s an old one, but it suits him.” Elaine added, still with a wide smile.

Novick couldn’t help but grin. “A motorcycle? That’s pretty cool. So he’s got the whole mysterious vibe going for him, huh?”

Elaine laughed, nodding. “Yeah, you could say that. He’s always been a bit of an enigma. But that’s just who he is. He doesn’t let on much, but when you get to know him, you realize there’s a lot more to him than meets the eye.”

Rak nodded in agreement. “The turtle’s got a good heart. He’s been through a lot, but he doesn’t let it change who he is. That’s why we all look out for him.”

Elaine, clearly enjoying the conversation, pulled out her phone and began scrolling through her photos. “Here, take a look at these. I’ve got some pictures of Bam from back in the day.”

Novick leaned in eagerly as Elaine swiped through the images. The photos showed Bam in various settings—at school, practicing archery, laughing with Elaine and Hockney, and even riding his motorcycle. In each one, Bam’s quiet demeanor and warm smile were evident, painting a picture of someone who was both approachable and intriguing.

“Wow,” Novick said, genuinely impressed. “He’s… adorable. I mean, not in a weird way, but there’s just something about him, you know?”

Elaine grinned, clearly pleased. “Yeah, that’s Bam for you. He’s got this way of growing on you. Before you know it, you’re rooting for him, no matter what. He had a way of making even the simplest moments special. I’m glad you’re getting to know him better."

At that moment, Aguero, who had been silently observing the interaction from a distance, chose to make his presence known. He approached Novick from behind, his footsteps silent on the floor. When he spoke, his voice carried a playful edge.

“Adorable, huh?” Aguero said, leaning in close. “You better watch your words, Novick. You’re treading on dangerous ground.”

Novick’s eyes widened in surprise as he turned to see Aguero standing behind him. “Oh, hey Aguero,” he said, trying to sound casual. “I didn’t mean it in a bad way. I just think Bam looks great in these pictures.”

Aguero’s expression softened slightly, though he maintained a teasing tone. “Just remember, Novick, Bam was someone very important to me. So, keep your compliments in check unless you want to deal with me.”

Dan, overhearing the exchange, jumped in with a grin. “Looks like someone’s getting protective. Better watch out, Novick.”

Novick laughed nervously, rubbing the back of his neck. “Got it, Aguero. I’ll be careful with my words.”

Elaine, sensing the tension ease, decided to lighten the mood. “Come on, Aguero, we were just sharing memories. Novick meant no harm.”

Aguero gave a slight nod, the playful glint in his eyes fading as he looked at the photos Elaine was showing. “I know, I know. It’s just… Bam meant a lot to all of us. I suppose I can be a bit overprotective.”

Rak, who had been quietly observing the interaction, chuckled. “Looks like the boss has a soft spot after all.”

Aguero shot Rak a mock glare. “Don’t get any ideas, Rak. I’m still the same old Aguero.”

The group laughed, the lighthearted atmosphere returning. As they continued to chat and reminisce, the mood in the room became more relaxed. The stories and shared memories of Bam brought them all closer together, reinforcing the bonds they had formed as a team.

Chapter Text

The hideout was unusually still that morning. Without the usual activity from all its members, the silence was almost jarring. The distant hum of city life outside was the only background noise, a sharp contrast to the lively chatter that typically filled the air. The absence of Elaine and Endorsi, who were working their morning shift at a nearby diner, and Hockney, who was attending an important seminar as a guest speaker, had left the hideout with a strange emptiness.

In the main room, Novick, Hatz, Shibisu, Rak, and Dan were scattered about, each lost in their own thoughts or quiet activities. The air felt heavy, as if everyone was waiting for something to break the monotony. Dan, never one to stay idle for too long, was the first to voice his frustration.

“This is boring,” Dan groaned, slumping back into the worn leather couch. His fingers drummed impatiently on the armrest. “We’ve been sitting around for days. When are we going to get some action?”

Shibisu, who was lounging in a nearby chair with a book in hand, looked up with a lazy smile. “Patience, Dan. Rushing into things is a sure way to waste opportunities and get yourself killed.”

Dan rolled his eyes. “I’m not talking about rushing. I just mean we’ve been sitting on our hands too long. It’s like we’re waiting for something to happen, but nothing ever does.”

“Sometimes waiting is part of the job,” Shibisu replied, his tone was calm but firm. “It’s better to be prepared and wait than to jump into something unprepared and regret it later.”

Rak, who was quietly cleaning his spear in the corner, grunted in agreement. “Hunting requires patience. You don’t chase prey blindly. You wait for the right moment to strike.”

Hatz, who had been sharpening his sword, glanced at Dan and nodded. “They’re right. We’ll move when it’s time, not before.”

Dan sighed, his frustration was palpable. “I know, I know. But it feels like we’re just wasting time. I need to do something, anything.”

Shibisu chuckled, closing his book. “Why don’t you go for a run or something? Burn off that restless energy. We’ll be here when you get back.”

Dan huffed but didn’t argue. He knew they were right, but it didn’t make the waiting any easier.

As the conversation died down, the door to the hallway creaked open, and Aguero stepped into the room. His appearance was as impeccable as ever, but there was a hint of weariness in his eyes that hadn’t been there before. He glanced around the room, taking in the scene before him with a slight smirk.

“It’s that time again, isn’t it?” Aguero said, his voice cutting through the silence.

Hatz looked up from his sword, understanding immediately. “You want a trim?”

Aguero nodded. “It’s getting a bit long again. You know how I like to keep it.”

Hatz stood up, sheathing his sword and gesturing for Aguero to follow him to the small side room they often used for such tasks. The room was simple, with just a chair and a mirror, but it served its purpose well.

Aguero sat down, his posture was relaxed but his eyes were sharp as ever. “Thanks for doing this, Hatz. You know you’re the only one I trust with my hair.”

Hatz shrugged, grabbing the scissors from the small shelf. “It’s no problem. I’ve been doing it for years now.”

As Hatz began trimming Aguero’s hair, the two fell into a comfortable silence, broken only by the soft snip of the scissors. Aguero’s thoughts wandered, reflecting on the events of the past few months. The silence was a rare respite, but he knew it wouldn’t last. There were always storms on the horizon in their line of work.

Just as Hatz was finishing up, the door creaked open again, and Ran walked in, his usual swagger tempered by a hint of urgency. He stopped short when he saw Aguero in the chair, a smirk playing on his lips.

“Getting your hair done, A.A? Didn’t realize you were such a diva,” Ran teased.

Aguero rolled his eyes but smiled. “Always with the jokes, Ran. What do you want?”

Ran’s expression turned serious as he pulled a small envelope from his jacket pocket and handed it to Aguero. “Maria sent this. Urgent meeting back home. She says your presence is required.”

Aguero’s smile faded as he took the envelope, breaking the seal and scanning the contents quickly. His eyes narrowed as he read, and he folded the letter back up with a sigh.

“What’s it about?” Hatz asked, noticing the shift in Aguero’s demeanor.

“Family matters,” Aguero replied curtly. “It seems I’m needed back home sooner than I expected.”

Hatz continued, his eyes still focused on Aguero’s hair. “Must be serious if they’re calling you in. You want backup?”

Aguero shook his head. “Not this time. This is something I need to handle on my own.”

Hatz finished the last snip and stepped back, examining his work before nodding in satisfaction. “You’re all set. Just be careful, Aguero.”

Aguero stood up, running a hand through his newly trimmed hair. “I always am.”

Ran pushed off the doorframe, giving Aguero a playful shove. “Well, let’s not keep them waiting. You know how Maria gets when you’re late.”

Aguero smirked, tucking the letter into his pocket. “I couldn’t care any less.”

With that, Aguero made his way back to the main room, where the others were still lounging. They looked up as he entered, noting the serious expression on his face.

“Looks like you’ve got some business to attend to,” Shibisu said, his keen eyes observing Aguero closely.

“Yeah,” Aguero replied, his tone was brisk. “I’ll be out for a while. Don’t burn the place down while I’m gone.”

Novick raised an eyebrow. “Need any help?”

“Not this time,” Aguero said, already heading for the door. “Just hold down the fort until I get back.”

The room fell silent as Aguero left accompanied by Ran, the door clicking shut behind him. The quiet returned, but there was a lingering tension in the air, a sense that something was brewing just beneath the surface. The calm before the storm.

Dan, still restless, sighed and flopped back onto the couch. “Man, I hate this waiting.”

Shibisu chuckled, picking his book back up. “You’ll get your action soon enough, Dan. Just be patient.”

Rak nodded in agreement, his gaze distant as if he was already preparing for whatever lay ahead. “The hunt is never over.”

And so, the hideout remained quiet, but the sense of anticipation hung heavy in the air. They all knew it was only a matter of time before things picked up again, and when they did, there would be no more room for waiting.

As the morning wore on, the members of TFN settled into their routines, each of them keeping one ear to the ground, ready for the moment when the stillness would break.

Meanwhile, the atmosphere in Lyborick’s office was as cold and calculated as the man himself. The sleek modern design of the room was meant to intimidate, with its sharp lines, dark hues, and the panoramic view of the city below. The Khun siblings sat around a long, polished table, their expressions were a mix of indifference and curiosity. Aguero, Asensio, Hachuling, Maschenny, and Ran all knew that this meeting wasn’t just a casual invitation. It was a test, and Lyborick, a renowned lawyer and fellow member of the Khun family, was the one conducting it.

Maria, seated beside Aguero, was the only one who seemed visibly tense. She had always been perceptive, and she knew Lyborick’s reputation well. This man was not just a lawyer; he was a master of manipulation, skilled in both words and tactics. If he had called them here, it was for more than just pleasantries.

Lyborick, under the pretense of a gracious host, greeted them with a warm smile that didn’t reach his eyes. “Welcome, everyone. I’m glad you could all make it. Please, help yourselves with some refreshments.”

He gestured toward the crystal decanter of amber liquid and the glasses laid out before them. Aguero’s eyes flicked to the drinks but showed no sign of suspicion. Without hesitation, he poured himself a glass and took a small sip, as if accepting the drink was just another routine gesture. The rest of the siblings, save for Maria, who politely declined, either ignored the offer or simply observed the proceedings.

Lyborick’s smile grew as he took a seat at the head of the table. “It’s rare to have so many of the Khun family together in one place. I thought it would be a good opportunity for us to catch up, discuss the future.”

Aguero met Lyborick’s gaze evenly. He could sense the tension beneath the surface, the carefully hidden malice behind Lyborick’s polite words. Aguero had learned long ago that in the world of the Khun family, nothing was ever as it seemed.

Lyborick leaned back in his chair, steepling his fingers as he regarded Aguero. “I’ve been hearing some interesting rumors lately. It seems there’s been talk of you, Aguero, stepping up as the next head of the Khun family. Quite the responsibility, wouldn’t you say?”

Aguero took another sip of his drink, his expression was unreadable. “Rumors are just that—rumors. They tend to get out of hand.”

Lyborick’s smile remained, but his eyes darkened. “Indeed. But as you know, in our world, rumors often have a way of becoming reality. Especially when they involve something as significant as succession.”

The air in the room grew heavier, and Maria’s unease deepened. She glanced at Aguero, her concern was barely hidden. Asensio and Hachuling remained silent, their expressions inscrutable, while Maschenny seemed almost bored, as if this whole affair was of little consequence to her. Ran simply listened, his gaze fixed on Lyborick.

Aguero didn’t waver. His calm demeanor only seemed to irritate Lyborick, who was clearly hoping to elicit a stronger reaction. “You’ve always been ambitious, Aguero,” Lyborick continued, his voice dripping with disdain. “But ambition alone doesn’t make a leader. It doesn’t make someone worthy of leading a family like ours.”

Aguero finally set his glass down, his eyes locking onto Lyborick’s with a cold intensity. “If you have something to say, Lyborick, say it. We’re not here to dance around the subject.”

Lyborick’s smile disappeared, replaced by a scowl. “Fine. Let’s get to the point. What makes you think you have what it takes to lead the Khun family? What skills do you have that could possibly justify you succeeding Eduan? You’re young, unproven, and as far as I can tell, you’ve done nothing to earn the respect of those who would follow you.”

The words hung in the air like a challenge, but Aguero remained unfazed. He had expected this, and he was prepared. Leaning back in his chair, he folded his arms across his chest and fixed Lyborick with a piercing stare.

“I don’t need to justify myself to you,” Aguero replied, his voice steady. “And I certainly don’t need your approval to take what’s mine. My skills, my legitimacy—they’re not up for debate. The fact that you feel threatened enough to bring this up only proves that you know exactly why I’m the right choice.”

Lyborick’s face twisted with anger, his calm façade cracking. “You arrogant brat! Do you think the rest of the family will just accept you because of your bloodline? This isn’t a game, Aguero. You can’t just waltz in and claim the throne without proving yourself first.”

Aguero’s expression hardened, his eyes narrowing. “You talk about proving myself, but what have you done, Lyborick? You’ve built your reputation on manipulation and deceit, using your position as a lawyer to twist the law to your advantage. You think that makes you better than me? It doesn’t. It just makes you desperate.”

The room fell silent as Aguero’s words cut through the air like a blade. Lyborick’s hands clenched into fists, his anger barely contained. Maria looked as if she wanted to intervene, but she knew this was something Aguero had to handle on his own.

Lyborick’s voice was low and dangerous as he spoke. “You’ve got a lot of nerve, boy. But nerves won’t protect you from the reality of our world. You’re walking into a battlefield, and if you’re not careful, you’ll be crushed before you even take your first step.”

Aguero stood up, his movements were slow and deliberate. “I’ve been on the battlefield my entire life, Lyborick. I know how to fight, and I know how to win. But more importantly, I know how to choose my battles. This? This is just a waste of my time.”

Asensio and Hachuling exchanged a glance, both recognizing the shift in the atmosphere. Maschenny, still leaning back in her chair, seemed mildly entertained by the exchange, while Ran simply watched, waiting for the inevitable conclusion.

Aguero turned to Ran, his tone dismissive. “Ran, we’re done here. Let’s go.”

Ran nodded, standing up and following Aguero as he made his way to the door. But before they could leave, Aguero paused, turning back to Lyborick with a cold smirk.

“Oh, and one more thing, Lyborick,” Aguero said, his voice laced with icy contempt. “Next time, don’t think about poisoning the drinks you offer to your guests. Those tricks are nothing when you’re up against the real successor.”

Lyborick’s eyes widened in shock, his anger momentarily replaced by disbelief. How had Aguero known? The poison had been subtle, undetectable to most, but Aguero had seen through it with ease.

Without waiting for a response, Aguero and Ran walked out, leaving the room in stunned silence. Maria watched them go, her worry now mixed with admiration. Aguero had handled the situation with the poise and confidence of a true leader, proving that he was more than capable of holding his own against those who would challenge him.

As the door closed behind them, Lyborick’s anger erupted, his fists slamming onto the table. “That insolent brat… He won’t get away with this!”

But deep down, Lyborick knew that Aguero had won this round. The battle for succession was far from over, but today, Aguero had proven that he was not to be underestimated.

Outside the office, Aguero and Ran walked in silence for a moment before Ran finally spoke. “You handled that well, A.A. Lyborick was practically foaming at the mouth.”

Aguero smirked, the tension from the meeting slowly dissipating. “It was easy. People like him always think they’re smarter than everyone else. All you have to do is show them that they’re not.”

Ran chuckled. “Still, that was a bold move, calling him out on the poison like that. You sure he won’t try something else?”

“He might,” Aguero replied, his tone was casual. “But he won’t get another chance. People like Lyborick don’t like to lose, but they hate being humiliated even more. He’ll lick his wounds and come at me from a different angle next time.”

Ran nodded, falling silent once more. Aguero’s confidence was unshakable, and it was clear that he was already thinking several steps ahead. The game they were playing was dangerous, but Aguero was more than ready for it.

As they exited the building and stepped into the cool evening air, Aguero’s thoughts drifted back to his siblings, to the challenges that lay ahead, and to the inevitable conflict that would arise within the family. But he wasn’t afraid. He was prepared, and he would do whatever it took to secure his place as the next head of the Khun family.

“Let’s get back,” Aguero said, his voice calm but resolute. “We have work to do.”

“What kind of work do you have to do, Aguero?”

Aguero and Ran halted mid-step, their backs still to the building. Aguero recognized that voice all too well—it was Maschenny, their elder sister, her tone dripping with condescension. He had noticed she hadn't immediately left Lyborick’s office, and now she was making her presence known. Slowly, Aguero turned, his expression carefully composed, while Ran glanced over his shoulder, his brow furrowing slightly.

Maschenny stood there, her posture as elegant as ever, with her long blue hair cascading over her shoulders. Her eyes gleamed with a mixture of amusement and disdain. Behind her, Maria lingered in the shadows, her face was partially obscured as her usual silence was now more unsettling than ever.

Aguero met Maschenny’s gaze, his own expression unreadable. “It’s nothing that concerns you,” he replied, his voice was cool and detached. He was not in the mood for one of Maschenny’s games. She always knew how to press his buttons, how to bring up things that he’d rather forget. But he wasn’t going to let her get to him this time, not after what he’d just endured with Lyborick.

Maschenny’s lips curled into a smirk. “You always were good at shutting people out, weren’t you? But I’m not so easily dismissed, little brother.” She took a step closer, her gaze was narrowing as if she could see right through him. “You can fool others, maybe even yourself, but not me. I know what you’re really after.”

Aguero’s jaw tightened, but he refused to take the bait. “And what might that be, Maschenny?”

Her smirk widened, a hint of malice in her eyes. “You still think you can find that boy, don’t you? Bam, wasn’t it? How foolish. Do you really believe you can change your fate?” She paused, letting her words sink in before delivering the final blow. “Let me be clear to you, Aguero. Every version of your story ends with Bam being slaughtered because it is your destiny. You will never be clean from that sin. There is no god who could give Bam and your purity back.”

Aguero felt a cold knot tighten in his chest, the familiar sting of her words cutting deep. He had heard these taunts before, ever since he returned home five years ago. Maschenny never missed an opportunity to remind him of the darkness that awaited him, of the blood that would stain his hands. Despite the countless times he had told himself that her words didn’t matter, that he was stronger than her venom, they still hurt. They always did.

But he wouldn’t give her the satisfaction of seeing that. Not today.

He looked down for a moment, gathering his thoughts, then lifted his gaze to meet Ran’s concerned eyes. “Move forward, Ran,” Aguero said quietly, his voice steady despite the turmoil inside. “Don’t look back.”

Ran hesitated, his concern deepening. He had known his older brother Aguero for years, and he could tell when something was bothering him, no matter how much Aguero tried to hide it. The mention of Bam—someone Ran knew was important to Aguero—had struck a nerve, even if Aguero wouldn’t admit it. 

“Are you okay, Aguero?” Ran asked, his voice was low, almost hesitant. He rarely saw his brother like this, and it worried him.

Aguero’s gaze flicked to Ran, his expression hardening as he forced a small, tight-lipped smile. “It doesn’t affect me,” he said, his tone was firm. “Not anymore.” But even as he said the words, he knew they weren’t entirely true. The memories, the guilt, the fear of what really happened to Bam—they lingered, always just beneath the surface.

Maschenny chuckled softly behind them, her amusement was clear as she watched Aguero’s feigned indifference. “Keep telling yourself that, little brother. Maybe one day you’ll believe it.”

Aguero’s hands clenched into fists at his sides, but he didn’t respond. There was nothing more to say to her, nothing that would change the cruel fate she seemed so eager to remind him of. Without another word, he turned and walked away, his steps brisk and purposeful, as if putting distance between himself and Maschenny could also silence the echoes of her voice in his mind.

Ran followed closely, his expression dark with a mixture of worry and frustration. He hated how Maschenny always got under Aguero’s skin, how she always found a way to dig at the wounds that Aguero tried so hard to keep hidden. But Ran also knew that pushing Aguero to talk about it wouldn’t help. Aguero was stubborn, and once he decided something didn’t bother him, he would stick to it, no matter how much it actually did.

As they walked through the dimly lit corridors of the building, Ran couldn’t help but glance at Aguero again. “You know,” Ran began cautiously, “it’s okay if it still bothers you, Aguero. You don’t have to pretend it doesn’t.”

Aguero’s pace didn’t falter, but there was a brief flicker in his eyes, a crack in his otherwise impenetrable façade. “It’s not that simple, Ran,” he replied, his voice was softer now, almost reflective. “There are some things that... you just have to live with. Even if they hurt.”

Ran nodded, understanding in his own way. “Yeah, I get that. But you’re not alone in this, Aguero. If you need help—”

“I know, Ran,” Aguero interrupted gently, his expression softening slightly. “And I appreciate it. But right now, we have to focus on what’s ahead. There’s too much at stake to get caught up in the past.”

Ran sighed but didn’t push further. He knew Aguero well enough to recognize when to back off. Still, he couldn’t shake the feeling that Maschenny’s words had left a deeper mark than Aguero was willing to admit.

The night sky was draped in a shroud of dark clouds, mirroring the heavy atmosphere inside the hideout. The TFN members had gathered in the main hall, the weight of anticipation settling over them like a thick fog. They knew this meeting was important; Asensio’s return always meant business, and the look in his eyes told them tonight would be no different.

Aguero stood at the head of the long table, his expression unreadable as he glanced at each member. Hachuling leaned against the wall, arms crossed, a grim look on his face. Asensio sat beside Aguero, his fingers tapping rhythmically on the table as he waited for everyone to settle in.

Dan, who had been fidgeting with impatience, finally spoke up. “So, what’s the job this time? It’s been too quiet lately.”

Asensio smirked at Dan’s eagerness. “I’ve got something that’ll put an end to that boredom of yours, Dan. We’ve got a total of four contracts, all high-priority, all sent directly to the family.”

Dan was practically vibrating with excitement. “Alright, what’s the scoop? We’ve been on standby for ages.”

Asensio, seated confidently, scanned the room. “We’ve finally got some action lined up. Four contracts have come in, and they’re all critical. Aguero, I need you to divide the team to handle these tasks.”

Aguero nodded, his gaze shifting to the members. “Alright, here’s how it’s going to work. Hockney, Ran, and Shibisu will take one. Endorsi, Novick, and Hatz will handle another. Dan, Elaine, and Rak will manage the third. I’ll personally take the last one.”

Dan’s eyes lit up with excitement. “You’re sending us out on different missions? This is going to be great.”

Hachuling stepped forward, carrying a stack of envelopes sealed with the Khun family crest. He distributed them to each group, a serious expression on his face. “Remember, these crests are not just symbols—they represent the Khun family’s authority. Keep the details of your missions confidential. Any slip-up could jeopardize everything.”

Elaine took her envelope with a nod, and Rak’s eyes narrowed with determination. Hockney, Ran, and Shibisu exchanged glances, ready for whatever lay ahead. Dan was practically bouncing in his seat, eager for the action to start.

Asensio cleared his throat, bringing everyone’s attention back to the briefing. “Let’s get into specifics. Hockney, Ran, and Shibisu, your task is to secure a black market arms deal. You’ll need to negotiate with a dealer known for his treachery. Be on high alert—this one’s likely to get messy.”

Hockney, always the strategist, raised an eyebrow. “Got it. We’ll need to plan our approach carefully to avoid tipping our hand.”

“Exactly,” Asensio confirmed. “Endorsi, Novick, and Hatz, your mission is to eliminate a former Khun family associate who has turned traitor. He’s planning to leak sensitive information to a rival family. Your goal is to ensure he can’t pass along any more secrets.”

Novick, who had been quietly listening, nodded. “Understood. We’ll make sure he’s dealt with before he can do any more damage.”

Asensio turned to Dan, Elaine, and Rak. “You three are assigned to sabotage a major operation run by a rival crime family. They’ve been encroaching on territory that’s crucial to our allies. Your job is to hit them hard and send a clear message.”

Elaine grinned. “Sounds like a challenge. We’re up for it.”

Finally, Asensio’s gaze shifted to Aguero. “Aguero, you’ll handle the last mission yourself. Your task is to dismantle a drug operation run by a rival syndicate. They’ve been damaging the reputation of one of our client families, and it’s important we put an end to it.”

Aguero’s expression remained neutral, though his eyes betrayed a hint of resolve. “Understood. I’ll take care of it.”

Dan, still buzzing with energy, looked at Novick with a grin. “Can you believe Aguero’s going solo on his mission? This is going to be something to see.”

Novick nodded, his eyes wide with anticipation. “I’ve heard stories about Aguero’s skills, but seeing it firsthand is going to be incredible.”

Asensio and Hachuling both stood up, signaling that the meeting was nearing its end. Asensio’s voice took on a final, authoritative tone. “Make sure you’re fully prepared for your missions. These tasks are critical, and there’s no room for error. Check in regularly and keep communication open.”

Hachuling added, “Remember the drill—stay sharp and don’t let anything slip. The success of these operations depends on your discretion and efficiency.”

With that, the meeting concluded, and the team dispersed, each member heading off to prepare for their respective missions. The air in the hideout was charged with a mix of determination and nervous energy as the TFN members set about their tasks, ready to tackle the challenges ahead.

As Aguero walked away from the meeting, he glanced at Ran, who had been silent throughout the briefing. “Let’s get ready. We’ve got a lot to do before we head out.”

Ran nodded, a look of concern and support in his eyes. “I’ll make sure everything’s in order. Just let me know if you need anything.”

Aguero gave a curt nod. “I’ll handle it. We need to stay focused and execute these missions flawlessly.”

The hideout fell into a rhythm of preparation and strategy as each team set out to tackle their assigned tasks, the weight of the night’s briefing hanging over them like a silent promise of action to come.

The night was thick with tension, the moon cloaked by clouds as if nature itself sought to obscure the deeds about to unfold. Aguero’s instructions had been clear, and now, under the cover of darkness, three teams moved with purpose, each with a mission that would decide the fate of the Khun family’s grip on the underworld.

Hockney, Ran, and Shibisu approached the meeting point with a blend of caution and confidence. The dilapidated warehouse reeked of oil and decay, a perfect setting for the treacherous dealings about to take place. Shibisu adjusted his collar, the weight of responsibility resting heavily on his shoulders as they waited for the black-market dealer. Hockney scanned the area, his eyes sharp beneath the thick lenses of his glasses, while Ran leaned casually against a crate, exuding an air of nonchalance that belied his readiness to strike at a moment’s notice.

“Stay sharp,” Shibisu muttered, his gaze fixed on the shadows shifting in the corners. “These types always have tricks up their sleeves.”

Hockney’s fingers danced over the tablet in his hands, manipulating the security feeds he had tapped into earlier. “I’ve got eyes on all exits. If they try anything, we’ll know.”

Ran cracked his knuckles. “Let them try.”

The creak of a rusty door echoed through the warehouse as a group of men emerged, led by a figure draped in a long coat, his face hidden beneath a wide-brimmed hat. The black-market dealer, known only as Madoraco, was infamous for his ruthless methods and unpredictable nature.

“Gentlemen,” Madoraco’s voice slithered out like a snake, oozing with false pleasantries. “A pleasure to do business with the esteemed Khun family.”

Shibisu stepped forward, a practiced smile on his lips. “Let’s skip the formalities, Madoraco. You have what we need?”

Madoraco’s grin widened, showing teeth that were too sharp. “Of course. But you know how it is—nothing comes without a price.”

As the dealer signaled his men, crates were pushed forward, revealing rows of gleaming weapons beneath the flickering fluorescent lights. Shibisu remained calm, but Hockney noticed the subtle twitch in Madoraco’s eye, a sign of something brewing beneath the surface.

“The price has been agreed upon,” Shibisu said, his tone firm. “You’re not thinking of changing the terms, are you?”

Madoraco chuckled, a sound that made the hair on the back of Shibisu’s neck stand up. “The thing about deals, my friend, is that they can be… renegotiated. I’m afraid the terms have shifted. Double the price, or things might get messy.”

Hockney’s hand hovered over his concealed weapon, while Ran’s expression darkened. Shibisu held up a hand, signaling them to wait.

“We had an agreement, Madoraco,” Shibisu replied evenly, though his eyes were like steel. “It would be unwise to break it.”

Madoraco’s smile vanished, replaced by a cold sneer. “Unwise? I think you misunderstand your position here.”

One of Madoraco’s men stepped forward, drawing a knife, but before he could make a move, Ran was on him. The sound of the man’s ribs cracking echoed through the warehouse as Ran drove his fist into his chest, grabbing the man’s knife with his other hand and stabbing it into his throat with brutal precision. The man crumpled to the ground, blood pooling beneath him.

The warehouse fell into a tense silence. Madoraco’s remaining men hesitated, clearly shaken by Ran’s swift and ruthless action. Shibisu didn’t flinch, his gaze locked on Madoraco.

“Consider that a warning,” Shibisu said coolly. “The next one won’t be so merciful.”

Madoraco’s eyes flicked between the three of them, calculating. Finally, he raised his hands in a mock gesture of surrender. “No need for further violence. A deal’s a deal.”

The tension in the room eased, but the air remained thick with the promise of betrayal. Shibisu nodded, and Hockney stepped forward to inspect the goods, confirming their authenticity.

“We’re done here,” Shibisu declared, signaling to Hockney and Ran. “Let’s get out.”

As they turned to leave, Madoraco’s voice trailed after them, dripping with venom. “Pleasure doing business with you, gentlemen.”

Ran didn’t respond, but the smirk on his face said everything. The Khun family’s business was secure, but the night was far from over.

Meanwhile, Endorsi, Novick, and Hatz moved through the city like shadows, their target a man who had once sworn loyalty to the Khun family but had since turned traitor. The task was clear: eliminate him before he could sell the family’s secrets to a rival.

Endorsi led the way, her chakrams strapped securely to her sides. She could feel the weight of Hockney’s modifications, a deadly promise of what was to come. Novick and Hatz followed closely, their eyes scanning the streets for any sign of their prey.

“We should be close,” Hatz murmured, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword. “Intel says he’s holed up in a secure location near the waterfront.”

Endorsi nodded, her gaze never wavering from the path ahead. “Keep your guard up. This guy knows we’re coming.”

As they approached the target’s hideout, a rundown building that overlooked the river, Endorsi motioned for the others to stop. She studied the structure, noting the security cameras and the armed guards patrolling the perimeter.

“He’s got the place locked down tight,” Novick observed, his eyes narrowing. “Getting in without being spotted will be tricky.”

Endorsi smirked. “Tricky is what we do best.”

With a flick of her wrist, she sent one of her chakrams flying towards a distant security camera. The blade sliced through the air, embedding itself in the camera with a sharp thunk, and a moment later, a small compartment on the chakram released a puff of poison into the device, short-circuiting it instantly.

“One down,” she whispered, catching the returning chakram with ease. “Let’s move.”

They slipped through the shadows, taking out the guards with swift, silent strikes. Novick’s Ben’s knife gleamed in the darkness as he dispatched two men with precise, lethal blows, while Hatz used his sword to cut down anyone who got too close. Endorsi moved like a wraith, her chakrams spinning through the air with deadly accuracy, each one returning to her hands as if they were extensions of her own body.

They reached the entrance to the building, where the final obstacle awaited them: a pair of heavily armed guards. Endorsi glanced at Novick and Hatz, and with a nod, they sprang into action. Novick charged forward, using his knife to deflect the first guard’s gunshot before driving it into the man’s chest. Hatz followed suit, his sword slicing through the second guard’s weapon before finishing him off with a swift strike to the neck.

With the path clear, they entered the building, finding their target in a small, dimly lit office. The man looked up in terror as they approached, scrambling to reach the phone on his desk, but Endorsi was faster. She hurled her chakram, and the blade embedded itself in the desk, inches from his hand.

“Going somewhere?” Endorsi’s voice was laced with mockery as she stepped forward, retrieving her weapon.

The man’s face went pale as he realized who was standing before him. “Please… I didn’t mean—”

“Save it,” Endorsi cut him off, her eyes cold. “You knew what would happen if you betrayed us.”

The man’s pleas turned to stammering as he tried to explain, but Endorsi had no interest in hearing his excuses. With a flick of her wrist, she sent the chakram flying once more, this time embedding it in the man’s throat. He choked on his own blood as he collapsed, the light in his eyes fading.

Novick and Hatz watched in silence as Endorsi retrieved her weapon, wiping the blood from the blade before turning to leave.

“It’s done,” Novick said quietly.

Endorsi nodded, her expression unreadable. “Let’s get out of here.”

On the other side of the city, Dan, Elaine, and Rak crept towards their target: a rival crime family’s warehouse that had been encroaching on the Khun family’s territory. The plan was simple: destroy the supplies, plant evidence to implicate another gang, and get out without being caught.

Dan led the way, his speed making him a blur in the darkness. Elaine and Rak followed, each of them prepared for the chaos that was sure to ensue. They reached the warehouse without incident, and Dan quickly disabled the security system, allowing them to slip inside.

“This place is crawling with guards,” Elaine whispered, her eyes scanning the interior.

Rak grinned, his massive frame looming over the others. “Good. I’m in the mood to break something.”

Elaine rolled her eyes but couldn’t help the small smile that tugged at her lips. “Just make sure you don’t bring the whole place down on our heads.”

They moved through the warehouse, avoiding detection as they made their way to the central storage area. Dan darted ahead, planting explosives on key structural points, while Elaine took out any guards they encountered with swift, precise strikes. Rak, for his part, made sure that anything that looked important was thoroughly smashed.

As they reached the main storage room, Dan began setting up the final explosives while Elaine and Rak stood guard.

“How much time do you need?” Elaine asked, her eyes flicking between the doors.

“Just a few more seconds,” Dan replied, his fingers flying over the detonator.

A sudden noise from behind them caught their attention, and Elaine spun around just in time to see a group of armed men burst into the room. Without hesitation, she launched herself at the nearest one, her fist connecting with his jaw in a bone-crunching blow. Rak let out a roar as he charged into the fray, swinging a massive metal pipe he had picked up along the way.

“Get down!” Dan shouted, pressing the final button on the detonator.

Elaine and Rak dove for cover as the explosives detonated in a series of deafening blasts. The walls shook, and flames erupted from the storage area, sending smoke billowing through the warehouse. Chaos erupted as the guards scrambled to escape, but Dan, Elaine, and Rak were already making their way out, the mission accomplished.

As they emerged into the night air, Rak let out a satisfied chuckle. “Now that’s what I call a job well done.”

Elaine shot him a wry look. “You always enjoy the destruction a little too much.”

Dan grinned as he secured the detonator in his pack. “Let’s just hope the evidence we planted does its job. The last thing we need is to deal with two gangs on our tail.”

They slipped into the shadows, leaving the burning warehouse behind as they disappeared into the night.

The hideout was alive with the echoes of returning footsteps and the low murmur of voices as the teams reassembled. The air was thick with the scent of sweat and blood, a testament to the night’s work. Despite the exhaustion, a sense of accomplishment hung over them like a victorious banner. Dan, still feeling the rush from the explosion they had set off, tossed his pack onto a nearby chair and stretched, his muscles aching but satisfied.

“Damn, did you see those turtles scatter when the place blew?” Rak boomed, his deep voice reverberating through the room as he plopped down on a couch, a wide grin on his face. “They didn’t know what hit ‘em!”

Elaine, who was still cleaning the blood off her knuckles, smirked. “It was a good hit. But you might want to be a little less enthusiastic next time, Rak. You nearly took down the entire building with that swing.”

Rak laughed heartily, unfazed. “What can I say? I like to make an impression.”

Hockney shook his head. “An impression is one thing, but let’s try not to get too carried away. We don’t need the entire city coming down on us.”

Novick, who had been uncharacteristically quiet, finally chimed in as he leaned against the wall, his arms crossed. “Speaking of making impressions, you handled that Madoraco guy pretty well, didn’t you? I’m still not over how he tried to play us. Good thing you guys caught on before things got messy.”

Shibisu rolled his eyes as he dropped onto the couch beside Rak. “Messy? You mean messier. The guy was a walking disaster waiting to happen. I half-expected him to trip over his own feet when he tried to pull that stunt.”

“Would’ve been funny if he did,” Hockney added with a chuckle. “Too bad Ran handled him so quickly.”

Ran simply shrugged as he polished his blade. “I don’t like loose ends.”

“Can’t argue with that,” Endorsi said as she walked into the room, her chakrams spinning idly in her hands. “But the real question is, where’s Aguero? I thought he’d be back by now.”

As the conversation continued, Dan’s brow furrowed as he glanced around the room. Something felt off. “Yeah, where is Aguero? He’s not the type to just disappear without a word.”

Ran heard the question and gave a casual shrug. “Aguero’s still out on his mission. You know him—always taking the solo jobs. Something about dismantling a drug operation for one of our clients.”

Dan’s interest piqued immediately. “Wait, Aguero’s out there right now?”

Ran nodded, not missing the gleam of curiosity in Dan’s eyes. “Yeah. Knowing him, he’s probably already halfway through the job. Why?”

A slow grin spread across Dan’s face. “I’ve never actually seen Aguero in action, you know? Always hear about it, but never get to watch the guy work. What do you say we go check it out? Could be educational.”

Novick, who had been leaning nonchalantly against the wall, straightened up, his own curiosity piqued. “You want to watch Aguero? Hell, count me in. It’s not every day you get to see the Ice Prince do his thing.”

Elaine raised an eyebrow, amused. “You guys sound like a bunch of kids trying to sneak a peek at the big kids playing ball.”

“And your point is?” Dan shot back with a grin. “This is Aguero we’re talking about. If you’re not curious, you’re crazy.”

Endorsi, tossing her chakram into the air and catching it effortlessly, smirked. “I’m in. It’s been a while since I’ve seen him cut loose.”

“Same here,” Shibisu added. “Watching him work? That’s a different ball game.”

Ran, sensing where this was going, sighed in resignation. “You guys are relentless, you know that? Aguero’s going to kill me if he finds out we were spying on him.”

“Oh, come on, Ran,” Dan teased. “When was the last time you saw your brother in action? Don’t you want to see what he’s up to?”

Ran sighed again, but there was a glimmer of amusement in his eyes. “Fine, fine. But if Aguero asks, this was all your idea.”

“Deal!” Dan said quickly, turning to Asensio, who had been sitting quietly in the corner. “So, Asensio knows where he is, right? Come on, ask him.”

Ran, with a resigned sigh, accepted his fate and called Asensio. He spent a good five minutes listening to Asensio before he could even get the exact location of Aguero’s mission. 

“I got it.” Ran said, putting his phone back inside his pocket. 

“Perfect,” Dan said, rubbing his hands together in anticipation. “Let’s move.”

They moved quietly through the shadows, the group of them making their way to the old chemical plant where Aguero was said to be. The building loomed in the distance, a hulking mass of rusted metal and broken windows, the perfect hideout for an operation as shady as the one Aguero was dismantling.

When they arrived, they kept their distance, positioning themselves on a nearby rooftop that gave them a clear view of the plant. From there, they could see the flickering lights of the facility and the dark figures moving about inside. Dan, Novick, and the others settled in, their eyes trained on the building, waiting for the show to begin.

“There he is,” Ran whispered, pointing to a shadowy figure slipping through the entrance. Even in the darkness, Aguero’s silhouette was unmistakable.

As they watched, Aguero moved with the precision of a predator stalking its prey. He was all business, every movement calculated and efficient. He slipped into the plant unnoticed, and they lost sight of him for a few moments before he reappeared inside, moving between the shadows like a ghost.

“There’s a reason they call him the Ice Prince,” Endorsi murmured, her eyes never leaving Aguero’s figure as he made his way deeper into the facility. “The guy’s colder than ice.”

“He’s always been like that,” Ran replied quietly. “Even when we were kids. Always a step ahead, always in control.”

Inside the plant, Aguero moved with purpose, his eyes scanning the area, taking in every detail. He quickly identified the key points of the operation—the labs where the drugs were being processed, the storerooms where they were being packed, and the offices where the deals were being made. It didn’t take him long to formulate a plan.

“He’s scoping out the whole place,” Novick observed, impressed. “Bet you he’s already figured out how to take them all down.”

Dan nodded, watching intently. “And he’s doing it alone. This is going to be good.”

Aguero began his assault by disabling the security systems, cutting off the plant from the outside world. The lights flickered and then went out, plunging the facility into darkness. The guards inside scrambled, trying to figure out what was happening, but Aguero was already moving, slipping through the shadows like a wraith.

In the darkness, he struck with deadly precision, taking out guards one by one, his movements swift and silent. The others watched in awe as he dispatched each man with a single, well-placed blow. There was no wasted effort, no unnecessary violence—just cold, calculated efficiency.

“He’s like a damn machine,” Shibisu whispered, unable to tear his eyes away from the scene unfolding below. “He doesn’t even break a sweat.”

Elaine watched in silence, her eyes narrowing as she studied Aguero’s technique. “It’s more than that. He’s thinking so many steps ahead of everyone else. By the time they realize what’s happening, it’s already too late.”

Aguero continued his methodical takedown of the operation, moving from one target to the next with ruthless efficiency. He made his way to the labs, where the drugs were being processed, and quickly identified the weak points. With a few precise strikes, he disabled the equipment, rendering the operation useless.

As he moved to the next target, a group of guards finally caught on to what was happening and converged on his location. For a moment, the spectators from afar tensed, wondering if Aguero had finally met his match. But instead of showing any signs of worry, Aguero simply smiled—a cold, calculating smile that sent chills down their spines.

“They’ve got him surrounded,” Novick whispered, his voice tense with anticipation. “What’s he going to do?”

The guards shouted commands, their guns trained on Aguero as they tried to surround him. But before any of them could react, Aguero moved. He was a blur of motion, faster than their eyes could follow. In the blink of an eye, he had closed the distance between them, disassembling their guns with terrifying speed. One by one, the guards’ weapons fell to the ground in pieces, their owners too stunned to react.

“Holy shit,” Dan breathed, his eyes wide. “Did you see that?”

Before the guards could react, Aguero was on them. He drew his blade—a sleek, deadly weapon that gleamed in the dim light—and cut them down with a series of quick, lethal strikes. Each movement was flawless, each kill precise. There was no hesitation, no mercy. The guards fell one by one, their blood staining the cold concrete floor.

From their vantage point, Dan and the others watched in silence, their earlier excitement replaced by a stunned respect. Aguero was a force of nature, an unstoppable force that left nothing but death and destruction in his wake.

“That’s why he’s the best,” Ran said quietly, his voice filled with a mix of admiration and unease. “That’s why he’s our leader.”

As the last guard fell, Aguero paused, surveying the carnage he had wrought. His expression was unreadable, his eyes cold and distant. He wiped his blade clean and sheathed it, his mission complete.

Dan, Novick, and the others remained silent as they watched Aguero disappear into the shadows, his work done. The plant was a ruin, the drug operation dismantled, the bodies of the guards strewn across the floor. Aguero had accomplished his mission with a level of skill and efficiency that left no room for doubt. 

“That… was something else,” Novick finally said, breaking the silence. His voice was filled with a new level of respect. “I knew Aguero was good, but damn… that was on another level.”

Dan nodded in agreement, his earlier curiosity giving way to a deep admiration. “Yeah. I’ve always known he was sharp, but seeing it firsthand… it’s different. The guy’s a freaking genius.”

“And a killer,” Shibisu added, his tone was more serious than before. “Don’t forget that. Aguero’s not just smart—he’s deadly. That’s what makes him who he is.”

Elaine glanced at the others, her expression thoughtful. “And that’s why we follow him. Because he gets the job done, no matter what it takes.”

There was a heavy silence as they all considered her words. Watching Aguero in action had reminded them of the reality of their world—a world where strength, intelligence, and ruthlessness were the keys to survival. Aguero embodied all of those traits, and it was clear that as long as he was leading them, they had nothing to fear.

Chapter Text

Khun Eduan was not a man who relished stepping outside the shadows of his vast estate. For a man of his power and stature, the outside world held little appeal unless it involved the delicate art of conducting business. His life was a cycle of control, power, and order, balanced perfectly within the confines of his grand chamber. And when he did step outside, it was for one of two reasons: to handle work that demanded his personal attention or to attend a meeting of The Order, the most formidable and feared group in the underworld.

Tonight, it was the latter that pulled him from the comforting darkness of his estate. The Order was convening in response to an emergency—a rarity that hinted at the seriousness of the matter at hand. The group’s influence spanned the entire criminal world, a syndicate of the most powerful mafia-assassin families who thrived in the dark corners of society. Among them, Eduan and Gustang from Poe Bidau were the most feared, their reputations as ruthless leaders cemented over decades of control.

The meeting location was deep within a hidden underground chamber, its entrance concealed beneath layers of deception and guarded by some of the most dangerous men alive. The chamber itself was vast, its stone walls adorned with symbols that spoke of an ancient legacy, a reminder that The Order’s roots ran deep. The air was thick with the scent of earth and stone, a stark contrast to the opulence that characterized the lives of those who gathered here.

Eduan stepped into the chamber with the quiet confidence of a man who knew he was among equals—each family head here commanded an empire built on blood, secrecy, and fear. But even among them, Eduan and Gustang stood out, their power unrivaled.

The room was already filled with the murmur of low voices when Eduan arrived. The family heads, seated at a circular table made of dark, polished wood, fell silent as he entered, their eyes shifting to him with a mix of respect and wariness. These were men and women who had seen it all, who had committed and sanctioned horrors unimaginable to most, yet even they were cautious around Eduan.

He moved to his seat with deliberate slowness, every step a testament to the control he wielded. Opposite him sat Gustang, a man whose intellect was as deadly as any weapon. Where Eduan’s power was raw, Gustang’s was refined—a sharp blade hidden behind a veneer of elegance and charm. The two men acknowledged each other with the barest of nods, a silent understanding passing between them. They were allies in this world of shadows, but both knew that alliances in the underworld were often as fragile as they were necessary.

Eduan’s gaze swept the room, taking in the faces of the other family heads. Each of them had carved out a piece of the underworld for themselves, but none had managed to do so without crossing paths with The Order. This council was more than a collection of the powerful—it was the foundation upon which the entire criminal world was built.

As the last of the family heads took their seats, the chamber fell into a tense silence. All eyes turned to the man at the head of the table, an elder statesman of The Order who had long served as its de facto leader. His voice, though softened with age, carried the weight of authority.

“This meeting has been called to address a growing threat,” the elder began, his tone grave. “A force that seeks to challenge the very foundation of our world.”

The statement was met with murmurs, but Eduan remained impassive. It was Gustang who broke the silence, his voice smooth and deliberate.

“You speak of FUG, I presume,” Gustang said, his words slicing through the tension like a knife.

The elder nodded. “Indeed. FUG has grown more bold in recent months. Their operations have shifted from mere interference to outright attacks on our assets.”

Eduan’s expression didn’t change, though his eyes narrowed slightly. FUG—a name that had circulated in the shadows for some time now. It is a special police force operating with the sole purpose of dismantling the underworld. Unlike conventional law enforcement, FUG had no interest in arrests or trials. They were executioners, operating under the belief that the only way to cleanse society of its corruption was to eliminate it entirely.

The Order had encountered FUG’s interference before, but it had always been manageable. Yet, if the council had been summoned to discuss them now, it meant that FUG was no longer a minor inconvenience. Still, Eduan wasn’t concerned. Challenges had come and gone, and The Order had weathered them all.

“We’ve dealt with threats before,” Eduan said, his voice cold and unyielding. “FUG is just another nuisance. They’ll be eradicated like the rest.”

Gustang leaned back in his seat, a faint smile playing on his lips. “Ordinarily, I would agree. But FUG is no longer content with small victories. They’re growing bolder, more strategic. And more importantly, they’ve obtained information—classified information that could undermine us.”

Eduan’s eyes flickered with mild interest, though he kept his tone dismissive. “Information? We control the flow of information in this world. What could they possibly have?”

Gustang’s smile widened, though it didn’t reach his eyes. “Plenty. One of them was how they’ve uncovered details about the train explosion. The one that happened five years ago.”

For a moment, the room fell deathly silent as they thought about it. The train explosion was a dark chapter in the history, one that had claimed many lives and left scars that had yet to heal. Eduan’s face betrayed no emotion, but internally, his thoughts were racing. He knew the explosion well—it had been orchestrated by a small group under a rival family, a group that Aguero had been tasked with eliminating. Bam, the one who had mattered most to Aguero, had died in that explosion. It was a wound that Aguero bore in silence, and Eduan had assumed that chapter was closed.

"Isn’t that small group under a family that my son massacred responsible for the explosion?" Eduan asked, his voice was laced with skepticism. He trusted his son’s capabilities and had never doubted the success of the mission.

Gustang’s response was immediate, dismissing the question with a shake of his head. "No, Eduan, it wasn’t them. The truth is far more complex. You’ve been too isolated, spending your days in that grand chamber of yours, surrounded by darkness. There’s a whole world out there, and it’s changing faster than you realize."

Eduan bristled at the remark, his pride stung. But he chose not to respond to the jab. Instead, he focused on what Gustang had said. If the explosion hadn’t been the work of that small group, then who had been behind it? And how had FUG obtained such sensitive information? Eduan’s mind raced, trying to piece together the implications.

As the meeting continued, Eduan’s thoughts began to drift. He had always prided himself on his control, on his ability to foresee and prevent threats before they could manifest. But now, for the first time in years, he felt a flicker of doubt. Someone had interfered with his plans, and the thought of it gnawed at him.

The Order continued their discussions, but Eduan was only half-listening. His mind was consumed by the revelation. When the meeting finally adjourned, Eduan excused himself quickly, needing to process everything he had learned. The other family heads filed out of the chamber, each deep in thought about the growing threat of FUG, but Eduan’s thoughts were elsewhere.

Eduan's thoughts churned as he left the emergency meeting of The Order. Gustang’s revelation about the train explosion had shaken him more than he cared to admit. For years, he had been certain that the small group under their rival family was responsible for that deadly incident. He had relayed this information to his son, Aguero, with a confidence that bordered on arrogance. But now, with the truth revealed, Eduan felt a cold rage brewing inside him. Someone had interfered, someone had manipulated the situation from the shadows, and that someone was likely within his own family.

As he walked back to his grand chamber, the pieces began to fall into place. The timing of the explosion, the way it disrupted all his carefully laid plans for Aguero, and the way events had unfolded since then—it all pointed to one person. Maschenny .

Eduan had always known that Maschenny was ambitious, but he had never thought she would go this far. The realization hit him like a physical blow, igniting a fury that made his blood boil. His hand clenched into a fist, knuckles white, as he replayed the events of the past years in his mind. Six years ago, when Aguero and Bam had gone off the radar, when Aguero had turned his back on the family legacy and threatened to erase the Khun name from history, Eduan had been infuriated. But he had told Maschenny to wait, to be patient, to let things unfold naturally. He had warned her against acting on impulse, against jeopardizing everything he had planned for so long.

And yet, she had done exactly the opposite of that. She had orchestrated the train explosion, had intervened in his plans, and had taken matters into her own hands. The thought was too much to bear. It was as if Maschenny had spat on everything he stood for, everything he had built. The anger roared through him, threatening to consume him entirely.

By the time he reached his grand chamber, Eduan was a storm of barely contained rage. He stood in the center of the darkened room, his breath coming in harsh, controlled bursts as he tried to rein in his emotions. But the more he thought about it, the more the fury grew. He couldn’t allow this betrayal to go unpunished. Maschenny needed to be taught a lesson, a harsh one.

He summoned her with a single command, his voice cold and hard. It wasn’t long before Maschenny entered the chamber, her usual confidence evident in the way she carried herself. But that confidence faltered the moment she saw the look in Eduan’s eyes—cold, deadly, filled with a fury she had never seen before.

"Dad," Maschenny began, but Eduan’s voice cut through the air like a blade.

"Silence," he hissed, his tone was laced with venom. He took a step toward her, his tall frame casting a long shadow across the room. "I know what you did."

Maschenny's eyes flickered with something—surprise, perhaps, or maybe it was just a fleeting moment of calculation. But she didn’t deny it. "And what if I did?" she replied, her voice was calm, almost dismissive. "Waiting wastes time. You taught me that."

Eduan’s hand shot out before he could stop himself, grabbing her by the throat and slamming her into the wall with a force that rattled the very foundation of the chamber. Maschenny’s breath was knocked out of her, her eyes widening in shock as she struggled against his iron grip. Eduan's face was inches from hers, his expression a mask of cold, murderous intent.

"You foolish, arrogant child!" he snarled, his voice was low and dangerous. "I told you not to act on impulse. But you—you dared to disobey me. You dared to ruin everything I’ve worked for!"

Maschenny clawed at his hand, gasping for air as his grip tightened around her throat. "You…were…too…slow," she choked out, her words barely audible. "I did…what you couldn’t."

Eduan’s rage intensified. He had never felt such a deep, personal betrayal. His own daughter, the one he had trusted to follow his orders, had defied him in the most egregious way possible. She had acted behind his back, had taken it upon herself to alter the course of events that he had meticulously planned.

"I should kill you for this," Eduan growled, his grip tightening even further. Maschenny’s face was turning pale, her struggles growing weaker. "You interfered with my plans! You've put everything at risk because of your impatience! Do you have any idea what you've done? You’ve betrayed your family, betrayed your father. And for what? For your own ambition?"

Maschenny's eyes locked onto his, and in them, he saw no fear—only defiance. "For…Aguero," she managed to whisper. "Everything…was for him. Because…you…couldn’t."

Eduan’s grip faltered for a fraction of a second, but it was enough for Maschenny to suck in a ragged breath. He was blindsided by her words, the implication that she had done all this for Aguero. For his son. But it didn’t make sense. She had interfered, had ruined everything. How could that possibly have been for Aguero’s sake?

"You think you did this for him?" Eduan sneered, his voice was dripping with disdain. "You think your actions have helped him?"

Maschenny coughed, blood splattering from her lips as she gasped for air. "Yes," she said, her voice was hoarse but resolute. "I did what you couldn’t, what you wouldn’t. I pushed him, forced him to confront his destiny. And look where he is now. Stronger, more focused…ready to take on the world."

Eduan stared at her, his mind was reeling. He had never considered that Maschenny’s actions could have been motivated by anything other than her own ambition. But as he looked into her eyes, he saw the truth—twisted, warped, but truth nonetheless. She had indeed acted for Aguero, but in a way that went against everything Eduan had planned. She had forced Aguero down a path of pain and struggle, believing that it would make him stronger. And perhaps it had. But at what cost?

Eduan released her suddenly, letting her drop to the floor in a heap. Maschenny coughed violently, blood dripping from her lips as she struggled to breathe. She looked up at him, her expression a mixture of pain and triumph.

"You always favored Aguero," Maschenny rasped, her voice weak but filled with bitterness. "Always talked about his achievements, about how he would carry on the Khun family. But you never praised me for raising him that way. You never acknowledged what I did for him."

Eduan shot her a death glare, his anger flaring up once more. "You think you deserve praise for this?" he spat. "You think your betrayal is something to be proud of?"

Maschenny wiped the blood from her lips, her eyes never leaving his. "I did what was necessary. I made him stronger, more resilient. I did what you couldn’t, because you were too blinded by your own plans, your own need for control."

Eduan’s hands clenched into fists at his sides. He could hardly believe what he was hearing. Maschenny, his own daughter, was standing before him, bloodied and battered, yet still defiant, still convinced that her actions were justified.

"You think you know what’s best for this family?" Eduan said, his voice was low. "You think you can just take matters into your own hands, disregard everything I’ve built?"

Maschenny struggled to her feet, swaying slightly but refusing to back down. "I did what I had to do," she said, her voice steady despite the pain. "We both know Bam is just a weakness that could bring Aguero down! That train explosion, he knew it was coming! Bam deserved it! And besides, you were too slow, too cautious, Aguero needed to be pushed, and you were too afraid to do it!"

Eduan’s eyes flashed with anger. "You don’t understand," he said through gritted teeth. "You have no idea what you’ve done."

Maschenny’s gaze was unwavering. "I know exactly what I’ve done," she replied. "And so do you. You’re just too proud to admit it."

Eduan stared at her, the fury and betrayal warring within him. He wanted to lash out, to punish her for her defiance, for her arrogance. But at the same time, he couldn’t deny the truth in her words. Aguero had changed, had become stronger, more focused. And perhaps, in some twisted way, Maschenny had played a role in that transformation.

But that didn’t excuse her actions. It didn’t justify the betrayal, the manipulation. She had acted without his knowledge, without his consent, and in doing so, had put everything at risk.

"Leave," Eduan finally said, his voice cold and hard. "Get out of my sight before I change my mind and finish what I started."

Maschenny didn’t hesitate. She turned and walked toward the door, her steps unsteady but purposeful. As she reached the threshold, she paused, looking back at him one last time.

"You’ll see," she said quietly. "One day, you’ll see that I was right."

Eduan didn’t respond, his gaze fixed on her with a cold, unyielding intensity. Maschenny lingered for a moment, then turned and left the chamber, the door closing behind her with a soft click.

But what Eduan and Maschenny didn’t realize was that someone else was there, hidden in the darkness, listening to every word. Aguero, their very own blood, was just a few feet away, concealed in the shadows that lined the chamber's periphery. He hadn’t intended to eavesdrop, hadn’t planned to witness the explosive confrontation between his father and sister. He had been summoned to the grand chamber for an entirely different reason, but when he heard the raised voices, something compelled him to stay hidden, to observe.

Aguero's breath caught in his throat as he watched his father, Eduan, a man who was usually so composed, so in control, now on the brink of losing himself to rage. Eduan had Maschenny pinned against the wall, his hand around her throat, and the look in his eyes was one of pure, unadulterated fury. It was a side of his father that Aguero had never seen before—a side that terrified him to his core.

But as much as the sight of Eduan’s wrath shocked him, it was the words that left Aguero reeling. He listened, heart pounding, as Eduan accused Maschenny of orchestrating the train explosion five years ago, the same explosion that had taken the life of his friend, Bam. Aguero had always believed that the explosion was the work of a rival family, a conclusion that had been fed to him by none other than Eduan himself. But now, as the truth spilled out in heated accusations and bitter confessions, Aguero felt the ground shift beneath him.

His mind raced, struggling to process what he was hearing. Maschenny, his own sister, had been behind the explosion? She had acted on her own, defying their father’s orders, taking matters into her own hands? And for what? To force Aguero into a role he hadn’t been ready to accept, to push him down a path that she believed was his destiny?

Aguero’s thoughts swirled in confusion and disbelief. He had spent the past five years believing that the explosion was the work of a small group within a rival family, that it was an act of retaliation, of violence meant to destabilize their own family’s power. But now, as he listened to the venomous exchange between Eduan and Maschenny, he realized how wrong he had been.

Eduan’s rage had been palpable, a living, breathing thing that threatened to consume them all. Aguero had never seen his father so enraged, had never seen him so close to the edge. The cold, calculating man he had grown up with was gone, replaced by someone who looked ready to kill his own daughter in a fit of fury.

And Maschenny, for her part, had remained defiant, even as she gasped for air under Eduan’s crushing grip. She had refused to back down, had insisted that everything she did was for Aguero, that she had acted in his best interest because their father was too cautious, too slow.

The truth of it all weighed heavily on Aguero, pressing down on him like a physical force. He had always known that his family was ruthless, that the Khun name was synonymous with power and manipulation. But to hear it laid out so plainly, to realize that the people closest to him had been pulling the strings all along, was almost too much to bear.

He felt a surge of emotions—anger, betrayal, sadness—all crashing together inside him like a violent storm. Aguero knew he couldn’t stay there any longer, couldn’t watch as his father and sister tore each other apart. He had to leave, had to get out before the weight of the truth crushed him completely.

Carefully, quietly, he backed away from the chamber, his footsteps soundless on the cold stone floor. His heart hammered in his chest, every beat echoing in his ears as he made his way toward the exit. He moved with the fluid grace of someone who had spent his entire life in the shadows, someone who knew how to disappear when necessary.

As he slipped out of the grand chamber, the door closing softly behind him, Aguero felt the cool air of the hallway wash over him, a stark contrast to the suffocating heat of the confrontation he had just witnessed. But the relief was fleeting. The reality of what he had learned was beginning to settle in, and with it came a sense of overwhelming dread.

Aguero kept moving, his steps quickening as he navigated the labyrinthine corridors of his family’s estate. He needed to get away, to find a place where he could think, where he could try to make sense of everything he had just heard. His mind was a whirlwind of thoughts, none of them clear, all of them tinged with a raw, burning anger.

For years, he had trusted his family, and had believed in the vision that his father had for their future. But now that trust was shattered, replaced by a gnawing sense of betrayal. He had always known that his father was a manipulator, that Eduan was capable of using anyone, even his own children, to achieve his goals. But to hear the truth about the explosion, to realize that it was all part of some twisted plan orchestrated by Maschenny—it was more than Aguero could handle.

Maschenny’s words echoed in his head. I did what was necessary. I made him stronger, more resilient. I did what you couldn’t, because you were too blinded by your own plans, your own need for control.

Aguero had always known that Maschenny was ambitious, that she was driven by a desire to prove herself. But he had never imagined that she would go so far, that she would be willing to sacrifice everything, even the lives of others, to achieve her goals.

And then there was Eduan. His father, the man who had raised him, who had trained him to be a leader, to be ruthless in his pursuit of power—Eduan had been just as manipulative, just as willing to use his own children as pawns in his game. Aguero had always looked up to his father, had admired his strength and cunning. But now, that admiration felt tainted, corrupted by the truth that had been laid bare.

Aguero felt a pang of sadness as he thought about Bam, the loved one he had lost in the explosion. Bam had been innocent, had been caught up in a world that he didn’t understand, a world that had ultimately taken his life. And now, to learn that his death had been part of some twisted plan—it was almost too much to bear.

But Aguero knew that he couldn’t let the pain consume him. He had to be strong, had to find a way to move forward, to find the answers he needed. He couldn’t let his family’s lies and manipulations define him. He had to carve out his own path, one that was free from their influence.

Aguero pushed open the heavy oak door to the hideout, the familiar creak signaling his return. The scent of warm food and the distant sound of chatter drifted through the hallway, a stark contrast to the cold, unsettling thoughts swirling in his mind. He walked slowly, each step heavier than the last, the echoes of his father’s anger and Maschenny’s chilling indifference still ringing in his ears. The confrontation he had just witnessed had shaken him more than he wanted to admit, and the weight of it all bore down on him as he neared the common room.

As he rounded the corner, Aguero’s usually sharp eyes widened in surprise. The common room, usually a space of serious discussions and silent contemplation, was now filled with laughter and a burst of color. Elaine, Endorsi, Dan, Hatz, Hockney, Novick, Rak, Ran, and Shibisu were all gathered together, lounging comfortably in various places. What caught Aguero off guard was their attire—everyone was dressed in pajamas, a sight so out of place that for a moment, he wondered if he had entered the wrong room.

Rak, usually a towering figure of strength and intimidation, had shrunk to a more manageable size and was sporting a pair of red pajamas that made him look almost…cute. Novick and Ran, who normally scorned any sign of frivolity, were each wearing their own set, albeit reluctantly. Hatz, the stoic swordsman, was in a simple gray pair, his expression a mixture of resignation and mild irritation. Even Shibisu, who usually maintained a level of coolness, was laughing along with the others in his striped pajamas.

Aguero’s eyes found Elaine and Endorsi, who were clearly the masterminds behind this unusual gathering. Elaine caught his eye and waved him over with a bright smile, her own pajamas were turquoise that matched her eyes. Endorsi, dressed in a sleek black set, grinned mischievously, clearly pleased with the scene they had orchestrated.

“Look who’s here!” Elaine’s voice cut through the room, cheerful and welcoming. “Aguero, you’re just in time! We’re celebrating our successful missions tonight. Come on, join us and put on your pajamas!”

Endorsi, with her usual commanding presence now softened by her choice of attire, added with a playful grin, “We even have a pair for you, Aguero. It’s got your name on it.”

Aguero managed a weak smile, shaking his head as he responded, “Thanks, but I don’t think I’m up for it tonight. I’m not feeling too well.”

Elaine’s smile faltered slightly, but before she could respond, Shibisu stood up, narrowing his eyes at Aguero. He knew that smile all too well—the one that Aguero wore when he was pretending everything was fine, even when it wasn’t.

“Come on, A.A,” Shibisu said, his tone light but with an undercurrent of concern. “You’ve got that look on your face again. What’s going on?”

Aguero’s eyes flickered to Shibisu, then back to the others, who were all looking at him with varying degrees of curiosity and concern. Before he could formulate a response, Endorsi walked over to him, her playful demeanor giving way to something more serious.

“Did something happen?” she asked, her voice was gentle but probing.

Aguero shook his head, forcing his usual composed mask back into place. “It’s nothing,” he said, trying to sidestep the question. “I’m just tired.”

But before he could turn to leave, Rak, in his shrunken form, moved quicker than Aguero expected, grabbing his arm with surprising strength. “You’re not going anywhere,” Rak grumbled, pulling Aguero towards the center of the room. “You’re gonna tell us what’s bothering you.”

Aguero’s resistance crumbled under Rak’s insistent pull, and he found himself being guided to the middle of the common room where everyone was gathered. Elaine’s eyes were filled with concern, and she motioned for Aguero to sit down on one of the cushions placed around the coffee table.

“Alright, spill it,” Elaine said, her voice gentle but firm. “Something’s clearly wrong. We’re a team, and we’re here for each other. What happened?”

Aguero sighed deeply, the weight of the day’s events pressing heavily on him. The room was silent as everyone awaited his response. He had always been the leader, the strong one, but now he felt vulnerable and exposed. Finally, he began to speak, his voice strained but steady.

“I went back home,” Aguero started, trying to find the right words. “I overheard a confrontation between our father and Maschenny. Dad was furious, so angry that he almost killed her on the spot.”

The room erupted in murmurs of surprise and concern. Ran, his youthful face reflecting confusion, asked, “Why would dad be so angry? What happened?”

Aguero continued, “It turns out that Maschenny had intervened with dad’s plan. The train explosion five years ago, the one that killed Bam—it wasn’t done by the small group from a rival family that dad led me to believe. It was Maschenny’s doing all along.”

The revelation hit the group like a sledgehammer. The common room, filled with light-hearted pajamas and celebratory energy, grew heavy with the gravity of Aguero’s words. The founding members of TFN—Endorsi, Elaine, Hatz, Hockney, Rak, and Shibisu—stared at Aguero, their expressions were a mixture of shock and confusion. Dan and Novick, newcomers to the group, looked particularly perplexed.

Seeing their bewilderment, Aguero took a deep breath and decided to explain further. “Bam was my dear friend,” he began, his voice trembling slightly. “He died in that explosion. Dad had told me that it was the work of a small faction from a rival family, and I acted on that information. I massacred them five years ago, believing that I was avenging Bam’s death.”

Dan and Novick exchanged glances, trying to piece together the information. Aguero could see the confusion in their eyes, and he knew he had to clarify. “Bam was not just anyone to me. He was... someone I cared deeply about. Losing him was devastating. And now, knowing that Maschenny was behind the explosion, that everything I thought was true was a lie—it’s more than I can handle.”

Elaine, her face etched with sympathy, placed a comforting hand on Aguero’s shoulder. “This… this is too much to process.”

Aguero looked around the room, at the faces of his friends and teammates. They were all here for him, in their pajamas, a stark reminder of the normalcy and camaraderie that he had momentarily lost sight of. “I don’t even know what to do now,” he admitted, his voice barely above a whisper. “I feel so lost. I thought I was fighting for justice, but now it seems like I was just a pawn in someone else’s game. Like what I used to be.”

Dan, the one to voice his thoughts, leaned forward, breaking the silence with a question that had been gnawing at him. “Aguero,” he began, his tone serious, “if Maschenny killed Bam, would it be wrong if you killed her in return? I mean, wouldn’t it be the same?”

The question hung in the air like a dagger, its implications cutting through the quiet. Aguero’s eyes darkened, his jaw tightening at the mention of Bam and Maschenny in the same breath. The rest of the group exchanged uneasy glances, knowing the delicate nature of the topic Dan had just brought up.

Ran was the first to respond. “Dan,” he said, his voice was firm, “killing family members is against our code. No matter what happens, family is off-limits.”

“But what if—” Dan started to protest, but Ran cut him off.

“No,” Ran said, more forcefully this time. “It doesn’t matter what the situation is. We don’t kill family members, no exceptions. It’s a rule we all live by.”

Aguero remained silent, his gaze fixed on the table, fingers tapping rhythmically against its surface. The question had clearly struck a nerve, but he wasn’t about to let his emotions show in front of the group.

Endorsi, who had been quietly observing the exchange, suddenly let out a small chuckle, a faint smile playing on her lips. The unexpected reaction drew the attention of everyone in the room.

“What’s so funny?” Hatz asked, raising an eyebrow at Endorsi’s amusement.

Endorsi shook her head, still smiling. “It’s not the question itself that’s funny,” she said, “it’s just that Dan’s question reminded me of something.”

Dan looked surprised, as did everyone else. “Reminded you of what?” Hockney asked, his curiosity piqued.

Endorsi leaned back in her chair, her eyes glazing over slightly as she recalled a memory. “There was this one time when Bam and I were training outside the hideout. He was always so curious about Aguero, always asking me things about him. And one day, he asked me something similar to what Dan just asked.”

The room fell silent again, everyone eager to hear what Endorsi had to say. Even Aguero, who had been brooding silently, seemed to perk up at the mention of Bam.

“What did he ask?” Elaine prompted, leaning forward slightly.

Endorsi smiled, a touch of fondness in her expression as she remembered the conversation. “He asked me if Aguero and his siblings ever disagreed on something, like, really disagreed, would it matter if they tried to kill each other, since they’re all assassins and everything,”

Everyone in the room seemed taken aback by the question, and Aguero’s eyes narrowed as he focused intently on Endorsi, clearly intrigued.

“What did you say to him?” Shibisu asked, breaking the silence.

“I asked him if he was serious,” Endorsi replied, laughing softly at the memory. “And Bam, being Bam, just shrugged and said, I mean, it just crossed my mind. I know they’re a family, but they’re also trained killers, right?"

The group exchanged glances, some nodding in understanding. It was a valid question, after all, considering the nature of the Khun family and their training.

“So what did you tell him?” Hatz asked, his voice quiet.

“I told him that that’s not the right way to look at it,” Endorsi said. “I said, I don’t know what kind of crazy ideas he got in his head, but no, they don’t just go around killing each other over disagreements. Family is off-limits in the Khun family.’”

Aguero’s expression softened ever so slightly as he listened, a brief flicker of something unreadable in his eyes. The mention of Bam’s curiosity about him brought back memories he had long buried, memories he wasn’t sure he was ready to face.

Endorsi continued, her voice softer now, as if she were speaking more to herself than to the group. “Bam was always so curious about you, Aguero. He would always strike up conversations with me about you, asking things about you, just basically talking about you.”

A small smile tugged at the corner of Aguero’s lips, though it didn’t reach his eyes. “He was always asking about me, huh?”

“Yeah,” Endorsi said, her smile widening as she remembered. “There was this one time when Elaine and I were helping him tend to the garden back at the hilltop cottage. He was supposed to be focused on the task at hand, but his mind was clearly elsewhere. And of course, that elsewhere was you.”

Elaine, who had been listening quietly, suddenly lit up. “Oh, I remember that!” she exclaimed, her voice was filled with happiness. “He had this flustered look on his face when you told him he was smitten over Aguero!”

Endorsi laughed, the sound light and carefree, a stark contrast to the earlier tension. “He was so embarrassed! But he didn’t even deny it. Just kind of mumbled something under his breath and kept working.”

The group, who had been so caught up in the heavy discussion earlier, found themselves smiling, the tension lifting as they reminisced about Bam and his innocent curiosity about Aguero. The conversation had taken a turn, moving from the serious to the lighthearted, as memories of Bam brought them all a sense of warmth and camaraderie.

Hatz chuckled, shaking his head in amusement. “I can just imagine Bam’s face. Poor guy was probably mortified.”

“Mortified is an understatement,” Elaine said, grinning. “He was practically glowing with embarrassment.”

“And yet, he still couldn’t stop thinking about Aguero,” Endorsi added, her smile fading slightly as the bittersweetness of the memory settled in.

Aguero, who had been listening quietly, finally spoke, his voice was softer than usual. “He was… always so curious, wasn’t he?”

Endorsi nodded, her expression was gentle. “He was. And not just about you, but about everything. He was always trying to understand the world around him, even if it didn’t always make sense to him.”

There was a brief moment of silence as the group reflected on Bam’s inquisitive nature, each of them lost in their own thoughts. The conversation had shifted from the weighty implications of family loyalty to the simple, yet profound, memories of Bam and his endless curiosity.

Hockney, who had been quietly observing, finally spoke up, his voice was thoughtful. “It’s funny, isn’t it? How someone so innocent could be so interested in a world that’s anything but cruelty and violence.”

“That was Bam for you,” Shibisu said with a nod. “Always seeing the good in everything, even when there wasn’t any to be found.”

Aguero’s gaze dropped to the table, his thoughts drifting back to all the times Bam had asked him questions, the way he would look at him with those wide, curious eyes, eager to learn and understand. It was one of the things that had drawn him to Bam in the first place—the purity of his heart, the way he saw the world with such wonder, despite everything.

“He never stopped asking questions,” Aguero murmured, almost to himself.

“And you never stopped answering them,” Endorsi added, her tone was gentle.

Aguero looked up, meeting Endorsi’s gaze. “He deserved answers.”

Endorsi nodded, understanding the depth of those words. Bam had deserved so much more than what life had given him, and yet, he had faced it all with a courage and kindness that was unmatched.

Elaine, sensing the somber turn the conversation was taking again, decided to lighten the mood. “Do you remember the time he tried to cook dinner for all of us?”

Endorsi burst out laughing, the memory clearly a fond one. “How could I forget? He nearly burned down the entire kitchen!”

“That’s because he didn’t know the difference between a teaspoon and a tablespoon,” Elaine added, her laughter infectious.

The room erupted in laughter as the memory of Bam’s disastrous attempt at cooking played out in their minds. Even Aguero couldn’t help but smile at the recollection.

“Poor guy,” Shibisu said, wiping a tear from his eye. “He was so determined to make something special for us.”

“And he did,” Hatz said with a grin. “Even if it was inedible.”

“Hey, don’t talk about my turtle like that! It’s the thought that counts,” Rak chimed in, a rare smile on his face.

The mood in the room had shifted entirely, the earlier heaviness replaced with a sense of lightness and shared memories. It was a reminder of the bond they all shared, the connection that went beyond their roles and missions. They were a family, in the truest sense of the word, bound not just by blood, but by the experiences they had gone through together.

As the laughter died down, Aguero looked around the room, his heart swelling with a mixture of emotions. Despite everything they had been through, they had each other. And in a world as dark and unforgiving as theirs, that was something to hold on to.

“We’ve come a long way, haven’t we?” he said quietly, his voice filled with both pride and sorrow.

Endorsi nodded, her smile bittersweet. “Yeah, we have. And we’ll keep going. For Bam, and for each other.”

The group fell silent once more, but this time, it was a comfortable silence, filled with the unspoken understanding that they were all in this together. No matter what challenges lay ahead, they would face them as they always had—side by side.

Dan, who had started the conversation with his question, looked around at his friends, feeling a sense of contentment settle over him. Despite the darkness of their world, there were moments like this—moments of light, of connection—that made it all worth it.

“Hey,” Dan said, breaking the silence once more. “We’re a pretty good team, aren’t we?”

Ran rolled his eyes, but there was a hint of a smile on his lips. “Don’t let it get to your head, Dan.”

“But yeah,” Elaine added, her tone was more serious. “We are.”

Aguero nodded in agreement, his eyes lingering on each member of the group. “We are,” he echoed softly.

Chapter Text

Hachuling moved quickly through the halls of the Khun family estate, the reports of the recently completed missions tucked securely under his arm. The polished marble floors gleamed under the flickering dim light of the chandeliers, casting a glow that reflected the grandeur and power of the family. He knew the path to the grand chamber by heart, having walked it countless times before, but today, a sense of unease gnawed at the back of his mind. Aguero's revelation about Maschenny had shaken the family to its core, and now, with this new mission report in hand, Hachuling couldn’t help but wonder what awaited him behind those towering doors.

As he approached the grand chamber, Hachuling noticed something unusual. The heavy doors, usually guarded and tightly shut, were slightly ajar. He hesitated for a moment, his hand resting on the ornate handle, before pushing it open. The chamber, usually filled with the presence of his father, was empty. The towering throne, carved from the finest obsidian and adorned with shimmering jewels, sat vacant at the center of the room. The room was eerily silent, save for the faint hum of electricity that always seemed to linger in the air, a testament to Eduan’s power.

A frown creased Hachuling’s brow as he stepped inside, his eyes scanning the room for any sign of his father. But there was nothing—no hint of where Eduan might be, no indication of what might have drawn him away from his throne. It was rare for Eduan to leave his chamber without notice, and Hachuling couldn’t shake the feeling that something was amiss.

Deciding not to linger, Hachuling turned on his heel and made his way toward the central hall. As he neared the entrance, he noticed a faint, almost imperceptible change in the air—an electric charge that made the hairs on the back of his neck stand on end. It was a sensation he had come to associate with his father’s presence, a subtle reminder of the immense power that Eduan wielded.

Hachuling quickened his pace, his footsteps echoing through the empty halls until he reached the central hall. There, standing in the center of the room, was Eduan. But this was not the father he was accustomed to seeing in the grand chamber, robed in regality and surrounded by the symbols of his power. No, this was the warrior, the leader of the Khun family in his most fearsome form.

Eduan was clad in his battle suit, a flowing robe or coat that billowed slightly around him, as if caught in a perpetual breeze. The garment was a mix of white, silver, and light blue—the signature colors of the Khun family—but it was the intricate designs that truly caught Hachuling’s attention. The robe itself appeared almost alive, the luxurious fabric catching the light in a way that made it seem both delicate and indomitable.

Underneath the robe, Eduan wore a fitted, sleeveless garment that revealed his muscular build—a stark reminder of the physical strength that lay beneath the layers of power and authority. A wide belt, adorned with metallic accents and encrusted with gems, cinched the robe at his waist, adding to the grandeur of his appearance. The belt gleamed in the dim light, each gem reflecting the wealth and influence that Eduan commanded.

For a moment, Hachuling could only stare, caught between admiration and apprehension. This was not a sight he saw often—Eduan in his battle attire, ready for something far more dangerous than the usual affairs of the family.

“Dad,” Hachuling began, stepping forward. “What’s the grand occasion?”

Eduan turned to face his son, his expression a mix of anticipation and menace. There was a sharpness in his gaze, a cold intensity that made Hachuling’s blood run cold. Eduan was not just preparing for a battle—he was anticipating something monumental, something that would leave a mark on the underworld.

“It’s work,” Eduan replied, his voice calm but laced with an undercurrent of danger. “Something that requires my personal attention.”

Hachuling frowned, a sense of foreboding settling in his gut. He had seen his father like this before, and it never boded well. If Eduan was called to do work, it meant that the stakes were incredibly high—something far beyond the usual dealings of the family.

“Work?” Hachuling echoed, his curiosity piqued but his concern growing. “What kind of work?”

Eduan’s lips curved into a predatory smile, one that sent a shiver down Hachuling’s spine. “The kind that involves swimming in a pool of blood,” Eduan said, his tone almost casual, as if he was discussing the weather.

Hachuling stiffened at the words, his heart skipping a beat. He knew what his father was capable of, had seen it with his own eyes, but the thought of what that meant, the bloodshed that was about to occur, made his stomach churn.

“Drop everything,” Eduan commanded, his voice leaving no room for argument. “You’re coming with me.”

Hachuling nodded, swallowing the lump in his throat as he pushed aside the reports he had been carrying. Whatever this was, it was clear that it was far more important than anything else on his agenda. When Eduan gave an order, it was to be followed without question.

As they made their way to the exit, Hachuling couldn’t help but wonder what had brought this on. His father was a man of power, a force to be reckoned with, but he rarely involved himself directly unless the situation demanded it. What could have possibly warranted this level of involvement?

Eduan seemed to sense his son’s thoughts, and as they stepped out into the cool night air, he spoke, his voice low and dangerous.

“Gustang contacted me earlier,” Eduan began, his tone carrying a weight that made Hachuling listen intently. “He asked if I could spare some time for a little request.”

Hachuling raised an eyebrow, knowing full well that nothing Gustang asked of his father was ever little. “And what was this request?”

Eduan’s smile widened, though it did not reach his eyes. “There’s a convention happening in the main attraction of the city. A gathering of key players in the underworld. Gustang received a tip that FUG plans to crash the party—likely to eliminate some of The Order’s subordinates.”

Hachuling felt a chill run down his spine. FUG, the special police force dedicated to stopping all underworld activities, was not to be taken lightly. If they were planning an attack, it meant that something big was about to go down.

“FUG?” Hachuling repeated, his voice tinged with disbelief. “And Gustang wants you to… what? Handle it?”

Eduan chuckled, the sound dark and ominous. “He wants me to go wild,” he said, his tone dripping with anticipation. “And from what he’s told me, a high-ranking commander of FUG will be there. It’s the perfect opportunity to remind them who truly runs the underworld.”

Hachuling’s mind raced, piecing together the implications of what his father had just said. This wasn’t just a mission—it was a statement. A declaration of power and dominance, a way for Eduan to reassert his position at the top of the food chain.

“And you’re going to do it personally,” Hachuling murmured, more to himself than to Eduan.

Eduan’s gaze shifted to his son, his expression unreadable. “Of course. This is not a task to be delegated. When it comes to matters of power and control, one must lead by example.”

Hachuling nodded, understanding the gravity of the situation. This was not just about dealing with FUG—it was about sending a message to the entire underworld. A message that no one, not even a force as formidable as FUG, could challenge the Khun family and live to tell the tale.

As they approached the edge of the estate, where a sleek black car awaited them, Hachuling felt a sense of resolve settle over him. This was not the first time he had been at his father’s side in a situation like this, and it likely wouldn’t be the last. But something about this mission felt different, more intense. The stakes were higher, the risks greater.

Eduan paused before entering the car, his eyes locking onto Hachuling’s with a seriousness that left no room for doubt. “Remember, Hachuling, in our world, strength is everything. Those who hesitate, those who show weakness—they’re the first to fall. Do not hesitate. Do not show weakness.”

Hachuling nodded firmly, his mind steeling itself for what lay ahead. “I won’t, dad.”

Eduan gave a curt nod of approval before sliding into the car, with Hachuling following suit. As the doors closed behind them, the car sped off into the night, the weight of their mission hanging heavily in the air.

The city lights blurred past them as they drove towards the main attraction, the heart of the underworld’s influence. Hachuling sat in silence, his mind racing with thoughts of what was to come. He could feel the tension in the air, the anticipation of the coming battle. It was a sensation he had grown accustomed to over the years, but tonight it felt different—sharper, more dangerous.

Eduan remained silent beside him, his gaze focused on the road ahead. Despite the calm exterior, Hachuling could sense the undercurrent of excitement in his father’s demeanor. Eduan lived for moments like these—moments where he could unleash his full power, where he could remind the world why the Khun family was feared and respected in equal measure.

The night was shrouded in a tense silence as Eduan and Hachuling arrived at the venue, their car gliding to a stop in front of the tall, imposing building. It was the centerpiece of the evening, a structure of sleek modern design, towering over the surrounding landscape with an air of both elegance and intimidation. The entrance was heavily guarded, with men in black suits patrolling the area, their hands resting on the weapons holstered at their sides. The sight was one of controlled aggression, a promise of what was to come if things went awry.

Eduan stepped out of the car first, his presence commanding immediate attention. The guards at the entrance straightened as he approached, their eyes snapping to his tall figure, dressed in his battle suit. Behind him, Hachuling followed, his demeanor more relaxed but no less alert. As they reached the door, they were met by an official, who greeted them with a respectful nod.

“Welcome, Mr. Khun,” the official said, his voice steady despite the underlying tension. “We’ve been expecting you. Please, this way.”

Eduan nodded in acknowledgment, his sharp gaze sweeping the area before he followed the official inside, with Hachuling at his side. The interior of the building was as impressive as its exterior—polished marble floors, high ceilings with ornate chandeliers, and a sense of grandeur that was almost overwhelming. It was a fitting stage for the kind of power play that was about to unfold.

As they were escorted through the halls, Eduan leaned slightly toward Hachuling, his voice low and measured. “Remember why we’re here, Hachuling. Our primary objective is to eliminate all gatecrashers, especially those from FUG. Don’t let anything else distract you.”

Hachuling nodded, his expression serious. “Understood. I’ll take care of it.”

Eduan’s gaze lingered on him for a moment, assessing, before he gave a curt nod. “Good. We’ll split up once we reach the tenth floor. Stay alert.”

They continued walking, their footsteps echoing through the spacious corridors until they reached the elevators. The official gestured for them to enter, and they stepped inside, the doors closing behind them with a soft hiss. The ride up was silent, the tension thickening with each passing second. When the doors finally opened on the tenth floor, they were met with a large convention hall filled with distinguished guests, each one exuding an air of power and influence.

Eduan and Hachuling exchanged a brief glance before parting ways. Eduan headed toward the center of the room, where the most influential figures had gathered, while Hachuling moved along the perimeter, his eyes scanning for any signs of trouble.

Minutes passed, the hum of conversation filling the room as the convention proceeded. Hachuling moved through the crowd with calculated ease, his expression carefully blank. But as he reached a hallway lined with large windows, something outside caught his attention. He stopped, his gaze narrowing as he spotted a series of dark vehicles pulling up to the building one by one. His pulse quickened slightly as he recognized the unmistakable emblem on the cars—FUG.

A small smile tugged at the corners of his mouth as he watched the scene unfold below. The tension in the air was palpable, and it didn’t take long for all hell to break loose. Explosions shattered the stillness of the night, followed by the rapid crackle of gunfire. The guards at the entrance were quickly engaged in a deadly clash with the FUG operatives, who moved with precision and ruthlessness, cutting through the defenses like a blade through silk.

Hachuling’s smile widened as he saw the chaos unfold. The sight of the carnage sent a thrill through him, breaking the monotony of the evening. He continued to watch for a moment, savoring the destruction, before turning and heading down the staircase toward the main entrance. His pace was unhurried, his hands tucked casually into the pockets of his hoodie. The hood cast a shadow over his face, but it couldn’t hide the faint smirk playing on his lips.

As he approached the ground floor, the sounds of the battle grew louder, the stench of blood and smoke filling the air. Hachuling stepped into the fray, his presence unnoticed at first amidst the chaos. But it wasn’t long before the FUG agents spotted him, their attention snapping to the lone figure moving toward them with an almost leisurely stride.

“Stop right there!” one of the agents barked, his gun trained on Hachuling. The others quickly followed suit, surrounding him with their weapons drawn. “Hands in the air! Surrender now, or we’ll shoot!”

Hachuling paused, his eyes slowly sweeping over the group. The tension was thick, the air charged with the threat of violence. For a moment, he did nothing, simply staring at the agents as if weighing his options. Then, with deliberate slowness, he reached up and pulled back his hood, revealing his face.

The reaction was immediate. The leader of the FUG squad’s eyes widened in recognition, a flicker of shock crossing his features. “You… You’re Hachuling of the Khun family…”

Hachuling’s smile turned predatory. “And here I thought tonight would be boring,” he said, his voice laced with dark amusement.

The recognition did little to deter the FUG agents. The leader gritted his teeth, trying to maintain control. “We know who you are, but that doesn’t change anything. You’re outnumbered. Last chance—surrender, or we’ll open fire.”

Hachuling’s gaze hardened, the playful glint in his eyes giving way to something far more dangerous. “You should have shot when you had the chance.”

The leader barely had time to react before Hachuling moved. His body blurred with inhuman speed, dodging the hail of bullets that followed. The agents fired wildly, but Hachuling was too fast, slipping between them with the grace of a predator stalking its prey. In one fluid motion, he drew his own weapon—a sleek, custom-made gun—and opened fire.

The first shot found its mark, dropping the nearest agent with a clean hit to the chest. Hachuling pivoted, his movements almost a dance as he took down another, then another. Each shot was precise, each kill executed with chilling efficiency. The FUG agents tried to regroup, but it was futile. Hachuling was relentless, his cold smile never faltering as he cut through their ranks.

“Is this all FUG has to offer?” Hachuling taunted, his voice carrying over the chaos. “I expected more from you.”

The leader, now desperate, called for backup, but it was too late. Hachuling closed the distance between them in a heartbeat, disarming the man with a swift kick before slamming him against the wall. The leader gasped for breath, his eyes wide with fear as Hachuling pressed the barrel of his gun against his temple.

“Tell me,” Hachuling said, his tone almost conversational, “was it worth it?”

The leader tried to speak, but no words came out. Hachuling’s finger tightened on the trigger, and with a final, dismissive look, he pulled the trigger.

The silence that followed was deafening. Hachuling straightened, glancing around at the bodies strewn across the floor. The ground was slick with blood, the stench of death hanging heavy in the air. With a sigh, Hachuling holstered his gun and adjusted his hoodie, the dark fabric once again obscuring his face. The thrill of the fight had faded, leaving only a sense of grim satisfaction.

He turned away from the carnage and began to make his way back inside, his steps slow and deliberate. The convention upstairs would be reaching its climax soon, and he needed to ensure that no more unwelcome guests made it past the entrance. As he walked, he couldn’t help but chuckle to himself, the sound low and dark.

“Dad was right,” Hachuling murmured to himself, his voice barely above a whisper. “This night might just be interesting after all.”

With that, he disappeared into the shadows, ready for whatever the night would bring next.

On Eduan’s side, he moved quietly through the dimly lit halls, his senses on high alert. The upper floors of the building were eerily silent, devoid of the usual hustle and bustle of guards. The absence of any trace of blood left Eduan intrigued; whoever had taken care of these guards was efficient—silent, swift, and precise. It was a mark of someone skilled, someone who enjoyed their work. As he continued to ascend, his excitement grew. This could only mean one thing: the rumors Gustang had mentioned were true. A high-ranking commander of FUG was here, in this very building.

Eduan’s footsteps echoed faintly as he climbed the staircase to the fifteenth floor, his hand brushing against the cold metal railing. He felt a faint presence nearby, almost imperceptible—a slight disturbance in the air, as if someone had briefly let their guard down. A rare slip, but enough for Eduan to track them. The thrill of the hunt surged within him as he followed the faint trail to a large set of double doors at the end of the hallway. His instincts told him this was it.

Standing before the doors, Eduan took a moment to calm himself, the excitement thrumming beneath his skin. His hand gripped the doorknob, and with a controlled breath, he pushed the door open. The sight that greeted him was not what he had expected, but it was a sight that quickened his pulse nonetheless.

The conference hall was spacious, with high ceilings and long windows that let in the moonlight. But what caught Eduan's attention were the bloodied bodies of the guards, piled like discarded dolls in one corner of the room. They had been dealt with swiftly, without a sound. And sitting atop that pile, with a nonchalant air, was a man dressed in a crisp black suit adorned with the emblem of FUG. His eyes were cold, detached, as if the carnage beneath him was nothing more than an unfortunate necessity.

Eduan recognized him immediately. “Luslec,” he said, his voice carrying a mixture of surprise and amusement. “I didn’t expect the Supreme Commander of FUG to show himself here. To what do I owe the honor?”

Luslec looked up from his casual inspection of his blood-splattered shoes, a small smile tugging at the corners of his lips. “Work’s work, Khun Eduan,” he replied, his tone light, almost indifferent. “Sometimes you have to get your hands dirty.”

Eduan chuckled, taking a few steps into the room. “Dirty? Seems more like you’re enjoying yourself.”

Luslec shrugged, rising from his perch atop the corpses. “Enjoyment is a luxury in our line of work. But I can’t deny that it has its perks.” He adjusted his cufflinks, as if preparing for something more formal. “I assume you didn’t come all this way just to chat.”

Eduan’s eyes narrowed slightly. “I was in the area. Thought I’d check in on things. And it seems I’ve found something interesting.”

Luslec’s gaze sharpened, and the air between them grew tense. The room, with its bloodied decorations and heavy silence, seemed to shrink around them, as if bracing for the inevitable clash.

Eduan didn’t waste time with further banter. He surged forward, his speed almost inhuman as he closed the distance between them. Luslec was fast, but Eduan was faster. The Supreme Commander barely had time to draw his gun before Eduan’s fist was in his face, sending him staggering back. Luslec fired off a shot, the bullet narrowly missing Eduan’s head as he ducked and closed in again.

Luslec regained his balance, unloading several more rounds in rapid succession. Eduan dodged each one with fluid movements, a deadly dance that left no room for error. The bullets ricocheted off the walls, embedding themselves in the wooden floor and pillars. Eduan grinned as he advanced, his fists a blur as he aimed for Luslec’s vital points. The sound of fists meeting flesh echoed in the room, each hit heavy and precise.

Luslec’s gun clicked empty, and he tossed it aside, not missing a beat as he drew a sleek, poisoned knife from his coat. The blade glistened with a dark, viscous substance, enough to paralyze a man twice Eduan’s size. But when Luslec managed to slice across Eduan’s arm, the Khun leader didn’t even flinch. The poison seemed to have no effect, only adding to Luslec’s growing frustration.

“Impressive,” Luslec admitted, wiping a trail of blood from the corner of his mouth. “But let’s see how long that immunity lasts.”

Eduan’s smirk widened. “Long enough to finish you off.”

The fight escalated, with Luslec relying on his knife, trying to land a debilitating blow. He was quick, his movements refined and calculated, but Eduan was relentless. Luslec’s attempts to strike were met with brutal counters, each one aimed to disable or destroy. The two men clashed repeatedly, the sound of metal against flesh reverberating through the empty halls.

Meanwhile, on a lower floor, Hachuling was making his way up when he felt a sudden shift in the air behind him. He moved instinctively, tilting his head just in time to avoid a dart that flew past his ear, embedding itself in the wall ahead. Hachuling’s eyes narrowed as he turned around to face the attacker.

A young man with dark complexion and stark white hair stood at the other end of the hallway, a smug grin on his face. “As expected from someone of the Khun family,” the man said, his voice laced with arrogance. “I’ve been looking forward to this.”

Hachuling studied the man for a moment before responding, “And you are?”

“Michael,” the man replied, his grin widening. “Member of the High Command Council. And the one who’s going to bring your head back to FUG headquarters.”

Hachuling pretended to be amused, a small smile playing on his lips. “Bold of you to assume you’ll live long enough to try.”

Before Michael could respond, Hachuling disappeared in a blur of motion, reappearing right in front of him. He grabbed Michael’s head with one hand, slamming it into the wall with enough force to crack the stone. Michael let out a gasp of pain, his smug expression replaced with shock and fear.

“No one’s ever said that to me and lived to tell the tale,” Hachuling said coldly, his grip tightening on Michael’s skull. “You won’t be the first.”

The two men engaged in a brutal fight, Michael relying on his speed and precision with the darts, while Hachuling countered with raw power and unrelenting aggression. Every dart Michael threw was deflected with ease, Hachuling’s reflexes too fast for the projectiles to land. The fight grew increasingly violent, with walls and furniture being destroyed in the chaos. Hachuling was like a force of nature, his strikes heavy and merciless, each one aimed to break bone or shatter flesh.

Michael struggled to keep up, his confidence waning as he realized just how outmatched he was. Hachuling’s relentless assault left him battered and bruised, blood seeping from numerous wounds. Just as Hachuling was about to deliver the finishing blow, his phone rang, the sound cutting through the violent haze.

Hachuling paused, his fist hovering inches from Michael’s face as he fished out his phone. He glanced at the screen, seeing Asensio’s name flashing on it. With a frustrated sigh, he answered the call, his eyes never leaving Michael, who was barely conscious, slumped against the wall.

“What is it, Asensio?” Hachuling asked, his voice clipped.

“Where are you?” Asensio’s voice came through the phone, calm but urgent.

“In the middle of work,” Hachuling replied, his tone laced with annoyance.

“Is dad with you?”

“Yes, he’s here.”

There was a brief pause on the other end before Asensio spoke again. “You need to get to him. Now. I just received a message from Gustang.”

Hachuling’s eyes narrowed. “Gustang? What’s going on?”

“I’ll explain later. Just get to dad. It’s important.”

Hachuling clenched his jaw, glancing down at Michael, who was barely holding on to consciousness. “Fine. But this better be worth it.”

Without another word, Hachuling hung up the phone and pocketed it, his expression darkening as he turned his attention back to Michael. “Looks like you get to live a little longer,” he muttered, his voice filled with contempt. “But don’t think this is over.”

With one final, brutal kick to Michael’s side, Hachuling turned and made his way up the stairs, leaving the battered man behind. His mind was already shifting to the next task at hand—reaching Eduan and figuring out what had prompted Gustang to send such an urgent message. Whatever it was, it couldn’t be good.

Back in the conference hall, the fight between Eduan and Luslec raged on. The room was in shambles, with furniture overturned and walls cracked from the force of their blows. Luslec was struggling, his movements growing sluggish as the fight wore on. He had managed to land a few hits on Eduan, but none were enough to slow him down. The poison in his knife had failed to have any effect, and now he was running out of options.

Eduan, on the other hand, was still as fierce and relentless as when the fight had started. He had sustained a few cuts and bruises, but they were nothing more than minor inconvenience. Just as the intensity of their fight reached its peak, the heavy wooden doors of the conference hall swung open with a resounding bang. Hachuling strode into the room with an air of calm authority that starkly contrasted the chaos unfolding before him.

“Dad,” Hachuling called out, his voice cutting through the cacophony of their clash. “Gustang told Asensio to pause the mission for tonight.”

Both Eduan and Luslec froze, their eyes snapping toward Hachuling. Eduan’s surprise was evident, a brief flash of confusion crossing his face before he masked it with his usual stoicism. Luslec, momentarily caught off guard, shifted his stance but remained silent.

Eduan’s gaze flicked to Luslec, a mixture of annoyance and resignation in his eyes. He took a breath, his formidable presence seeming to grow even more imposing as he considered the new development. “Well, work’s a work,” Eduan said, his tone betraying his reluctance to abandon the fight. 

Luslec, still caught in the aftershock of the news, stood rigid, his expression a mask of controlled irritation. The pause in their confrontation was palpable, the energy in the room shifting from explosive to a tense stillness. Luslec’s eyes narrowed as he assessed the situation, his thoughts racing behind his calm facade.

When Eduan began to turn toward the exit, Luslec’s voice cut through the silence, a taunting edge to his words. “Leaving already, Eduan? You won’t get another chance like this.”

Eduan paused mid-stride, his back still turned to Luslec. He looked over his shoulder, a smirk playing on his lips. “There’s always more coming, Luslec. Don’t think this is the last you’ll see of me.”

With that, Eduan’s figure shimmered momentarily before he and Hachuling disappeared from sight, leaving Luslec alone in the room. The Supreme Commander’s gaze followed their exit, his eyes dark with unspoken thoughts. The heavy silence that followed was interrupted only by the distant echoes of their earlier conflict.

Luslec’s mind raced as he sheathed his knife, the poisonous blade retracting into its holster. He had been prepared for a fight, but the sudden intervention and the news of a mission pause had shifted the dynamic entirely. He took a deep breath, trying to calm the storm of frustration and disappointment swirling within him.

“Damn it,” Luslec muttered under his breath, his voice laced with bitterness. “Just when things were getting interesting.”

In the shadow of the chaos engulfing the city’s main attraction, where FUG’s assault on the convention had seized the limelight, another battle unfolded quietly but with equal intensity. Maschenny’s fury simmered beneath a surface of calm professionalism. Her rage was a quiet storm, meticulously contained and controlled as she moved through the darkened corridors of one of FUG’s secret bases.

Maschenny had always been a figure shrouded in both fear and admiration within the world of assassins. Her reputation as a ruthless and precise operative was well-earned. Tonight, her purpose was clear and singular: to infiltrate the FUG base and erase any trace of sensitive information they had regarding the explosion that had rocked the train five years ago.

The base itself was a labyrinth of concrete and steel, a stark contrast to the opulent and well-guarded convention hall. Maschenny slipped through the base’s defenses with the practiced ease of someone who had spent years mastering the art of stealth. Her movements were a blur of efficiency, her every step calculated and purposeful.

Inside the base, the air was heavy with the smell of antiseptic and a faint undercurrent of sweat. The dim lighting cast long shadows across the walls, creating a maze of darkness for Maschenny to navigate. She moved like a wraith, her eyes scanning the environment with a sharpness that spoke of her focus and training. She was a master at blending into her surroundings, and her presence was almost imperceptible.

As she made her way through the base, Maschenny's mind was a tempest of thoughts. Eduan’s discovery of her previous lapse in judgment had been a blow to her pride. The near-fatal encounter had left her with a simmering anger that fueled her every action tonight. She had made a mistake, one that could have cost her life, but now she was determined to make amends and prove her worth. The information about the train explosion was her focus, and she knew it was critical.

Her goal was twofold: eliminate the FUG base and ensure that any data related to the train explosion was destroyed. Maschenny was well aware that the FUG’s access to sensitive information was a threat not just to her but to her entire world. The Order’s control over global intelligence was supposed to be absolute, but somehow, FUG had breached that security. How they had done so was a mystery she intended to unravel.

As she approached the central server room, Maschenny could feel her pulse quickening. This was where the most critical information was stored, and she had to act quickly. She paused outside the door, her ear pressed to the cold metal surface. Inside, she could hear the soft hum of computer equipment and the occasional murmur of voices. She waited, her breath steady and controlled, until the moment was right.

When the door finally opened, Maschenny slipped inside with the grace of a shadow. The room was filled with rows of servers, their blinking lights casting an eerie glow. She moved swiftly, her fingers dancing over the controls as she accessed the data. Her focus was razor-sharp, her movements a blend of precision and speed. She knew she had only a limited amount of time before security systems would detect her presence.

As Maschenny worked, her mind flashed back to the train explosion. The incident had been a significant event, one that had left its mark on their lives, especially to Aguero. The explosion was not just an accident but a carefully orchestrated act of sabotage prepared by her. She had been confident that all crucial data about the explosion were all cleaned up, that it won’t point back to her, but this failure had been a point of deep shame. Now, with Aguero poised to inherit Eduan’s position, Maschenny was determined to control the narrative and prevent any further complications.

The data she was erasing was critical. It contained details about the operation, the identities of those involved, and most importantly, evidence that could link the explosion back to her. She was meticulous in her work, ensuring that no trace of the information remained. Her actions were methodical, driven by a single-minded determination to cover her tracks.

Just as she was about to finish her task, an unexpected noise jolted her from her concentration. The faint sound of footsteps echoed through the hallway, growing louder by the second. Maschenny’s instincts kicked in, and she quickly shut down the computer, her movements fluid as she blended back into the shadows. She had anticipated this possibility, but the presence of intruders was a complication she had not accounted for.

Her breathing slowed as she listened intently. The footsteps drew nearer, and Maschenny’s mind raced. She knew she had to act quickly to avoid detection. Her anger from earlier in the night now fueled a cold, calculating resolve. She was an assassin through and through, and she would not let this opportunity slip away.

Maschenny silently moved to the side of the door, positioning herself for a quick exit if necessary. She watched as a group of FUG operatives entered the room, their chatter indicating that they were unaware of the breach. They began to assess the situation, their voices a low murmur as they discussed the missing data.

With a decisive movement, Maschenny emerged from her hiding place. Her presence was a sudden and deadly force, her training allowing her to move with a speed and efficiency that left no room for error. The operatives barely had time to react before she struck, her attacks precise and lethal. She was a whirlwind of motion, her movements a blur as she dispatched her foes with a cold efficiency.

In a matter of minutes, the room was silent again, the operatives lying motionless on the floor. Maschenny took a deep breath, her anger now channeled into a grim determination. She quickly finished her work on the servers, ensuring that no trace of the sensitive information remained. The data was gone, and with it, the threat to her carefully constructed plans.

As Maschenny prepared to leave the base, she couldn’t shake the feeling of unease. The FUG’s ability to access such sensitive information was a serious breach, and it raised questions that needed answers. How had they managed to obtain such data? What other secrets did they hold? These questions would have to be addressed later; for now, her priority was to get out of the base and avoid any further complications.

Maschenny made her way out of the base with the same stealth and precision she had used to infiltrate it. As she slipped into the night, her mind was already turning over the next steps. The situation with Aguero and the impending shift in power was a delicate one. She needed to stay ahead of the game and ensure that her position remained secure.

Chapter Text

Aguero sat in the quiet confines of his chamber, the dim light from the single lamp casting long shadows on the walls. The room was filled with the smell of old leather and ink, a comforting yet oppressive scent that matched his mood. The world outside was dark and silent, but inside his mind, the storm raged on. 

Maria had always been a constant in his life. As a child, Aguero had looked up to her, admired her strength, and sought her approval. She had been more than just someone; she had been a mentor, a confidante, someone who understood the burdens of being part of the Khun family, someone Aguero used to love. But over time, things had changed. The once-clear waters of their relationship had become muddied with secrets, betrayals, and the ever-present shadow of their elder sister, Maschenny.

Since Bam’s death, Maria’s presence had become even more prominent in Aguero’s life. She was always there, hovering at the edges, offering advice, making suggestions, and guiding him in ways that felt more like manipulation than genuine care. Aguero had noticed the subtle changes in her, the way her words carried hidden barbs, the way her actions seemed to align too perfectly with Maschenny’s schemes. And yet, he couldn’t bring himself to confront her, not directly. The bonds of family were strong, and despite everything, Aguero still cared for Maria in a way he couldn’t fully explain.

Maria had always been close to Maschenny, a fact that had never bothered Aguero in the past. But now, knowing what he did about Maschenny’s involvement in the events that led to Bam’s death, that closeness had taken on a more sinister tone. Aguero couldn’t help but wonder how much Maria knew, how much she had been a part of Maschenny’s plans. And yet, every time he tried to push those thoughts away, they came back stronger, gnawing at him, eroding the last vestiges of trust he had in her.

The door to the study creaked open, and Aguero didn’t need to look up to know who it was. Maria had a way of moving that was both silent and deliberate, a quality she had perfected over the years. She stepped into the room, closing the door behind her with a soft click, her presence immediately filling the space with a quiet tension.

“Aguero,” Maria’s voice was soft, almost too soft, as if she were trying to soothe a wild animal. “You’ve been in here for hours. You should get some rest.”

Aguero leaned back in his chair, his eyes still focused on the papers in front of him, though he wasn’t really seeing them. “I’m fine,” he replied, his tone as cold as the ice that ran through his veins. “Is there something you need?”

Maria walked further into the room, her movements graceful, almost predatory. She settled herself on the edge of his desk, her posture casual, but Aguero knew better. Maria never did anything casually. Everything she did was calculated, deliberate, just like Maschenny.

“I’m worried about you,” she said, her voice laced with concern. “You’ve been pushing yourself too hard. You need to take care of yourself, Aguero. You can’t keep carrying all this weight alone.”

Aguero finally looked up, his blue eyes meeting Maria’s with an intensity that made her shift slightly. “I’m managing,” he said, his voice flat. “What do you really want, Maria?”

Maria’s lips curled into a small, knowing smile. “I just want to help you,” she said, her tone gentle, almost coaxing. “You’ve taken on so much since… since Bam. I’m here for you, Aguero. We’re family.”

Family. The word hung in the air between them, heavy with unspoken meaning. Aguero’s jaw tightened, and he forced himself to remain calm. “Family,” he echoed, his voice dripping with irony. “Is that what we are?”

Maria’s smile faltered, just for a moment, before she quickly regained her composure. “Of course,” she said, her voice firm. “We’re Khuns. We look out for each other.”

Aguero leaned back in his chair, crossing his arms over his chest. “Is that why you’ve been spending so much time with Maschenny? Looking out for each other?”

Maria’s eyes narrowed slightly, a flicker of something dangerous passing through them. “Maschenny is your sister,” she said, her voice carefully neutral. “She’s… complicated, but she’s still family. You of all people should understand that.”

Aguero let out a bitter laugh, the sound harsh and devoid of humor. “Oh, I understand perfectly,” he said, his voice cold. “I understand that Maschenny is a master manipulator, and I understand that you’ve been playing right into her hands.”

Maria’s expression hardened, the softness in her eyes replaced by something much colder. “You’re paranoid, Aguero,” she said, her voice sharp. “Maschenny may have her own agenda, but she’s not your enemy. She’s not the one you should be worried about.”

Aguero’s eyes flashed with anger, but he quickly reined it in, forcing himself to stay calm. “Then who should I be worried about, Maria? You?”

Maria’s gaze didn’t waver, but there was a hint of something in her eyes, something that made Aguero’s blood run cold. “You should be worried about those who would see you fail,” she said, her voice low and ominous. “Those who would use your grief, your anger, against you.”

Aguero felt a chill run down his spine, but he refused to show it. “And where do you fall in that equation?” he asked, his voice dangerously quiet.

Maria held his gaze for a long moment, her eyes searching his, as if trying to decide how much to reveal. Finally, she sighed, a weary sound that seemed out of place coming from someone like her. “I’m on your side, Aguero,” she said, her voice sincere. “I always have been.”

Aguero wanted to believe her. He wanted to believe that Maria was the person he had always known, the one who had cared for him, protected him, and guided him when he needed it most. But the truth was, he didn’t know who she was anymore. The Maria he had once known was gone, replaced by someone he could barely recognize.

“You’ve changed,” he said quietly, his voice tinged with sadness. “You’re not the same person you used to be.”

Maria’s expression softened, and for a moment, Aguero thought he saw a flicker of the sister he had once known. “We’ve all changed, Aguero,” she said, her voice gentle. “You most of all.”

Aguero looked away, unable to hold her gaze any longer. She was right, of course. He had changed, and not for the better. Bam’s death had shattered something inside him, something he didn’t know how to fix. But it had also given him clarity, a clarity that he had never had before.

“I’m not your pawn, Maria,” he said finally, his voice firm. “Whatever you’re planning with Maschenny, leave me out of it.”

Maria’s eyes darkened, but she quickly masked it with a smile. “You’re not a pawn, Aguero,” she said, her voice smooth. “You’re a king. But even kings need allies.”

Aguero stood up from his chair, moving around the desk to stand in front of Maria. He towered over her, his presence intimidating, but Maria didn’t flinch. She met his gaze head-on, her expression defiant.

“I don’t need your kind of allies,” Aguero said, his voice low and menacing. “Stay out of my way, Maria. And stay away from my team.”

Maria’s smile didn’t falter, but there was a coldness in her eyes that sent a shiver down Aguero’s spine. “Very well,” she said, her voice soft. “But remember, Aguero… we’re family. And family always comes first.”

With that, she turned and walked out of the study, her footsteps echoing in the silence that followed. Aguero watched her go, his mind racing with thoughts he couldn’t quite grasp. He knew that Maria was dangerous, that she was playing a game he didn’t fully understand. But he also knew that he couldn’t let her manipulate him any longer.

As the door closed behind her, Aguero let out a breath he didn’t realize he had been holding. He ran a hand through his hair, his mind replaying the conversation over and over. Maria’s words had been carefully chosen, each one designed to plant seeds of doubt and fear in his mind. But Aguero was stronger than that. He had to be.

He walked over to the window, staring out at the rain-soaked world beyond. The darkness outside was a mirror to the darkness within him, a constant reminder of the losses he had endured, the betrayals he had faced. But it was also a reminder of the strength he had gained, the resolve that had been forged in the fires of his pain.

Aguero had learned to trust no one, not even those who claimed to have his best interests at heart. Maria was a part of his past, a part of him that he had once cherished. But that part of him was gone now, buried beneath the weight of his grief and the burden of his responsibilities.

He would not let Maria or anyone else use him for their own ends. He would not let them turn him into a pawn in their twisted game. Aguero was no one’s puppet, and he would not be controlled.

As the rain continued to fall outside, Aguero felt a sense of calm settle over him. The storm inside his mind began to subside, replaced by a cold, clear determination. He would protect what was left of his family, his real family—the one he had built with his own hands. And he would do whatever it took to keep them safe, even if it meant cutting ties with those who sought to drag him down.

Aguero was not the boy he once was. He was a man now, a leader, and he would not be swayed by the manipulations of others. He would stand tall, face his enemies head-on, and protect the ones he loved with every ounce of strength he had. Maria had made her choice, aligning herself with Maschenny and whatever dark plans they had. But Aguero had made his choice too, and he would not waver. The battle lines had been drawn, and there was no turning back now.

As the night wore on and the storm outside began to wane, Aguero felt a sense of peace he hadn’t felt in years. He knew the road ahead would be difficult, fraught with danger and uncertainty. But he was ready. He was ready to fight for what he believed in, to protect the people who mattered most to him.

And he would do it alone, if he had to.

Because that’s what Bam would have done.

Because that’s what Bam would have wanted.

The thought of Bam brought a pang of pain, but it was a pain that Aguero welcomed. It was a reminder of the love he had lost, the love that still fueled his every action, his every decision. Aguero would not let Bam’s memory be tarnished by the schemes of others. He would honor Bam in the only way he knew how—by being the man Bam had always believed him to be.

Strong.

Loyal.

Unyielding.

As the first light of dawn began to creep over the horizon, Aguero felt a renewed sense of purpose. The world was changing, the game was shifting, but Aguero was ready. He would face whatever challenges lay ahead, and he would do it with the strength and resolve that had carried him this far.

Because he’s Khun Aguero Agnis.

And he would not be broken.

Not by Maria.

Not by Maschenny.

Not by anyone.

The future was uncertain, but Aguero knew one thing for sure.

He would protect his team—his family.

And he would do it with everything he had.

Aguero walked briskly through the dimly lit hallway of the building where he was supposed to meet Asensio. His footsteps echoed off the marble floors, each step a reminder of the irritation brewing inside him. The message from Asensio had been brief and cryptic, mentioning only that there was an important matter they needed to discuss. Aguero had his suspicions, but nothing could have prepared him for what he was about to hear.

As he reached the heavy wooden door, Aguero took a deep breath before pushing it open. The room was spacious, with high ceilings and large windows that let in the muted light of the overcast day. Asensio was seated at a sleek, black desk, his posture relaxed as he glanced up at Aguero with an unreadable expression.

"You’re late," Asensio remarked, a smirk playing on his lips.

"I didn’t realize we were on a schedule," Aguero shot back, his voice tight with annoyance.

Asensio leaned back in his chair, crossing his arms over his chest. "You know, you should try to be more punctual. It sets a good example for the rest of your team."

Aguero ignored the jab and cut straight to the point. "What’s this about, Asensio? You said it was important."

"It is," Asensio replied, his tone suddenly serious. "It’s about your next mission."

Aguero frowned. "I already know about the mission. What’s the real reason you called me here?"

Asensio hesitated for a moment before he spoke again. "Maria recommended someone to join your team for this mission."

Aguero’s eyes narrowed, and he could feel his temper rising. "Maria has no say in who joins my team. My team is mine to manage, not hers."

"I know you don’t like it," Asensio said, his tone almost conciliatory. "But this isn’t just Maria’s idea. Dad approved it."

Aguero scoffed, the sound filled with disbelief and disdain. "Since when does Dad care about who’s on my team? And why would he approve something like this?"

Asensio shrugged, though there was a hint of unease in his expression. "All I know is that Maria suggested it, and Dad backed her up. The girl’s supposed to be good—skilled, resourceful. She could be an asset."

"Or she could be a liability," Aguero retorted sharply. "I don’t need anyone Maria sends my way, and I sure as hell don’t need her meddling in my team."

Asensio nodded, acknowledging Aguero’s frustration. "I get it, but what’s done is done. The girl’s waiting outside. I was told to introduce her to you."

Aguero’s hands clenched into fists at his sides, his anger barely contained. "Fine," he spat. "Let’s get this over with."

Without waiting for a response, Aguero turned on his heel and stormed out of the room. As he stepped into the corridor, his gaze immediately landed on the girl standing by the wall, her posture rigid as if she’d been waiting there for some time. She had long, blonde hair that fell just past her shoulders, and her yellow eyes met his with a hint of apprehension. The sight of her only fueled Aguero’s anger further.

"Follow me," he ordered, his voice cold and unwelcoming.

The girl hesitated for a moment before nodding and falling into step behind him. Aguero could feel the tension in the air as they walked in silence, the weight of the situation pressing down on him like a heavy cloak. He didn’t trust this girl, didn’t want her anywhere near his team, but he had no choice in the matter. For now, he would have to play along, but that didn’t mean he would make it easy for her—or for Maria.

When they finally reached the hideout, the atmosphere was markedly different. The members of TFN were gathered in the main room, engaged in various activities. Elaine and Shibisu were discussing something quietly, while Ran and Hatz were sparring in a corner. Endorsi lounged on the couch, flipping through a magazine, and Rak was inspecting a set of new weapons laid out on the table. Dan and Novick were engrossed in some kind of strategy game, their banter filling the space with a sense of normalcy.

That normalcy shattered the moment Aguero walked in with the girl. Heads turned, conversations stopped, and all eyes were suddenly on the pair.

Dan was the first to react, a wide grin spreading across his face as he practically bounded over to Aguero. "Well, well, well, what do we have here? Who’s the lucky lady, Aguero?"

Before Dan could get any closer, Aguero’s hand shot out, grabbing Dan by the head—not tightly, but enough to make it clear that he wasn’t in the mood. "It’s not the time to fuck around, Dan."

The hidden anger in Aguero’s voice was unmistakable, and it immediately put everyone on edge. The lighthearted atmosphere from moments ago evaporated, replaced by a heavy, uncomfortable tension.

Aguero released Dan, who took a step back, the grin gone from his face. He then turned to the girl, who had been standing quietly by his side, and gestured for her to introduce herself.

The girl took a deep breath before speaking, her voice soft but clear. "My name is Michelle Light. I’ve been assigned to join your team for the upcoming mission."

Her words hung in the air, met with a mixture of surprise and skepticism from the group. 

Endorsi was the first to voice what everyone else was thinking. "Assigned?" she repeated, her tone sharp. "I thought the recruitment was over. We don’t need another one."

Aguero’s expression hardened as he turned to Endorsi. "That was Maria’s doing. She recommended Michelle, and somehow Dad agreed to it."

Endorsi’s eyes narrowed, and she crossed her arms over her chest. "So, she’s here because of Maria?"

"Yes," Aguero confirmed, his voice clipped. "But don’t think for a second that I had any say in this."

The revelation only deepened the tension in the room. Shibisu stepped forward, offering a polite nod to Michelle. "Welcome to the team, Michelle. I’m Shibisu. I’ll introduce you to everyone."

Despite the outwardly friendly gesture, there was an underlying wariness in Shibisu’s eyes. The rest of the group mirrored his sentiment—wary but hiding it well.

As Shibisu went through the introductions, Endorsi kept staring daggers at Michelle, her suspicion and irritation barely concealed. Michelle, for her part, seemed to shrink under the intensity of Endorsi’s gaze, though she tried to maintain her composure.

Hockney, who had been quiet up until now, found himself unable to look away from Michelle. There was something oddly familiar about her, something that tugged at the edges of his memory. Hatz, noticing the way Hockney was staring, leaned in and whispered, "What’s up with you? You look like you’ve seen a ghost."

Hockney shook his head slightly, still staring at Michelle. "I don’t know… It’s just… I feel like I’ve seen her before, but I can’t figure out where or when."

Hatz raised an eyebrow, intrigued. "You sure you’re not just imagining things?"

"I don’t think so," Hockney replied, his voice tinged with uncertainty. "But it’s weird. I can’t place it."

Their conversation was cut off when Shibisu called Hatz over. It seemed that while Shibisu had been introducing Michelle to the group, he and Elaine had also been discussing something important.

"We’ve been talking," Shibisu began, once Hatz had joined them. "About placing Michelle’s number in TFN."

Hatz, who was responsible for tattooing the numbers on the members as a sign of their commitment to the team, nodded thoughtfully. "I can do that…"

Before he could finish his sentence, Hockney awkwardly interjected, something that was unusual for him. "Hold on," he said, his tone hesitant but firm. "It’s just one mission, right? I mean, is it really fair for her to get a number tattooed when she hasn’t gone through the same recruitment process as Dan and Novick?"

His words hung in the air, and everyone seemed to pause, considering the implications. Hockney’s point was valid, and it was clear that he wasn’t just speaking out of concern for fairness. There was something else, something deeper that was bothering him, though he couldn’t quite put his finger on it.

Elaine, who had been quietly observing the exchange, finally spoke up. "Hockney’s right. We can’t just give her a number like that. It’s not how we do things."

Aguero, who had been watching the entire interaction with a stony expression, finally let out a slow breath. He wasn’t thrilled about Michelle being here, and the idea of integrating her into the team—even temporarily—was grating on him. But Hockney’s hesitation only added to his concerns.

"She doesn’t get a number," Aguero finally said, his voice decisive. "Not until she’s proven herself. This mission will be her test. If she makes it through, we’ll talk."

Michelle, who had been standing silently through the whole discussion, nodded in understanding. She didn’t argue or protest, which Aguero noted with a hint of approval. At least she wasn’t here to make demands or expect special treatment. The tension in the room eased slightly as the group accepted Aguero’s decision, though it was clear that Michelle still had a lot to prove before she would be truly accepted. The air was still heavy with unease, but for now, the matter was settled.

Aguero gestured for everyone to return to their activities. "We’ve got work to do. Prepare for the mission. Asensio might contact us anytime. Michelle, you’ll be briefed on your role later."

The group dispersed, though the uneasy atmosphere lingered. As the members of TFN went about their preparations, Aguero couldn’t shake the feeling that things were about to get more complicated. He didn’t trust Michelle, didn’t trust Maria’s motives, and certainly didn’t trust the timing of all this. But for now, he had no choice but to move forward and see where this unexpected twist would lead them.

As the day wore on, Aguero found himself alone in his room, going over the report of their recently conducted missions and considering the implications of Michelle’s presence. He didn’t like surprises, and this one had all the markings of a potential disaster. But he was nothing if not adaptable, and he would do whatever it took to ensure that his team came out on top—no matter what obstacles were thrown their way.

A knock on the door pulled him from his thoughts, and he looked up to see Hockney standing in the doorway, a troubled expression on his face.

"Can I talk to you?" Hockney asked, his voice uncharacteristically tentative.

Aguero nodded, gesturing for him to enter. "What’s on your mind?"

Hockney hesitated for a moment before speaking. "It’s about Michelle. I can’t shake this feeling that I’ve seen her before. There’s something familiar about her, but I can’t remember what it is."

Aguero frowned, considering Hockney’s words. "Do you think she’s dangerous?"

"I don’t know," Hockney admitted. "But I can’t ignore the feeling. It’s like… like there’s a connection there, something from the past. I just can’t figure out what it is."

Aguero leaned back in his chair, his mind racing. Hockney’s intuition was rarely wrong, and if there was something off about Michelle, he needed to know what it was—and fast.

"Keep an eye on her," Aguero finally said. "If anything seems out of place, I want to know immediately."

Hockney nodded, the tension in his shoulders easing slightly. "I will."

As Hockney left the room, Aguero was left alone with his thoughts once more. The mission was already complex enough without this added layer of uncertainty, but he couldn’t afford to let his guard down. There were too many variables, too many unknowns, and too many people involved who had their own agendas.

But Aguero was nothing if not determined. No matter what, he would protect his team, his family. He would find out who Michelle really was, and why Maria—and by extension, Eduan—wanted her on this mission. And if she turned out to be a threat, he wouldn’t hesitate to deal with her accordingly.

The night outside grew darker, the shadows lengthening as the hours passed. But Aguero remained at his desk, meticulously planning for the mission ahead, determined to stay one step ahead of whatever was coming.

The following days at the hideout were filled with a new rhythm, one that included Michelle as part of the everyday activities of Twenty-Fifth Night (TFN). Temporarily integrated into the group, Michelle had been instructed to stay with them until further notice from Asensio. Her presence was a novelty in their otherwise tight-knit group, and each member had their own way of adjusting to it. 

Michelle’s routine had quickly synchronized with the rest of the team’s. She shared meals with them, trained alongside them, and even took part in their more mundane tasks around the hideout. But despite the relative ease with which she integrated, there was a distinct undercurrent of tension—one that was most palpable in Endorsi’s pointed dislike for her. 

Endorsi didn’t bother hiding her disdain. Every chance she got, she made her feelings known, directing sharp remarks at Michelle whenever they crossed paths. One afternoon, as they all gathered in the common room to unwind after a particularly grueling training session, Endorsi couldn't resist taking another jab.

"You know, Michelle," Endorsi said, her voice dripping with sarcasm, "you’re really starting to settle in here. Almost too well, if you ask me."

Michelle, seated at the far end of the room, looked up from the book she was reading. "I’m just trying to help out where I can," she replied evenly, not rising to Endorsi’s bait.

Shibisu, who was lounging nearby, couldn’t help but chuckle. "Come on, Endorsi. Maybe you’re just jealous. I mean, she’s pretty good at picking up on things, right?"

Endorsi shot him a glare. "Jealous? Please. If Bam was here, he’d definitely be pissed at Aguero for bringing that girl into our space. This isn’t about jealousy. It’s about respect."

The mention of Bam’s name seemed to catch Michelle’s attention, and she tilted her head slightly in curiosity. "Bam? Who’s Bam?" she asked, her voice tinged with genuine interest.

Elaine, who had been sitting quietly on the other side of the room, suddenly stiffened. She glanced at Endorsi, then back at Michelle. "It’s… kind of personal," she said softly, clearly uncomfortable with the direction the conversation was heading.

Michelle, sensing the awkwardness, nodded and let the topic drop, but she couldn’t shake the feeling that there was something important about Bam that she wasn’t being told.

As days passed, Michelle continued to make an effort to fit in with the group. She joined them in their training sessions, even sparring with some of the members to improve her combat skills. She participated in the group’s activities, whether it was helping Shibisu with strategy planning, assisting Hockney with some technical repairs, or even joining Hatz for early morning runs. It was during these moments of camaraderie that Michelle began to earn the tentative trust of some members, though the wariness in their eyes never completely faded.

Endorsi, however, remained distant. She often found herself watching Michelle from afar, scrutinizing her every move. There was something about Michelle that rubbed her the wrong way, but she couldn’t quite put her finger on it. At times, it felt like Michelle was genuinely trying to be a part of the team, but at other times, Endorsi couldn’t shake the feeling that something was off. And yet, as days went by, an unexpected emotion began to creep in—guilt.

Endorsi hated to admit it, even to herself, but as she watched Michelle push herself in training, trying her best to keep up with the rest of them, she couldn’t help but feel a twinge of empathy. Maybe she had been too harsh, too quick to judge. Maybe, just maybe, Michelle really was a good teammate, someone who was just trying to prove her worth. But these thoughts were fleeting, quickly buried under layers of mistrust and resentment.

One morning, Endorsi woke up to the familiar sounds of the hideout coming to life. The early risers were already going about their routines—Hatz was outside, practicing his swordsmanship; Shibisu was in the kitchen, probably fixing himself breakfast; and Hockney was tinkering with some equipment in the workshop. The others were just inside the common room. But something felt off. As Endorsi stretched and made her way to the common room, she realized that Michelle was nowhere to be seen.

"Where’s Michelle?" Endorsi muttered to herself, but quickly brushed it off. "Not my problem."

She continued with her morning routine, but a strange feeling of unease lingered at the back of her mind. It wasn’t until much later, when Michelle finally returned to the common room, that Endorsi’s suspicions were confirmed.

A short while later, however, Michelle burst into the common room, her face alight with excitement. In her hands, she was holding a bow—one that was all too familiar to Endorsi. "Look what I found!" Michelle exclaimed, holding the bow up for everyone to see. "I’ve been practicing archery this morning. I didn’t realize how fun it could be!"

Elaine froze for a moment when the figure of the bow came to light. “Wait… isn’t that…” 

Endorsi’s eyes locked onto the bow, her heart skipping a beat. That bow—it was unmistakable. She had seen it before, in Bam’s room. The realization hit her like a punch to the gut, and before she knew it, she was moving on pure instinct. 

In a blur, Endorsi grabbed a knife from the table and was across the room in an instant. Her hand was steady as she pressed the blade to Michelle’s throat, her eyes blazing with fury.

The room erupted into chaos as Shibisu and Hatz sprang into action, forcing Endorsi to release her grip. The knife clattered to the floor, the sound sharp and jarring in the tense silence that followed. Michelle stood frozen, her eyes wide with shock as she touched her throat, feeling where the knife had almost cut through.

"What the hell, Endorsi!" Shibisu shouted, his voice a mixture of anger and disbelief. He grabbed her arm, pulling her back. "Are you out of your mind?"

Hatz, standing between Endorsi and Michelle, shot a glare at Endorsi. "You could’ve killed her!"

Aguero, who had been observing from the doorway, finally stepped forward, his expression unreadable. "Endorsi, what’s going on?"

Endorsi’s chest heaved as she tried to control her breathing, her mind racing with a mix of anger and confusion. She pointed at Michelle, her voice trembling with rage. "She was using Bam’s bow. How did she even get it? None of us have ever gone inside Bam’s room out of respect, but she—she must have gone in there without permission!"

Her words hung heavy in the air, and for a moment, no one spoke. The shock was palpable as the realization of what Michelle had done sank in. Aguero’s eyes narrowed, his gaze shifting from Endorsi to Michelle, who was still standing there, bow in hand.

"Is this true?" Aguero’s voice was calm, but there was an edge to it, a dangerous undercurrent that made everyone in the room tense.

Michelle, still shaken, nodded slowly. "Yes, I—I was cleaning that room and I found the bow. I didn’t mean any harm, I just… I wanted to practice. I didn’t know it was off-limits."

Aguero stepped forward and took the bow from her hands, examining it closely. His expression darkened, and when he finally looked up, his eyes were cold. "That’s two strikes, Michelle. First strike, you went inside Bam’s room. Second strike, you used his bow. Third strike, and I’ll kill you myself. Understood?"

Michelle’s breath caught in her throat as she met Aguero’s gaze. There was no doubt in her mind that he meant every word. "Understood," she whispered, her voice barely audible.

Aguero handed the bow to Hatz, who took it with a grim nod. "Take this back to Bam’s room. Make sure everything is as it was."

Hatz nodded again and left the room, the bow clutched tightly in his hands. The tension in the room was suffocating, the weight of what had just happened pressing down on everyone.

Endorsi, still seething, couldn’t look at Michelle. "You should’ve known better," she muttered, her voice low and bitter. "Bam’s room isn’t just some storage closet you can rummage through."

Michelle looked down, shame and regret etched across her face. "I’m sorry," she said quietly. "I really didn’t mean to disrespect anyone."

Aguero’s expression softened slightly, but his tone remained firm. "This isn’t just about disrespect, Michelle. This is about trust. You’re new here, and trust has to be earned. You’ve already made two major mistakes. I suggest you tread very carefully from now on."

Michelle nodded, tears welling up in her eyes. "I understand. I’ll do better."

The room fell into an uneasy silence, the gravity of the situation still hanging over them. Aguero turned to the rest of the group, his voice carrying a finality that left no room for argument. "Everyone, back to your routines. We’ll discuss the mission details tomorrow night. For now, let’s put this behind us and focus on what’s ahead."

Slowly, the group began to disperse, the usual banter and light-heartedness noticeably absent. Endorsi lingered for a moment, her eyes locked on Michelle, before finally turning away and heading out of the room. She couldn’t shake the feeling of anger and betrayal that had taken hold of her, but beneath it all, there was a whisper of doubt, a small voice that questioned whether she had overreacted.

Chapter Text

The night was thick with silence, the kind that seeped into the bones and made sleep elusive. Endorsi lay in her bed, staring at the ceiling, her thoughts a tangled mess that refused to settle. The moonlight filtering through the curtains cast faint shadows across the room, but they did little to soothe her restless mind. She had tried to sleep, but the weight of the day’s events clung to her, gnawing at the edges of her thoughts. Finally, with a resigned sigh, she threw off the covers and slipped out of bed.

The common room was dark and quiet, a stark contrast to the lively energy it usually held during the day. Endorsi found comfort in the solitude as she slouched onto the couch, pulling her knees up to her chest and hugging them tightly. She was lost in thought, her mind replaying the morning’s confrontation with Michelle. The memory of her rage, the way she had almost snapped—almost killed Michelle—lingered, unsettling her.

Endorsi’s breath hitched as she replayed the scene. Bam’s bow. Michelle had dared to touch Bam’s bow without permission, an act that had ignited something fierce and protective within her. The bow was more than just a weapon; it was a symbol of Bam’s presence, a tangible connection to someone they all missed desperately. And yet, the depth of her reaction had left her wondering if she had gone too far.

She was so deep in thought that she didn’t notice Elaine until she heard the soft creak of the floorboards. Elaine approached quietly, her footsteps light as she came to sit on the floor near Endorsi. The silence stretched between them for a moment before Elaine finally spoke, her voice gentle.

“What are you doing here, Endorsi?”

Endorsi glanced down at Elaine, her expression unreadable. “Can't sleep,” she muttered, her voice low. She shifted her gaze back to the darkened room, unable to shake the lingering tension in her chest.

Elaine studied her for a moment, her eyes soft with understanding. “Still thinking about this morning?”

Endorsi’s silence was all the confirmation Elaine needed. She didn’t press further, simply waiting for Endorsi to speak. After a long pause, Endorsi let out a heavy sigh, her shoulders slumping slightly.

“Do you think I overreacted?” Endorsi finally asked, her voice barely above a whisper.

Elaine’s lips curved into a small smile, her eyes warm as she shook her head. “To others, maybe it seemed that way,” she began, choosing her words carefully. “But I think it’s understandable, Endorsi. Your reaction shows how much you value and respect Bam. You wouldn’t let anyone touch his things without permission, and that’s not overreacting—it’s just you being protective.”

Endorsi’s gaze softened at Elaine’s words, though the tension still lingered. “I almost killed her,” she said, the weight of the admission heavy in the air.

Elaine chuckled softly, a sound that eased some of the tension in the room. “To be honest, I was close to doing something similar,” she confessed, her eyes gleaming with a hint of mischief. “When I saw Michelle holding Bam’s bow, I nearly threw the fork I was holding at her.”

Endorsi blinked, surprised by Elaine’s admission, and then a small, amused smile tugged at her lips. “You, too, huh?”

Elaine nodded, her smile widening. “It’s not just you, Endorsi. We all care about Bam, and seeing someone else with his things, especially without permission—it’s hard not to react.”

The tension in Endorsi’s chest began to ease as she listened to Elaine. There was comfort in knowing she wasn’t alone in her feelings, that someone else understood the intensity of the emotions she was grappling with. For a moment, the silence returned, but it was no longer heavy or uncomfortable. It was simply shared, a quiet understanding between them.

After a while, Endorsi shifted, sliding down from the couch to sit beside Elaine on the floor. She hugged her knees to her chest again, resting her chin on top of them. “I miss him,” she said quietly, her voice tinged with a vulnerability she rarely showed.

Elaine’s expression softened even further. “I miss him, too,” she admitted, her voice equally soft. “There’s not a day that goes by that I don’t think about him.”

Endorsi’s eyes grew distant, her thoughts drifting to memories of Bam. “It’s been so long,” she murmured, her voice barely audible. “Sometimes, I… I’ve forgotten what his voice sounds like.”

Elaine felt a pang in her chest at Endorsi’s words. She understood the ache of time, the way it blurred the edges of memory until even the most cherished details began to fade. It was a pain they all carried, but it was one they rarely spoke of. Hearing it voiced now, so plainly and with such honesty, brought the reality of their loss into sharp focus.

“Me, too,” Elaine whispered, her voice tinged with sadness. “But I try to hold on to the memories. The way he’d smile, how he’d always find something kind to say, no matter what.”

Endorsi nodded, her gaze fixed on some distant point as she clung to the memories she had left. “He was always so warm,” she said, a hint of wistfulness in her voice. “He made everything feel… brighter.”

They fell silent again, both lost in their own thoughts, their memories of Bam intertwined with the pain of his absence. The night stretched on, but neither of them made any move to leave. There was comfort in the shared silence, a quiet solidarity that neither of them had to put into words.

As the minutes turned into hours, fatigue began to creep in. Endorsi and Elaine’s conversation slowed, their words fewer and further between until they finally drifted off, leaning against each other for support. The common room, which had started as a place of restless thoughts and unanswered questions, became a haven of quiet understanding and unspoken grief.

The first light of dawn was just beginning to peek over the horizon when Aguero woke up. He had always been an early riser, his mind too sharp to linger in sleep for long. As he moved through the halls, the house still blanketed in the hush of early morning, he noticed the faint sounds of breathing coming from the common room.

Curious, Aguero stepped inside, only to be met with the sight of Elaine and Endorsi fast asleep on the floor, their heads resting on the couch pillows they had pulled down. They looked peaceful, their expressions soft and unguarded in sleep, a stark contrast to the weight they both carried during their waking hours.

Aguero’s eyes softened at the sight. He knew how much Bam’s absence weighed on all of them, though they rarely spoke about it openly. Seeing Endorsi and Elaine like this, seeking comfort in each other’s company, made him realize just how deeply that wound ran. Without a word, Aguero turned and quietly retrieved a couple of blankets from the nearby closet. He approached them with careful steps, not wanting to disturb their sleep. With gentle hands, he draped the blankets over their resting forms, tucking the edges in to ensure they stayed warm.

As he stood there, watching over them for a moment longer, Aguero couldn’t help but feel a pang of sadness. They were all doing their best to hold on, to keep moving forward, but the cracks were there, just beneath the surface. Bam’s absence was a void they couldn’t fill, no matter how hard they tried. Finally, Aguero turned away and left the room as quietly as he had come. The morning was still young, the day yet to begin, but in that quiet moment, as he moved through the silent halls, he couldn’t help but feel the weight of the past pressing down on them all.

The common room remained a refuge for Elaine and Endorsi as they slept, their dreams filled with memories of brighter days. And when the sun finally rose, its light filtering through the windows, it found them still curled up together, wrapped in the warmth of the blankets Aguero had so thoughtfully provided.

Elaine stirred awake as the first rays of morning light filtered through the small window in the common room. She blinked a few times, trying to shake off the remnants of sleep, when she noticed something that made her pause. There was a soft, warm blanket draped over her, its edges neatly tucked in around her body. For a moment, she was confused. She didn’t remember covering herself with a blanket the night before. 

Beside her, Endorsi yawned and stretched, only to freeze mid-stretch when she noticed the same thing—a blanket carefully placed over her. The confusion on her face mirrored Elaine’s. They exchanged puzzled looks before a voice interrupted their silent questioning.

"Good morning, sleepyheads!" Shibisu’s voice rang out as he and Hatz walked into the room, looking much more awake and refreshed than they had any right to be at this hour.

Elaine and Endorsi both sat up, the blankets sliding off them as they did. "Uh, good morning," Elaine replied, still trying to piece together what had happened.

Endorsi, always quick to get to the point, narrowed her eyes at the two boys. "Did you give us this?" she asked, gesturing to the blankets.

Shibisu laughed, shaking his head. "Us? No way. We were out cold last night. It was A.A who covered you both up. I saw him when I woke up early this morning."

Hatz nodded in confirmation. "Yeah, he came in really early. Guess he didn’t want you two freezing to death on the floor."

For a moment, neither Elaine nor Endorsi knew what to say. The idea of Aguero quietly looking after them like that wasn’t exactly out of character for him, but it wasn’t something they had expected either. A warm feeling spread through Elaine, and she couldn’t help but smile.

Endorsi, on the other hand, just rolled her eyes, though there was a small smile tugging at the corners of her lips. "He really thinks he’s everyone’s dad, doesn’t he?"

Elaine chuckled, and the two girls shared a brief moment of understanding. Maybe things weren’t as bad as they sometimes seemed. With that, they both got up to start their morning routine, folding the blankets and setting them aside.

As they moved through the hideout, getting ready for the day, the comforting scent of breakfast wafted through the air. Following their noses, they found themselves in the kitchen where Novick, Rak, and Hockney were busily preparing a hearty meal.

"Morning, ladies," Novick greeted them without looking up from the stove, where he was flipping what looked like pancakes. Rak was at the counter, his large hands surprisingly deft as he chopped vegetables, while Hockney carefully brewed coffee.

"Morning," Elaine replied, feeling more at ease now that she was surrounded by the familiar buzz of the kitchen.

Endorsi leaned against the counter, watching them work. "Smells good. What’s the occasion?"

Rak grunted, not looking up from his task. "We were hungry. Figured we’d make enough for everyone."

Hockney glanced up, offering a small smile. "And it’s nice to start the day with something warm after the last few... incidents."

Elaine nodded in agreement, appreciating the effort. The tension from the previous days was still there, lurking beneath the surface, but for now, it seemed everyone was trying to move past it. The familiar routines helped; they grounded them, made everything feel almost normal again.

A few minutes later, Michelle joined them in the kitchen. She looked slightly hesitant, her eyes darting around as if unsure of her welcome, but when no one said anything, she relaxed a little. It was as if the events of the previous day had been quietly brushed aside, at least for now.

As they all gathered around the table, the atmosphere was surprisingly light. Conversations flowed easily, and there was even laughter as they shared the meal. The conflict and tension from the day before seemed to have been temporarily forgotten, replaced by the comfort of routine and the warmth of shared food.

Elaine couldn’t help but notice the way Michelle kept sneaking glances at Aguero’s empty seat. Finally, she leaned over to Dan, who was sitting next to her. "Where’s Aguero? And Ran?" she asked quietly.

Dan swallowed a mouthful of food before answering. "They went to talk to Asensio early this morning. Something about mission details."

Elaine nodded, though a part of her felt a bit uneasy. She wasn’t entirely sure what Aguero and Asensio were planning, but she trusted Aguero to handle it. He always did.

The meal continued, filled with light banter and easy conversation. For the first time in days, there was a sense of normalcy in the hideout, a brief reprieve from the underlying tensions that had been simmering since Michelle’s arrival.

After breakfast, the day stretched out before them, empty and uneventful. With no immediate mission on the horizon, they all found themselves with an unusual amount of free time. By midday, the boredom had started to set in, and it was Dan who finally broke the monotony.

"Alright, this is getting ridiculous," Dan declared, pushing away the book he had been pretending to read. "We’re all bored out of our minds. Let’s do something fun."

Shibisu perked up at the suggestion, ever the one to jump at an opportunity for some entertainment. "Like what? You got something in mind?"

Dan grinned, his eyes gleaming with mischief. "How about a little game? Something to get the blood pumping. But here’s the twist—no one’s allowed to stand up. We have to use any techniques to hit a target in the middle."

Hatz raised an eyebrow, intrigued. "A target? Sitting down? That’s not exactly easy."

"That’s the point!" Dan shot back, already excited by the idea. "Come on, we’ve been training so much. Let’s see how good we really are."

Elaine exchanged a glance with Endorsi, who shrugged. "Why not? It’s not like we have anything better to do."

Novick and Rak seemed to agree, and soon everyone was on board with the idea. They all gathered in the common room, arranging themselves in a loose circle on the floor. In the center, they placed an empty can—the makeshift target for their game.

Dan took the first shot, his hand flicking out almost lazily as he sent a small, precise blade sailing through the air. It clinked against the can, making it wobble but not fall over. "Not bad," Shibisu commented, giving a mock golf clap. "But let’s see if you can do better than that."

The challenge was on. One by one, they all took their turns, using whatever they had at their disposal—throwing knives, small projectiles, even improvised weapons they found lying around. The rules were simple: no standing up, and no repeating the same move twice. It forced them to get creative, and before long, the room was filled with laughter and playful banter.

"Come on, Endorsi, you call that a shot?" Shibisu teased as Endorsi’s dagger just barely grazed the can.

"Shut up, Shibisu. I’m warming up," Endorsi shot back, a grin tugging at her lips despite herself.

Rak, the competitive one, was determined to outdo everyone else. He managed to knock the can over completely with a well-aimed throw of a large, blunt object he had pulled from somewhere, earning a chorus of groans and good-natured complaints from the others.

"Cheater!" Novick accused, though his tone was more amused than serious. "That thing’s practically a rock!"

Rak just smirked, clearly pleased with himself. "Not my fault you can’t handle the competition."

Elaine was up next, and she took a different approach, using her keen sense of precision to aim for the base of the can. Her knife struck true, sending the can spinning in place before it toppled over.

"Nice one!" Dan exclaimed, genuinely impressed.

The game continued, with everyone getting more and more into it. The competitive streak that ran through each of them was on full display, and it wasn’t long before the lighthearted banter turned into full-on taunting and challenges.

By the time they were done, the common room was littered with small weapons, and the can had been dented and battered from all sides. Everyone was breathless from laughter, the tension that had lingered from the previous days finally dissipating in the wake of their impromptu game.

As they all lounged around the room, catching their breath, Elaine couldn’t help but feel a sense of camaraderie. Despite everything, they were still a team. A dysfunctional, sometimes chaotic team, but a team nonetheless. Even Michelle, who had been the source of so much tension, seemed to have found a place among them, at least for the moment.

Endorsi, lying back with her arms behind her head, glanced over at Michelle, who was sitting quietly to the side. For once, there was no animosity in her gaze—just a thoughtful curiosity. Maybe, just maybe, things were starting to change.

Michelle, catching Endorsi’s gaze, offered a small, tentative smile. It wasn’t much, but it was a start. 

"Not bad," Endorsi said, her tone casual but not unkind. "You’re not as useless as I thought."

Michelle blinked in surprise, then laughed softly. "Thanks… I think?"

The others chuckled at the exchange, and just like that, the last remnants of tension seemed to melt away. They were all tired, a little bruised, and still dealing with the shadows of their pasts, but for now, at this moment, they were okay. And that was enough.

The rest of the afternoon passed in a relaxed haze. They didn’t have any pressing matters to attend to, so they simply enjoyed the rare opportunity to unwind. Conversations flowed easily, the usual barriers between them temporarily lowered by the day’s events.

The evening sky was tinged with the fading hues of twilight as Aguero and Ran walked into the hideout, bringing with them the unmistakable presence of Asensio and Hachuling. The atmosphere inside the hideout shifted immediately. It wasn’t unusual for the Khun brothers to show up together for mission briefings, but tonight felt different. The seriousness in their faces was enough to clue everyone in—the mission they were about to discuss was no ordinary task.

Elaine, who had been sitting near the window, noticed the shift first. She glanced at Endorsi, who was leaning against the wall, her arms crossed as she observed the group. “They look like they’ve seen a ghost,” Elaine murmured under her breath.

Endorsi nodded slightly, her eyes narrowing as she took in the expressions of the Khun brothers. “Whatever it is, it’s big,” she replied, her voice low.

Shibisu, who had been lounging on one of the couches, straightened up as Aguero and the others entered. “Guess the fun’s over,” he remarked with a sigh, though there was a hint of anticipation in his tone.

Hatz, sitting next to Shibisu, remained silent, his gaze focused on the Khuns. He could sense the tension in the air, and it was making him uneasy. Novick, who had been in the middle of a conversation with Rak, fell silent as well, his usual smirk fading as he noticed the grim expressions of Asensio and Hachuling.

Aguero wasted no time. “Everyone, to the conference hall. Now,” he ordered, his tone leaving no room for argument. 

The TFN members exchanged quick glances before moving toward the conference hall. There was no need for questions—whatever was about to be discussed was clearly too important to delay.

The conference hall was dimly lit, the only sources of light coming from the projector screen at the front of the room and the faint glow of the computer monitors lining the walls. The group quickly took their seats, the silence thick with anticipation. Asensio and Hachuling stood at the front, their expressions unreadable.

Once everyone was settled, Asensio stepped forward, his gaze sweeping across the room. “We’ve received new intel on our next mission,” he began, his voice calm but firm. “This isn’t just any mission. We’re going up against FUG.”

The room tensed at the mention of FUG. Everyone in the underworld knew about them—the special police force dedicated to eliminating all criminal organizations, including The Order. They were ruthless, efficient, and always one step ahead. For Asensio to bring up FUG meant that this mission was far more dangerous than anything they’d faced before.

Asensio continued, his tone steady. “FUG is not just a threat to The Order; they’re a threat to every major player in the underworld. They’re planning a major crackdown, and we’ve been tasked with stopping them. Our mission is to infiltrate their central headquarters, compromise their key operations, and eliminate their high-ranking officers.”

Hachuling stepped forward, nodding to Asensio before addressing the group. “Eduan, our father, recently received a tip from Gustang, the head of the Po Bidau family. Gustang informed him that a high-ranking commander from FUG would be attending a convention in the city. Dad and I went to investigate, and we found out that the tip was accurate.”

Asensio activated the projector, displaying a series of images on the screen. “This is Grace Mirchea Luslec,” he said, pointing to the image of a man with sharp features and a cold, calculating expression. “He’s the Supreme Commander of FUG. Dad faced him at the convention.”

Shibisu, unable to contain his curiosity, leaned forward. “What happened? Did Eduan take him out?”

Hachuling shook his head. “The fight was interrupted. Gustang intervened before it could reach its conclusion.”

Novick frowned. “If Luslec was there, why didn’t Eduan just finish him off? Wouldn’t that have solved a lot of problems?”

Asensio answered this time, his tone measured. “We’re assassins, not mercenaries. We don’t kill without a purpose, and we certainly don’t go against our clients’ wishes. Gustang is our client in this case, and he wanted Luslec alive—for now. We follow the client’s orders, even if that means letting an enemy live.”

There was a brief silence as the group processed this information. The idea of letting such a dangerous enemy live didn’t sit well with most of them, but they understood the importance of following the rules. In the underworld, disobeying a client could be more dangerous than facing any enemy.

Asensio moved on, displaying another image on the screen. This time, it was a younger man, his face marked by a distinctive scar. “This is Michael, a member of FUG’s High Command Council. Hachuling encountered him at the convention as well.”

Hachuling’s expression remained unreadable as he recalled the encounter. “He’s strong—maybe boastful as well. If you face him, don’t underestimate him. He may not be just as skilled in combat, but he’s strategic.”

Elaine leaned back in her chair, her mind already working through the implications of this new information. “So we’re up against the top brass of FUG. This isn’t going to be easy.”

Asensio nodded in agreement. “No, it won’t be. But that’s why we’ve been chosen for this mission. We’re the best at what we do, and we’ve been trained for situations like this.”

While Asensio continued outlining the mission details, Hockney found himself distracted. He couldn’t stop staring at Michelle, who was sitting across from him, her eyes focused on the screen. The light from the projector flickered across her face, casting shadows that played with his memory. There was something about her that was nagging at him, something he couldn’t quite place.

Then it hit him—he had seen her before. Not in person, but in the data files he had once hacked from FUG. His eyes widened in realization as the memory came rushing back. Years ago, when he had been working for a client who wanted to breach FUG’s sensitive information, he had come across her data. But the name wasn’t Michelle.

Hockney’s heart raced as he pieced it together. Michelle wasn’t who she claimed to be. But who was she, really? And what was she doing here?  

He glanced at Aguero, who was still focused on Asensio’s briefing. Hockney wanted to shout, to warn him, but he knew he had to be careful. This was too important to mess up. He needed to speak to Aguero alone, away from prying eyes and ears.

Finally, after what felt like an eternity, the meeting adjourned. As the others began to file out of the conference hall, Hockney quickly made his way to Aguero.

“Aguero, wait,” he called out, his voice low but urgent.

Aguero turned, his sharp blue eyes narrowing slightly as he noticed the seriousness in Hockney’s expression. “What is it?”

Hockney glanced around to make sure no one was listening before he spoke. “It’s about Michelle. There’s something you need to know.”

Aguero’s expression hardened. “What about her?”

Hockney took a deep breath, gathering his thoughts. “I now recognized her tonight. I’ve seen her before—in FUG’s data files.”

Aguero’s eyes widened slightly, but he remained silent, waiting for Hockney to continue.

“Years ago, I was hired to breach FUG’s information. I came across a file with her face on it, but her name wasn’t Michelle. I don’t remember the exact details, but I’m sure it was her. She’s not who she says she is, Aguero. We’ve been infiltrated.”

Aguero’s jaw clenched, his mind racing as he processed the information. “Are you sure?”

Hockney nodded. “Positive. I wouldn’t bring this up if I wasn’t. We need to be careful.”

Aguero cursed under his breath, anger boiling just beneath the surface. They had been played, and worse, they hadn’t even seen it coming. He wanted to confront Michelle immediately, but he knew that doing so could jeopardize the entire mission.

“We can’t let this information get out,” Aguero said, his voice low and deadly serious. “If the others find out, it could ruin everything. We’ll keep this between us for now. But keep an eye on her. If she makes one wrong move, we’ll deal with her.”

Hockney nodded, his expression grim. “Understood.”

As Aguero turned to leave, Hockney called after him one last time. “Aguero, be careful. She’s dangerous.”

Aguero paused, glancing back at Hockney. “I know. But so are we.”

With that, Aguero walked away, his mind already working through the next steps. He had to protect his team, his mission, and above all, he had to figure out who Michelle really was before it was too late. The stakes were higher than ever, and failure was not an option.

The night had fallen like a thick, suffocating blanket over the Obsidian Wilderness, a vast and foreboding stretch of forest known for its eerie silence and towering black trees. The dense canopy blocked out all but the faintest traces of moonlight, casting the forest in perpetual twilight. It was a place of legends, where those who entered often never returned. The TFN knew that beneath this seemingly endless stretch of trees lay their target: one of FUG’s secret bases, buried deep within the earth, hidden from the world. The base was a labyrinth of tunnels and chambers, nearly impenetrable and impossible to find unless you knew exactly where to look.

As the team moved through the forest, the silence was almost deafening, broken only by the occasional rustle of leaves or the distant cry of some unseen creature. Every step they took was careful, measured, as if the very ground could betray them. The forest was a natural barrier, both physical and psychological, designed to keep intruders at bay. But TFN was not easily deterred.

Aguero led the group, his sharp blue eyes scanning their surroundings for any signs of movement. The air was heavy with tension, but he remained focused, his mind already working through the complex strategies that would be necessary to complete the mission. He was flanked by Dan and Hockney, both of whom were equally alert. Each member of the team had their role to play, and failure was not an option.

“We’re getting close,” Aguero whispered, his voice barely audible. He glanced back at the group, meeting each of their eyes in turn. “Remember, stick to the plan. No improvisations. We don’t have the luxury of mistakes tonight.”

Dan nodded, his usually laid-back demeanor replaced by a steely determination. “Got it, boss,” he replied, his voice equally quiet. “I’ll take care of the security systems. They won’t even know we’re here.”

Hockney, who was tasked with disabling FUG’s surveillance systems, adjusted his goggles, his eyes reflecting the faint glow of the screens embedded within them. “I’ll get us in and out without a trace,” he said, his voice filled with quiet confidence.

Aguero gave a brief nod before turning his attention back to the forest ahead. They had reached the point where the concealed entrance to the FUG base was supposed to be. According to the intel they had gathered, the entrance was hidden beneath a thick layer of undergrowth, protected by advanced camouflage technology. Finding it would be the first challenge.

“Dan, you’re up,” Aguero said, motioning for the younger man to take the lead.

Dan stepped forward, crouching down to examine the ground. His fingers brushed against the moss-covered earth, searching for any signs of disturbance. After a few moments, he found what he was looking for: a faint outline, almost invisible to the naked eye, where the entrance was hidden.

“Here it is,” Dan murmured, pressing his hand against the outline. A soft hum filled the air as the camouflage deactivated, revealing a small, metal hatch embedded in the ground. “Let’s get inside.”

The hatch opened with a quiet hiss, and one by one, the team descended into the darkness below. The air grew cooler as they moved deeper underground, the walls of the tunnel closing in around them. The labyrinthine structure of the base was designed to disorient intruders, but Aguero had memorized the layout, every twist and turn, every hidden chamber.

As they moved through the narrow corridors, the team split into their designated groups, each with a specific objective. Aguero, Dan, and Hockney would head to the intelligence department, while Endorsi, Elaine, Shibisu, and Michelle focused on sabotaging the communications network. Rak, Ran, Novick, and Hatz had the most dangerous task of all: assassinating the key FUG officers who posed the greatest threat to the Khun family.

Aguero led his group down a series of twisting passages, his mind racing through the details of the mission. The intelligence department was heavily guarded, and any misstep could alert the entire base to their presence. They needed to extract critical data and plant false information, all while disabling the surveillance systems that monitored the base.

“We’re almost there,” Aguero whispered as they approached a large, reinforced door. “Dan, you’re up again.”

Dan nodded and stepped forward, pulling out a small device from his pack. He attached it to the door’s control panel and began working on bypassing the security protocols. The process took only a few moments, but each second felt like an eternity. Finally, the door slid open with a quiet click.

The room beyond was filled with rows of servers and data terminals, the heart of FUG’s intelligence operations. The soft hum of machinery filled the air, and the screens cast an eerie glow over the otherwise dark space.

“Hockney, disable the surveillance systems,” Aguero ordered, his voice calm and steady. “Dan, start extracting the data. I’ll cover you.”

Hockney immediately set to work, his fingers flying over the keyboard as he hacked into the base’s security systems. Within moments, the surveillance cameras went dark, their feeds replaced with looping footage that would keep the guards unaware of their presence.

“Surveillance is down,” Hockney reported, not taking his eyes off the screen. “We’re clear for now, but we need to move fast.”

Dan was already at one of the data terminals, his hands moving with practiced ease as he extracted the information they needed. “I’m in,” he said, his voice tinged with excitement. “Just a few more seconds, and we’ll have everything.”

Aguero stood by the door, his gaze focused on the hallway beyond. He could hear the distant sounds of footsteps, the muffled voices of guards patrolling the corridors. They were cutting it close, but that was nothing new.

“Got it,” Dan said, his voice triumphant. He pulled a small drive from the terminal and slipped it into his pocket. “Data extracted. Now to plant the false information.”

Aguero nodded, his expression unreadable. “Make it quick,” he said, his voice low. “We don’t have much time.”

Dan quickly uploaded the false data, overwriting the original files with the fabricated information. It was a delicate process, one that required precision and speed. Any mistake could expose their deception, but Dan was a master at his craft.

“Done,” Dan said, stepping back from the terminal. “We’re good to go.”

Aguero allowed himself a brief moment of relief before turning to Hockney. “Let’s move. We need to regroup with the others.”

Meanwhile, in another part of the base, Endorsi, Elaine, Shibisu, and Michelle were making their way to the communications center. Their mission was just as critical as Aguero’s—if not more so. Without communications, FUG would be unable to call for reinforcements, effectively isolating the headquarters.

Endorsi led the way, her movements fluid and confident. She was in her element, the thrill of combat giving her a sharp focus. Elaine was right behind her, her expression calm and composed, but with an intensity in her eyes that spoke volumes. Shibisu, ever the strategist, was already running through the plan in his mind, while Michelle moved with a quiet grace, her presence almost ghostly.

As they approached the communications center, Endorsi held up a hand, signaling the team to stop. She glanced around the corner, her eyes narrowing as she assessed the situation.

“Two guards,” she whispered, her voice barely audible. “Elaine, you take the one on the left. I’ll handle the right. Shibisu, get ready to plant the malware. Michelle, be ready to cover us if anything goes wrong.”

Elaine nodded, her hand already on the hilt of her blade. Endorsi drew her own weapon, a sleek, deadly blade that glinted in the dim light. The two women moved as one, slipping into the shadows and closing in on the unsuspecting guards.

It was over in an instant. Endorsi and Elaine struck simultaneously, their blades flashing through the air in a blur of motion. The guards didn’t even have time to react before they crumpled to the ground, silent and lifeless.

“All clear,” Endorsi whispered, her voice calm as she wiped the blood from her blade. “Shibisu, you’re up.”

Shibisu moved quickly, stepping over the bodies of the guards as he approached the control panel. His fingers flew over the keys as he accessed the communications network, his brow furrowed in concentration.

“This should only take a minute,” he said, his voice low. “Once the malware is in place, they won’t be able to call for help, even if they figure out we’re here.”

Michelle stood by, her eyes scanning the area for any signs of danger. She was the team’s last line of defense, ready to act if anything went wrong. Her heart pounded in her chest, but her face remained calm, her expression unreadable.

“There,” Shibisu said after a moment, stepping back from the control panel. “Malware’s in place. Their communications are down.”

Endorsi allowed herself a small smile. “Good work,” she said, her voice filled with a quiet satisfaction. “Now let’s get out of here before anyone notices.”

In another section of the base, Rak, Ran, Novick, and Hatz were preparing for the most dangerous part of the mission: the assassination of the key FUG officers. Each officer was located in a different section of the headquarters, requiring precise, simultaneous strikes. Timing was everything, and any mistake could cost them their lives.

Rak, the team’s heavy-hitter, led the way, his massive frame moving with surprising stealth through the narrow corridors. He was followed by Ran, whose speed and agility would be crucial in striking swiftly and retreating before anyone could react. Novick, another heavy-hitter, brought up the rear, his eyes sharp and focused. Hatz, the team’s stealth expert, moved like a shadow, his presence barely detectable even to his own teammates.

“Remember, we strike at the same time,” Rak whispered, his voice low and serious. “No mistakes. No second chances.”

Ran nodded, his expression focused. “I’ve got the first target,” he said, his voice barely above a whisper. “He’s in the next room.”

Hatz, who had been scouting ahead, returned to the group, his eyes gleaming with the thrill of the hunt. “My target is two floors down,” he said, his voice soft but filled with intensity. “I’ll take him out quietly.”

Novick, who had been silent up until now, finally spoke. “I’ll handle the last one,” he said, his voice calm and measured. “We need to make this quick.”

Rak grunted in agreement. “On my mark,” he said, his voice a low growl. “Three… two… one… go.”

The team split off, each member moving with purpose toward their respective targets. Rak headed straight for the central chamber, where the highest-ranking officer was stationed. He knew this would be the toughest fight, but he was ready. His hands tightened around the handle of his weapon, his eyes narrowing with determination.

Ran moved with the speed of a lightning bolt, slipping into the room where his target was located. The officer barely had time to register his presence before Ran struck, his blade slicing through the air with deadly precision. The officer crumpled to the ground, dead before he hit the floor.

Hatz, true to his reputation, moved like a ghost through the darkened corridors, his footsteps silent as he approached his target. The officer was alone, completely unaware of the danger that was about to befall him. Hatz struck with surgical precision, his blade cutting through the air in a swift, deadly arc. The officer slumped to the ground, his life snuffed out in an instant.

Novick, meanwhile, had made his way to the final target’s location. The officer was seated at a desk, engrossed in his work, oblivious to the danger that was closing in on him. Novick moved with the grace and power of a predator, his blade slicing through the air with lethal intent. The officer didn’t even have time to scream before Novick’s blade found its mark, ending his life in a single, swift motion.

Rak, meanwhile, had reached the central chamber, where the highest-ranking officer was stationed. The room was heavily guarded, but Rak was undeterred. With a roar, he charged forward, his massive weapon cutting through the air with devastating force. The guards barely had time to react before they were cut down, their bodies crumpling to the ground in a bloody heap.

The officer, now alone and terrified, tried to flee, but Rak was faster. He grabbed the man by the throat, lifting him off the ground with one hand. The officer gasped for air, his eyes wide with fear as he stared into Rak’s cold, merciless gaze.

“Any last words?” Rak growled, his voice filled with a deadly menace.

The officer tried to speak, but no sound came out. He was trembling, his eyes filled with terror as he realized there was no escape.

Rak tightened his grip, his eyes narrowing with fury. “That’s what I thought,” he snarled before snapping the officer’s neck with a single, brutal twist. The man’s body went limp in his hand, and Rak let it drop to the floor with a dull thud.

“Turtles eliminated,” Rak said to his communicator, his voice steady and calm. “Mission accomplished.”

The night in the FUG base was thick with tension as the members of Twenty-Fifth Night completed their separate missions. Each group had carried out their tasks with precision, as per Aguero’s orders. The forest, dark and unforgiving, seemed to close in around them, but they were undeterred. They were assassins, after all, used to working in the shadows. Their footsteps were swift and silent as they moved through the underbrush, their minds focused on reaching the designated extraction point Aguero had instructed them to meet at. The mission was nearly complete, but none of them allowed themselves to relax just yet.

Endorsi's team had been the last to finish. They moved quickly through the forest, their breath heavy but controlled. Endorsi led the group, her eyes sharp as they scanned the darkness ahead. Elaine followed closely behind, her movements fluid and graceful despite the rough terrain. Shibisu, though not as skilled in stealth as the others, kept pace, his eyes darting nervously around. Michelle trailed behind them, her demeanor seemingly calm, but there was a tension in her steps that hadn’t been there before.

"Keep moving," Endorsi urged, her voice low but commanding. "We’re almost there."

Elaine nodded, her eyes narrowing as she concentrated on the path ahead. Shibisu, however, couldn't help but glance back at Michelle. Something about the way she moved, the way she seemed almost too composed, bothered him. But he kept his thoughts to himself, knowing now was not the time for distractions.

The forest was eerily quiet, the only sounds being the rustling of leaves underfoot and the occasional hoot of an owl. The darkness was thick, oppressive, wrapping around them like a cloak. But they pushed forward, knowing that the sooner they reached the extraction point, the sooner they could get out of this cursed place.

Just as they were beginning to see the faint glow of the designated meeting spot in the distance, something changed. Endorsi, who had been leading them with a relentless pace, suddenly disappeared from sight. She moved so quickly that Elaine and Shibisu barely registered her absence until they heard a sharp, unexpected sound behind them—a dull thud, followed by a gasp of pain.

They turned around just in time to see Endorsi reappear, her chakram glinting in the faint light as she delivered a brutal, direct blow to Michelle. The force of the impact sent Michelle staggering backward, her hand clutching her side where Endorsi’s weapon had struck. Elaine froze in shock, her eyes wide with disbelief, while Shibisu’s face twisted in anger.

“Endorsi!” Shibisu shouted, rushing forward to stand between Endorsi and Michelle. “What the hell are you doing?”

Endorsi didn’t respond immediately, her gaze cold and unyielding as she watched Michelle struggle to stay on her feet. Michelle’s breath was ragged, and she winced in pain as she tried to steady herself. But she wasn’t cowed, not in the least.

Shibisu, however, was furious. “You’ve been bullying her ever since she joined! This is too much, Endorsi!” His voice was filled with frustration and anger, his fists clenched at his sides. “What’s wrong with you?”

Elaine, still stunned, remained silent, her eyes flicking between Endorsi and Michelle, trying to make sense of what was happening. She knew Endorsi could be harsh, but this… this was different. There was a fierceness in Endorsi’s eyes that she hadn’t seen before.

Endorsi finally turned her gaze to Shibisu, her expression hard. “You don’t know anything,” she said coldly, her voice cutting through the tension like a knife. “You’ve been blind to what’s been right in front of you this whole time.”

Shibisu looked taken aback, his anger faltering as confusion took its place. “What are you talking about?”

But before Endorsi could respond, Michelle let out a low, pained laugh, her lips curling into a twisted smile. 

“Is that all you’ve got, Michelle?” Endorsi sneered, her voice laced with venom. “Or should I say… Rachel from FUG?”

The words hung in the air like a bomb, the revelation sending shockwaves through Shibisu and Elaine. Both of them stared at Michelle—Rachel—in stunned silence, their minds struggling to process what they had just heard.

Rachel’s smile widened, though there was nothing but malice in her eyes. “You bitch,” she spat, the pretense of Michelle’s sweet demeanor completely gone. The transformation was startling, the cruel smirk on her face a stark contrast to the persona she had been wearing for so long.

Shibisu felt like the ground had been ripped out from under him. “Michelle… is Rachel?” he whispered, his voice barely audible, filled with disbelief and betrayal. He had trusted her, defended her, and now…

Elaine’s shock quickly turned to a cold, steely resolve. She moved to stand beside Shibisu, her gaze hardening as she looked at Rachel. “What the hell is going on?” she demanded, her voice sharp.

Endorsi didn’t answer immediately. Instead, she kept her eyes on Rachel, her chakram at the ready. “You two should move on your own,” she said, her tone suddenly calm, almost dismissive. “I’ll deal with this on my own.”

Shibisu opened his mouth to protest, but Endorsi cut him off with a sharp look. “You know me, Shibisu,” she said, a small, almost sad smile playing on her lips. “I don’t like people touching Bam’s things, especially when they’re too dumb to even know how to use them.”

Elaine hesitated, but something in Endorsi’s expression told her that arguing would be pointless. There was a resolve in her eyes that Elaine knew all too well—Endorsi had already made up her mind. With that, Elaine and Shibisu flee, but not without turning their heads to check on Endorsi until her figure becomes unrecognizable. 

Rachel, on the other hand, seemed amused by the whole situation. She chuckled darkly, her eyes gleaming with malice. “So, it’s on, then?” she asked, her voice dripping with sarcasm. “How noble of you, Endorsi. Standing up for your precious little Bam.”

Endorsi didn’t rise to the bait. She simply tilted her head slightly, her gaze never leaving Rachel’s. “You’re terrible at acting, Rachel,” she said, her voice cool and measured. “Your evil deeds have been wafting around the hideout for a while now. You couldn’t hide them if you tried.”

Rachel’s expression darkened, her smile fading as she glared at Endorsi. “Evil deeds? Coming from a cold-blooded killer like you? Isn’t that a bit ironic?”

Endorsi didn’t flinch, her eyes narrowing. “Call it what you want,” she said evenly. “But we don’t pretend to be something we’re not.”

Rachel scoffed, her lip curling in disdain. “TFN… all of you are such hypocrites. Preaching loyalty, family, and all that crap when, in reality, you’re just a bunch of killers trying to play innocent.” Her voice was filled with contempt as she taunted Endorsi, mocking the very foundation of everything TFN stood for. “You think you’re better than me? You’re all the same. Just murderers hiding behind pretty words.”

Endorsi listened in silence, her expression unreadable. But as Rachel’s laughter filled the night air, mocking and cruel, something in Endorsi shifted. She moved so quickly that she seemed to disappear, reappearing just inches from Rachel, her chakram already in motion. Before Rachel could react, Endorsi had her blade pressed against Rachel’s neck.

“Bold words,” Endorsi said softly, her voice deadly calm, “for someone within stabbing range.”

Rachel’s eyes widened in shock as Endorsi’s blade cut into her neck, the sharp edge slicing through skin and muscle with precise, lethal force. Blood spurted from the wound as Rachel gasped, her hands flying to her neck in a futile attempt to stop the bleeding. She staggered back, her eyes wide with fear and disbelief as she fell to the ground.

Endorsi watched Rachel fall, her expression cold and detached. She made no move to help, no sign of remorse or hesitation. She simply turned her back on Rachel, her chakram still dripping with blood.

As she began to walk away, Endorsi paused, glancing back at Rachel, who was now writhing on the ground, gasping for breath as her life ebbed away. “My chakram contains poison,” Endorsi said, her voice matter-of-fact. “An improvement made by Hockney. It’s enough to kill you within minutes.”

Rachel’s eyes widened in terror as she realized the full extent of her situation. She tried to speak, but no sound came out, her voice choked off by the blood filling her throat.

Endorsi’s expression remained impassive as she watched Rachel struggle. “If you survive this,” she said coolly, “we’ll definitely cross paths again. But next time…” Her eyes hardened, a cold, deadly light shining in them. “Next time, I won’t be so merciful.”

With that, Endorsi turned away, leaving Rachel to her fate. She didn’t look back as she disappeared into the shadows of the forest, her figure blending into the darkness like she had never been there at all.

The mission had been executed with precision, each member of Twenty-Fifth Night playing their part to perfection. Aguero had triggered the pre-planned diversion, an elaborate scheme that made it appear as though a rival faction had attacked FUG, creating the chaos they needed to escape unnoticed. 

Now, they waited in the shadows, breaths held as they counted heads. The trees loomed overhead, their thick branches obscuring the moonlight and casting long shadows on the ground. One by one, the team members emerged from the darkness, reuniting with the group. First was Ran, his face flushed with adrenaline, followed by Hatz and Novick, both looking winded but determined. Hockney appeared next, his usually calm expression now tinged with concern, likely still processing the revelation about Michelle. Shibisu brought up the rear, his eyes scanning the treeline as though expecting an ambush.

Aguero’s gaze swept over the group, silently counting them. Everyone was accounted for—everyone except Endorsi. He felt a knot of worry tighten in his chest but kept his expression neutral. They had agreed to regroup here before making their final move to the extraction point, but Endorsi was nowhere to be seen. Seconds stretched into minutes, each one heavier than the last. The group exchanged uneasy glances, their breaths fogging in the cold air. Aguero felt a familiar mix of fear and frustration gnaw at him, but he forced himself to remain calm. Endorsi was one of their best; she knew how to handle herself. But that didn’t stop the scenarios from running through his mind, each one worse than the last.

Finally, after what felt like an eternity, a figure emerged from the trees. Endorsi walked towards them with measured steps, her face shadowed by the night. But as she drew closer, the group could see the change in her demeanor. Her usual confidence was muted, replaced by something darker, something more vulnerable. Her eyes, once sharp and determined, now held a flicker of doubt.

“Endorsi, you okay?” Dan asked, his voice laced with concern.

Endorsi nodded, but her expression didn’t match the gesture. “Yeah, I’m fine,” she replied, though the words lacked conviction. 

Aguero and the others who knew the truth—Hockney, Elaine, and Shibisu—exchanged a quick glance. They all knew what had happened. Endorsi had dealt with Rachel. There was no need to ask her about it; the weight of the encounter was written all over her face. 

“Let’s move,” Aguero said, his tone brooking no argument. “We’re heading to another hideout.”

The others, who hadn’t been privy to the details of Rachel’s identity, looked puzzled. “Why are we moving to another location?” Ran asked, frowning. “I thought this was our fallback point.”

“It’s part of the mission,” Aguero replied curtly, his eyes narrowing slightly. He wasn’t in the mood for questions, not with Endorsi looking so shaken. Ran opened his mouth to argue but thought better of it when he saw the steely look in Aguero’s eyes.

The low rumble of engines cut through the tense silence as their getaway cars arrived, the headlights slicing through the darkness. Without a word, the group divided into two teams and climbed into the vehicles. Aguero, Elaine, Endorsi, Dan, and Rak squeezed into one car, while Ran, Shibisu, Hatz, Novick, and Hockney took the other. 

As the cars pulled away from the forest, the tension inside them was palpable. The hum of the engine filled the silence, broken only by the occasional murmur of conversation in the backseat. Rak and Dan were recounting their experiences on the mission, their voices animated as they discussed the close calls they had faced. Elaine nodded along, offering a comment here and there, but her attention kept drifting back to Endorsi, who was unusually quiet.

Aguero sat in the passenger seat, his eyes fixed on the road ahead, but his mind was elsewhere. He could feel the shift in Endorsi’s demeanor, the way she seemed to be folding in on herself, retreating into a dark place. It wasn’t like her to be so quiet, especially after a successful mission. He wanted to ask her what had happened, to find out what Rachel had said to make her doubt herself, but he knew better than to push her. Endorsi would talk when she was ready.

The car hit a bump in the road, jolting them all slightly. Dan cursed under his breath, but the moment passed quickly. The conversation in the backseat picked up again, but Endorsi remained silent, her eyes fixed on the passing scenery outside the window.

Finally, after what felt like hours, Endorsi spoke, her voice resonating within the car like a pebble dropped into a still pond. “Do we really deserve this?” she asked, her tone soft but laced with a deep, unspoken pain. “Do we really deserve having this group—this family? Are we not entitled to our own happiness because we’re all killers?”

The question hung in the air, heavy and suffocating. It was as if the very walls of the car had closed in around them, trapping them in the weight of her words. The others fell silent, their earlier conversations forgotten. Even Rak, who was usually quick with a joke or a gruff comment, had nothing to say.

Aguero turned slightly in his seat to look at her, but it was Elaine who responded first. “Endorsi,” she began, her voice gentle but firm, “we’ve been through so much together. We’ve faced impossible odds, and we’ve come out stronger each time. We’ve fought for each other, protected each other. Aren’t we a family already?”

Endorsi’s gaze remained fixed on the window, her reflection distorted by the glass. “A family,” she repeated, as if the word were foreign to her. “Rachel said… she said we’re hypocrites. That we preach about loyalty, family, and love, but in the end, we’re just a bunch of killers. That we don’t deserve any of it.”

Aguero’s jaw tightened, his hands gripping the armrest. He knew Rachel’s words had struck a nerve, but hearing them out loud made it all the more real. “Rachel doesn’t know us,” he said, his voice low and controlled. “She doesn’t understand what we’ve been through, what we’ve sacrificed. We’re not just killers, Endorsi. We’re survivors. We’ve had to make hard choices, but that doesn’t make us less deserving of happiness.”

Elaine reached out and placed a comforting hand on Endorsi’s arm, her touch warm and reassuring. “We’ve all done things we’re not proud of,” she said softly. “But that doesn’t define us. What defines us is how we’ve stayed together, how we’ve looked out for each other, even when things were at their worst. We’ve earned this family, Endorsi. We’ve earned the right to fight for our happiness.”

Endorsi finally turned to look at her, her eyes shimmering with unshed tears. “But what if she’s right? What if we’re just fooling ourselves, thinking we can have something good when all we do is take lives?”

Elaine shook her head, her expression resolute. “She’s wrong, because she doesn’t know us like we know each other. We’ve seen the good in each other, even when we couldn’t see it in ourselves. And that’s what makes us different. We don’t just take lives; we save them too. We’ve saved each other more times than I can count. That’s what makes us a family.”

Aguero remained silent, allowing Elaine’s words to sink in. She had a way of cutting through the noise, of reaching the heart of the matter. He could see the conflict in Endorsi’s eyes, the way she was wrestling with the truth of Elaine’s words against the poison that Rachel had planted in her mind.

Dan, who had been uncharacteristically quiet during the exchange, finally spoke up. “Endorsi, we’re all in this together. We’ve all got our demons, but that doesn’t mean we don’t deserve to be happy. We’ve fought too hard to give up now.”

Endorsi’s gaze softened as she looked at him, the doubt in her eyes slowly giving way to something else—something stronger. “Maybe you’re right,” she murmured. “Maybe… maybe I just needed to hear it.”

Elaine gave her a reassuring smile, squeezing her arm gently. “We’re here for you, Endorsi. Always.”

Aguero glanced back at her, his expression unreadable. “You don’t have to carry this alone,” he said quietly. “We’re all here for each other. That’s what it means to be a family.”

Endorsi nodded, a small, tentative smile forming on her lips. “Thanks,” she whispered, her voice barely audible. “I needed that.”

The car fell into a more comfortable silence after that, the earlier tension dissipating as they continued their journey. The road ahead was long and uncertain, but for now, they had each other. And that was enough.

As the vehicles sped through the night, Aguero couldn’t help but reflect on everything that had led them to this moment. The battles they had fought, the lives they had taken, the sacrifices they had made. They were all scarred by their pasts, each of them carrying their own burdens. But they had also found something precious in each other—something worth fighting for, worth protecting.

It wasn’t easy being part of TFN, but it was a choice they had all made, and they had made it together. They had become a family, not because of blood, but because of the bonds they had forged through fire and pain. And that bond was something no one—not even someone like Rachel—could take away from them.

The cars eventually pulled off the main road, taking a winding path through a dense thicket of trees. The route was familiar to Aguero, who had chosen this secondary hideout for its seclusion and security. They had used it a few times in the past, mostly as a temporary safe house, but tonight it would serve as their refuge as they regrouped and planned their next move.

When they finally arrived, the group disembarked in silence, each of them lost in their thoughts. The hideout was a modest cabin, nestled deep in the woods, far from prying eyes. It wasn’t much, but it was enough for their needs.

Inside, the atmosphere was tense but not as strained as before. The group gathered around the central table, their faces illuminated by the dim overhead light. Aguero stood at the head of the table, his sharp gaze sweeping over them.

“We’ll lay low here for the night,” he said, his tone brokering no argument. “Tomorrow, we’ll reassess the situation and plan our next move. For now, get some rest. We’ll need to be sharp in the morning.”

The others nodded, their exhaustion evident. One by one, they retreated to the small rooms that branched off from the main living area. Elaine lingered by Endorsi’s side, offering her a comforting smile before heading to her own room.

Aguero watched them go, his mind still racing with thoughts of the mission, of Rachel, and of the weight that Endorsi carried. He had seen her doubt before, but never like this. Rachel’s words had cut deep, but he knew that Endorsi was strong. She would bounce back—she always did.

But still, he couldn’t shake the feeling that this time was different. He made a mental note to keep an eye on her, to make sure she didn’t slip into the darkness that Rachel had tried to push her into.

As the night deepened, the hideout grew quiet, the only sounds being the occasional rustle of leaves outside and the faint creaks of the wooden structure. Aguero sat at the table long after the others had gone to bed, his thoughts too tangled to allow for sleep. They had won this round, but the war was far from over. And with each passing day, the stakes only grew higher. They couldn’t afford to lose anyone—not to the enemy, and certainly not to doubt.

Chapter Text

The sun was just beginning to set as the group made their way back from the successful mission at the FUG base. The air was thick with the satisfaction of a job well done, but beneath that was an undercurrent of tension. The mission had been critical, not just for the information they’d acquired, but because of the revelations it had uncovered about someone they thought they could trust.

Aguero had been quiet during the journey back, his mind racing as he considered how to break the news to the others. He had known about Rachel’s true identity for some time now, but not everyone in the group was aware of the danger she posed. As they reached the outskirts of the city and made their way through the dense forest that led to their new hideout, Aguero finally spoke up, his voice cutting through the silence.

"Before we get inside, there’s something important I need to tell you all," Aguero said, his tone serious. The others turned to him, curiosity and concern etched on their faces.

Elaine, Endorsi, Hockney, and Shibisu exchanged knowing glances, already aware of what was coming. The rest of the team—Dan, Hatz, Novick, Ran, and Rak—looked at Aguero expectantly, waiting for him to continue.

"It’s about Michelle," Aguero continued, his blue eyes sharp as he scanned the group. "Or rather, Rachel."

There was a pause as the words sank in. Dan’s brows knitted together in confusion, while Ran tilted his head slightly, trying to piece together what Aguero was getting at.

"Rachel?" Novick repeated, his voice incredulous. "You mean the girl Maria recommended for the mission? The one who just vanished after it was over?"

"Yeah," Aguero confirmed, his tone icy. "That’s because she isn’t who we thought she was. Michelle is actually Rachel, a member of FUG."

The revelation hit like a bombshell. Hatz’s eyes widened in shock, while Rak let out a low growl of anger. Dan looked around at the others, trying to gauge their reactions, while Ran’s expression darkened, a rare seriousness taking over his usual smirk.

"How do you know this?" Hatz asked, his voice laced with disbelief. "How could she have fooled all of us?"

Hockney stepped forward, adjusting his glasses as he spoke. "I came across her data when I was breaching FUG’s systems. It was buried deep, but there was no mistaking it. She’s been working with FUG for years, using different aliases. Michelle was just one of them."

"And she’s been lying to us the whole time?" Dan asked, anger simmering in his voice.

"Not just lying," Endorsi chimed in, her tone colder than usual. "Manipulating. She played her part perfectly, made sure we trusted her just enough to get close. But once the mission was over, she showed her true colors."

Ran clenched his fists, his usual laid-back demeanor gone. "So what now? Do we go after her?"

"Endorsi had already dealt with her before we reached here," Aguero replied, his voice measured. "She’s dangerous, and she’s been ahead of us this entire time. We need to be smart about how we handle this because we don’t exactly know what she got from staying with us for the past few days."

The group fell into an uneasy silence, the gravity of the situation sinking in. They had all faced countless dangers together, but this was different. This was betrayal from within, a knife in the back from someone they had let into their circle.

Elaine, who had been quiet until now, finally spoke up. "We’ve faced worse before, and we’ll face this too. But Aguero’s right—we can’t let her know we’re onto her. We’ll stick to the plan, stay focused, and when the time is right, we’ll make our move."

Shibisu nodded in agreement. "Until then, we keep our eyes open. She’s not going to catch us off guard again."

With that, the group began to make their way into the new hideout, the tension still lingering but tempered by their shared resolve. The house was a two-story structure, nestled deep within the heart of the forest, yet close enough to the city to keep a watchful eye on any developments. It was spacious, with enough rooms for everyone, a large common area, and an upstairs balcony that offered a stunning view of the night sky and the city lights beyond.

As they stepped inside, the group couldn’t help but feel a small sense of relief. The house, despite its purpose as a hideout, had a warmth to it, a sense of security that they desperately needed after everything they had been through. They each began to settle into their respective rooms, though the weight of the recent revelation still hung in the air.

The next morning brought a semblance of normalcy back to the group’s routine. They had only just moved into the new hideout, and there was still plenty of work to be done. Aguero had assigned tasks to everyone. Today, however, was a special day in the hideout—laundry day.

Elaine, Endorsi, and Shibisu were tasked with washing the clothes, while Dan, Novick, and Hockney were responsible for drying. Hatz and Rak, on the other hand, were assigned to clean the house, a task that Rak was less than thrilled about.

"Why do I have to do this?" Rak grumbled as he begrudgingly swept the floor, his shrunken size making the broom look like something big. "I’m a warrior, not a janitor!"

Hatz smirked as he wiped down the kitchen counter. "Because even warriors need a clean place to live. Besides, if we don’t clean up, we’ll be living in a pigsty. I don’t know about you, but I’d rather not wade through piles of dirty clothes and dishes every day."

Rak huffed but continued his sweeping, muttering under his breath about how he’d rather be hunting or fighting enemies. Hatz just chuckled, used to Rak’s grumbling by now.

Meanwhile, in the laundry room, Elaine, Endorsi, and Shibisu were up to their elbows in clothes. The piles seemed endless, but they tackled the task with determination—and a fair bit of humor.

"How do we always end up with so much laundry?" Endorsi asked, tossing a bundle of shirts into the washing machine. "It’s like it multiplies on its own."

"Maybe it’s Rak’s clothes," Elaine joked, grinning as she added some detergent. "He’s big enough to fill two washing machines on his own."

"Or maybe it’s Shibisu’s collection of tacky shirts," Endorsi teased, eyeing one particularly garish shirt that had somehow ended up in the pile.

Shibisu feigned offense, clutching the shirt to his chest. "Hey, these shirts are stylish! You just don’t appreciate fashion."

Elaine laughed, shaking her head. "Sure, if by fashion you mean blinding patterns and questionable color choices."

The three of them continued bantering as they worked, the monotony of the task made bearable by their lighthearted teasing. Even the tedious work of sorting, washing, and folding became enjoyable with the right company.

Out on the balcony, Dan, Novick, and Hockney were busy with the drying. They had set up clotheslines across the length of the balcony, where the sun and breeze would do the work of drying the clothes.

"At least we’ve got a nice view while we do this," Dan said, clipping a pair of pants to the line. "It almost makes this task bearable."

"Almost," Novick agreed, hanging up a shirt. "Though I wouldn’t mind trading places with Elaine and the others. They seem to be having more fun."

Hockney, who had been quietly working beside them, smiled slightly. "They’re just good at making the best of things. Besides, it’s better than being stuck inside all day."

Dan glanced over at Hockney, noticing the thoughtful expression on his face. "You okay, Hockney? You’ve been quiet since we got back."

"I’m fine," Hockney replied, his tone even. "Just thinking about everything that’s happened. About Rachel."

Novick nodded, his expression growing more serious. "It’s a lot to take in. But we’ll handle it. We always do."

Dan and Hockney exchanged a look, both understanding the weight of Novick’s words. They may be new but they had faced many challenges together, but this one felt different—more personal.

By afternoon, everyone had begun to move about on their own, choosing rooms and unpacking. It was a rare moment of normalcy—no missions, no threats, just the simple task of finding a space to call their own, if only for a little while.

Aguero had claimed a room on the second floor for Bam. It was at the end of the hall, away from the main activity, with a large window that offered a view of the forest. Aguero knew Bam would appreciate the tranquility, the way the light filtered through the trees, casting a soft glow in the room.

As he carried a large box filled with Bam’s belongings toward the room, he couldn’t help but feel the weight of the memories inside it. Each item was a piece of Bam’s life, a fragment of the time they had spent together. It was more than just things—it was everything Bam had left behind.

Just as he was about to enter the room, he heard footsteps behind him. Turning, he saw Novick and Dan approaching, each with a look of mild concern on their faces.

“Need a hand with that, Aguero?” Novick offered, his voice casual, but with a hint of hesitation.

Aguero paused, his grip tightening slightly on the box. His first instinct was to refuse—Bam’s things were personal, sacred in a way, and he wasn’t sure he wanted anyone else touching them. But as he looked at Novick and Dan, he saw something in their eyes—a shared understanding, a quiet acknowledgment of what those items meant. And there was also a part of him that knew he needed to allow them in, to show that they were more than just comrades—they were family now.

With a sigh, Aguero nodded. “Alright,” he said, stepping aside. “But be careful. These aren’t just things.”

Novick smiled softly, sensing the weight of Aguero’s words. “We’ll be careful,” he promised, gently taking the box from Aguero. “Where should we put it?”

Aguero led them into the room he had chosen for Bam. It was still bare, but he could already picture how it would look once Bam’s belongings were arranged—how it would become a space that felt like Bam, even in his absence.

“Over there, by the window,” Aguero instructed, pointing to a spot where the light from outside spilled onto the floor.

As Novick set the box down, Dan glanced around the room. “This place isn’t bad,” he remarked. “Bam would like it here.”

Aguero nodded, his expression softening. “Yeah. He would.”

For a moment, the three of them stood in silence, the room filled with a quiet reverence. Then, with careful movements, Aguero began to unpack the box. Novick and Dan watched him, unsure if they should help or just stay out of the way. But when Aguero glanced at them and gave a small nod, they understood that it was okay—that they were welcome to be a part of this.

One by one, they pulled out Bam’s belongings. There were the clothes Aguero had bought for him when Bam, Hockney, and Elaine were just beginning their training—simple, comfortable things that had seen their fair share of wear and tear. There were the plushies Bam and Aguero had won at the arcade near Bam’s old apartment, a reminder of a rare carefree day spent away from the shadows of their pasts. And then there were the books—well-worn and full of notes, the pages marked by Bam’s curiosity and quiet determination to learn.

Dan picked up one of the plushies—a small, blue bear with a slightly lopsided smile. “Didn’t know Bam was into these,” he said with a grin, holding it up for the others to see.

Aguero chuckled, a fond smile tugging at his lips. “He wasn’t, really. But he couldn’t resist the challenge of winning them. We ended up with a whole collection before I knew it.”

Novick raised an eyebrow, amused. “So, the great Bam has a soft spot for stuffed animals, huh? I never would’ve guessed.”

“Don’t let him hear you say that,” Aguero warned, though there was no real threat in his tone. “He’ll deny it to his grave.”

As they continued unpacking, Dan found a stack of books, the covers worn from frequent use. “These must be Bam’s,” he said, flipping through one of them. “Looks like he really tore through these.”

Aguero nodded, his gaze distant for a moment. “He always did. Even when things were rough, he’d find time to read. It was his way of escaping, I think.”

Novick glanced at Aguero, noticing the shift in his expression. “You miss him, don’t you?”

The question hung in the air for a moment, and Aguero didn’t answer right away. Instead, he carefully placed a small, framed photo on the windowsill—a picture of him and Bam, taken on a rare day off. They were both smiling, relaxed, the weight of their world temporarily lifted.

“Yeah,” Aguero finally admitted, his voice quiet. “I do.”

Dan and Novick exchanged a look, one that held a mix of empathy and understanding. They knew how much Bam meant to Aguero—how Bam had become more than just a mission partner, more than just a friend. He was family, in every sense of the word.

There was a pause, then Novick cleared his throat, trying to lighten the mood. “You know, with all these books and plushies, Bam’s room might end up being the most comfortable one here.”

Aguero chuckled, the tension easing slightly. “He’d probably complain that it’s too much,” he said, shaking his head. “But then he’d settle in and get lost in one of those books for hours.”

Dan grinned, picking up Bam’s bow and inspecting it. “And then there’s this,” he said, holding it up. “I heard he’s really something with this thing. Rak said he’d seen him hit targets I wouldn’t even attempt.”

Aguero smiled, a hint of pride in his eyes. “He’s always been good at it. It’s like second nature to him.”

As they finished unpacking, the room began to take on a life of its own. It was no longer just a space—it was a reflection of Bam, of the things he loved, the memories he had created with Aguero and the others. It felt lived-in, familiar, as if Bam could walk through the door at any moment and feel right at home.

When they were done, the three of them stood back, taking in the sight. It wasn’t just a room—it was a promise, a reminder of what they were fighting for.

Dan broke the silence, clapping a hand on Aguero’s shoulder. “It looks good,” he said simply.

Aguero nodded, his gaze lingering on the photo by the window. “Yeah,” he agreed. “It does.”

There was a pause, then Novick spoke up, his tone light. “You know, if you ever need help with anything like this again, don’t hesitate to ask. We’re here, you know?”

Aguero smiled, a rare, genuine expression. “Thanks,” he said. “I’ll keep that in mind.”

The first rays of sunlight streamed through the large windows of the hideout, casting a warm glow across the dining area. The soft chatter of voices and the clinking of utensils filled the room as the team gathered for breakfast. Despite the exhaustion from the previous day, there was a sense of calm, a rare moment of peace before they resumed their dangerous lives.

Ran sat at the table, his expression a mix of impatience and distraction. He picked at his food, clearly eager to leave. It was unusual for him to be up this early, but he had received a message from Asensio late last night, requesting his help. Ran didn’t know the details yet, but if Asensio needed him, it had to be important.

Elaine, sitting across from Ran, noticed his restlessness. She frowned slightly, concerned. “Ran, you haven’t even touched your breakfast,” she said, her voice gentle but firm. “You need to eat something before you go.”

Ran glanced up, trying to hide his impatience. “I’ll grab something on the way, Elaine. I don’t have time for a sit-down meal.”

Elaine shook her head, not budging. “You know you won’t. You’ll get busy and forget. You need to eat properly, especially if Asensio’s calling you out early like this. Whatever it is, it’s probably going to be a long day.”

Ran sighed, knowing she was right. Elaine had always been the one looking out for them, making sure they took care of themselves even when they were too focused on their missions to think about it. He couldn’t argue with her when she was being so reasonable.

Before he could respond, Endorsi chimed in with a teasing grin. “Elaine’s got a point, Ran. You wouldn’t want to faint from hunger while you’re out there, would you? That’d be embarrassing.”

Ran shot her a glare, though there was no real malice behind it. “I wouldn’t faint,” he muttered, but his protest was weak.

Elaine stood up and disappeared into the kitchen for a moment. When she returned, she was holding a lunchbox. It was simple, but packed with care—rice, vegetables, and some of the leftover meat from last night’s dinner. She placed it in front of Ran with a determined expression.

“Take this with you,” she said firmly. “You can eat it when you get a chance.”

Ran stared at the lunchbox, then back at Elaine. He opened his mouth to argue, to say that he didn’t need it, but something in Elaine’s eyes made him pause. He could see the effort she had put into it, the care she had taken to make sure he would have something to eat. It wasn’t just about the food—it was about her looking out for him, the way she always did.

Ran’s face flushed slightly, embarrassed at the thought of carrying a lunchbox around, especially one packed by Elaine. But before he could refuse, Endorsi leaned over, grinning mischievously. “You’re not seriously going to say no, are you, Ran? You wouldn’t want to waste Elaine’s effort, right?”

Ran looked between them, feeling cornered. He knew he was outnumbered, and there was no way he could win this argument. With a resigned sigh, he picked up the lunchbox. “Fine,” he grumbled. “I’ll take it. But don’t expect me to make a habit of this.”

Elaine smiled, satisfied. “That’s all I ask.”

Endorsi laughed, petting Ran on the head. “Good boy. Now go do whatever Asensio needs you to do, and make sure you don’t get into too much trouble.”

Ran rolled his eyes but couldn’t help the small smile tugging at the corners of his mouth. “Yeah, yeah. See you guys later,” he muttered as he stood up, the lunchbox in hand.

As Ran headed for the door, Elaine called out to him, her voice softening. “Be careful, Ran. And make sure you come back safe.”

Ran paused, glancing back at her. He gave a brief nod, the usual cocky smirk replaced with something more genuine. “I will,” he promised, before heading out.

As the door closed behind him, the room fell into a comfortable silence. Endorsi leaned back in her chair, stretching her arms above her head. “Well, that was a nice start to the day,” she said with a grin. “Maybe we should make this a regular thing—packing lunch boxes for Ran.”

Elaine shook her head, though there was a hint of amusement in her eyes. “He’ll get used to it eventually. But for now, let’s just hope he actually eats it.”

Endorsi laughed, reaching for her cup of coffee. “Knowing Ran, he’ll pretend he’s too cool for it, but he’ll eat every bite when no one’s looking.”

The conversation drifted to lighter topics as the team finished their breakfast. But even as they talked and laughed, there was an undercurrent of tension—an unspoken understanding that their respite wouldn’t last long. Soon enough, they would be thrown back into the chaos of their lives, but for now, they savored the quiet moments.

After breakfast, the team dispersed to go about their individual tasks. Aguero lingered in the common area, his thoughts elsewhere. The morning had been uneventful, yet his mind was troubled. Something had been gnawing at him since the mission, a suspicion that wouldn’t let go. It was related to Bam, or rather, the people who had been part of Bam’s life before everything changed.

He had been mulling over the idea for days now, ever since they had started planning to move into the hideout. Aguero knew that he needed answers, and there was only one place he could go to find them.

Regal Heights School.

It was where Bam and his friends had studied, a place filled with memories that were both painful and precious. But it was also where Aguero had met someone who had been an integral part of Bam’s life—Yu Hansung, Bam’s archery coach.

The thought of returning to the school filled Aguero with unease, but he couldn’t ignore his suspicions any longer. Hansung hadn’t been searching for Bam, despite their close relationship. It was unlike him, and that raised too many questions for Aguero to leave unanswered.

With a sigh, Aguero made his decision. He grabbed his coat and headed for the door, pausing only to let the others know he would be out for a while. There were no questions, no protests—just silent nods of understanding. Everyone had their own missions, their own demons to confront.

Aguero stared out the window as the car sped away from the extraction point. The mission had been successful, but his thoughts were elsewhere. Something gnawed at him, a feeling he couldn’t shake off. As the dense forest slowly gave way to the sprawling cityscape, memories began to surface—memories of a place he hadn’t visited in years but had left a lasting mark on him: Regal Heights School.

It was the school where Bam, Elaine, and Hockney had once studied. It was where he had met Bam in the most unexpected way, a day that had changed the course of his life. The memory of that day was still vivid in his mind. He could still see the flash of determination in Bam’s eyes as the boy had kicked him in the head, misunderstanding his intentions, thinking Aguero had something to do with Elaine and Hockney being taken to the guidance office. The sheer audacity of it had left Aguero stunned, but also intrigued. And after that, the rest had become history—a history that was both painful and precious.

Driven by an instinct he couldn’t ignore, Aguero decided to visit Regal Heights School. The decision wasn’t planned; it was a spur-of-the-moment impulse, but one he felt compelled to follow through. The car pulled up to the familiar gates of the school, and Aguero stepped out, feeling a mix of nostalgia and apprehension wash over him.

As he walked through the school grounds, memories flooded back with every step. The faculty, recognizing him instantly, greeted him warmly. After all, Aguero wasn’t just another visitor; he was the son of the school’s owner, a prodigy who had once roamed these halls, not as an official student, but as someone who had terrorized the classes with his sharp intellect. Teachers had dreaded his presence, knowing that he would ask questions they weren’t competent enough to answer.

“Young master!” one of the faculty members exclaimed, a broad smile on their face. “It’s been so long! What brings you back here?”

“Just visiting,” Aguero replied with a polite smile, though his thoughts were elsewhere. He continued walking, his eyes taking in the familiar surroundings, though everything felt slightly different now, tinged with the passage of time.

As he wandered, he overheard snippets of conversations, the sounds of students bustling about, and the distant echoes of a school bell. It all felt like stepping back into a different life, one that was simpler, though no less significant. 

His footsteps eventually led him to the administration building, where he learned that Lero Ro, Bam, Elaine, and Hockney’s former math teacher, was now the school principal. Intrigued, Aguero decided to pay him a visit.

When he entered the principal’s office, Lero Ro looked up from his desk, his expression one of pleasant surprise. “Young master? Is that really you?” he asked, standing up and extending a hand.

Aguero shook his hand, noting the firm grip. “It’s been a while, Lero Ro.”

“Indeed it has,” Lero Ro said with a chuckle. “I almost didn’t recognize you. You’ve changed.”

“Haven’t we all?” Aguero replied, taking a seat across from him.

Lero Ro leaned back in his chair, studying Aguero with a curious expression. “So, what brings you back here after all this time? I assume it’s not just a casual visit.”

Aguero hesitated for a moment before responding. “You could say I’m following a hunch. Something drew me back here, and I thought it wouldn’t hurt to look around.”

Lero Ro nodded, his expression thoughtful. “I see. Well, you’ve certainly come at an interesting time. The school’s changed a lot since you were last here. I’m sure you’ve noticed.”

“I have,” Aguero admitted. “But some things remain the same.”

The conversation shifted to more professional topics, with Lero Ro filling Aguero in on the school’s progress and developments. They discussed education, the challenges of running a school in a constantly changing world, and the pressures of leadership. Aguero listened intently, offering insights when appropriate, but his mind was still occupied with thoughts of the past.

After a while, Lero Ro’s tone shifted to a more personal note. “You know, I’ve been thinking about some of my former students recently. Bam, Elaine, Hockney… They were an interesting group.”

Aguero stiffened slightly at the mention of Bam, but he kept his expression neutral. “They were,” he agreed.

“I heard that Hockney’s become quite the mechanical engineer,” Lero Ro continued, a note of pride in his voice. “He always had a knack for that sort of thing. But what about Elaine and Bam? How are they doing?”

Aguero took a deep breath, steadying himself before answering. “Elaine’s doing fine on her own. She’s strong, capable. As for Bam…” He paused, the words heavy on his tongue. “Bam’s dead. He’s been gone for five years now.”

The shock on Lero Ro’s face was immediate and palpable. “Dead?” he repeated, his voice barely above a whisper. “But… how? When?”

“It’s a long story,” Aguero said quietly. “One that I’m not sure I’m ready to go into right now. But it’s been five years since he died. It was sudden… and it changed everything.”

Lero Ro seemed to struggle with the information, his eyes clouding with disbelief. “I had no idea… I’m so sorry. I can’t imagine what that must have been like.”

“It’s something I’ve learned to live with,” Aguero replied, though the pain in his voice was evident. “But it’s not something I’ll ever forget.”

The conversation grew somber, the weight of Bam’s absence hanging between them like a shadow. Lero Ro, sensing the shift in mood, tried to steer the conversation back to lighter topics, but the damage was done. Aguero couldn’t shake the feeling that something was still unresolved, something that had drawn him back to this place for a reason.

After catching up with Lero Ro, Aguero left the principal’s office, his mind racing. He wandered through the school, his thoughts drifting back to the memories he’d buried deep within. As he passed by the classrooms, the cafeteria, and the sports fields, he could almost see the ghosts of the past—Bam, Elaine, Hockney, and himself, all those years ago, navigating the trials of youth and the complexities of their intertwined lives.

It wasn’t long before he found himself standing in front of the archery practice room. The door was slightly ajar, and he could hear the faint sound of arrows hitting targets inside. Aguero hesitated for a moment before pushing the door open and stepping inside.

The room was empty except for one figure— Yu Hansung, Bam’s archery coach. The older man was focused on his practice, his posture straight and his movements precise. Aguero watched him for a moment, memories of Bam’s archery lessons flooding back. Hansung had been more than just a coach to Bam; he had been a mentor, a guiding figure during those formative years.

Aguero cleared his throat, drawing Hansung’s attention. The coach turned, his expression unreadable as he lowered his bow. “Young master,” he said, his voice calm and measured. “It’s been a long time.”

“It has,” Aguero replied, stepping further into the room. “I was in the area and thought I’d stop by.”

Hansung nodded, his eyes narrowing slightly as he studied Aguero. “I heard you’ve been busy. A lot has changed since you were last here.”

“Yes, it has,” Aguero agreed, his tone guarded. “But some things haven’t.”

Hansung didn’t respond immediately, instead turning his attention back to the target. He nocked another arrow, drawing the bowstring back with practiced ease. “You’re not just here for a casual visit, are you?”

Aguero didn’t answer right away. Instead, he watched as Hansung released the arrow, watching it fly straight and true to the center of the target. There was something in the coach’s demeanor that set off alarms in Aguero’s mind—something he couldn’t quite place, but it was there, lurking beneath the surface.

“Haven’t you heard that Bam died?” Aguero finally said, his voice steady. “And I realized something… You never came looking for him.”

Hansung didn’t flinch, but there was a slight tension in his shoulders as he set the bow down. “I knew Bam was strong enough to take care of himself,” he replied evenly. “And I trusted that he was with people who cared about him.”

“That’s not an answer,” Aguero pressed, his tone sharpening. “You were close to him, Hansung. You saw him grow up, trained him, mentored him, you even moved schools just to  teach him. And yet, when he disappeared, you didn’t even try to find out what happened.”

Hansung turned to face Aguero fully, his expression still calm but with a hint of something darker in his eyes. “And what would I have found if I had?” he asked quietly. “The truth? The lies? Or something in between?”

Aguero frowned, trying to decipher the meaning behind Hansung’s words. “What do you know?” he demanded. “What are you hiding from me?”

Hansung remained silent for a long moment, his gaze steady. “Some things are better left buried, Aguero. Sometimes, the truth does more harm than good.”

Aguero’s frustration boiled over, his voice rising. “Don’t give me that cryptic nonsense, Hansung! If you know something about what happened to Bam, you owe it to me to tell me!”

Hansung met Aguero’s gaze with an intensity that caught him off guard. “I owe you nothing,” he said firmly. “Bam’s path was his own, and he made his choices. I respected that. But if you’re looking for someone to blame, look elsewhere.”

Aguero felt a surge of anger, his fists clenching at his sides. “You were supposed to protect him!” he snapped. “You were supposed to be there for him when it mattered!”

Hansung’s expression softened, a hint of sadness flickering in his eyes. “And I did, in my own way. But Bam wasn’t a child, Aguero. He was stronger than you think, and he knew the risks he was taking.”

Aguero stared at Hansung, his mind racing. There was more to this, he could feel it. But Hansung wasn’t going to give him the answers he sought, at least not willingly.

After a tense silence, Aguero finally spoke, his voice cold. “If you know anything, anything at all, about what happened to Bam… you should tell me. Because if I find out you’ve been hiding something, I won’t hesitate to make you regret it.”

Hansung didn’t respond, his expression unreadable as he watched Aguero turn and leave the archery room. As the door closed behind him, Aguero’s mind was in turmoil. Hansung’s evasiveness only confirmed his suspicions—there was something more to Bam’s death, something that Hansung was keeping from him.

As Aguero walked away from the archery practice room, his resolve hardened. He would find out the truth, no matter what it took. And if Hansung—or anyone else—was hiding something, they would pay the price.

The visit to Regal Heights School had stirred up old memories and new questions, but Aguero knew one thing for certain: he was closer to the truth than ever before. And he wouldn’t stop until he uncovered every last secret.

Aguero walked through the forest, the quiet rustling of leaves and the occasional call of a bird the only sounds that accompanied him. His mind was still reeling from the conversation with Hansung Yu at Regal Heights. There was no denying that the encounter had left him with more questions than answers, but he had to push it aside for now. He had a mission to focus on, and any distractions could be dangerous.

As the trees thinned, he spotted a familiar figure up ahead. Ran was waiting for him, leaning against a tree with a slight scowl on his face. But Aguero couldn’t help but notice something unusual. Ran was holding a lunchbox, a detail that made Aguero’s lips twitch into a small, rare smile.

“Is that what I think it is?” Aguero asked, his tone teasing.

Ran looked down at the lunchbox, his ears turning a little pink. “Elaine made me bring it,” he mumbled, not quite meeting Aguero’s eyes. “She insisted I take it with me when I met up with Asensio earlier this morning.”

Aguero’s smile widened a fraction. “That must be a new experience for you,” he said, his voice softening. “We didn’t grow up with that, did we? Warmth, love, gentleness… they were all foreign concepts to us.”

Ran shifted uncomfortably, clearly not used to such conversations. “I know,” he muttered, his embarrassment evident. But he didn’t pull away when Aguero reached out to gently ruffle his hair, a rare show of affection.

“I’m happy you get to experience it now, even if it’s a little late,” Aguero said, his tone sincere.

Ran’s eyes softened, though he quickly looked away, trying to hide his awkwardness. “Yeah, well… I guess it’s nice,” he replied, his voice a bit gruff. “But don’t go getting all sentimental on me, okay?”

Aguero chuckled, a sound that felt almost foreign to him. “I’ll try my best.”

The two brothers continued their walk toward the hideout, the atmosphere between them lighter than it had been in a long time. As they approached, the familiar sight of the hideout came into view, but what caught their attention was the sight of the rest of TFN lounging outside. Hockney and Rak had apparently decided it would be a good idea to have dinner under the stars, and the rest of the group seemed to be in agreement.

Aguero noticed the way they were all relaxed, enjoying each other’s company. It was a sight he rarely saw, but it brought a small smile to his face. This was what they had fought for—a moment of peace amidst the chaos of their lives.

But just as Aguero was about to step forward, a sudden wave of cold, murderous intent washed over them, freezing everyone in place. Aguero’s eyes narrowed as he felt the familiar, suffocating presence behind him. He didn’t need to turn around to know who it was.

Maschenny stood there, her expression a mix of anger and something darker. The bloodlust radiating from her was palpable, and behind her stood Maria, her eyes fixed on Aguero with a mixture of curiosity and wariness. Maschenny’s eyes were locked onto Aguero, and the fury in them was unmistakable.

“So,” Maschenny’s voice cut through the tense silence like a blade, “you’ve been busy, haven’t you, Aguero?”

Aguero remained calm, even as the rest of TFN tensed around him. He knew Maschenny well enough to know that this wasn’t just a casual visit. The fact that she had tracked him down to the hideout meant she was here for a reason, and that reason couldn’t be good.

“What brings you here?” Aguero asked, his voice steady despite the tension in the air.

Maschenny’s eyes narrowed, her gaze never leaving his. “I heard you paid a visit to Regal Heights,” she said, her tone icy. “Care to explain why?”

Aguero didn’t flinch, even though he could feel the weight of her words. “It was a personal visit,” he replied, his tone neutral. “Nothing more.”

Maschenny’s eyes darkened, and she took a step forward, her presence even more oppressive. “Don’t lie to me, Aguero. I know you better than that. You’ve always been too curious for your own good. Why were you really there?”

Aguero’s mind raced. He couldn’t tell her the real reason, not yet. There was too much at stake, and he didn’t trust Maschenny with that information. But he also knew that she wouldn’t back down easily.

“I don’t owe you an explanation,” Aguero said, his voice firm. “What I do is my business, not yours.”

Maschenny’s eyes flashed with anger, and before anyone could react, she moved with lightning speed, grabbing Aguero’s face in a vice-like grip. The suddenness of the action shocked everyone, and for a moment, the world seemed to hold its breath.

The rest of TFN immediately went into fight mode, their instincts kicking in as they sensed the danger. Ran, who was closest to Aguero, didn’t hesitate to let his bloodlust flare, ready to defend his brother if necessary. Endorsi, Hockney, Elaine, and the others were equally prepared, their eyes cold and calculating as they assessed the situation.

Maschenny, however, just laughed, the sound chilling in the tense atmosphere. “Look at this,” she taunted, her grip on Aguero’s face tightening. “You’ve managed to gather quite the loyal following, haven’t you? All of them ready to jump to your defense at a moment’s notice. But tell me, Aguero, is it really worth it? Chasing after a ghost?”

Aguero’s eyes met hers, cold and defiant. “What are you talking about?”

Maschenny’s smile turned cruel. “Oh, don’t play dumb with me. We all know why you created this little group of yours. It’s all because of your never-ending hope that Bam is still out there, isn’t it?”

The mention of Bam made the air around them grow even colder. Aguero felt a surge of anger, but he forced himself to remain calm. He couldn’t let Maschenny provoke him.

“You’re wrong,” Aguero said, his voice steady despite the fury boiling beneath the surface. “This isn’t about Bam.”

Maschenny’s eyes gleamed with dark amusement. “Isn’t it? You can lie to yourself all you want, Aguero, but you can’t lie to me. I know you too well. You’ve never been able to let go, even after all these years. That’s why you’re still searching, that’s why you can’t move on.”

Aguero’s jaw tightened, but he didn’t respond. He knew there was no point in arguing with her, not when she was determined to see things her way.

Maschenny leaned in closer, her voice dropping to a low, menacing whisper. “You’ve forgotten who raised you, who trained you to be the way you are. Don’t think for a second that you’re free from me, Aguero. I know every move you make, every thought that crosses your mind. Because I made you this way.”

Aguero’s eyes burned with cold fire as he met her gaze. “I am not your puppet, Maschenny. I never was.”

Maschenny’s smile faded, replaced by something far more dangerous. “Maybe not. But don’t forget who holds the strings. I could kill every single one of you right now, and there wouldn’t be a damn thing you could do about it.”

The threat hung in the air like a dark cloud, but Aguero didn’t waver. He could feel the tension in the group behind him, but he also knew they were ready to fight if it came down to it. Maschenny might be powerful, but so were they.

For a long moment, the two siblings stared each other down, the weight of their shared history heavy between them. Aguero could see the darkness in Maschenny’s eyes, the same darkness that had haunted his childhood, the same darkness that had shaped him into the person he was today.

But he wasn’t that helpless child anymore. He was stronger now, and he had people he cared about, people he would protect no matter the cost.

Finally, Maschenny released her grip on his face, stepping back with a cold, calculating expression. “Remember this, Aguero,” she said, her voice like ice. “No matter how far you go, no matter what you do, you will never escape me. I will always be watching.”

With that, she turned on her heel and walked away, Maria following silently behind her. The oppressive atmosphere slowly lifted as they disappeared from view, but the tension remained thick in the air.

Aguero let out a slow breath, trying to calm the storm of emotions raging inside him. He could feel the eyes of his team on him, their concern palpable.

Ran was the first to speak, his voice low and serious. “Are you okay?”

Aguero nodded, though he didn’t trust himself to speak just yet. He could still feel the ghost of Maschenny’s grip on his face, the reminder of just how dangerous she was.

“I’m fine,” he finally said, his voice more controlled than he felt. “She’s just trying to get under my skin.”

Elaine frowned, her eyes still narrowed in the direction Maschenny had gone. “She’s dangerous, Aguero. We can’t take her lightly.”

Aguero knew she was right, but he also knew they didn’t have a choice. Maschenny was a threat they couldn’t ignore, but they couldn’t let her derail their mission either.

“We stick to the plan,” Aguero said, his voice firm. “We can’t afford to be distracted, not now.”

The others nodded, though Aguero could see the unease in their eyes. They all knew how dangerous Maschenny was, how unpredictable she could be. But they also trusted Aguero, and that trust was what held them together.

“Let’s get back inside,” Aguero said, his voice gentler now. 

After the encounter with Maschenny, the air in the hideout was thick with tension. The members of Twenty-Fifth Night gathered in the common room, hoping to shake off the unease that clung to them. Normally, nights like these were a time for relaxation, a chance to forget the weight of the world outside. But tonight, there was no escaping the gravity of what had transpired.

Elaine and Novick moved to the small bar tucked away in the corner of the room, silently agreeing to get everyone something to drink. Even as they busied themselves with the task, they exchanged glances—both knowing that whatever calm they could offer would be temporary at best. As they handed out the drinks, each member took theirs with a quiet "thanks" or a nod, but the usual lighthearted banter was absent.

Aguero stood near the fireplace, his eyes fixed on the dancing flames as if searching for answers within them. His mind was a storm, thoughts and emotions clashing violently. He knew they were all waiting for him to speak, to share what had happened at Regal Heights, and what had transpired with Maschenny. But where to begin? How could he explain the growing sense of dread that gnawed at him, the feeling that something was fundamentally wrong?

Endorsi, never one to shy away from breaking the silence, finally spoke up. "Aguero," she said, her voice unusually soft, "what happened back at Regal Heights?"

Aguero tore his gaze away from the flames, meeting Endorsi's eyes. The others were watching him too—Elaine, Dan, Hatz, Hockney, Novick, Rak, Ran, Shibisu—all of them waiting for an answer.

He sighed, running a hand through his hair. "I visited Regal Heights because... I had a feeling. A gut instinct I couldn’t ignore. When I got there, I ended up talking to Hansung, Bam’s old archery coach."

"Bam’s coach?" Hockney echoed, his brow furrowing. "That guy was practically a father figure to Bam."

"Exactly," Aguero replied, his voice laced with frustration. "Hansung was someone who watched Bam grow up. He mentored him, taught him everything he knew about archery, about discipline. They were close, and yet... he never searched for him. Not once. Doesn’t that strike you as odd?"

The room fell silent, everyone lost in their own thoughts. Endorsi was the first to speak again, her tone careful. "You think he knows something?"

Aguero nodded slowly. "It’s hard not to think that. The way he talked about Bam... it was almost like he knew more than he was letting on. But it wasn’t just that. It was overwhelming because... it made me question everything. Everything we've done, everything we believed."

Elaine, who had been quiet until now, set her drink down on the table, her voice steady but concerned. "What exactly are you saying, Aguero?"

Aguero looked around the room, at the faces of his friends—no, his family—who had been with him through everything. He could see the worry in their eyes, the uncertainty. They had been through so much together, and now he was about to lay another burden on them.

"I’m saying," Aguero began, his voice faltering slightly, "that something has been off for a while now. I’ve felt it, but I kept pushing it aside, telling myself it was just my imagination. But now... with everything happening, I can’t ignore it anymore."

He paused, swallowing hard as he tried to gather his thoughts. "I know deep down that Bam isn’t coming back anymore. We’ve searched for years, and we found nothing. I accepted that he was gone. But... there’s still this part of me, this small, irrational part, that keeps hoping. And I feel guilty for it. Guilty for hoping that he might still be alive, even when I know it’s impossible."

The room was heavy with emotion, the weight of Aguero’s words sinking in. Hatz was the first to break the silence, his voice rough. "You shouldn’t feel guilty for hoping, Aguero. Bam meant everything to us. It’s only natural to want him back."

"But what if that hope is what's holding me back?" Aguero countered, his voice strained. "What if it’s making me see things that aren’t there? Hansung, Maschenny, all of it... I can’t help but wonder if I’m just desperate to find something, anything, that might explain what happened to Bam."

Shibisu, who had been listening quietly, finally spoke up. "Aguero, none of us blame you for hoping. We all wish Bam were still here. We all want answers. But you’re not alone in this. We’re in this together."

Aguero looked at Shibisu, appreciating the sincerity in his words. But he couldn’t shake the doubt gnawing at him. "Do you ever wonder if Bam might still be out there?" he asked, his voice barely above a whisper. "Do any of you think that maybe... just maybe... he’s alive somewhere?"

The question hung in the air, heavy with the weight of what it implied. One by one, the others responded, their voices filled with a mixture of longing and resignation.

"I do," Elaine admitted softly, her eyes glistening with unshed tears. "Sometimes, I dream that he’s still out there, waiting for us to find him."

"Me too," Endorsi added, her voice thick with emotion. "I think about it all the time, even though I know it’s probably just wishful thinking."

Hatz clenched his fists, his knuckles white. "I want to believe he’s alive. But I don’t know if I can anymore."

Hockney nodded slowly. "I’ve seen things, glimpses of the past, of Bam. But nothing that suggests he’s still alive. Still, I can’t help but hope."

Rak grunted, his voice gruff. "If he’s out there, we’ll find him. We owe him that much."

Novick, who had been silent, finally spoke, his voice steady. "Hope isn’t a weakness, Aguero. It’s what keeps us going. Even if it’s a long shot, even if it’s just a sliver of a chance... it’s worth holding onto."

Aguero listened to their words, feeling a mix of relief and sorrow. They understood. They felt it too, that impossible hope. But was it enough? Could they really keep going, keep searching, knowing that the odds were stacked against them?

"I’m sorry," Aguero said finally, his voice thick with emotion. "I’m sorry for dragging you all into this, for making you go through all of this with me."

"Don’t apologize," Dan said firmly, placing a hand on Aguero’s shoulder. "We’re in this together. Whatever happens, we face it as a team. As a family."

Aguero nodded, feeling a sense of gratitude that words couldn’t express. They were right. Whatever the future held, they would face it together. And maybe, just maybe, that was enough. The tension in the room began to ease, replaced by a quiet resolve. They might not have all the answers, but they had each other. And for now, that was enough to keep the darkness at bay.

As the night wore on, the conversation shifted to lighter topics. They reminisce about the good times with Bam, sharing stories and memories that brought both laughter and tears. The drinks Elaine and Novick had brought were passed around, loosening tongues and lightening the mood.

But even as they laughed and joked, the weight of Aguero’s words lingered in the back of their minds. The hope that Bam might still be alive, the fear that they were chasing shadows—it was a burden they all carried, even if they didn’t say it out loud.

Later, as the group began to disperse, heading to their rooms for the night, Aguero found himself standing by the balcony, staring out into the darkness. The stars were faint tonight, obscured by clouds that threatened rain. It felt fitting, somehow.

Endorsi approached him, her footsteps soft on the wooden floor. She stood beside him, following his gaze out the balcony. "You know," she said quietly, "Bam always believed in you. Even when things got tough, he never doubted you."

Aguero smiled faintly, though it didn’t reach his eyes. "I wish I had that kind of faith in myself."

"You do," Endorsi insisted. "You just don’t realize it. We all believe in you, Aguero. And we believe in Bam too, wherever he is."

Aguero turned to look at her, his expression conflicted. "Do you really think he’s out there?"

Endorsi met his gaze, her eyes filled with a quiet determination. "I don’t know. But I want to believe he is. Because if there’s even the slightest chance that he’s alive, then it’s worth everything we’ve gone through."

Aguero nodded slowly, feeling a flicker of hope stir in his chest. It wasn’t much, but it was something. And for now, that was enough.

"Thank you," he said softly, his voice filled with gratitude.

Endorsi smiled, reaching out to squeeze his hand. "You don’t have to thank me, Aguero. We’re all in this together, remember?"

Aguero squeezed her hand in return, feeling a warmth spread through him that he hadn’t felt in a long time. It wasn’t the answer he had been looking for, but it was a start. And maybe, just maybe, it was enough to keep going.

Chapter Text

The sun was high in the sky, casting a warm glow over the sandy beach. Gentle waves lapped at the shore, and the air was filled with the sound of laughter. Amidst it all, Viole knelt in the sand, his hands carefully shaping the walls of a grand sandcastle. Two children, a boy with dark purple hair and a girl with brown hair, eagerly helped him, their small hands digging into the sand and adding their own creative touches to the structure.

“Viole! Viole, look at this!” the little girl exclaimed, holding up a seashell she had found. Her eyes sparkled with excitement as she ran over to him, placing the shell on top of one of the castle’s towers.

“That’s perfect, Miseng,” Viole said with a gentle smile, placing his hand on her head. “It makes the castle look even more special.”

The boy, his purple hair sticking out in every direction, was busy carving a moat around the castle with a stick. “This will keep out the bad guys!” he declared with determination.

Viole chuckled softly. “Good thinking, Prince. A castle is only as strong as its defenses.”

As the three of them worked together, a voice called out from further down the beach. “Viole! Viole, where are you?”

Viole looked up, squinting against the bright sunlight. He could make out a figure waving at him in the distance. Recognizing the voice, he turned to the children and smiled. “Wangnan’s looking for us. Let’s finish up here and go see what he wants, okay?”

The children nodded eagerly, and the three of them quickly added the finishing touches to their sandcastle. Satisfied with their creation, Viole stood up and dusted the sand off his hands. He took one last look at the castle, then called out, “Wangnan! We’re over here!”

Wangnan jogged over, his yellow hair tousled by the sea breeze. He was grinning widely, a carefree expression that had become all too familiar to Viole over the past few years.

“There you are,” Wangnan said, slightly out of breath. “I was wondering where you ran off to. Goseng made lunch, and she’s insisting everyone come and eat.”

“Lunch sounds great,” Viole replied, nodding. He turned to the children, who were still admiring their castle. “Come on, Miseng, Prince. Let’s go eat.”

The two children scrambled to their feet, grabbing Viole’s hands as they headed back towards the small beach house that had become their home. As they walked, Viole felt a deep sense of contentment, a warmth that spread through his chest. He didn’t remember much about his past, but this—this simple, happy life—felt like something he could hold onto.

When they reached the house, the smell of food wafted through the open windows. Goseng, Akraptor, Horyang, and Yihwa were all gathered around a table set up on the porch, where they could enjoy the ocean view as they ate.

“There you are, Viole,” Yihwa said with a bright smile as they approached. “I was about to send Wangnan out with a search party.”

Viole smiled back, feeling a warmth in his chest at her teasing. “Sorry, we got a little carried away with the sandcastles.”

“No worries,” Akraptor chimed in, pulling out a chair for Viole. “You’re just in time. Goseng’s been working on this special dish all morning.”

“Special dish?” Viole asked as he sat down, his curiosity piqued.

Goseng beamed with pride as she set a large bowl of something fragrant and colorful in the center of the table. “Yep! It’s a recipe I learned from my grandmother. It’s a bit of a twist on the traditional stew, but I think you’ll like it.”

Viole nodded, looking around the table at the familiar faces. Wangnan and his family had taken him in when he had nowhere else to go, when his memories were nothing but a hazy fog. They treated him like one of their own, with no expectations or demands. They had taught him everything from scratch—how to cook, how to do laundry, even how to navigate the daily challenges of life. They had given him a place to belong, and for that, he was grateful beyond words.

The meal was filled with laughter and conversation, the kind that made the day seem brighter. Viole listened quietly as Wangnan and Prince bantered back and forth, while Yihwa and Goseng discussed their plans for the garden out back. Horyang, as usual, was quiet but content, his presence was solid and reassuring.

After lunch, as the others began to clear the table, Viole found himself standing by the railing, gazing out at the ocean. The waves were calm, the horizon stretching endlessly. It was peaceful, yet there was a part of him that couldn’t help but feel a nagging emptiness, a void where his memories should have been.

Wangnan joined him, leaning on the railing beside him. “Penny for your thoughts?” he asked, his tone was light.

Viole shook his head slightly, a small smile tugging at his lips. “Just… thinking. About how much things have changed.”

Wangnan nodded in understanding. “It’s been a journey, that’s for sure. But you’ve come a long way, Viole. We all have.”

“I wouldn’t have made it without you,” Viole admitted, glancing at Wangnan. “You and everyone else… you gave me a place to belong.”

Wangnan smiled, a warm and genuine expression. “You’re family, Viole. That’s what we do for each other.”

The word ‘family’ echoed in Viole’s mind, bringing with it a sense of comfort. He didn’t remember his past, but maybe that didn’t matter as much as he thought. Maybe what mattered was the life he had now, the people who cared about him, and the new memories they were creating together.

As the sun began to immerse towards the horizon, casting a golden glow over the beach, Viole felt a quiet resolve settling within him. He didn’t need to dwell on what was lost. He had a new life, a new family, and that was enough.

Later that evening, after the children had been tucked into bed and the house had quieted down, Viole found himself sitting on the porch alone. The night air was cool, the stars twinkling brightly above. He was lost in thought when the door creaked open, and Wangnan stepped out, carrying two mugs of steaming tea.

“Thought you could use something to warm up,” Wangnan said, handing one of the mugs to Viole.

“Thanks,” Viole replied, taking the mug and wrapping his hands around it, feeling the warmth seep into his skin.

They sat in comfortable silence for a while, the sounds of the night filling the air. Eventually, Wangnan broke the silence.

“You know, Viole, I’ve been thinking,” Wangnan began, his voice thoughtful. “I know you don’t remember much about your past, but that doesn’t mean you’re starting from zero. You’re still you, just with a clean slate.”

Viole glanced at him, listening intently.

“What I mean is,” Wangnan continued, “you have the chance to decide who you want to be, without being tied down by whatever came before. And you don’t have to figure it out alone. We’re all here for you, no matter what.”

Viole smiled softly, appreciating Wangnan’s words. “You’re right. I’ve been so focused on what I’ve lost that I haven’t really thought about what I’ve gained.”

“That’s the spirit,” Wangnan said, clinking his mug against Viole’s. “Here’s to the future, whatever it may bring.”

As they sat together, watching the stars and sipping their tea, Viole felt a deep sense of peace. The future was uncertain, but he knew he didn’t have to face it alone. With Wangnan and his newfound family by his side, he was ready to embrace whatever lay ahead.

The sun peeked over the horizon, casting a warm golden glow over the tranquil waters surrounding the island. The gentle sound of waves lapping against the shore was accompanied by the distant calls of seabirds, heralding the start of another peaceful day. The island, far removed from the hustle and bustle of city life, was a sanctuary of serenity. For Viole and Wangnan’s family, it was home.

Viole awoke to the soft morning light filtering through the curtains of his small bedroom. The room was simple, furnished with only the essentials—a bed, a wooden dresser, and a small table by the window. He stretched, feeling the familiar ache of muscles well-used from daily chores. It was a comforting feeling, one that reminded him of the life he had built with these people who had taken him in.

He could hear the faint clatter of dishes from the kitchen, a sign that Goseng was already up and preparing breakfast. Viole quickly dressed and made his way to the kitchen, where the scent of freshly brewed coffee greeted him. Goseng was at the stove, her hair tied back in a loose bun, humming softly to herself as she flipped pancakes.

“Good morning, Viole,” she greeted him with a warm smile as he entered.

“Good morning, Goseng,” Viole replied, returning her smile. “Need any help?”

“I’m almost done here, but could you set the table?” she asked, nodding towards the stack of plates on the counter.

“Of course,” Viole said, moving to gather the plates and silverware. 

He set the table with practiced ease, arranging everything neatly. It was a simple task, but one that he found comfort in. Helping Goseng around the house had become part of his routine, a way to contribute to the family that had given him so much.

As he worked, the sound of footsteps echoed from the hallway, and soon Wangnan appeared, his hair still slightly tousled from sleep. He was carrying his camera bag, a constant companion for him as a photographer.

“Morning, Viole, Goseng,” Wangnan said with a grin, slinging the bag over his shoulder. “Smells great in here.”

“Good morning,” Viole and Goseng replied in unison.

Wangnan grabbed a cup of coffee and took a sip, savoring the rich flavor. “So, what’s on the agenda for today?” he asked, leaning against the counter.

“Same as usual,” Goseng replied with a chuckle. “Breakfast, then I’ll walk the kids to school. Yihwa has a class early today, so she’s already left. Akraptor and Horyang are heading to work, and I think Miseng and Prince have a big test today.”

Wangnan nodded, his expression thoughtful. “Sounds like a busy day. I’ll be out taking some shots for that nature article I’m working on. The editor wants something special for this one.”

“Need any help?” Viole offered.

“Nah, I’ve got it covered,” Wangnan said with a smile. “But thanks. I might need a hand editing later, though.”

“Sure thing,” Viole agreed, glad to have a role to play.

Just then, the sound of laughter filled the house as Miseng and Prince came running into the kitchen, still in their pajamas. The two middle schoolers were full of energy, even in the early morning hours.

“Morning, everyone!” Miseng chirped, her eyes were bright with excitement. “Guess what? We’re having a science experiment today at school! It’s going to be so cool!”

Prince, always the quieter of the two, nodded in agreement. “Yeah, and we get to make our own rockets. It’s going to be awesome.”

“That sounds like fun,” Goseng said, placing a plate of pancakes on the table. “But first, you two need to get dressed and eat breakfast.”

“Yes, auntie,” the siblings chorused before dashing off to their rooms to get ready.

Viole couldn’t help but smile as he watched them go. There was something heartwarming about the simple, everyday moments they shared. Despite the challenges that life had thrown at them, Wangnan’s family had found happiness in each other, and they had welcomed Viole into that circle without hesitation.

As everyone gathered around the table for breakfast, the conversation flowed easily. Akraptor, who was usually the first to leave for work, took a moment to sip his coffee and check the time.

“I’m heading out soon,” Akraptor said, glancing at his watch. “Got a big project at the office today, so I might be late coming home.”

“Good luck with that,” Wangnan said, giving him a thumbs-up. “You’ve got this.”

“Thanks,” Akraptor replied, a rare smile tugging at the corners of his mouth.

Horyang, who had been quietly eating his breakfast, nodded in agreement. “Same here. I’ll probably be back after dinner, so don’t wait up.”

“We’ll save you both some leftovers,” Goseng promised, her tone motherly.

After breakfast, the house buzzed with activity as everyone prepared for the day ahead. Viole helped Miseng and Prince gather their school supplies, making sure they had everything they needed. Once they were ready, he joined Goseng in walking them to the nearby school, which was a short distance from their home.

The path to the school wound through a lush forest, the trees swaying gently in the morning breeze. The air was fresh and crisp, filled with the scent of pine and earth. Viole often found solace in these walks, the peaceful surroundings providing a sense of calm that he had grown to cherish.

As they approached the school, the children waved goodbye and ran ahead to join their friends, their laughter echoing through the trees. Goseng watched them go, a fond smile on her face.

“They’re growing up so fast,” she said softly, almost to herself.

Viole nodded, sensing the bittersweet tone in her voice. “They are. But they’re good kids. You have done a great job raising them.”

Goseng smiled at the compliment, her eyes softening. “Thank you, Viole. That means a lot.”

The two of them began their walk back to the house, taking their time to enjoy the quiet morning. The island had a way of making time feel slower, more deliberate. It was a place where the rush of the outside world seemed distant, replaced by a rhythm that was more in tune with nature.

When they returned home, the house was already quiet, with everyone else having left for the day. Viole helped Goseng with the morning chores, tidying up the kitchen and making sure everything was in order. It was a routine they had fallen into, one that gave Viole a sense of purpose.

As they worked, Goseng glanced at Viole, her expression thoughtful. “You know, Viole, I’ve been meaning to ask… how are you doing? I mean, really doing.”

Viole paused, considering her question. It wasn’t often that he was asked about his own feelings. “I’m… doing okay,” he said after a moment. “It’s strange, sometimes, not remembering anything from before. But being here, with all of you, it makes it easier.”

Goseng nodded, understanding in her eyes. “We’re glad to have you here, Viole. You’re part of our family now, and that’s never going to change.”

“Thank you,” Viole replied, his voice filled with genuine gratitude. “That means a lot to me.”

The rest of the day passed in a peaceful blur. Viole spent the afternoon helping Goseng with various tasks around the house—mending a broken fence, tending to the small vegetable garden in the backyard, and making sure the chickens were fed. It was honest work, the kind that left him tired but satisfied at the end of the day.

As evening approached, the family began to trickle back home one by one. Horyang was the first to return, his usually stoic expression softening when he saw the lights on in the house.

“Welcome home, Horyang,” Viole greeted him as he stepped inside.

“Yeah,” Horyang replied with a nod. “How was your day?”

“Quiet,” Viole said with a small smile. “But good. How about you?”

“Busy, but nothing I can’t handle,” Horyang said, his tone as even as always.

A short while later, Yihwa returned from her job at the school. She looked tired but content, her long day of teaching having gone well.

“Hey, everyone,” Yihwa called out as she kicked off her shoes and joined them in the living room. “I’m starving. What’s for dinner?”

“Goseng’s making her famous stew,” Viole said, catching the pleased expression on Yihwa’s face.

“Perfect,” Yihwa said, sinking into a chair. “I need something warm after that crazy day.”

As the evening wore on, the house filled with the comforting sounds of family life. The clatter of dishes as they set the table, the chatter of conversation as they shared stories from their day, and the occasional burst of laughter that echoed through the rooms. It was a life that Viole had come to treasure, one that felt more real and tangible than anything from his past.

Later, after dinner had been cleared away and the younger kids had gone to bed, Viole found himself sitting on the porch with Wangnan once again. The night air was cool and refreshing, carrying the scent of the ocean. The stars above were bright and clear, a reminder of the beauty that surrounded them.

“Another day in paradise, huh?” Wangnan said with a chuckle, leaning back in his chair.

“Yeah,” Viole agreed, his gaze drifting towards the horizon. “It really is.”

They sat in comfortable silence for a while, each lost in their own thoughts. There was no need for words between them; the quiet companionship was enough.

Eventually, Wangnan spoke again, his voice thoughtful. “You know, Viole, I’m glad you’re here with us. I don’t think this place would feel the same without you.”

Viole turned to look at him, a small but genuine smile tugging at his lips. “I feel the same way, Wangnan. You all mean a lot to me.”

Wangnan grinned, his usual lightheartedness returning. “Good to hear. Now, how about we grab a couple of drinks and toast to another day well spent?”

“Sounds good,” Viole agreed, rising from his chair.

As they headed back inside, the warm light from the house spilling out onto the porch, Viole felt a deep sense of contentment. For the first time in as long as he could remember, he felt like he belonged somewhere. This island, this family—it was home. And no matter what the future held, he knew he would always carry a piece of this place in his heart.

Viole stood at the edge of the shore, his feet sinking slightly into the damp sand. He watched as the waves lapped gently against the beach, their rhythmic motion almost hypnotic. It was early—earlier than usual—but the quietness of the morning felt like a welcome embrace.

"Hey, Viole!" Wangnan called out, waving from further down the beach. He was already knee-deep in the shallow waters, tugging at the edge of a fishing net that had been left out overnight. "You ready to get your hands dirty?"

Viole walked over, his bare feet leaving faint impressions in the sand. "Of course," he replied, rolling up the sleeves of his shirt. "Let's see what we've caught today."

Wangnan grinned, his eyes gleaming with a mix of excitement and mischief. "With the way you handle those nets, you'd think you've been doing this your whole life."

Viole chuckled softly as he stepped into the water beside Wangnan. "You’d be surprised how often I think the same thing. Who knows, maybe I was a fisherman before… well, before."

"Maybe," Wangnan mused as they both grabbed hold of the net, their fingers curling around the rough rope. "Or maybe you're just one of those people who's naturally good at everything."

Viole smirked at the comment, though his thoughts briefly drifted to the past he couldn’t remember. "Maybe," he echoed, though his tone was less certain. "Let's get these nets in."

Together, they began pulling the nets toward the shore. The weight of the catch made the task more difficult than it seemed, but Viole’s strength turned what would have been a strenuous job into something almost effortless. He moved with a fluidity that belied the physical demands, his muscles flexing with each tug. The nets were heavy, laden with wriggling fish that gleamed silver in the morning light, but Viole didn’t falter.

Wangnan, despite being used to Viole’s near-superhuman abilities, couldn’t help but marvel at how naturally Viole moved, as if this was second nature to him. "You know," Wangnan said between breaths, "I think you missed your calling as a fisherman. If this whole island life doesn’t work out, you could always make a living off the sea."

Viole smiled faintly as he glanced at Wangnan. "It’s just muscle memory, I suppose. Besides, I’ve got a pretty good teacher."

"Flattery won’t get you out of hauling the next load," Wangnan shot back with a laugh, wiping the sweat from his brow. "But I appreciate it."

The two men continued their work, hauling in net after net, their rhythm becoming more synchronized with each pull. The water sloshed around their legs, the coolness of it refreshing in the rising heat of the day. The sun climbed higher in the sky, casting longer shadows across the beach as they worked in companionable silence, interrupted only by the occasional joke or comment.

When the final net was secured on the shore, Viole stretched his back, feeling the satisfying pull of tired muscles. Wangnan plopped down onto the sand, his breath coming in heavy pants.

"That should be enough for today," Wangnan said, shielding his eyes from the sun as he looked up at Viole. "We’ll eat well tonight, thanks to you."

Viole offered a hand to Wangnan, who took it gratefully. "It’s a team effort," Viole said, helping him up. "And besides, you know more about this than I do."

Wangnan dusted off his pants, grinning. "Maybe, but you’ve got the muscle. I’m just here to look pretty."

They both laughed, the sound carried away by the ocean breeze. As they began the short walk back to the house, the warmth of the sun and the rhythmic crash of the waves brought a sense of peace that was as rare as it was precious. It was moments like these that made island life worth every bit of effort.

By the time they reached the house, the sun was higher in the sky, and the day had fully awakened. Goseng was in the kitchen, her hands busy with preparing the dough for bread. The kitchen was filled with the comforting scent of yeast and flour, a prelude to the day’s meal.

"How was the catch?" Goseng asked without looking up, her hands kneading the dough with practiced ease.

"Good," Wangnan replied as he dropped the bucket of fish by the door. "Viole made it look easy, as usual."

Goseng glanced up at Viole, her eyes warm with affection. "Well, we’ll make sure all that hard work pays off. Viole, would you mind helping with dinner later? I could use an extra pair of hands."

"Of course," Viole said, already moving to wash up. "I’ll just clean up, and I’ll be right with you."

As the afternoon stretched on, Viole found himself in the kitchen, side by side with Goseng. The kitchen was the heart of the home, a place where the scents of cooking mingled with laughter and conversation. Viole had come to enjoy these moments, where the tasks were simple, yet fulfilling.

"Here, like this," Goseng instructed, showing Viole how to knead the dough properly. "You need to press firmly but not too hard. Let the dough give under your hands."

Viole mimicked her movements, his hands pressing into the soft dough. "Like this?"

"Exactly," Goseng said with a smile. "You’re a quick learner, Viole."

Viole focused on the dough, finding the repetitive motion almost meditative. "You’re a good teacher," he replied, a small smile tugging at his lips.

They worked in comfortable silence for a while, the only sounds being the rhythmic kneading and the occasional clatter of pots and pans. Viole moved from one task to the next with quiet efficiency—stirring the pot of stew that simmered on the stove, slicing vegetables with a precision that surprised even him, and shaping the dough into loaves that would soon fill the house with the aroma of freshly baked bread.

As the afternoon light filtered through the kitchen window, casting a warm glow over the room, Viole couldn’t help but feel a sense of contentment. There was something inherently comforting about preparing a meal with his own hands, knowing that it would nourish the people he cared about. And yet, beneath that contentment, there was a faint, nagging feeling—an emptiness that he couldn’t quite place. It was as if there was something just out of reach, something he should remember but couldn’t.

"You’re quiet today," Goseng observed as she stirred the stew. "Is everything okay?"

Viole blinked, realizing he had been lost in thought. "Yeah, I’m fine. Just… thinking."

"About anything in particular?" she asked, her tone gentle.

Viole hesitated, unsure how to put his thoughts into words. "It’s nothing, really. Just… sometimes, I feel like there’s something I’m missing. Something important."

Goseng paused, her expression softening. "It’s understandable, given everything you’ve been through. But you know, Viole, it’s okay to not have all the answers. Sometimes, we just have to focus on what’s in front of us, and trust that the rest will come in time."

Viole nodded, appreciating her words even if they didn’t completely ease his mind. "You’re right. I guess I just need to be patient."

Goseng smiled, a motherly warmth in her eyes. "You’ve got a good heart, Viole. Don’t forget that."

As the evening settled in, the house gradually filled with the sounds of life. Wangnan returned from his errands, Miseng and Prince came home from school, and the usual bustle of the household resumed. Dinner was a lively affair, with everyone gathered around the table, their conversations overlapping in a cheerful cacophony.

Viole sat quietly at his spot, watching as Miseng animatedly recounted her day at school while Prince nodded along, his mouth full of stew. Yihwa chimed in with stories from her classroom, and even Horyang offered a rare smile as he listened.

After dinner, as the younger children prepared for bed, Viole helped Goseng clean up the kitchen. The dishes clinked softly as they worked, the scent of soap mingling with the lingering aroma of the meal they had shared. Once the kitchen was spotless, Goseng began gathering supplies for Miseng and Prince’s school projects.

"Viole, could you help me with these?" she asked, gesturing to the stack of paper, glue, and colored pencils.

"Of course," Viole said, joining her at the table.

The two of them worked together in quiet companionship, cutting and pasting with careful precision. Viole found the task surprisingly enjoyable, his focus on the small details helping to quiet his restless thoughts. Goseng, ever patient and meticulous, guided him through the process, her gentle instructions a comfort.

"This reminds me of when I was in school," Goseng said with a soft laugh. "I used to love doing these kinds of projects."

Viole smiled as he carefully glued a piece of colored paper onto the poster. "You must have been the top of your class."

"Oh, hardly," Goseng replied, shaking her head. "But I enjoyed it. I guess that’s what matters."

They continued working, the quiet night enveloping them in a peaceful cocoon. The only sounds were the soft rustling of paper and the occasional murmur of conversation. The simplicity of the task, coupled with the warmth of the home, brought a sense of normalcy that Viole cherished.

When they finished, Goseng looked over their work with satisfaction. "I think we’re done. The kids will be happy with this."

Viole nodded, feeling a sense of accomplishment. "They’ll do great."

As they put away the supplies, Viole couldn’t help but feel grateful for these moments. The simplicity of life on the island, the warmth of the family, and the sense of belonging he had found here—it was all more than he could have hoped for. And yet, as he lay in bed that night, listening to the gentle sound of the waves outside, that lingering emptiness remained, a quiet reminder of the past he couldn’t quite grasp.

The weekend brought a sense of calm to the small island community, a serene haven far removed from the bustle of city life. Here, life moved at a gentle pace, marked by the ebb and flow of the tides and the rustling of palm trees swayed by ocean breezes. The residents, though few, had formed a close-knit community, bound together by the shared rhythms of island life and the simplicity of their surroundings. For Viole, it had become a place of quiet solace, where he had gradually found his place within Wangnan’s family and the wider island community.

It was a Saturday, the day when the islanders gathered for their communal meal. The tradition had been established long before Viole arrived on the island, a way for everyone to come together, share food, and enjoy each other's company. Over time, Viole had become a regular participant in these gatherings, working alongside Wangnan, Miseng, Prince, Goseng, Akraptor, Yihwa, and Horyang to prepare the feast. Despite the lingering shadows of his forgotten past, Viole had found peace in these moments, surrounded by the warmth of friendship and laughter.

The day began with the sun rising over the horizon, casting a golden glow across the ocean. Viole stood outside, watching the waves lap against the shore. The early morning air was crisp and refreshing, filling his lungs with each deep breath. As he stood there, the familiar sound of Wangnan’s voice called out from behind him.

“Viole, are you ready to get started?” Wangnan asked, walking over with a smile.

Viole turned to face him, nodding slightly. “Yes, let’s get to it. The sooner we start, the more time we’ll have to enjoy the meal.”

Wangnan chuckled. “That’s the spirit. I think Miseng and Prince are already in the kitchen helping Goseng.”

The mention of Miseng and Prince brought a faint smile to Viole’s face. The two middle school students were full of energy and enthusiasm, their youthful spirits often brightening the day for everyone around them. Despite their differences in age and experience, Viole had grown fond of them, appreciating their company and the joy they brought to the household.

Inside the house, the kitchen was already buzzing with activity. Miseng stood on a stool, stirring a pot of soup with a determined expression, while Prince carefully sliced vegetables on the counter beside her. Goseng, ever the patient teacher, guided them both with gentle words of encouragement.

“Remember to keep stirring, Miseng, so the soup doesn’t stick to the bottom,” Goseng said, watching over her with a watchful eye.

“I know, Auntie,” Miseng replied, her brow furrowed in concentration. “I’m not going to burn it this time!”

Prince, focused on his task, glanced up with a grin. “If you do, at least we’ll have my vegetables to save the day.”

Miseng stuck her tongue out at him. “As if! Your veggies are too boring to save anything.”

Goseng laughed softly, shaking her head at their banter. “Both of you are doing great. Just keep it up, and we’ll have a meal to be proud of.”

Viole entered the kitchen with Wangnan, his presence drawing the attention of the children. Miseng beamed at him, her earlier teasing forgotten. “Viole, do you want to taste the soup? I think it’s getting really good!”

Viole approached the stove, leaning down to take a whiff of the bubbling pot. The aroma of fresh vegetables and herbs filled his senses, reminding him of the many meals they had shared together. He dipped a spoon into the soup, taking a small sip.

“It’s delicious, Miseng,” Viole said, smiling down at her. “You’ve done a great job.”

Miseng’s face lit up with pride. “Really? Thanks, Viole! I’m going to make sure it’s perfect for everyone.”

Prince smirked, unable to resist a playful jab. “Don’t get too full of yourself, Miseng. We still have a lot to do.”

“I’m not full of myself!” Miseng shot back, crossing her arms. “You’re just jealous because I’m a better cook than you.”

Wangnan, sensing the rising tension, quickly intervened. “Alright, you two, let’s not start a food fight before we even get to the table. How about we all work together and make this the best meal yet?”

The children exchanged competitive glances but ultimately nodded in agreement. Viole and Wangnan shared a look of amusement before turning their attention to the tasks at hand. There was still much to prepare, and the communal meal would not make itself.

As the morning wore on, the house was filled with the sounds of chopping, stirring, and the occasional burst of laughter. Yihwa arrived to lend a hand, her sharp eyes and quick hands making quick work of the fruit platters. Akraptor followed soon after, his deep voice adding to the lively chatter as he shared stories of his week with the others. Horyang, ever the quiet presence, worked diligently on setting up the tables outside, ensuring that everything was in place for the feast.

By the time noon arrived, the preparations were complete. The tables outside were adorned with colorful cloths, and the spread of food was nothing short of a feast. There were roasted meats, fresh seafood, an array of vegetables, and of course, Miseng’s soup, which she proudly presented at the center of the table. The smell alone was enough to make anyone’s mouth water, and the sight of the meal brought a sense of satisfaction to all who had worked on it. One by one, the island’s residents began to arrive, drawn by the promise of good food and good company. Viole stood back for a moment, observing the scene as the community gathered. There was a warmth in the air, a feeling of belonging that he had come to cherish. The people here were not just neighbors; they were friends, companions who had welcomed him into their lives without question.

Wangnan’s voice broke through his thoughts. “Come on, Viole. Don’t just stand there, join us.”

Viole nodded, stepping forward to take his place at the table. The chatter around him was light and joyful, the conversations flowing as easily as the food. Miseng and Prince had already begun swapping stories with the other children, their laughter ringing out above the din. Yihwa and Goseng were deep in conversation with some of the other women, discussing everything from recipes to the latest gossip on the island.

Akraptor, seated next to Viole, nudged him with his elbow. “How are you feeling, Viole? You’ve been a part of this for a while now. Got any favorite moments?”

Viole considered the question, his gaze drifting over the gathered crowd. “I think… my favorite part is seeing everyone together like this. The laughter, the stories—it makes everything feel more real, more connected.”

Akraptor smiled, his eyes crinkling at the corners. “That’s what it’s all about. Out here, we’re all family, even if we’re not related by blood. We look out for each other.”

“Family…” Viole repeated softly, the word resonating within him. It was a concept that felt both familiar and distant, like a memory just out of reach. “I’m grateful to be a part of it.”

Wangnan, overhearing the conversation, leaned in with a grin. “You’ve always been part of it, Viole. We’re lucky to have you.”

The meal continued with easy laughter and shared stories, the atmosphere relaxed and filled with warmth. As the sun dipped lower in the sky, casting a golden hue over the island, the conversations turned to more light-hearted topics. The children, their bellies full, ran off to play, their voices echoing across the open space. The adults, content and satisfied, lingered at the tables, savoring the last moments of the gathering.

Viole found himself seated beside Yihwa, who had been unusually quiet throughout the meal. She was gazing out at the horizon, her expression thoughtful.

“Yihwa, are you alright?” Viole asked gently.

She turned to him with a faint smile. “I’m fine, Viole. Just thinking about how lucky we are to have this—this life, this community. It’s not something everyone gets to experience.”

Viole nodded, understanding her sentiment. “It’s special, isn’t it? Being here, surrounded by people who care.”

Yihwa’s smile grew a little brighter. “Yes, it is. And it’s even better knowing we’re all here together.”

The two of them sat in comfortable silence for a while, watching as the sky slowly darkened, the first stars beginning to appear. The communal meal had drawn to a close, but the bonds formed and strengthened over the years would continue to hold them all together.

As the evening deepened, the islanders began to say their goodbyes, drifting back to their homes with full stomachs and happy hearts. Wangnan’s family lingered a little longer, tidying up and making sure everything was in order before heading back to their own house. Viole helped gather the dishes, his movements practiced and efficient after so many months of the same routine.

As they walked back toward their home, Miseng and Prince walked ahead, their voices carrying on the breeze as they chatted about the day. Goseng, carrying a basket of leftovers, fell into step beside Viole.

“You did well today, Viole,” she said, her tone warm. “The meal wouldn’t have been the same without your help.”

Viole shook his head modestly. “I didn’t do much. Everyone played a part.”

The simple pleasure of communal meals, the shared stories, and the easy laughter had woven themselves into the fabric of his new life. And as he looked out at the peaceful night, Viole felt a deep sense of contentment, knowing that he had found a place where he truly belonged.

Chapter Text

It was a slow morning on the island, a rare treat where time seemed to slow down just enough to savor the moments of leisure. Wangnan, the island’s unofficial photographer, was up early, savoring the tranquility before the day’s activities began. As he made his way to the living room, he couldn’t help but smile at the sight that greeted him.

In the middle of the room, Miseng and Prince were sitting on the floor, their attention focused on Viole, who was seated between them. Viole’s long hair was being carefully brushed and braided by the two children, who were clearly enjoying the task. The normally unruly hair was now smooth and neatly arranged, and Viole was smiling with an expression of relaxation and contentment.

“Good morning, everyone,” Wangnan said, walking in with a cheerful tone. “Looks like you’re having fun with Viole’s hair.”

Miseng looked up, her eyes were bright. “Good morning, Wangnan! We’re just giving Viole’s hair a bit of a makeover. It’s nice to do something relaxing for a change.”

Prince added with a grin, “And Viole’s been very patient with us. He even let us use his hair as a practice for our braiding skills!”

Viole chuckled, his eyes crinkling at the corners. “It’s actually quite nice. I’m enjoying the pampering.”

Goseng, who was preparing breakfast in the kitchen, poked her head out and caught Wangnan’s attention. “Wangnan, could you come here for a moment?”

Wangnan approached her, sensing that there was something she needed to discuss. Goseng, looking thoughtful, said, “We’re running a bit low on supplies. I was thinking it might be a good idea for you to head to the nearest city and pick up what we need.”

Wangnan nodded, considering the request. “Sure, I can do that. It might be a good chance for Viole to get out and see a bit more of the island. What do you think, Viole? Want to come along for the trip?”

Viole, who had been listening in, looked up with interest. “I’d love to. It sounds like a nice change of pace.”

“Great!” Wangnan said, turning back to Goseng. “We’ll head out after breakfast.”

As they finished up their meal, Wangnan and Viole prepared for their trip. Viole had never been to the city on the island, and he was excited to see more of it. The city, though small, was bustling with activity, and it was always an experience to walk through its streets.

After breakfast, Wangnan and Viole set off, making their way to the city. The path to the city was scenic, winding through lush greenery and offering stunning views of the surrounding ocean. The weather was perfect, with a gentle breeze and clear skies.

When they arrived in the city, it was alive with the usual Saturday market atmosphere. Vendors lined the streets, selling everything from fresh produce to handmade crafts. The air was filled with the sounds of haggling and cheerful chatter.

Wangnan and Viole navigated the crowded streets, stopping at various stalls to pick up the supplies they needed. They were deep in conversation about the latest local news when, suddenly, a commotion erupted nearby. A woman’s voice rang out, her distress evident as she cried for help.

“My purse! My purse was stolen!” the woman shouted, her voice trembling.

Without a second thought, Viole’s instincts kicked in. He glanced at Wangnan and, seeing that he was busy gathering the last of their purchases, took off in the direction of the thief. The crowded streets made it difficult to see, but Viole’s heightened senses and agility allowed him to quickly close in on the thief.

The thief was fast, weaving through the market with impressive speed. Viole pushed himself harder, his legs moving in a blur as he closed the gap. When he finally reached the thief, he tackled him with precise force, pinning him down on the ground. The thief struggled, but Viole’s grip was firm. With a quick motion, Viole retrieved the purse and got to his feet, holding it up triumphantly.

He raced back to where he had left Wangnan, who was standing beside the distressed woman. Wangnan’s expression was a mix of concern and mild annoyance.

“There you are!” Wangnan said, trying to hide his relief. “I was starting to wonder where you disappeared to.”

The woman, now visibly calmer, looked at Viole with gratitude. “Thank you so much! I thought I’d never get my purse back. You’re a real hero!”

Viole offered a modest smile, handing the purse back to her. “I’m just glad I could help.”

Wangnan, though trying to maintain his scolding tone, couldn’t hide his smile. “You know, you could at least tell me where you’re going before you run off like that. I had to finish picking up all our things by myself.”

“I’m sorry,” Viole said, looking sheepish. “I just saw someone in trouble and acted on instinct. I didn’t mean to leave you hanging.”

Wangnan chuckled, shaking his head. “Well, I suppose it’s good to know that your instincts are sharp. Just try to keep me in the loop next time, okay?”

“Got it,” Viole replied, nodding. “I’ll be more mindful.”

With the supplies finally gathered and the crisis averted, Wangnan and Viole continued their shopping. They picked up a few additional items and made their way back to the island, the atmosphere between them lighter and more relaxed after the day’s unexpected excitement.

As they approached their home, the sun was beginning to set, casting a warm golden glow over the landscape. Wangnan and Viole unloaded the supplies and carried them inside, where Goseng was waiting with a smile.

“Welcome back!” Goseng greeted them. “How was the trip?”

“It was eventful,” Wangnan said with a grin. “Viole had quite the adventure.”

Goseng’s eyes widened in curiosity. “Oh? Do tell.”

Viole recounted the day’s events, including the purse-snatching incident. Goseng listened with interest, her admiration was evident. “Well, I’m glad everything turned out well. And thank you, Viole, for helping out. It sounds like you really saved the day.”

“It was nothing,” Viole said, brushing off the praise. “Just did what needed to be done.”

As they finished putting away the supplies, the family gathered for dinner. The atmosphere was warm and welcoming, filled with the chatter of the day’s events. The meal was a simple, hearty one, and everyone seemed to enjoy the relaxed pace after the excitement of the day.  Miseng and Prince excitedly shared their latest school news, while Akraptor, Horyang, and Yihwa discussed their work. Viole found himself deeply immersed in the conversations, feeling a profound sense of belonging.

As the night wore on and the family began to wind down, Viole reflected on the day’s events. The thrill of the chase, the gratitude of the woman, and the warmth of the community all blended together into a comforting feeling of contentment. 

Lying in bed later that night, Viole thought about how much his life had changed since coming to the island. The memories of his past were still elusive, but the experiences he was gaining now were creating a new kind of richness. He had found not only a place to live but also a place where he felt truly valued. And as he drifted off to sleep, Viole couldn’t help but look forward to the many more moments like this, filled with the simple joys of life on the island and the warm companionship of those who had become his new family.

The days on the island continued to blend together in a comforting rhythm for Viole. He found himself fully immersed in the daily routines of Wangnan's family, helping with various tasks and contributing to the smooth running of their lives. Despite the routine and the warmth of the community, Viole couldn’t shake a growing sense of frustration that gnawed at him.

Each morning, he woke up early, joined Wangnan and the family for breakfast, and then set about his chores. Whether it was helping Goseng with household duties, running errands, or assisting Yihwa with school-related tasks, Viole threw himself into his work with a dedication that impressed everyone around him. However, no matter how busy he kept himself, a persistent feeling of emptiness followed him throughout the day.

One morning, as Viole and Wangnan were cleaning up after breakfast, Viole paused, wiping his hands on a towel as he stared out of the window. “Wangnan, do you ever feel like there’s something missing, even when you’re surrounded by good things?”

Wangnan glanced at Viole, noting the troubled expression on his face. “I guess everyone feels that way sometimes. It’s natural to question things, especially when you’re trying to find your place in the world.”

“I suppose,” Viole replied, sighing. “It’s just... I feel like there’s a part of me that’s missing. I work hard, I help out, but I still don’t know who I really am or what I’m meant to do.”

Wangnan nodded sympathetically. “It’s understandable. Not having memories can be incredibly disorienting. But sometimes, it takes time to figure things out. You’re doing well here, and you’re an important part of our family. Maybe that’s enough for now.”

“I hope so,” Viole said quietly, though he wasn’t entirely convinced. He turned back to his tasks, determined to push aside his doubts, if only for a while.

Later that day, Viole found himself in the garden, watching Miseng and Prince with some outdoor chores. Miseng was trying to fix a broken fence, while Prince was carrying tools and supplies. Viole was using a hammer to secure some nails when he noticed a strange sensation, as if his movements were guided by an instinct he didn’t fully understand.

“Hey, Viole, could you help us with this?” Miseng asked, holding up a loose board.

“Sure,” Viole replied, walking over. As he worked, his movements were precise and fluid, almost as if he had been doing this his whole life. Miseng and Prince exchanged surprised glances.

“You’re really good at this,” Prince remarked, eyes wide. “How did you learn to handle tools like that?”

Viole looked up, puzzled. “I don’t know. I just... it feels natural.”

As the day progressed, Viole’s frustration grew. He was trying to help Akraptor with some repair work in the shed when an unexpected accident occurred. A metal rod fell from a shelf and was headed straight for Akraptor’s head. Without thinking, Viole dove forward, catching the rod mid-air with reflexes that astonished everyone

“What the—” Akraptor exclaimed, staring at Viole in shock. “How did you do that?”

“I— I don’t know,” Viole stammered, looking just as surprised. “It just happened. It felt like I knew exactly what to do.”

The incident left Viole feeling more unsettled than ever. His ability to react so instinctively, despite his lack of memory, only deepened his confusion about himself. That night, as he lay in bed, he couldn’t stop thinking about the day's events.

The next morning, Viole was in the kitchen, kneading dough for bread with Goseng. The aroma of freshly baked goods filled the air, and despite the comforting environment, Viole felt a pang of frustration.

“You seem lost in thought, Viole,” Goseng said, glancing at him. “Everything alright?”

Viole looked up, forcing a smile. “Yeah, just... thinking about some things. Sometimes I feel like I’m trying to grasp at shadows.”

Goseng set down her rolling pin and gave him a reassuring look. “It’s okay to feel that way. You’re doing a great job, and we’re all here for you. Maybe, in time, the pieces will start to fall into place.”

“Thanks, Goseng,” Viole said, appreciating her support. He returned to his work, trying to focus on the task at hand, but his thoughts kept drifting back to his fragmented sense of self.

Days turned into weeks, and Viole continued to integrate himself into the daily life of Wangnan’s family. The routines were comforting, but the gaps in his memory and the unexplained skills he exhibited kept him on edge. Each time he used a skill he couldn’t remember learning, it felt like a reminder of the puzzle he couldn’t solve.

One afternoon, Viole was helping Yihwa set up a classroom project for her students. As they arranged materials and prepared for the next day’s lessons, Viole’s mind wandered.

“You’re really good at this,” Yihwa commented as Viole neatly organized a stack of papers. “It seems like you have a knack for teaching.”

Viole chuckled softly. “It’s funny you should say that. Sometimes I feel like I’m capable of things I don’t even remember learning.”

Yihwa raised an eyebrow. “Well, maybe you have a hidden talent. Or maybe it’s just instinct. Either way, you’re a great help.”

“Thanks,” Viole replied, though his uncertainty lingered. “I just wish I could figure out why I can do things I don’t remember learning.”

As evening approached, Viole joined Goseng in preparing the children’s school projects. Miseng and Prince had brought home various assignments, and Goseng needed help with organizing and preparing their materials.

“Could you help me with these projects, Viole?” Goseng asked, handing him a stack of papers and supplies. “We need to get them ready for tomorrow.”

“Of course,” Viole said, taking the materials with a nod. He worked alongside Goseng, carefully assembling the projects and checking for any missing pieces.

The task was straightforward, but Viole’s mind was occupied with thoughts of his identity. As he worked, he noticed how easily he handled the tasks, how quickly he adapted to the needs of the projects. Each time he demonstrated an unexpected skill or knowledge, it reminded him of how little he truly understood about himself.

Finally, as the day wound down and the projects were completed, Viole sat back and looked at the work they had done. The familiar feeling of contentment from being productive was there, but it was tinged with the frustration of not knowing why he was able to perform tasks so effortlessly.

Wangnan joined him in the kitchen, where Viole was finishing up the last of the preparations. “How’s everything going?” Wangnan asked, noticing Viole’s pensive expression.

“Good,” Viole said, though his voice lacked enthusiasm. “Just trying to figure out why I can do things I don’t remember learning.”

Wangnan placed a comforting hand on Viole’s shoulder. “It sounds like you’re grappling with more than just daily tasks. Remember, it’s okay to have questions and uncertainties. You’re making a positive impact here, and that’s what matters.”

Viole nodded, appreciating Wangnan’s words. “Thanks, Wangnan. I just hope one day I’ll find the answers I’m looking for.”

As Viole finished up his chores and prepared for bed, he reflected on his journey so far. The sense of purpose he found in helping Wangnan’s family was real, but the shadows of his past loomed large. Each day brought new challenges and revelations, but the search for his identity and purpose continued. 

And so, Viole faced each new day with a mixture of hope and uncertainty, determined to navigate the complexities of his life on the island while continuing to seek answers to the questions that lingered in his heart.

Wangnan leaned back against the seat of the taxi, exhausted but satisfied after a long day of shooting. The city on the island was buzzing with life, even as the sun dipped below the horizon, casting a warm, golden glow over the skyscrapers and bustling streets. The photoshoot had gone well; the photographer was pleased, and Wangnan had managed to get through it without any major mishaps, which was a small victory in itself.

As the taxi wove its way through the evening traffic, Wangnan let his thoughts drift. He couldn’t wait to get home, kick off his shoes, and relax with his friends. Maybe he’d even find out what the others were up to. Hockney had been working on a new art piece, and Hatz had mentioned something about training with Shibisu. It would be good to catch up, to feel normal again after the craziness of the day.

But as they crossed a bridge leading out of the city center, Wangnan noticed something that made his heart skip a beat. In the rearview mirror, a black SUV had been following them for the last few blocks. It could have been a coincidence, but something about the way it stuck close to their car, matching every turn and speed adjustment, made him uneasy.

“Hey, can you take a different route?” Wangnan asked the driver, trying to keep his voice casual.

The driver glanced at him in the mirror, raising an eyebrow but nodding. “Sure thing. Any particular reason?”

Wangnan shook his head. “Just... want to avoid traffic.”

The driver shrugged and made a sharp turn down a side street, speeding up slightly as they moved away from the main road. For a moment, Wangnan relaxed, thinking they’d lost the SUV. But then, just as they were approaching an intersection, the black vehicle appeared again, its headlights glaring in the twilight.

Wangnan’s pulse quickened. This wasn’t just a coincidence. Someone was following him.

“Step on it,” he urged the driver, his tone more insistent now.

The driver frowned, clearly sensing the tension in Wangnan’s voice. He hit the gas, the taxi lurching forward as it sped through the intersection. The SUV followed suit, keeping pace easily.

Wangnan’s mind raced. Who were these people? What did they want with him? He wasn’t exactly someone important, just a guy trying to make a living. But then his thoughts shifted to Viole—his friend, someone who became an integral part of their lives. Could this have something to do with him?

The SUV drew closer, and Wangnan’s heart pounded in his chest. He couldn’t lead them back home, couldn’t risk putting his friends in danger. He needed to lose them, and fast.

“Take the next left,” Wangnan instructed, scanning the road ahead for any opportunities to escape.

The driver complied, the taxi swerving down a narrow alley. For a brief moment, they were out of sight, but the SUV wasn’t far behind. Wangnan spotted a small side street coming up on the right.

“Turn there, and then stop,” he said quickly.

The driver hesitated but did as he was told, the taxi skidding to a halt in the shadows of the alleyway. Wangnan threw cash onto the front seat.

“Sorry about this,” he said as he jumped out of the car. “Keep the change. Don’t wait for me.”

Before the driver could respond, Wangnan was sprinting down the alley, his heart in his throat. He could hear the SUV’s engine roar as it sped past the alley, its occupants unaware that their target had just slipped away.

For a few moments, Wangnan ran blindly, his instincts guiding him through the maze of backstreets. He didn’t know this part of the city well, but he hoped it would be enough to throw off his pursuers. Eventually, he slowed down, ducking into a dark doorway to catch his breath.

The streets were quieter here, the sounds of the bustling city center now a distant hum. Wangnan leaned against the cold stone wall, trying to steady his breathing. What had just happened? Who were those people? And why were they after him?

His mind kept circling back to Viole. There had always been something enigmatic about him, something that set him apart from the rest of them. Viole was kind, no doubt, but there was a depth to his silence, a weight to his gaze, that Wangnan had never quite understood. Could Viole’s past have caught up with them?

Before Wangnan could think further, he heard footsteps approaching from the mouth of the alley. He pressed himself deeper into the shadows, holding his breath. A figure emerged, tall and cloaked in a long, dark coat. The man moved with a purpose, his gaze sweeping the area as if searching for something—or someone.

Wangnan’s heart skipped a beat as the man’s eyes locked onto his hiding spot. It was too late to run. He was trapped.

“Come out,” the man called, his voice was calm but commanding. “I know you’re there.”

Wangnan hesitated, his mind racing for a way out. But there was no use hiding any longer. He stepped out from the shadows, keeping a wary distance between himself and the stranger.

“What do you want?” Wangnan demanded, trying to keep his voice steady despite the fear gnawing at him.

The man studied him for a moment, his eyes cold and calculating. “You’re Ja Wangnan, aren’t you?”

Wangnan stiffened. “Who’s asking?”

The man ignored his question, taking a step closer. “You’re close to someone I’m very interested in. A boy named Viole.”

Wangnan’s stomach dropped. “What do you want with Viole?”

The man smirked, as if amused by Wangnan’s attempt to be brave. “Let’s just say he reminds me of someone. Someone from the underworld.”

“The underworld?” Wangnan echoed, his mind reeling. “What are you talking about?”

“You really don’t know, do you?” The man tilted his head, studying Wangnan as if trying to decide how much to reveal. “Viole isn’t who he seems. He’s hiding something—something that could change everything.”

Wangnan’s heart pounded in his chest. What was this guy saying? Was Viole really someone else? Someone dangerous? “I don’t know what you’re talking about,” Wangnan said, trying to sound convincing.

The man’s eyes narrowed. “You should be careful, Ja Wangnan. People like Viole... they bring trouble. And if you’re not careful, you’ll get caught up in it.”

Before Wangnan could respond, the man turned and disappeared into the shadows, leaving him standing there, shaken and confused.

Wangnan stood frozen, his mind racing with questions. Who was that man? And what did he mean about Viole? Was it possible that his friend was hiding something from them—something dangerous? The idea of Viole being connected to the underworld sent chills down his spine.

But even as the fear settled in, another emotion rose to the surface: determination. If there was more to Viole than met the eye, then Wangnan needed to know. He couldn’t just let this go, couldn’t let his friend face whatever this was alone. Viole had become important to him, to all of them, and Wangnan wasn’t about to abandon him now.

With a deep breath, Wangnan began to make his way out of the alley, his mind already formulating a plan. He needed to talk to the others, to share what had happened and figure out what to do next. This wasn’t something he could handle on his own, but with his friends by his side, they might just stand a chance.

As he walked, Wangnan’s thoughts drifted back to Viole, to the quiet moments they’d shared, the way Viole had always been there for him, even when he didn’t need to be. Whatever secrets Viole was hiding, Wangnan was determined to uncover the truth. Not to betray him, but to help him. Because no matter what, Viole was his friend. And friends didn’t leave each other behind.

The journey back home felt longer than usual, each step heavy with the weight of the night’s events. By the time Wangnan reached the familiar door of their hideout, the sky had turned a deep indigo, the first stars just beginning to twinkle overhead.

Wangnan had always been protective of his family, but after the encounter with the mysterious stranger, that protectiveness grew into something more intense, almost desperate. He hadn’t told anyone about what happened—about the ambush, the cryptic warning about Viole, or the unnerving feeling that there was something dangerous lurking just out of sight. He kept it all to himself, letting it fester in his mind, gnawing at him every time he looked at Viole.

The stranger’s words replayed in his head endlessly, Viole... someone from the underworld. He resembles someone from the shadows . The more Wangnan thought about it, the more he couldn’t shake the feeling that there was more to Viole than what meets the eye. But how could he bring it up? Viole didn’t remember anything from his past, and the last thing Wangnan wanted was to make him feel more lost or confused. 

So, Wangnan kept quiet. But his behavior changed in subtle ways that didn’t go unnoticed by the others in their makeshift family. He found himself hovering around Viole, always looking for signs of danger, staying close whenever they were out in the city or even just around the island. It was as if he was waiting for something to happen, for another ambush, for another strange figure to emerge from the shadows and demand answers Wangnan didn’t have.

Goseng was the first to notice. "Wangnan," she said one afternoon as they sat on the porch, watching the waves crash against the shore, "is everything okay? You’ve been acting... different lately."

"Yeah," Yihwa chimed in, looking up from the book she was reading. "You’re always watching Viole like you’re expecting him to sprout wings and fly away."

Akraptor, who had been mending a fishing net nearby, glanced over, his brow furrowed. "They’re right. You’re on edge, Wangnan. What’s going on?"

Wangnan forced a laugh, trying to play it off. "It’s nothing. Just... I don’t know, I’ve been thinking a lot, that’s all."

"About what?" Horyang asked, his deep voice calm but concerned. He had a way of getting to the heart of things without prying too much.

Wangnan hesitated, looking out at the ocean. He couldn’t tell them the truth, not when he didn’t even know what the truth was himself. "I’m just worried about Viole," he finally said, which wasn’t a lie, but it wasn’t the whole truth either. "He doesn’t remember anything from before he came here, and I just... I want to make sure he’s okay, that’s all."

Goseng exchanged a glance with Yihwa, then said gently, "Viole’s strong, Wangnan. He might not remember who he was, but that doesn’t change who he is now. And he’s with us. We’ll make sure he’s safe."

"I know," Wangnan murmured, but the words didn’t bring him the comfort they used to. He wished he could tell them everything, but he couldn’t bring himself to burden them with the weight of his worries.

As the days turned into weeks, Wangnan’s unease only grew. Viole, who had always been quiet and introspective, started to seem more distant, more restless. He spent long hours staring out at the sea, as if searching for something just beyond the horizon. Wangnan could see the tension in his friend’s shoulders, the way his gaze would linger on the waves as if they held the answers to questions he couldn’t even articulate.

One evening, as the sun dipped low in the sky and the island was bathed in the warm, golden light of dusk, Wangnan found Viole standing alone on the beach, his feet buried in the sand as he stared out at the vast expanse of the ocean. The sight of him, so small and solitary against the backdrop of the endless sea, tugged at something deep within Wangnan.

"Viole," he called out, making his way down the beach toward him. "What are you doing out here?"

Viole turned slightly, his expression was pensive. "Just thinking," he said quietly, his voice almost lost in the sound of the waves.

Wangnan stopped beside him, following his gaze out to the water. "About what?"

Viole was silent for a long moment, and Wangnan wondered if he would answer at all. But then, Viole spoke, his voice was soft and distant. "About who I was before... before I came here. I don’t remember anything, and sometimes... sometimes it feels like I’m missing something important. Like there’s a part of me that’s just out of reach, but I can’t figure out how to find it."

Wangnan felt a pang of guilt twist in his chest. He wanted to tell Viole everything—about the stranger, about the warning, about his suspicions—but he couldn’t bring himself to do it. Instead, he forced a smile and placed a hand on Viole’s shoulder. "You’re not missing anything, Viole. You’re here with us, and that’s what matters."

Viole turned to look at him, and for a moment, Wangnan saw something flicker in his friend’s eyes—something dark and uncertain. "But what if I’m not who you think I am?" Viole asked, his voice was barely above a whisper. "What if I was someone... I don’t know, dangerous?"

The words hit Wangnan like a punch to the gut, and he had to fight to keep his voice steady. "It doesn’t matter who you were," he said firmly. "What matters is who you are now. And right now, you’re our family, and we’re here for you. No matter what."

Viole looked away, his gaze returning to the horizon. "I appreciate that, Wangnan. I really do. But I can’t help feeling like there’s something out there... something I need to remember. Something important."

Wangnan’s heart ached for his friend, and he wished more than anything that he could take away the uncertainty and the pain. But all he could do was stand by Viole’s side and offer what little comfort he could.

As night fell, the two of them stood in silence, the cool ocean breeze tugging at their clothes as the stars began to twinkle in the sky above. It was a peaceful moment, but beneath the surface, Wangnan could feel the tension coiling tighter, like a storm waiting to break.

Over the next few days, Viole’s restlessness only grew. He would often slip away from the group, wandering the island on his own, disappearing for hours at a time. The others noticed too, but they didn’t press him for answers, understanding that Viole was grappling with something none of them could fully comprehend.

One night, unable to sleep, Wangnan decided to go for a walk. The moon was high in the sky, casting a silver glow over the island as he made his way down to the beach. He wasn’t surprised to find Viole there, standing at the water’s edge, his feet barely touching the waves as they lapped against the shore.

"Viole," Wangnan called out softly, not wanting to startle him.

Viole didn’t turn around, but he acknowledged Wangnan’s presence with a slight nod. "Can’t sleep either, huh?"

Wangnan shook his head as he approached, coming to stand beside Viole. "No. I’ve got a lot on my mind."

"Same here," Viole murmured, his voice carrying a note of melancholy. He glanced at Wangnan, and in the moonlight, his eyes seemed even darker, as if they were holding secrets he couldn’t begin to fathom. "Do you ever feel like there’s something you’re supposed to be doing, but you can’t figure out what it is?"

Wangnan sighed, rubbing the back of his neck as he considered the question. "Yeah, sometimes. But I try not to let it get to me. I just focus on what’s in front of me, you know? The people I care about, the things I can do right now. That’s what keeps me going."

Viole nodded, but there was a hint of frustration in his expression. "But what if what’s in front of you isn’t enough? What if there’s something more out there, something you need to find?"

Wangnan looked at him, seeing the turmoil that had been brewing beneath Viole’s calm exterior. "Are you thinking about leaving the island?" he asked carefully, trying to keep his voice neutral.

Viole hesitated, his gaze was fixed on the horizon as if he could see something out there that no one else could. "I don’t know," he admitted. "Part of me wants to stay here, with all of you. But another part of me... it’s like there’s a pull, something telling me that I need to find out who I was before I lost my memories. And it scares me, because I don’t know what I’ll find."

Wangnan felt a surge of protectiveness rise within him, but he forced himself to stay calm. "Viole, whatever you decide, we’ll support you. But just know that you don’t have to do it alone. We’re your family now, and we’ll help you figure this out, no matter what it takes."

Viole turned to look at Wangnan, and for the first time, there was a glimmer of hope in his eyes. "Thank you, Wangnan. That means a lot."

Wangnan nodded, relieved to see that some of the tension had left Viole’s shoulders. "We’re all in this together, Viole. Don’t forget that."

Viole offered a small smile, but it didn’t quite reach his eyes. "I won’t. But... I think I need some time to figure things out on my own. I don’t want to drag you all into this until I know more."

Wangnan wanted to protest, to insist that they should face whatever was coming together, but he knew Viole well enough to understand that pushing him would only make things worse. So instead, he placed a hand on Viole’s shoulder and squeezed gently. "Just promise me you’ll be careful. And if you ever need us, don’t hesitate to ask for help. We’re not going anywhere."

Viole nodded, his expression softening. "I promise."

They stood there in silence for a while longer, the sound of the waves filling the space between them. Wangnan could feel the weight of the unknown pressing down on both of them, but he refused to let it crush his spirit. No matter what the future held, they would face it together, just like they always had.

As the days passed, Wangnan tried his best to keep things normal, to keep the peace within their little family. But the more time went on, the more he could see Viole pulling away, spending more time alone, wandering the island with a far-off look in his eyes. It was clear that the questions about his past were eating away at him, and Wangnan hated that he couldn’t do more to help.

One evening, as they sat around the dinner table, the mood was unusually quiet. Normally, their meals were filled with laughter and chatter, but tonight, there was a tension in the air that no one seemed able to shake.

"Viole," Goseng finally said, breaking the silence, "are you okay? You’ve been really quiet lately."

Viole looked up from his plate, his expression apologetic. "I’m sorry, I didn’t mean to worry you guys. I’ve just... had a lot on my mind."

Yihwa frowned, her concern was evident. "Is it about your memories? Are you remembering something?"

Viole shook his head. "No, it’s not that. It’s more like... I’m starting to feel like I need to remember. Like there’s something important that I’ve forgotten, and I won’t be whole until I figure out what it is."

Akraptor leaned forward, his brow furrowed. "Do you want to talk about it? Maybe we can help."

Viole hesitated, glancing around the table at the faces of his friends—his family. He could see the concern in their eyes, the willingness to help, but he didn’t want to burden them with his problems. "I appreciate it," he said slowly, "but I think this is something I need to figure out on my own. I don’t even know where to start, and I don’t want to drag you all into it until I have a better idea of what’s going on."

Wangnan, who had been silent up until now, finally spoke up. "You’re not dragging us into anything, Viole. We’re here for you, no matter what. But if you need space to figure things out, we’ll respect that too."

Viole offered a grateful smile. "Thanks, Wangnan. I promise, if I need help, I’ll come to you. But for now... I just need some time to think."

The rest of the meal passed in relative silence, each of them lost in their own thoughts. Wangnan couldn’t shake the feeling of unease that had settled over him. He didn’t like the idea of Viole dealing with this alone, but he also knew that pushing too hard could drive him further away.

That night, after everyone else had gone to bed, Wangnan found himself unable to sleep. He tossed and turned, his mind racing with thoughts of Viole and the mysterious past that seemed to be haunting him. Finally, unable to take it anymore, he got up and decided to go for a walk.

As he stepped outside, the cool night air hit his face, and he took a deep breath, trying to calm the turmoil in his mind. He had a feeling he knew where Viole would be, and sure enough, as he made his way down to the beach, he saw his friend standing at the water’s edge, staring out at the ocean.

Wangnan approached slowly, not wanting to startle him. "Can’t sleep again, huh?"

Viole turned his head slightly, acknowledging Wangnan’s presence with a nod. "No. There’s just... too much on my mind."

Wangnan came to stand beside him, following his gaze out to the dark horizon. The sound of the waves was soothing, but it did little to ease the tension in his chest. "I’ve been thinking about what you said," Wangnan began carefully, "about needing to remember who you were before."

Viole sighed, his shoulders slumping slightly. "I know I’ve been distant lately, and I’m sorry for that. I just... I feel like I’m trapped in this strange limbo, like I’m stuck between two worlds. I want to be here, with all of you, but I also feel like there’s something out there that I need to find. Something that will help me understand who I am."

Wangnan frowned, his concern was deepening. "But what if remembering your past doesn’t change anything? What if it just makes things more complicated?"

"I’ve thought about that," Viole admitted, "and it scares me. But I can’t keep ignoring it. Every day, it feels like there’s this... this pull, this force drawing me toward something I can’t see. I need to know what it is, even if it’s painful."

Wangnan felt a lump form in his throat. He hated seeing Viole like this—so lost, so uncertain. "Viole, no matter what you find, we’ll be here for you. You don’t have to face this alone."

Viole turned to look at him, his expression was a mixture of gratitude and sadness. "I know, Wangnan. And that means more to me than you’ll ever know. But I think... I think this is something I need to do on my own, at least for now."

Wangnan nodded slowly, understanding but still worried. "Just promise me you’ll be careful. And if you ever feel like you’re in over your head, come back to us. We’ll figure it out together."

"I promise," Viole said softly, his voice filled with sincerity. "I won’t do anything reckless. I just... I need to see this through."

They stood there in silence for a while longer, the sound of the waves filling the space between them. The moon hung high in the sky, casting a pale glow over the beach, and for a moment, it felt like they were the only two people in the world.

Finally, Wangnan sighed, breaking the quiet. "Let’s head back. It’s late, and we both need to get some sleep."

Viole nodded, though his gaze lingered on the horizon for a few more seconds before he turned to follow Wangnan back up the beach. As they walked, side by side, Wangnan couldn’t help but feel a sense of foreboding, as if they were standing on the edge of something monumental, something that would change their lives forever.

But whatever was coming, Wangnan knew one thing for sure: he wouldn’t let Viole face it alone. No matter what the future held, they would face it together, just like they always had. And no matter what secrets Viole’s past might hold, Wangnan was determined to protect him from whatever dangers lay ahead.

Chapter Text

Wangnan had never been one to fixate on things. He was the kind of person who lived in the moment, who took life as it came. But lately, something had changed. Ever since that ambush incident, when Viole had started expressing doubts about his identity, a nagging obsession had taken root in Wangnan's mind. He couldn’t stop thinking about it—about who Viole really was, where he had come from, and what his life had been like before they met. The mystery gnawed at him, consuming his thoughts to the point where he found it difficult to focus on anything else.

It wasn’t long before Wangnan’s obsession started to show. He would spend hours poring over any clues he could find, piecing together bits of information that might hint at Viole’s past. He combed through old records, asked around the island for anyone who might have seen or heard something unusual, and even began questioning Viole’s habits and behaviors in an attempt to find some hidden meaning in them. 

His responsibilities began to slip. Chores were left unfinished, tasks were delayed, and he became increasingly distant from the rest of the family. It didn’t take long for Akraptor to notice. One afternoon, after Wangnan had missed yet another meeting about their food supplies, Akraptor decided it was time to confront him.

Wangnan was sitting inside his room, face upfront with his computer, papers and notes scattered around him in a chaotic mess. He was so deep in thought, scribbling down ideas and theories, that he didn’t even notice Akraptor until he was standing right in front of him.

"Wangnan," Akraptor said, his voice firm, "we need to talk."

Wangnan looked up, startled. "Akraptor? What’s up?"

Akraptor crossed his arms, his expression was serious. "I should be asking you that. What’s going on with you? You’ve been neglecting your duties, and it’s starting to affect the rest of us. This isn’t like you."

Wangnan rubbed the back of his neck, feeling a pang of guilt. He knew he had been letting things slide, but he couldn’t help it. The mystery of Viole’s identity had become all-consuming. "I’m sorry, Akraptor. I know I’ve been slacking off lately, but… there’s just something I can’t stop thinking about."

Akraptor raised an eyebrow. "And what’s that?"

Wangnan hesitated for a moment, then blurted out, "Viole. His past. His real identity. I can’t stop wondering who he really is, where he came from, and why he can’t remember anything. It’s driving me crazy."

Akraptor frowned, leaning against the table. "Wangnan, you’re not the only one who’s curious about Viole’s past. We all are. But obsessing over it isn’t going to help anyone, least of all Viole."

Wangnan’s eyes widened in surprise. "You’ve wondered about it too?"

"Of course I have," Akraptor admitted. "We all have. But we’ve also accepted that Viole doesn’t remember, and that’s something we can’t change. What we can do is be here for him in the present, to support him as he is now."

Wangnan looked down at the mess of papers on the table, feeling a mix of frustration and helplessness. "But what if his past is something dangerous? What if it comes back to haunt us all? Don’t you want to know who he really is?"

Akraptor sighed, placing a hand on Wangnan’s shoulder. "Wangnan, I get it. I really do. But you can’t let this consume you. Viole is our friend, and right now, he needs us to be there for him, not to get lost in some search for answers we might never find. Besides, if Viole wanted to know more about his past, he’d be the one looking for it, not you."

Wangnan opened his mouth to argue, but then stopped himself. Akraptor was right. He had been so focused on finding out the truth about Viole’s past that he hadn’t stopped to think about what Viole actually wanted. He realized that in his quest for answers, he had been ignoring Viole’s wishes, pushing his own agenda instead of respecting Viole’s need for space.

"You’re right," Wangnan finally said, his voice subdued. "I’ve been so caught up in this that I didn’t even think about what Viole might want. I’ve been a terrible friend."

Akraptor squeezed his shoulder reassuringly. "You’re not a terrible friend, Wangnan. You care about Viole, and that’s why this is bothering you so much. But sometimes, caring means knowing when to let go, when to step back and give someone the space they need."

Wangnan nodded slowly, feeling the weight of Akraptor’s words sink in. He knew he needed to change his approach, to stop obsessing over things he couldn’t control and start focusing on what really mattered—being there for Viole and the rest of their makeshift family.

"Thanks, Akraptor," Wangnan said after a moment, offering a small smile. "I needed to hear that."

"Anytime," Akraptor replied, returning the smile. "Now, why don’t you take a break from all this and help me with the food inventory? We could use an extra set of hands."

Wangnan laughed softly. "Yeah, I think I could use a break from all this too."

The two of them left the shack together, and for the first time in days, Wangnan felt a sense of relief wash over him. He still had questions, still wondered about Viole’s past, but he knew now that those questions couldn’t be the center of his life. He had responsibilities, friends who depended on him, and a new resolve to be the kind of friend that Viole needed.

As for Viole, the days that followed his conversation with Wangnan were filled with a strange sense of both peace and uncertainty. The conversation had brought a lot of things to the surface—feelings he had been trying to ignore, questions he had been too afraid to ask himself. But it had also made him realize something important: he didn’t have to be defined by his past, by the memories he had lost. He could choose to live in the present, to find meaning in the life he had now, with the people who had become his family.

It wasn’t easy. The pull of the unknown, of the past he couldn’t remember, was still there, still lingering at the edges of his mind. But Viole found that the more he focused on the present, on the relationships he had built on the island, the less power that pull seemed to have over him.

One evening, as the sun was setting over the ocean, Viole found himself sitting on the beach, watching the waves roll in and out. The sky was painted in hues of orange and pink, the colors reflecting off the water in a mesmerizing display. It was moments like this that reminded him of the beauty in life, the simple pleasures that could be found even in the midst of uncertainty.

Wangnan approached him, carrying two cups of tea. He handed one to Viole before sitting down beside him. "Beautiful, isn’t it?" Wangnan said, nodding toward the sunset.

"Yeah," Viole agreed, taking a sip of his tea. The warmth of the drink was comforting, grounding him in the moment. "It is."

They sat in silence for a while, simply enjoying the peacefulness of the scene. After a while, Wangnan broke the silence.

"I’ve been thinking a lot lately," he began, his voice contemplative. "About everything that’s happened since you came to this island, about you and your… situation. I realized that I’ve been so caught up in trying to figure out who you were that I forgot to appreciate who you are now."

Viole turned to look at him, surprised by the admission. "Wangnan…"

"No, let me finish," Wangnan interrupted gently. "I’ve been selfish, Viole. I wanted to know your past behind your back because I thought it would help me understand you better, but I didn’t stop to think about what you wanted. I forgot that it’s not the past that defines us, but the choices we make now, in the present. And I want you to know that no matter what you decide, no matter what you remember or don’t remember, I’m here for you. We all are."

Viole felt a warmth spread through his chest at Wangnan’s words. It was a feeling he had come to cherish since he had met Wangnan and the others—a sense of belonging, of being accepted for who he was, not for who he might have been.

"Thank you, Wangnan," Viole said softly. "That means a lot to me. I’ve been struggling with these questions about my past for a long time, but I’ve realized that maybe it’s okay not to have all the answers. Maybe it’s okay to just… live in the moment, to focus on the life I have now instead of the one I can’t remember."

Wangnan smiled, relief evident in his eyes. "I think that’s a good way to look at it. We can’t change the past, but we can make the most of the present. And from where I’m standing, the present looks pretty good."

Viole chuckled, feeling a weight lift off his shoulders. "Yeah, it does."

As the sun dipped below the horizon, casting the world in twilight, Viole felt a sense of peace settle over him. He still didn’t have all the answers, still didn’t know who he had been before he came to the island, but for the first time, he was okay with that. He had a new life now, a new family, and that was enough. 

Over the next few weeks, Viole made a conscious effort to focus on the present, to live each day to the fullest. He spent more time with Wangnan and the others, helping with chores, sharing meals, and enjoying the simple pleasures of life on the island. He found himself laughing more, smiling more, and even though the shadow of his lost memories still lingered, it no longer held the same power over him.

One evening, as they were all gathered around the campfire, Viole looked around at the faces of his family—Wangnan, Akraptor, Yihwa, Horyang, Miseng, Goseng, and Prince. He realized that these were the people who had become his family, who had accepted him for who he was now, not who he had been. And in that moment, he felt a sense of contentment that he hadn’t felt in a long time.

He leaned back against a log, watching the flames dance in the fire, and smiled to himself. He didn’t know what the future held, didn’t know if he would ever regain his lost memories, but he knew one thing for certain: he was happy, and that was enough.

As the fire crackled and the stars began to twinkle in the night sky, Viole made a silent promise to himself. He would live in the present, cherish the moments he had with the people he cared about, and create new memories that weren’t tied to his mysterious past. And whatever the future held, he would face it with the strength he had found in his new life, with his new family by his side.

The night wore on, and one by one, the others began to drift off to sleep. Wangnan, who had been sitting next to Viole, yawned and stretched. "I’m beat," he said with a tired grin. "I think I’m gonna call it a night."

Viole nodded. "Yeah, me too. Thanks for the talk earlier, Wangnan. I really needed it."

"Anytime," Wangnan replied, clapping him on the shoulder. "That’s what friends are for, right?"

"Right," Viole agreed, feeling a warmth spread through his chest at the word "friends."

As they all settled down for the night, Viole lay on his back, staring up at the stars. He felt a sense of peace that he hadn’t felt in a long time, a sense of belonging that went beyond words. He didn’t have all the answers, but he had something even more important—a family, a home, and a new life that he was determined to live to the fullest.

With that thought, Viole closed his eyes, a small smile playing on his lips. For the first time in a long time, he felt truly content. The past might always be a mystery, but the present was something he could hold onto, something he could cherish. And that was enough.

As sleep began to claim him, Viole made one final promise to himself: no matter what the future held, he would face it with courage, with hope, and with the knowledge that he was not alone. He had his friends, his family, and a life worth living. And that was all that mattered.

After Viole made the decision to leave his past behind and focus on his new life with Wangnan and the rest of their family, the days seemed to settle into a comfortable routine. The quiet moments they shared were precious, filled with the warmth of companionship. 

Wangnan had promised Akraptor that he would stop digging into Viole’s past. After all, Viole had finally found some peace, and Wangnan wanted to respect that. The days flowed by, each one much like the last, with the family going about their daily lives—Miseng and Goseng often giggling over some silly joke, Horyang quietly reading in the corner, Yihwa and Prince bickering good-naturedly, and Akraptor keeping a watchful eye over everyone.

Viole seemed to be adjusting well to this new life. He was quieter than the others, but he smiled more now, and his presence was a calming one. Wangnan found himself content in those moments, feeling that maybe, just maybe, they had left the worst behind them.

One evening, as they all sat around the table, sharing a meal, Wangnan couldn’t help but feel a surge of gratitude for this little family they had built. Viole was seated beside him, eating in his usual quiet manner, while the others chatted and laughed.

“This stew is amazing, Akraptor,” Yihwa said, ladling herself a second helping. “I swear, you could open a restaurant.”

Akraptor chuckled, waving off the compliment. “If I opened a restaurant, who would keep all of you in line?”

“Oh please,” Prince muttered, rolling his eyes. “Like we’re that difficult.”

“You are, actually,” Goseng chimed in, earning a playful glare from Prince.

As the conversation continued around him, Wangnan glanced at Viole. “You’re doing okay, right?” he asked softly, not wanting to draw too much attention to them.

Viole looked at him and nodded. “I’m fine. Thank you, Wangnan.”

The sincerity in Viole’s voice reassured Wangnan. They were okay. They were all okay. The past didn’t need to matter anymore. They had each other, and that was enough.

But the peace they had found would soon be tested.

A few days later, Wangnan received a message that would shatter the calm he had so carefully tried to maintain. It was late in the evening, and the others had already gone to bed. Wangnan was sitting by the window, lost in thought, when his phone buzzed. He picked it up, expecting a routine message or maybe a reminder about some errand, but what he saw made his blood run cold.

The message was from an unknown sender, and it contained only a few words:

The past is never truly forgotten. He is not who you think he is.

Wangnan stared at the screen, his heart pounding. Who had sent this? What did they know? And, more importantly, what did it mean?

He read the message over and over, hoping to find some clue, some hint that would make sense of it. But there was nothing. Just those cryptic words, hanging over him like a dark cloud.

Wangnan had promised Akraptor that he would stop searching for information about Viole’s past. He had meant to keep that promise, but now... Now, he wasn’t so sure. This message—it wasn’t something he could ignore. Whoever had sent it knew something, something important. He thought about telling Akraptor, but he hesitated. He didn’t want to worry him, not when things had finally settled down. But he couldn’t just let this go, either. He needed to know the truth.

The next morning, Wangnan decided that he would start searching for clues again, but this time, he would do it on his own. He wouldn’t drag anyone else into it—not yet, anyway. If he could find something, anything, that would explain this message, then he could decide what to do next.

As the days passed, Wangnan found himself growing more and more determined. He began asking questions, subtle at first, trying to avoid drawing too much attention. Wangnan knew some informants were wary of questions, especially about things that didn’t seem to concern them. But Wangnan was careful. He didn’t mention Viole by name, only described his appearance, hoping that someone might recognize him.

But no one did. It was as if Viole had never existed before Wangnan had found him. Every lead he thought he had turned into a dead end, and every door he tried to open was firmly shut in his face.

Still, Wangnan didn’t give up. He couldn’t. The message haunted him, pushing him forward even when it seemed hopeless. He found himself lying awake at night, replaying every conversation, every bit of information he had gathered, trying to piece it all together. But it was like trying to solve a puzzle with half the pieces missing.

One evening, as Wangnan was heading out to follow up on another lead, Akraptor caught him at the door. “Wangnan, can I talk to you for a minute?”

Wangnan froze, his hand on the doorknob. “Uh, sure, what’s up?”

Akraptor crossed his arms, his expression was serious. “You’ve been acting strange lately. I know you promised to stop looking into Viole’s past, but I can tell something’s changed. What’s going on?”

Wangnan’s heart skipped a beat. He had hoped no one would notice, but of course, Akraptor would. He was too observant for his own good. “It’s nothing, really,” Wangnan said, trying to sound casual. “I’ve just been a bit restless, that’s all.”

Akraptor raised an eyebrow. “Restless? Wangnan, I’ve known you long enough to know when you’re hiding something. Spill it.”

Wangnan sighed, realizing he couldn’t keep this from Akraptor any longer. “Alright, fine. I’ve been getting these weird messages, okay? They’re about Viole, and they’re... unsettling. I didn’t want to worry anyone, so I’ve been trying to figure it out on my own.”

Akraptor’s expression softened slightly. “Messages? What kind of messages?”

Wangnan pulled out his phone and showed Akraptor the message he had received. Akraptor read it, his brow furrowing. “Who sent this?”

“I don’t know,” Wangnan admitted. “But whoever it is, they know something about Viole’s past. I couldn’t just ignore it.”

Akraptor was silent for a moment, his gaze distant as he considered the situation. Finally, he looked at Wangnan. “If you’re determined to find out the truth, then I’m coming with you.”

Wangnan blinked in surprise. “What? But—”

“No buts,” Akraptor said firmly. “If someone out there knows about Viole’s past, we need to know too. But we’ll do it together. And we keep this between us, alright? The others don’t need to know, not until we have something concrete.”

Wangnan hesitated. He hadn’t wanted to drag Akraptor into this, but he also knew that having him by his side would make things easier—and safer. “Okay,” he agreed. “We’ll do this together.”

With Akraptor’s help, Wangnan felt a renewed sense of purpose. They began their search in earnest, combing through every possible lead, talking to contacts they know in the police field that may hold databases of persons who were missing years ago, and following up on any scrap of information they could find. But the more they searched, the more elusive the answers became.

Every time they thought they were getting close, the trail would go cold. It was as if Viole’s past had been erased, wiped clean from every record, every memory. No one knew him, no one had heard of him, and no one could tell them anything useful.

Days turned into weeks, and still, they found nothing. Wangnan grew more frustrated with each passing day, while Akraptor remained calm, reminding him that they had to be patient, that the truth would come out eventually.

One evening, after another fruitless search, they returned home, both of them exhausted and discouraged. The house was quiet, the others already asleep.

“This is getting us nowhere,” Wangnan muttered, sinking into a chair. “It’s like he doesn’t exist.”

Akraptor leaned against the wall, arms crossed. “He does exist, Wangnan. We just haven’t found the right thread to pull yet.”

Wangnan rubbed his temples, feeling a headache coming on. “I just don’t understand. How can someone like Viole have no past? It doesn’t make any sense.”

Akraptor sighed, sitting down across from him. “Maybe it’s not that he doesn’t have a past. Maybe it’s that someone doesn’t want us to find it.”

Wangnan looked up at him, frowning. “What do you mean?”

Akraptor shrugged. “Think about it. If Viole’s past is as important as these messages seem to suggest, then maybe someone has gone to great lengths to keep it hidden. We’re not just up against time or bad luck, Wangnan. We’re up against someone who doesn’t want us to know the truth.”

The thought sent a shiver down Wangnan’s spine. He hadn’t considered that possibility, but it made sense. If Viole’s past was connected to something—or someone—powerful, then it would explain why they were hitting so many dead ends.

“So what do we do?” Wangnan asked, feeling a bit lost.

“We keep looking,” Akraptor said, his voice steady. “But we also need to be careful. If someone’s trying to keep Viole’s past buried, they won’t like us digging it up. We need to be smart about this, Wangnan. And we need to be ready for whatever we might find.”

Wangnan nodded, feeling a renewed sense of determination. They had come this far—he wasn’t about to give up now. “You’re right. We’ll keep going. We’ll find the truth, no matter what.”

Akraptor gave him a small, reassuring smile. “That’s the spirit. We’re in this together, Wangnan. We’ll figure it out.”

And so, despite the mounting obstacles, Wangnan and Akraptor continued their search, driven by the cryptic messages and the growing mystery surrounding Viole’s past. They knew it wouldn’t be easy, and they knew the road ahead was fraught with danger, but they were determined to uncover the truth—no matter what it cost them.

The sun hung lazily in the sky, casting a warm, golden hue over the island. It was one of those rare, mundane days where the entire family—Viole, Wangnan, Akraptor, Miseng, Goseng, Prince, Horyang, and Yihwa—had no pressing matters to attend to, no missions or hidden agendas, just a day to relax and enjoy each other’s company. The sound of the waves gently lapping against the shore mixed with the cheerful voices of Miseng and Prince, who were splashing about in the shallow water.

Viole sat on the sand near the shoreline, his eyes following Miseng as she floated on her inflatable ring, bobbing up and down with the rhythm of the sea. He smiled faintly, a rare but genuine expression, as he turned his attention to Prince, who was deeply engrossed in building an elaborate sandcastle. Viole carefully handed him another handful of wet sand.

“Is this enough?” Viole asked, watching Prince shape the sand with meticulous concentration.

Prince nodded without looking up, his brow furrowed in focus. “Yeah, just a bit more and we can start the towers.”

Viole found it oddly calming to watch the children play. Their innocence, their joy in the simplest things—like the thrill of swimming and the challenge of constructing the perfect sandcastle—reminded him of a part of himself that seemed lost. He didn’t remember his past, not much of it at least, but days like this made him feel connected to something, even if he couldn’t put it into words.

A short distance away, Wangnan and Akraptor stood side by side, their gazes fixed on Viole. They had been watching him for some time now, exchanging uneasy glances as they tried to make sense of the enigma that was Viole. Despite their best efforts and the help of discreet informants, they had found little to no information about his past. It was as if he had appeared out of nowhere, a blank slate with nothing to offer but the present.

Wangnan broke the silence first, his voice low and tinged with frustration. “I still don’t get it, Akraptor. How can someone like him have no past? No records, no history… it doesn’t make sense.”

Akraptor sighed, rubbing the back of his neck as he considered his words. “It’s not that simple, Wangnan. Some people… they go through things, things that make them want to disappear, to erase who they were. Viole could be one of those people. Maybe he’s hiding from something, or someone.”

“But what if he’s not?” Wangnan countered, his voice rising slightly. “What if he’s just… lost? What if he doesn’t even know who he really is? It’s like there’s this huge wall between him and his memories, and we’re just standing here, helpless.”

Akraptor looked over at Viole, who was now helping Prince carve out a doorway in the sandcastle. There was something almost tragic in the way Viole moved, in the way he interacted with the world around him, as if he was an outsider looking in.

“I get what you’re saying,” Akraptor said after a moment. “But until we find something concrete, we can’t push him. He’s part of our family now, and we have to respect his space, his pace.”

Wangnan nodded, though the uneasy feeling in his chest didn’t dissipate. “I know. I just… I worry, you know? What if we never find out who he is? What if his past catches up with him before we do?”

Akraptor placed a reassuring hand on Wangnan’s shoulder. “We’ll deal with it when the time comes. For now, let’s just enjoy the peace while we have it. Viole seems happy here, with us, and that’s what matters.”

Wangnan sighed, forcing a small smile. “You’re right. I guess I’m just overthinking things, as usual.”

They fell into a comfortable silence, watching as Viole and the children continued their playful activities. Miseng’s laughter rang out across the beach as she splashed water at Prince, who retaliated by threatening to knock over her floatie. Viole watched them with a gentle expression, his presence a calming influence on the otherwise chaotic scene.

As the day wore on, the sun began to dip towards the horizon, painting the sky with hues of orange and pink. The group slowly gathered their things, ready to head back to the house they had made their temporary home on the island. Miseng and Prince, reluctant to leave the beach, took one last dive into the water before Goseng called them over.

“Come on, kids, it’s time to go,” Goseng said, her tone firm but kind.

Miseng pouted, but she complied, dragging her floatie along the sand. Prince, on the other hand, was more focused on saving the remains of his sandcastle, scooping up a handful of shells to take with him as souvenirs.

Viole helped Miseng gather her things, making sure she had everything before they headed back. His shirt was soaked from the water and sand, clinging to his lean frame as they made their way up the beach.

When they reached the house, Goseng noticed Viole’s state and frowned. “Viole, your shirt is all wet. You should change into something dry before you catch a cold.”

Viole blinked, as if only just realizing the dampness. “Oh, right. I’ll do that.”

He headed to his room, pulling off his wet shirt as he went. As he did, Wangnan, who was passing by, caught a glimpse of something that made him stop in his tracks. There, right in the middle of Viole’s chest, was a scar—a jagged, pale line that stood out against his skin, right where a person’s heart would be.

It wasn’t the first time Wangnan had seen that scar. He remembered the first time he had asked Viole about it, back when they had just started living together. Viole had simply looked down at the scar, his expression blank, and said he didn’t remember how he got it. That had been the end of the conversation, but the image of that scar had stayed with Wangnan ever since.

Now, as he stood there, staring at it again, a deep unease settled in the pit of his stomach. There was something about that scar that didn’t sit right with him, something that felt… wrong.

Wangnan forced himself to look away as Viole disappeared into his room to change. He knew it was just a scar, just a mark left behind by some long-forgotten injury, but it still bothered him. Especially now, with everything he and Akraptor had been doing to uncover Viole’s past. The more they dug, the more it felt like they were uncovering pieces of a puzzle that didn’t quite fit together.

Later that evening, the family gathered around the dinner table, the atmosphere warm and lively. Miseng and Prince were still chattering about their day at the beach, while Horyang and Yihwa teased each other over who had caught more fish earlier. Akraptor was trying to convince Goseng to let him cook dinner the next day, despite her protests that he was a terrible cook.

Through it all, Wangnan couldn’t shake the feeling of unease that had settled over him since seeing Viole’s scar. He kept glancing over at Viole, who was quietly eating his meal, seemingly oblivious to the tension in Wangnan’s gaze.

At one point, Viole looked up and caught Wangnan staring. “Is something wrong?” he asked, his voice soft but concerned.

Wangnan shook his head quickly, forcing a smile. “No, nothing’s wrong. Just… thinking about stuff.”

Viole nodded, accepting the answer without question, and went back to his food. But Wangnan couldn’t help but wonder if Viole had noticed his unease, if he had picked up on the fact that something was bothering him.

After dinner, the family scattered to their usual evening activities. Miseng and Prince retreated to their room to play, while Horyang and Yihwa settled down to watch a movie. Goseng and Akraptor cleaned up the kitchen, bickering good-naturedly over who should wash the dishes. Viole, as usual, slipped away to the porch, where he often went to sit and watch the stars.

Wangnan followed him out, needing to clear his head. He found Viole sitting on the steps, staring up at the sky with that same quiet, contemplative expression he always wore when he was deep in thought.

“Mind if I join you?” Wangnan asked, already sitting down beside him.

Viole shook his head. “No, I don’t mind.”

They sat in silence for a while, the sound of the waves in the distance the only thing breaking the quiet. Wangnan glanced over at Viole, trying to find the right words to say. He didn’t want to pry, didn’t want to push, but he couldn’t just ignore the nagging feeling that something was off.

“Viole,” he began cautiously, “do you ever… I mean, do you ever wonder about your past? About who you were before all of this?”

Viole didn’t respond right away. His eyes remained fixed on the stars, his expression unreadable. Finally, he spoke, his voice barely above a whisper. “Always. But it’s like trying to remember a dream. The more I think about it, the more it slips away.”

Wangnan nodded slowly, understanding the frustration in Viole’s words. “I get that. It must be hard, not knowing where you come from, or who you were.”

Viole’s gaze dropped to his hands, which were resting in his lap. “It is. But I try not to dwell on it too much. I have a new life now, with all of you. That’s what matters.”

Wangnan felt a pang of guilt for bringing up the subject. He knew Viole valued his new life with them, but he also knew that the past had a way of creeping up on you, no matter how hard you tried to forget it.

“Yeah, you’re right,” Wangnan said, forcing a smile. “We’re your family now, and we’re not going anywhere.”

Viole looked over at him, a faint smile tugging at the corners of his mouth. “Thank you, Wangnan. That means a lot.”

They fell into a comfortable silence again, the weight of the conversation easing a little. Wangnan knew he couldn’t solve the mystery of Viole’s past on his own, but he also knew that he would do whatever it took to protect him, to keep him safe, no matter what.

As the night wore on, the rest of the family began to turn in for the night. Akraptor poked his head out the door, nodding at Wangnan and Viole. “You two coming in soon?”

Wangnan nodded. “Yeah, we’ll be there in a bit.”

Akraptor gave them a thumbs up before disappearing back inside. Viole sighed softly, getting to his feet. “We should probably head in. It’s getting late.”

Wangnan stood up as well, stretching his arms above his head. “Yeah, you’re right.”

They walked back to the house together, the cool night air wrapping around them like a blanket. As they reached the door, Wangnan paused, glancing over at Viole one last time.

“Hey, Viole,” he said, his voice soft. “No matter what happens, we’ve got your back. You know that, right?”

Viole looked at him, a flicker of something—gratitude, maybe—passing through his eyes. “I know. And I’m grateful for that, more than you know.”

With that, they headed inside, the warmth of the house enveloping them as they closed the door behind them. The night was quiet, peaceful, and for now, that was enough. The mysteries of the past could wait. What mattered was the present, the family they had built together, and the bonds that held them close.

And as Viole lay in bed that night, staring up at the ceiling, he couldn’t help but feel a sense of contentment, a feeling that maybe, just maybe, he had found a place where he truly belonged. The past was still a shadow hanging over him, but in this moment, with the people he cared about nearby, he could almost forget about it. Almost.

Chapter Text

Aguero was not a man who easily lost his composure, but the events of the past few days had pushed him to the brink. He had faced betrayal, uncovered secrets that shook the very foundations of the world he thought he knew, and now he was burdened with the knowledge of possible impending war within the underworld. FUG, the special police force dedicated to dismantling underworld organizations, had become a looming threat. And even though he had faced countless dangers before, this was different. This was personal.

The bustling city around him felt like a blur as he walked the crowded streets, his mind racing with thoughts he couldn’t seem to escape. The noise, the people, the very life of the city—it all felt distant, like a muffled echo in his ears. For once, Aguero felt out of place, as if he didn’t belong in the world that had once been so familiar to him.

He thought about the recent emergency meeting of The Order which Asensio told him about, the founding group that governed all the mafia and assassin families in the underworld. The discussion about FUG had been tense, with every family head on edge. Even his father, Eduan, had been visibly shaken, though he had tried to hide it beneath his usual arrogance. And when  they learned that Michelle, the girl that Maria randomly thought of joining their group for the special mission connecting to FUG, who was actually Rachel working for FUG—it all doesn’t make sense. FUG was not just another enemy; they were a force that could dismantle everything the families had built over generations.

Aguero had known about FUG’s existence for some time, but he hadn’t realized the extent of their power until now. They had infiltrated every level of society, from the highest echelons of government to the darkest corners of the criminal underworld. And they were relentless. 

As he walked, his thoughts turned to Maschenny. Their confrontation in Eduan’s grand chamber had been explosive, filled with anger and accusations. Maschenny had admitted to orchestrating the train explosion, a revelation that had blindsided Aguero. He had always known his sister was ruthless, but this… this was something else. She had manipulated events to her advantage, all while hiding behind the facade of loyalty to their father.

Aguero’s fists clenched at his sides as he remembered the way Maschenny had spoken to him, her tone dripping with condescension. She had been so sure of herself, so confident that her actions were justified. But Aguero couldn’t accept that. The lives lost in that explosion, the chaos that had followed—it was all too much. And then there was the nagging thought that had been eating away at him ever since that confrontation: what if Maschenny wasn’t the only one hiding something?

The city’s towering skyscrapers loomed over him as he made his way toward a familiar alleyway, one that led to a small, secluded park. It was a place he often went to when he needed to clear his head, away from the prying eyes of the underworld and the constant pressure of his responsibilities. As he entered the park, the noise of the city faded into the background, replaced by the rustling of leaves and the distant chirping of birds.

Aguero found a bench near a fountain and sat down, running a hand through his hair. He tried to focus on the sound of the water, hoping it would drown out the chaos in his mind, but it was no use. The revelations kept coming back to him, over and over again, like a relentless tide.

His thoughts were interrupted by the sound of footsteps approaching. Aguero tensed, his instincts were on high alert. He hadn’t told anyone where he was going, and he wasn’t in the mood for company. But when he looked up, he saw a figure standing at the edge of the park, partially hidden by the shadows of the trees.

It was a woman, her presence was both commanding and mysterious. She wore a long, red cloak that billowed slightly in the breeze, and her striking red eyes seemed to pierce through the darkness. Her hair, a vibrant shade of crimson, cascaded down her back, and there was something about her that immediately set Aguero on edge.

He recognized her, though they had never met before. She was Hwaryun, a figure shrouded in mystery and rumored to possess knowledge of things most people couldn’t even begin to comprehend. Her appearance was often seen as a sign of impending change, a harbinger of events yet to unfold.

“What do you want?” Aguero’s voice was sharp, edged with the tension that had been building inside him for days.

Hwaryun stepped closer, her movements were fluid and graceful, almost unnaturally so. She stopped a few feet away from him, her eyes never leaving his. “I’ve come to speak with you, Khun Aguero Agnis.”

Aguero narrowed his eyes. “You’re not someone who appears without reason. What is it this time? Another cryptic warning? A prophecy I don’t care to hear?”

Hwaryun’s lips curved into a small, knowing smile. “You’ve been through much lately. The weight of the world is heavy on your shoulders, and the truth you seek is elusive. But I’m not here to offer you riddles, Eduan’s successor. I’m here to tell you something important.”

Aguero leaned back slightly, his gaze never wavering. “Get to the point.”

Hwaryun’s expression softened, though her eyes remained as intense as ever. “You’ve been haunted by the past, by the loss of someone dear to you.”

Aguero’s heart skipped a beat, though he kept his face carefully neutral. He knew who she was referring to, but he refused to show any weakness. “If you’re talking about Bam, I suggest you tread carefully.”

Hwaryun nodded, acknowledging the warning. “I understand. But what if I told you that the past is not as final as you believe? What if I told you that the one you lost may not be truly gone?”

Aguero’s chest tightened, a surge of emotion threatening to break through the walls he had so carefully constructed. “You’re lying,” he said, his voice low and dangerous. “Bam is dead. I watched him die.”

Hwaryun took another step forward, her voice was soft yet compelling. “Are you certain? Or is that what you’ve been led to believe?”

Aguero’s mind raced, the memories of that fateful day flooding back to him. The explosion, the chaos, the feeling of helplessness as he watched Bam’s life slip away. He had carried that guilt with him every day since, the knowledge that he hadn’t been able to save his friend, his light.

But now, with Hwaryun standing before him, casting doubt on everything he thought he knew, Aguero felt a flicker of something he hadn’t allowed himself to feel in a long time—hope.

“Why should I believe you?” Aguero demanded, his voice was wavering between anger and desperation. “Why should I trust anything you say?”

Hwaryun’s eyes softened once again with understanding. “I know it’s difficult to believe. You’ve suffered so much, and the pain of that loss is still fresh. But I’m not here to give you false hope, Aguero. I’m here because there is something you need to know, something that could change everything.”

Aguero’s breath caught in his throat. “What are you talking about?”

Hwaryun held his gaze, her expression was resolute. “I’m saying that Bam may still be alive.”

The words hung in the air between them, heavy with the weight of possibility. Aguero felt as though the ground had shifted beneath his feet, as though the world he had known was suddenly tilting on its axis.

He wanted to dismiss her words as a cruel trick, a lie designed to manipulate him. But something in Hwaryun’s eyes told him that she believed what she was saying, and that belief sent a jolt of fear and hope crashing through him.

“No,” Aguero said, shaking his head as if to dispel the thought. “It’s impossible. I saw him die. I saw the explosion in my own eyes. You’re just trying to mess with my head, and I won’t let you.”

Hwaryun didn’t flinch at his accusation. Instead, she continued to speak with the same calm, measured tone. “I understand your skepticism, but think about it, Aguero. Has anything ever truly made sense about that day? The explosion, the aftermath—there were too many unanswered questions, too many inconsistencies.”

Aguero’s hands clenched into fists as he remembered the chaos, the confusion, the way everything had spiraled out of control so quickly. He had always wondered if there was more to the story, if someone had orchestrated the events leading up to Bam’s death, and when he finally learned the truth about Maschenny’s schemes, Aguero promised to himself that he’d keep anything and will act when it’s time. He had never allowed himself to dig too deeply because he was afraid of what he might find.

Now, Hwaryun was forcing him to confront those fears, to consider the possibility that Bam’s death had been a lie. But if that was true, if Bam was still alive, then where was he? Why had he not come back?

“Why are you telling me this now?” Aguero’s voice was barely above a whisper, his composure cracking under the weight of the revelations.

Hwaryun’s expression was one of empathy, as if she understood the turmoil he was experiencing. “Because you’re about to face something far greater than you realize. The events unfolding around you are not random; they are part of a larger plan. And Bam, if he is alive, plays a crucial role in what’s to come.”

Aguero’s mind was spinning, the implications of her words crashing down on him like a tidal wave. If Bam was alive, then everything he thought he knew about the past five years was a lie. And if Bam was somehow involved in the events that were unfolding, then Aguero couldn’t afford to be caught off guard.

But there was still a part of him that resisted, a part that refused to believe that he had been deceived for so long. He had seen the pain in Bam’s eyes during those times when they were running to hide, and felt the life leave his body gradually. How could that have been a lie?

“I need proof,” Aguero said finally, his voice strained. “I can’t just take your word for it.”

Hwaryun nodded, as if she had expected this. “I understand. And I will help you find the truth. But you must be prepared for what you might discover. The truth is rarely simple, and it often comes with a price.”

Aguero’s resolve hardened, the flicker of hope was now a burning flame. If there was even a chance that Bam was alive, he had to know. He couldn’t continue living in the dark, burdened by the weight of his guilt and the secrets that surrounded him.

“What do I need to do?” Aguero asked, his voice firm.

Hwaryun’s smile was faint but genuine. “You need to follow the trail that has been left for you. The truth is out there, hidden in the shadows, waiting for you to uncover it. But you must be vigilant. There are those who will do anything to keep the truth buried.”

Aguero nodded, the determination in his eyes unmistakable. “I’ve never been one to back down from a challenge.”

Hwaryun’s eyes sparkled with a mixture of admiration and something else—something that Aguero couldn’t quite place. “I know, Aguero. That’s why I came to you. You have the strength to face what’s ahead, even if it means confronting your deepest fears.”

With those words, Hwaryun turned to leave, her cloak swirling around her like a crimson flame. But before she disappeared into the shadows, she paused and looked back at him. “Remember, Aguero, the truth is not always what it seems. Trust your instincts, and don’t be afraid to question everything.”

And then she was gone, leaving Aguero alone in the park, the weight of her words settling over him like a heavy shroud.

Aguero sat there for a long time, his mind racing with thoughts of what Hwaryun had told him. Could it be true? Could Bam really be alive? The possibility both thrilled and terrified him. He knew he couldn’t afford to get his hopes up, but the seed of doubt had been planted, and it was already beginning to take root.

He thought about the people in his life, the ones who had stood by him through everything, Elaine, Endorsi, Hatz, Hockney, Rak, and Shibisu. They had all been affected by Bam’s death in their own ways, and the thought of reopening that wound made Aguero’s heart ache. But he also knew that they deserved to know the truth, no matter how painful it might be.

Rising from the bench, Aguero took a deep breath and started walking, his mind already formulating a plan. He needed to gather his team, to start digging into the past and uncovering the secrets that had been kept from them for so long. And he needed to do it quickly—before anyone else could interfere.

As he made his way back to the hideout, Aguero’s resolve hardened. He was done playing by other people’s rules, done being a pawn in someone else’s game. It was time to take control, to find the answers he had been searching for, and to protect the people he cared about.

The city’s lights flickered in the distance, casting long shadows on the streets as night began to fall. Aguero felt the weight of the darkness around him, but for the first time in a long time, he didn’t feel afraid. He had a mission now, a purpose. And he would see it through to the end—no matter what it cost him.

As he reached the entrance to the hideout, Aguero paused, taking a moment to collect himself. He knew that the road ahead would be difficult, filled with challenges and dangers he couldn’t yet foresee. But he also knew that he wasn’t alone. He had his team, his friends—his family.

Opening the door, Aguero stepped inside, the familiar surroundings of the hideout bringing a sense of comfort and security. He could hear the faint sounds of conversation coming from the conference hall, the voices of his team engaged in discussion.

With a deep breath, Aguero made his way down the hallway, his footsteps echoing softly against the walls. As he approached the common room, the voices grew louder, more distinct. He could hear Hatz and Rak bickering about something, while Hockney and Shibisu tried to mediate. Endorsi’s laughter rang out, light and carefree, a stark contrast to the tension that had gripped Aguero for so long.

He pushed open the door and stepped inside, the room falling silent as everyone turned to look at him. Their expressions shifted from surprise to concern as they took in his appearance—tired, but resolute.

“Aguero,” Endorsi said, her voice laced with worry. “What’s going on? You look like you’ve seen a ghost.”

Aguero forced a small smile, though it didn’t quite reach his eyes. “In a way, I have. But it’s more complicated than that.”

Hatz crossed his arms, his gaze narrowing. “You’re not making any sense. What happened?”

Aguero took a deep breath, steeling himself for what he was about to say. “I just had a conversation with Hwaryun.”

That got their attention. Everyone in the room knew of Hwaryun, though their encounters with her had been few and far between. She was a figure of mystery, someone who appeared only when something significant was about to happen.

“What did she say?” Hockney asked, his voice was calm but edged with curiosity.

Aguero hesitated, the weight of Hwaryun’s words still heavy on his mind. But he knew he couldn’t keep this to himself. They deserved to know the truth, even if it was just a possibility.

“She said that Bam might still be alive,” Aguero finally said, the words hanging in the air like a bombshell.

The room erupted into chaos, everyone speaking at once, their voices overlapping in a cacophony of disbelief and confusion.

“What do you mean, alive ?!” Rak roared, his voice booming.

“Is she messing with you?” Endorsi demanded, her eyes wide with shock.

Hatz’s expression was one of skepticism, though there was a flicker of something else in his eyes—hope, perhaps? “How can that be possible?”

Aguero raised his hands, trying to calm them down. “I don’t know if it’s true. But she seemed certain. She said that the past isn’t as final as we believe, and that there are too many unanswered questions about what happened five years ago.”

The room fell into a stunned silence as they processed his words. Aguero could see the turmoil in their eyes, the way their emotions warred with their logic. They had all mourned Bam, and had all come to terms with his death in their own ways. To have that certainty ripped away from them was almost too much to bear.

“But how can we know for sure?” Elaine asked quietly, her voice tinged with uncertainty.

Aguero met her gaze, his resolve firm. “We need to investigate. We need to dig into the past, find out what really happened that day. If there’s even a chance that Bam is alive, we owe it to him, and to ourselves, to find out.”

Endorsi nodded slowly, her expression was thoughtful. “You’re right. We can’t just ignore this. We need to know the truth, whatever it may be.”

Hatz sighed. “This is going to be a mess. But if there’s one thing I’ve learned from all this, it’s that we can’t shy away from the hard truths anymore.”

Rak grunted in agreement, though his expression was still one of frustration. “I don’t like it, but I’ll go along with it. If there’s even a chance that the turtle is out there, I want to know.”

Aguero felt a surge of gratitude toward his team, their unwavering loyalty and determination bolstering his own resolve. They were in this together, no matter what they might find.

“Then it’s settled,” Aguero said, his voice steady. “We’ll start investigating right away. But we need to be careful now. If someone has been keeping this a secret, they won’t take kindly to us poking around.”

Hockney nodded in agreement. “We’ll need to tread lightly. But I’m with you, Aguero. Let’s find the truth.”

As the team began to discuss their plan, Aguero felt a renewed sense of purpose. The darkness that had weighed him down for so long seemed to lift, replaced by the flicker of hope that Hwaryun had ignited. It was a fragile hope, one that could easily be shattered, but it was enough to keep him going.

For the first time in years, Aguero felt like he was on the right path, that he was finally moving toward the answers he had been searching for. And no matter what lay ahead, he knew he wasn’t alone.

As the night deepened and the city’s lights shimmered outside, Aguero and his team prepared themselves for the journey ahead—a journey that would take them into the heart of the past, where the truth lay hidden in the shadows, waiting to be uncovered.

And as they moved forward, one question lingered in Aguero’s mind, a question that would drive him to the ends of the earth if necessary.

Was Bam truly alive?

Only time would tell.

Aguero was not easily swayed by the grandeur of his surroundings when he walked to the Khun family mansion. As he strode through the long corridors, his thoughts were consumed by one thing: the betrayal he felt had been orchestrated by someone he once considered an ally—Maria.

Aguero had always prided himself on his ability to think several steps ahead, to anticipate moves and counter them before they could harm him or his team. But this time, he had been blindsided. Rachel—who had infiltrated his team under the guise of Michelle Light—had nearly cost him everything. And now, as he stood outside the door to Maria’s chambers, the weight of that betrayal hung heavy in the air.

He pushed the door open with a force that echoed through the vast room. Maria was seated at a small table, a cup of tea held delicately in her hands. She looked up as he entered, her expression was serene, as if she had been expecting him. Perhaps she had.

“Aguero,” Maria greeted him with a slight smile, her voice smooth and calculated. “You’re back. I trust the mission was a success?”

Aguero didn’t bother with formalities or pretense. His blue eyes, usually sharp and calculating, were now dark with anger. “Cut the act, Maria. You know exactly why I’m here.”

Maria set her teacup down gently, the porcelain clinking against the saucer. “I’m not sure what you mean. But I can see you’re upset. Why don’t you take a seat, and we can discuss this calmly?”

“I’m not interested in sitting,” Aguero replied coldly. “I’m interested in knowing why you pushed so hard to have Rachel—no, Michelle Light—join our mission. Why would you send someone who was working for FUG to infiltrate one of their own bases?”

Maria’s eyes widened slightly, a calculated move that might have fooled someone less perceptive. “Aguero, I had no idea Michelle was working for FUG. I recommended her based on her skills and what I thought would be best for the mission.”

Aguero scoffed, taking a step closer to her. “You expect me to believe that? You’ve always prided yourself on being thorough, on knowing everything about everyone you involve in our operations. Yet you missed this? Either you’re lying, or you’re losing your touch.”

Maria’s expression hardened, but she quickly masked it with a look of concern. “Aguero, I understand why you’re upset, but I genuinely didn’t know. I would never knowingly put your team at risk.”

“Then explain to me why she was so adamant about joining our mission,” Aguero pressed, his voice cold. “Explain why she was so keen on getting close to me and my team, why she knew things only someone with deep ties to FUG could know.”

Maria paused, her eyes narrowing slightly as she considered her next move. She knew Aguero was not someone easily fooled, but she also knew that in this game, appearances were everything. “Perhaps FUG was using her without her knowledge. It’s not uncommon for them to manipulate operatives, to have them act as double agents without their consent.”

Aguero’s jaw tightened. “You’re saying she was a pawn? That she didn’t know she was working for them?”

“It’s a possibility,” Maria replied smoothly. “FUG is known for their deception, for their ability to twist even the most loyal agents to their will. You of all people should understand that.”

“I understand more than you think,” Aguero shot back, his voice low. “Which is why I find it hard to believe you weren’t aware of who she really was.”

The room fell into a tense silence, the only sound being the distant ticking of a grandfather clock. Aguero’s gaze never wavered from Maria’s, searching for any sign of deceit. He had always been good at reading people, at deciphering their intentions, but Maria was a master of the game—one of the few who could meet his eyes without flinching.

Finally, Maria sighed and leaned back in her chair. “Aguero, I understand that you’re angry. But you need to trust me. I have always had your best interests at heart. If I had known about Michelle’s true allegiance, I would never have suggested her for the mission.”

Aguero’s eyes narrowed, his patience was wearing thin. “Trust? You’re asking me to trust you after you put my entire team in jeopardy?”

“Yes,” Maria replied firmly. “Because we’re on the same side. We want the same things—success, survival, power. And we both know that in this world, sometimes risks must be taken. Calculated risks.”

“This wasn’t a calculated risk,” Aguero shot back. “This was a disaster waiting to happen. And you knew it.”

Maria’s gaze softened, a hint of something resembling regret flickering in her eyes. “I didn’t know, Aguero. I made a mistake, and I’m sorry for that. But don’t let this one incident destroy everything we’ve built together. We’re stronger as allies than as enemies.”

Aguero fell silent, his mind racing as he processed her words. There was truth in what she said—they were stronger together. But the trust between them had been shattered, and he wasn’t sure if it could ever be repaired.

He took a step back, his expression guarded. “Stay away from my team, Maria. If I find out you’ve been manipulating us again, I won’t hesitate to cut ties. Permanently.”

Maria’s lips curved into a faint smile, though her eyes remained cold. “I would expect nothing less from you, Aguero. But remember, in this game, there are no permanent allies or enemies—only those who are useful and those who are not.”

Aguero turned and walked toward the door, his thoughts still swirling with doubts. As he reached the threshold, Maria’s voice called out to him one last time.

“Aguero,” she said softly, her tone almost affectionate. “Be careful who you trust. The real enemy may be closer than you think.”

Without another word, Aguero left the room, the door closing behind him with a finality that echoed through the grand chambers. As he made his way back through the estate, his mind was already working on the next steps. He couldn’t afford to be caught off guard again. 

He needed to clear his head, to think things through without the walls of the estate closing in on him. There was only one place he could go where he might find some clarity—Asensio’s office.

Though the office was located discreetly outside the main grounds of the estate, Aguero knew the path well. Asensio had always been somewhat of a confidant for Aguero, someone he could rely on when things got murky. The two of them understood the undercurrents of their world better than most, and Aguero knew that if anyone could help him unravel this web of deceit, it would be Asensio.

The office was unassuming, tucked away in a quiet corner of the Khun family’s vast property. To an outsider, it looked like a simple storage building, but Aguero knew better. As he approached the door, he knocked twice—a coded signal that only he and Asensio used. Moments later, the door swung open, revealing Asensio leaning casually against the frame, his usual smirk in place.

“A.A,” Asensio greeted, stepping aside to let him in. “You look like you’ve been through a wringer. What brings you here?”

Aguero stepped inside, the familiar scent of polished wood and old books calming his nerves slightly. 

“I need to talk to you,” Aguero said, his voice tense. “Something happened with Maria.”

Asensio raised an eyebrow as he closed the door behind them. “Maria? That’s never a good sign. What did she do this time?”

Aguero didn’t waste time with pleasantries. He took a seat at the small table in the center of the room, his hands resting on the cool surface as he met Asensio’s gaze. “It’s about the girl she brought into the group. Michelle Light, or Rachel, as she’s really known. She was a plant, Asensio. A spy working for FUG.”

Asensio’s smirk vanished, replaced by a look of genuine surprise. “What? Are you serious? Maria brought in someone working for FUG?”

“Dead serious,” Aguero replied, his tone was sharp. “You remember how she insisted on adding Rachel to our last mission, the one where we infiltrated the FUG base, right? At first, I didn’t think much of it—Maria’s always had her own agenda, but I never thought she’d be so reckless. But now, knowing what I know, it’s hard not to think she did it on purpose.”

Asensio frowned, crossing his arms as he leaned against the edge of the table. “And you’re sure about this? That Rachel was working for FUG?”

Aguero nodded. “I’m certain. Hockney came across her data when he was working to breach FUG’s security systems years ago. It’s impossible to believe that Maria didn’t catch onto that.”

“Didn’t she do a background check?” Asensio asked, his eyes narrowing in thought. “That’s the first thing anyone with half a brain would do.”

“Exactly,” Aguero said, his frustration mounting. “That’s what bothers me. Maria’s too thorough to miss something like that. Which means she knew, and she still pushed to have Rachel join us. And that leads me to only one conclusion—Maria’s in on something bigger.”

Asensio let out a low whistle, shaking his head. “That’s a dangerous assumption, A.A. But knowing Maria and how she operates, it’s not out of the realm of possibility. And if she’s involved, you can bet Maschenny is too. Those two are thick as thieves.”

Aguero’s jaw clenched at the mention of Maschenny. It made sense. Maria and Maschenny had always had their own schemes, their own way of manipulating the board to their advantage. But this time, it felt different. This time, it felt personal.

“If they’re working together,” Aguero said slowly, “then they’re playing a game we’re not fully aware of. And that puts us, and the team, in the crossfire.”

Asensio nodded, his expression was serious. “Yeah. But the question is, what’s their endgame? What do they stand to gain by putting you at risk?”

“I don’t know,” Aguero admitted, his voice tinged with frustration. “But I’m not going to sit around and wait to find out. We need to be proactive.”

A silence fell between them, both men lost in their own thoughts. The weight of the situation hung heavily in the air, thick with the unspoken danger that lay ahead.

“Well,” Finally, Asensio broke the silence, his tone shifting to a more pragmatic one, “since you’re already here, there’s something I need to discuss with you. We received a new contract recently—a mission on a remote island. The details are still coming in, but it’s clear that it’s high-risk.”

Aguero’s thoughts shifted gears, focusing on the matter at hand. “A remote island? Sounds like someone’s trying to keep things off the radar.”

“Exactly,” Asensio said. “The client wants it handled quietly. No mess, no attention. Just get in, do the job, and get out.”

Aguero leaned back in his chair, considering the options. Normally, a mission like this would require his full attention, but with everything going on, his priorities were split. After a moment of thought, he made a decision.

“I’ll send Endorsi, Hatz, and Rak to handle it,” Aguero said. “They’re more than capable, and it’ll keep them occupied while we figure out what’s going on with Maria and Maschenny.”

Asensio nodded in agreement. “Good call. They’re reliable, and they can handle themselves. Besides, it’ll give you some breathing room to deal with the mess Maria’s created.”

Aguero sighed, the tension in his shoulders easing slightly. “Yeah, I’ll need it. I’ll brief them on the mission and make sure they’re prepared.”

“Sounds like a plan,” Asensio replied, his smirk returning. “And A.A, watch your back. If Maria and Maschenny are really plotting something, you’ll need to stay sharp.”

Aguero gave a curt nod. “I always do.”

With that, the two men stood, the weight of their conversation lingering in the air. Asensio walked Aguero to the door, pausing before opening it.

“Remember, A.A,” Asensio said quietly, “trust is a rare commodity in this family. Don’t give it away lightly.”

Aguero met his gaze, his eyes steely. “I know. And I won’t.”

With that, Aguero stepped outside, the cool night air hitting his face as he left Asensio’s office. The conversation had given him clarity, but it had also confirmed his worst fears. Maria and Maschenny were up to something, and whatever it was, it wasn’t going to end well for anyone caught in the middle.

As he walked back to the hideout, his mind was already racing with plans, contingencies, and what-ifs. There was no time to waste. He needed to get his team ready, ensure the mission was handled, and most importantly, find out what Maria and Maschenny were really after. The path ahead was uncertain, filled with shadows and hidden dangers. But Aguero had never been one to shy away from the dark. If anything, it was where he thrived.

The game was on, and this time, he was determined to win—no matter the cost.

Chapter Text

Wangnan sat at the small, cluttered desk in his room, the dim light from the lamp casting shadows on the papers scattered in front of him. He rubbed his temples as frustration gnawed at him as he stared at the screen of his laptop. He and Akraptor had spent countless hours poring over every possible lead, every scrap of information, every clue that might give them some insight into Viole’s past. But it had all amounted to nothing.

Private informants, online databases, scouring the web—all of it had come up empty. Each time they thought they were getting closer, the trail went cold. Viole was a ghost, a shadow without a past, and it was driving Wangnan crazy. 

Akraptor sat across from him, his brow furrowed in thought. The older man had been patient, methodical, and resourceful, but even he seemed to be reaching the end of his rope.

“We’ve exhausted every normal method,” Wangnan muttered, his voice heavy with frustration. “There’s got to be something we’re missing, something we haven’t thought of.”

Akraptor leaned back in his chair, arms crossed. “It’s not surprising that we haven’t found anything. If Viole’s as dangerous as we think, then someone’s gone to a lot of trouble to bury his past.”

Wangnan sighed, running a hand through his hair. “Yeah, but who? And why? What could be so important that someone would go to these lengths to erase his entire history?”

Akraptor remained silent for a moment, his gaze distant as he considered their options. Then, as if a thought had suddenly occurred to him, he sat up straighter, his expression serious.

“There’s one avenue we haven’t explored yet,” Akraptor said slowly, his tone cautious. “But it’s risky.”

Wangnan looked up, curiosity piqued. “What is it?”

Akraptor hesitated, as if weighing the decision. “We’ve been playing it safe so far, using conventional methods—official channels, legal databases, private informants. But if we really want to dig into Viole’s past, we might need to go… deeper.”

“Deeper?” Wangnan repeated, frowning. “What do you mean?”

“I’m talking about the underworld,” Akraptor said, his voice low. “The dark web, criminal networks, black markets—places where the usual rules don’t apply. It’s dangerous, but if Viole has ties to the underworld, that’s where we’ll find them.”

Wangnan’s eyes widened slightly at the suggestion. “The underworld? You’re serious?”

Akraptor nodded grimly. “Look, I know it’s not ideal. But we’re out of options. The normal methods have gotten us nowhere, and if Viole’s as connected as we think, the answers won’t be found in any public database.”

Wangnan leaned back in his chair, considering the proposal. The idea of delving into the underworld was unsettling. He had heard stories—rumors of shadowy figures, illegal deals, and information brokers who could find out anything for the right price. It wasn’t a world he was eager to step into, but if it was the only way to learn the truth about Viole…

Before Wangnan could respond, he recalled something—a brief, cryptic conversation he had with the man who had ambushed him weeks ago. It had been a harrowing experience, one that had left him shaken, but there was something the man had said that now seemed relevant.

“Akraptor,” Wangnan said slowly, “there’s something I need to tell you. When that guy ambushed me a while back, he said something that’s been bothering me. He mentioned that Viole… resembles someone from the underworld.”

Akraptor’s eyes narrowed, his interest piqued. “Did he say who?”

Wangnan shook his head. “No, he just said that Viole looked like someone from that world. At the time, I didn’t think much of it, but now… if Viole really is connected to the underworld, that might explain why we haven’t been able to find anything about him through normal means.”

Akraptor considered this, nodding slowly. “That just makes it even more likely that we’ll find what we need in the underworld. If Viole has a history there, it’s going to be buried deep, but not deep enough that we can’t dig it up.”

Wangnan chuckled nervously, trying to lighten the mood. “You seem to know a lot about the underworld, Akraptor. Should I be worried?”

Akraptor cracked a small smile, but it didn’t quite reach his eyes. “I’m not the one with connections there, kid. It’s my boss. He’s got ties to all sorts of places, including the underworld. He doesn’t talk about it much, but he’s helped me out in the past when I’ve needed information that couldn’t be found anywhere else.”

Wangnan raised an eyebrow. “Your boss, huh? I guess that explains why you know where to look.”

Akraptor’s expression grew serious again. “It’s not something I take lightly, Wangnan. The underworld is a dangerous place, and once you step into it, there’s no turning back. If we do this, we have to be careful—one wrong move, and we could end up in a lot of trouble.”

Wangnan nodded, understanding the gravity of the situation. “I get it. But if this is the only way to find out who Viole really is, then we have to do it. We’ve come too far to back out now.”

Akraptor studied him for a moment before nodding in agreement. “All right. I’ll reach out to my contacts and see what they can find. It might take some time, but if there’s anything out there on Viole, we’ll find it.”

The conversation settled into a heavy silence as both men considered what lay ahead. The path they were about to take was fraught with danger, but Wangnan knew it was necessary. He couldn’t shake the feeling that Viole’s past held the key to understanding everything—their current predicament, the dangers they faced, and perhaps even the fate of their family.

The hours dragged on as they discussed the details, formulating a plan to navigate the treacherous waters of the underworld. Akraptor would make contact with his boss, who would then connect them with trusted information brokers who specialized in digging up secrets buried deep within the criminal world. Wangnan, meanwhile, would continue searching for leads through more conventional means, just in case something turned up that could spare them from having to rely on such risky methods.

But as the night wore on, it became increasingly clear that this was the path they would have to take. The normal avenues had failed them, and now they were being forced to venture into the shadows. It was a sobering realization, but one that both men accepted with grim determination.

Eventually, as the first light of dawn began to creep through the window, Akraptor stood up, stretching his tired limbs. “I’ll make the calls today,” he said, his voice rough with exhaustion. “We’ll see what turns up. In the meantime, try to get some rest. We’re going to need our wits about us for what’s coming.”

Wangnan nodded, though he doubted he’d be able to sleep. The weight of their decision hung heavily on his shoulders, and his mind raced with possibilities—what they might find, what dangers lay ahead, and what truths about Viole might finally come to light.

As Akraptor made his way to the door, Wangnan called out to him. “Akraptor, thanks for sticking with this. I know it’s not easy.”

Akraptor turned back, giving Wangnan a tired but genuine smile. “We’re in this together, kid. We’ll figure it out.”

With that, Akraptor left, leaving Wangnan alone in the quiet of the early morning. The apartment felt oppressively silent without Akraptor’s steady presence, and Wangnan found himself lost in thought, staring out the window at the pale sky.

The underworld. It was a place he had hoped never to go, a world he had only heard about in rumors and half-whispered tales. But now, it seemed like their only option. If Viole was truly connected to that dark world, then they had no choice but to follow the trail wherever it led.

As the sun began to rise, Wangnan made a silent vow. No matter what they uncovered, no matter how dark the secrets or dangerous the enemies, he wouldn’t back down. He would find the truth about Viole, even if it meant delving into the darkest corners of the world to do it.

Because in the end, the truth was all that mattered. And Wangnan was willing to risk everything to uncover it.

Wangnan and Akraptor sat in the dimly lit room, the hum of the old computer the only sound breaking the silence. They had spent weeks chasing dead ends, empty leads, and broken trails. Every time they thought they were close to uncovering Viole’s past, the path would abruptly end, leaving them more frustrated and desperate than before. But tonight, after countless hours of digging and sifting through the shadows of the underworld, they had finally found something.

Wangnan leaned closer to the screen, his eyes scanning the lines of text with a mix of disbelief and confusion. “I can’t believe it,” he muttered, his voice barely above a whisper. “After all this time… we finally found something.”

Akraptor, who had been leaning back in his chair, arms crossed and eyes narrowed, leaned forward, his gaze sharp as he read over Wangnan’s shoulder. “A train explosion,” he murmured, his voice tense. “Five years ago. And Viole… he was the only survivor?”

Wangnan nodded slowly, still processing the information. “Yeah. But that’s not even the strangest part. Look at this.” He pointed to a section of the report, highlighting a specific detail. “Every single record of the explosion has been erased. There’s no official mention of it anywhere—no news reports, no police records, nothing. It’s like the whole incident was wiped from existence.”

Akraptor frowned, his expression growing darker. “Someone went to a lot of trouble to make sure no one knew about this. But why? What happened on that train?”

Wangnan’s eyes darted back to the screen, searching for answers that weren’t there. “I don’t know. But here’s the thing that really doesn’t make sense—Viole wasn’t alone on that train. He was with members of an assassin group… one that works for the Khun family.”

Akraptor’s breath hitched slightly, and he sat back in his chair, the weight of the revelation sinking in. “The Khun family,” he repeated, his voice heavy with disbelief. “The most notorious assassins in the underworld. If Viole was with them…”

Wangnan finished the thought, his voice was tight with anxiety. “Then he’s not just some random guy with a mysterious past. He’s connected to the Khun family—maybe even directly. But what was he doing on that train? Why was he with them?”

Akraptor’s gaze hardened as he considered the implications. “It’s possible he was one of them. Or maybe he was their target. Either way, it explains why we’ve had such a hard time finding anything on him. The Khun family has the power to erase people from existence if they want to.”

Wangnan felt a chill run down his spine. Wangnan has heard of the Khuns. The Khun family was infamous for their ruthlessness, their reach extending into every dark corner of the underworld. If Viole was involved with them, even tangentially, it meant they were dealing with forces far beyond anything they had anticipated.

As the silence stretched between them, Wangnan’s mind began to race, connecting dots that had once seemed unrelated. “Wait a minute,” he said suddenly, his voice filled with a mix of realization and dread. “Five years ago… that’s when I found Viole.”

Akraptor looked at him, confused. “What do you mean?”

Wangnan turned away from the computer, his thoughts drifting back to that fateful day. “I found Viole on a seashore five years ago. Remember the day when I brought him here? He was injured, his clothes were torn, and he was passed out. I thought he was just some unfortunate soul who got caught up in something bad, but now…”

Akraptor’s eyes widened slightly as he pieced it together. “You think he was on that train before you saw him?”

Wangnan nodded slowly. “It makes sense. If he was the lone survivor, and if that explosion happened on or near the coast, then maybe the blast threw him into the sea. Maybe that’s how he ended up there, unconscious and injured. But why? Why was he there in the first place?”

The room fell silent as the weight of the revelation settled in. If Viole had been on that train, then his connection to the Khun family was deeper and more complicated than they had imagined. And if the Khun family had erased all records of the event, it meant they were hiding something—something that involved Viole.

Akraptor broke the silence, his voice tense with urgency. “We need to figure out what really happened on that train, Wangnan. If Viole’s past is tied to the Khun family, then this is bigger than we thought. We’re not just dealing with some runaway—we’re dealing with someone who might have been involved in something dangerous, something the Khun family didn’t want anyone to know about.”

Wangnan nodded, his resolve hardening. “You’re right. We’ve come this far, we can’t stop now. We need to find out what really happened and what Viole’s connection to the Khun family is. But we have to be careful, Akraptor. If the Khun family is involved, then we’re walking on thin ice.”

Akraptor’s gaze was steely as he met Wangnan’s eyes. “I know. But I told you we’re in this together, kid. We’ll figure it out—no matter what it takes.”

With renewed determination, the two men began to plan their next move. They knew the risks, but they also knew that they couldn’t turn back now. The truth about Viole’s past was within reach, and they were prepared to go to any lengths to uncover it.

As they worked late into the night, pouring over the scant information they had managed to uncover, Wangnan couldn’t help but think back to that day on the seashore. He had no idea that the injured young man he had found would lead him down such a dark and dangerous path. But now, with the truth so close, he knew there was no turning back.

For better or worse, they were about to uncover secrets that had been buried for years—secrets that could change everything they thought they knew about Viole, the Khun family, and the dangerous world they had stumbled into.

After exhausting every legal and semi-legal option, Wangnan and Akraptor knew they had to dive deeper into the underworld if they wanted to find out anything substantial about Viole’s past. With this decision made, they had contacted an informant known for dealing in the kind of secrets that never saw the light of day, someone who could be discreet when money was involved and talkative when it wasn’t.

The informant had suggested they meet at a bar on the island—far from prying eyes, yet easily accessible to those who knew where to look. The bar itself was an unassuming place, tucked away on the outskirts of the island, where the only sounds were the distant waves and the quiet hum of conversation from the few patrons who knew about its existence.

Wangnan and Akraptor arrived early, scanning the room for anything suspicious. The bar was dimly lit, the walls decorated with old, yellowed maps, and the wooden tables and chairs were worn but sturdy. A faint smell of saltwater lingered in the air, mixing with the scent of cheap liquor. The bartender, a burly man with a scarred face, gave them a curt nod as they entered, but otherwise paid them no mind.

They chose a corner booth, far from the other patrons, and sat down to wait. The silence between them was tense, filled with the weight of their shared uncertainty. Akraptor’s fingers drummed impatiently on the table, his eyes scanning the room for any signs of trouble. Wangnan, on the other hand, tried to steady his nerves, reminding himself that this was just another step in their investigation—albeit a risky one.

It wasn’t long before the informant walked in. He was a wiry man with sharp features, wearing a worn trench coat that seemed too large for his thin frame. His eyes darted around the room, taking in everything at once before he approached their table. Without a word, he slid into the booth across from them, his gaze settling on Wangnan and Akraptor with a calculating look.

“You’re the ones asking about the train,” the informant said, his voice low and gravelly.

Wangnan nodded, leaning forward slightly. “That’s right. We’re looking for information about the people who were on it—especially a young man named Viole.”

The informant’s eyes narrowed slightly, as if weighing how much to reveal. “Viole, huh? That sounds new. You sure you want to be digging around in this?”

“We wouldn’t be here if we weren’t,” Akraptor replied, his tone firm. “What do you know?”

The informant smirked, as if amused by their determination. “Well, I’ve got something that might interest you. Cost me a pretty penny to get it, but I figured it was worth the investment.”

He reached into his coat and pulled out a small, worn envelope, sliding it across the table to them. Wangnan took it with cautious hands, glancing at Akraptor before opening it. Inside was a single photograph, faded and slightly crumpled, but the image was clear enough.

The photo showed the interior of a train car, with several people seated together. In the center was Viole, looking younger but unmistakably him, with his trademark solemn expression. Beside him was a young man with blonde hair and piercing blue eyes, casually leaning back in his seat with a confident air. Across from them were two girls—one with dark green hair tied back into a neat ponytail, and the other with shorter brown hair. To the side were two men—one with black spiky hair, and the other with a clean-cut, almost bald head. And finally, sitting further back, there was a massive figure that could only be described as an alligator, its eyes gleaming with a sharp intelligence.

Wangnan stared at the photo, his mind racing to process what he was seeing. “This… This is Viole,” he said, more to himself than to the others. “And these people… Who are they?”

The informant chuckled softly, clearly enjoying their surprise. “That blonde guy with the blue eyes? He’s a member of the Khun family—a real high-ranking one, too. If he was on that train, then you can bet your life that this wasn’t just any ordinary trip. The others with him… Well, they’re all known associates of the Khun family in one way or another. That brown-haired girl, for example—she’s an assassin who’s done work for them before. And that big guy in the back? Let’s just say he’s not someone you want to mess with.”

Akraptor’s eyes flicked to the informant, his suspicion was clear. “You’re saying Viole was traveling with a bunch of killers and a Khun family member? How does he fit into all this?”

“That’s the million-dollar question, isn’t it?” The informant leaned back in his seat, his smirk widening. “Your boy Viole wasn’t just a tag-along, though. If he was on that train with them, he was important—important enough that the Khun family would want to erase any trace of what happened.”

Wangnan felt a chill run down his spine. The Khun family had a reputation for being one of the deadliest and most secretive families in the underworld. If Viole was connected to them, it meant they were dealing with something far bigger and more dangerous than they had ever imagined.

“What about the train itself?” Wangnan asked, his voice tinged with urgency. “What happened to it? Why was everything about it erased?”

The informant’s expression grew more serious. “The train was blown up—an explosion that was big enough to take out everyone on board. But here’s the kicker—Viole was the only survivor. The Khun family made sure the whole thing was buried, wiped from every record, and forgotten. But some of us in the underworld… Well, we don’t forget so easily.”

Akraptor exchanged a glance with Wangnan, both of them realizing the gravity of what they had uncovered. “If the Khun family went to these lengths to cover up what happened, then whatever was on that train was something they didn’t want anyone to know about,” Akraptor said, his voice low.

The informant nodded. “Exactly. And now you two have your hands on that secret. I hope you know what you’re doing, because once you start poking around the Khun family’s business, it’s hard to stop.”

Wangnan clenched his fists, his mind swirling with a mix of fear and determination. “We’ve come too far to back down now. We need to know the truth about Viole—no matter what it takes.”

The informant studied them for a moment before giving a slight nod. “Just be careful. The Khun family doesn’t play games. If they find out you’re digging into their past, they won’t hesitate to make you disappear—just like that train.”

With that ominous warning, the informant stood up, gave them one last look, and walked out of the bar, disappearing into the night. Wangnan and Akraptor sat in silence for a long moment, the weight of the information they had just received pressing down on them.

“This changes everything,” Wangnan finally said, his voice heavy with realization. “Viole isn’t just some runaway—he’s connected to the Khun family. And if that’s true…”

“Then we’re dealing with something way bigger than we ever imagined,” Akraptor finished, his expression grim. “But we can’t stop now. We need to find out exactly what happened on that train and what Viole’s connection to the Khun family really is.”

Wangnan nodded, his resolve hardening. “You’re right. We’ve come this far—there’s no turning back now. But we need to be smart about this. If the Khun family is involved, we can’t afford any mistakes.”

Akraptor gave him a steady look. “We’ll have to move carefully. No more relying on informants—we need to find people who were directly involved. People who can tell us what really happened.”

Wangnan took a deep breath, feeling the weight of their mission more than ever before. “Then let’s do it. Let’s find out the truth.”

As they left the bar and stepped into the cool night air, Wangnan couldn’t shake the image of the photograph from his mind. Viole, sitting side by side with a member of the Khun family, surrounded by killers and assassins. Whatever secrets that train held, they were buried deep—hidden by the most dangerous people in the underworld.

But now, those secrets were within their grasp. And no matter the cost, Wangnan and Akraptor were determined to uncover the truth.

As they made their way back to their home, the gravity of their discovery weighed heavily on them, yet it also fueled their determination. They knew the risks, but they also knew that they had come too far to stop now. With each step, they grew more resolute—ready to face whatever dangers lay ahead, for the truth about Viole was within reach, and they wouldn’t stop until they uncovered it all.

A few days later, the sun was rising, casting a warm, golden light across the small dock where Viole and Wangnan were working. The two of them were repairing the boat they often used for their trips between the island and the mainland—a routine task that had become almost meditative for Viole, who found solace in the repetitive motion and the quiet companionship of Wangnan. 

The steady rhythm of their work filled the silence between them, the only other sounds being the gentle lapping of the waves against the dock and the distant calls of seagulls overhead. Wangnan, as usual, was talking about something—his voice was animated, his words flowing easily, almost as if he was thinking out loud. Viole listened with half an ear, his mind more focused on tightening a loose bolt than on whatever story Wangnan was sharing. 

“So, I was thinking,” Wangnan said, his voice was casual but tinged with a hint of excitement. “What if we tried fishing in that cove on the other side of the island? I heard the locals say it’s a great spot—lots of fish, hardly anyone goes there. They say it’s a bit dangerous but I think that’s okay since you’re helping me. We’re not going anywhere. We could catch enough to last us a week, maybe even longer if we get lucky.”

Viole nodded absentmindedly, his hands continuing their work. But as Wangnan kept talking, something strange happened. A sudden flash of memory hit him—brief, fragmented, and so disorienting that it made him freeze in place. Wangnan’s words seemed to echo in his mind, but they were layered with another voice—familiar, yet distant, as if it came from a different time, a different life. 

“…we’re not going anywhere… I’m not going anywhere…”

The words blurred and shifted in Viole’s mind, merging with the fleeting image of a place he couldn’t quite remember. He saw the vast night sky, the flicker of lights, and the shadow of a figure standing beside him. The voice—soft, calm, and reassuring—was speaking the same words Wangnan had just said, but the context was different. There was an urgency in the memory, a sense of danger lurking just beyond the edges of the image. And then, just as suddenly as it had appeared, the memory vanished, leaving Viole standing there, shaken and confused.

“Viole? Hey, are you okay?” Wangnan’s voice cut through the fog in his mind, pulling him back to the present. 

Viole blinked, his gaze unfocused as he turned to look at Wangnan. “I… I’m fine,” he said, but his voice lacked its usual calmness. “It’s just… for a moment, I thought I heard something, I saw something.”

Wangnan frowned, his concern creasing his brow. He had seen the look on Viole’s face—a look of confusion and fear that was completely out of character for him. “What do you mean? What did you see?”

Viole hesitated, struggling to put the experience into words. “I’m not sure,” he finally admitted, his voice was quieter now. “It was like… a memory. But not a clear one. More like a feeling, or a fragment of something I can’t fully remember. When you were talking, it was as if I had heard those words before, from someone else. And I saw… someone, I think. But it was blurry. I couldn’t make out their face.”

Wangnan’s unease deepened. Ever since he and Akraptor had discovered the truth about Viole’s past—about the train explosion and his connection to the Khun family—they had both been on edge. They hadn’t told Viole what they had learned, partly because they didn’t know how he would react, and partly because they weren’t sure what it all meant yet. But hearing Viole mention a memory—something from his past—made Wangnan’s stomach twist with anxiety.

“Do you think… it’s something important?” Wangnan asked carefully, not wanting to push too hard but needing to know more.

Viole shook his head, his expression was troubled. “I don’t know. It was just a flash. It didn’t feel important, but… it was unsettling. Like something I should remember, but can’t.”

Wangnan swallowed hard, trying to keep his voice steady. “Maybe it’s just your mind playing tricks on you. You know, like when you hear something that reminds you of a dream you can’t quite remember.”

“Maybe.” Viole didn’t sound convinced, though. He turned back to the boat, his hands resuming their work, but his mind was clearly elsewhere. 

Wangnan watched him for a moment, his mind racing. He couldn’t help but wonder if Viole’s memory had something to do with the train, with the people who had been with him that day. The photo the informant had shown them kept flashing in his mind—the image of Viole sitting side by side with a young man from the Khun family, surrounded by people who were clearly not ordinary passengers. 

“Viole,” Wangnan said cautiously, “if you ever want to talk about… your past, you know you can talk to me, right?”

Viole paused, glancing at Wangnan with a faint smile. “I appreciate that, Wangnan. But there’s not much to talk about. My past is… a blur. I’ve tried to remember, but the more I try, the more it slips away.”

Wangnan forced a smile in return, though his mind was far from at ease. “Yeah, I get it. Just… just don’t keep everything bottled up, okay? We’re friends. We’ve got each other’s backs.”

Viole nodded, his expression softening slightly. “I know. Thanks, Wangnan.”

The conversation drifted back to their work, but the tension lingered in the air, unspoken but palpable. As they continued to repair the boat, Wangnan couldn’t shake the feeling that the memory Viole had experienced was more than just a fleeting thought. It was a glimpse into a past that had been deliberately hidden, buried beneath layers of secrecy and pain. And now that past was beginning to resurface, piece by piece.

As the day wore on and the sun began to set, Wangnan found himself replaying the events of the past few weeks in his mind. He thought about the train explosion, the erased records, and the people in the photograph. He thought about the Khun family and their ruthless reputation. And most of all, he thought about Viole—his friend, who had somehow survived all of it, but who was now being haunted by memories he couldn’t fully grasp.

That night, as Wangnan lay awake in his bed, staring up at the ceiling, he made a silent promise to himself. No matter what it took, he would help Viole uncover the truth about his past. He would stand by his friend, even if it meant going up against the Khun family themselves. Because whatever secrets Viole’s past held, Wangnan knew one thing for certain: they couldn’t stay hidden forever.

But even as he made that vow, a sense of dread settled in his chest. He knew that the more they dug into Viole’s past, the more dangerous their journey would become. And with each step they took, they were getting closer to a truth that could shatter everything they thought they knew.

The next morning, Wangnan was quieter than usual. The easy banter he usually shared with Viole was replaced by a more subdued conversation as they prepared for the day ahead. Akraptor, noticing the shift in Wangnan’s mood, shot him a questioning glance, but Wangnan only shook his head slightly in response. He wasn’t ready to share what had happened with Akraptor—not yet. Not until he understood it better himself.

As they set out for another day of work, Wangnan couldn’t help but keep an eye on Viole, watching for any signs of distress or confusion. But Viole seemed to have recovered from the previous day’s episode, his usual calm demeanor firmly back in place. If he was still troubled by the memory, he didn’t show it.

But Wangnan couldn’t shake the feeling that something was coming—something that would force them to confront the shadows of Viole’s past head-on. And when that moment came, they would have to be ready for whatever truths it revealed.

Over the next few days, the atmosphere between Wangnan and Viole remained tense but unspoken, as if they were both waiting for the other to bring up the memory again. But Viole said nothing more about it, and Wangnan, unsure of how to broach the subject, kept his thoughts to himself. Still, the incident lingered in the back of his mind, a constant reminder of the secrets they had yet to uncover.

Chapter Text

The moon hung low in the sky, casting a cold, pale light over the island. The waves lapped gently against the shore, a soft rhythm that would have been calming if not for the tension gripping Wangnan’s heart. The once peaceful island, which had been their home for so many years, now felt suffocating, its every shadow hiding a potential threat.

Wangnan’s mind raced as he replayed the events that had led them to this moment. It had all started with Viole, the mysterious young man they had found washed up on the shore five years ago, battered and near death. Viole had no memory of who he was or where he had come from, and despite the years that had passed, those memories had never returned. Wangnan and Akraptor had tried to uncover Viole’s past, seeking out informants from the underworld, delving into the darkest corners of society in search of answers. But instead of clarity, their inquiries had only brought danger. 

The word had spread quickly—too quickly. The underworld was buzzing with rumors of the lone survivor of a catastrophic train explosion five years ago, and somehow, those rumors had led back to Viole. Now, Wangnan and his family were marked, hunted by those who sought the truth for their own purposes. The peaceful life they had built on the island was crumbling around them, and their only option was to run.

Wangnan stood by the window, staring out at the dark expanse of the sea, his thoughts heavy with the weight of responsibility. They needed to leave—now, before it was too late. But the thought of abandoning their home, the place that had sheltered them for so long, filled him with a deep sense of loss.

A soft knock on the door pulled him from his thoughts. He turned to see Akraptor standing in the doorway, his expression grim. “They’re getting ready,” Akraptor said quietly, his voice barely above a whisper. “We need to move fast.”

Wangnan nodded, the urgency of the situation settling like a stone in his gut. “Are the kids okay?” he asked, his voice strained.

“They’re scared,” Akraptor confessed, his gaze dropping to the floor. “But they trust us. They’ll do what we ask.”

Wangnan sighed, running a hand through his hair. “I wish it didn’t have to be like this,” he murmured. “I wish we could just stay here and be safe.”

“We both know that’s not an option,” Akraptor replied, his tone firm. “The island isn’t safe anymore. They’ll find us if we stay.”

Wangnan looked down, his fists clenching at his sides. “I know,” he said, his voice tight with frustration. “But it doesn’t make it any easier.”

Akraptor placed a reassuring hand on Wangnan’s shoulder. “We’ll get through this,” he said, his voice filled with quiet determination. “We’ve faced worse, and we’ve always made it through.”

Wangnan forced a smile, though it felt hollow. “Yeah,” he agreed, though his heart was heavy with doubt. “We’ll make it through.”

Akraptor nodded, giving Wangnan’s shoulder a gentle squeeze before stepping back. “I’m going to get Goseng, Miseng, Prince, and Yihwa ready,” he said. “We’ll meet you by the boat in fifteen minutes.”

“Right,” Wangnan replied, his mind already racing with the next steps. “I’ll make sure Viole and Horyang are ready.”

Akraptor gave him a final nod before disappearing down the hallway. Wangnan took a deep breath, steeling himself for what was to come. They didn’t have time for second-guessing or regrets. They had to move, and they had to do it now.

Wangnan made his way down the narrow corridor to the small room where Viole and Horyang were waiting. He could feel the weight of the situation pressing down on him with every step, the fear gnawing at his resolve. When he reached the door, he paused for a moment, gathering his thoughts before stepping inside.

Viole was sitting on the edge of the bed, his expression was distant, lost in thought. Horyang stood by the window, his tall, muscular frame tense as he scanned the horizon for any signs of danger. The room was filled with an unspoken tension, the fear and uncertainty hanging thick in the air.

Wangnan cleared his throat, drawing their attention. “We need to go,” he said, his voice steady despite the turmoil inside him. “Akraptor is getting the others ready. We’ll meet by the boat in fifteen minutes.”

Horyang nodded, his expression serious. “Understood,” he replied, his deep voice resonating with calm authority.

Viole, however, didn’t move. He remained seated, his gaze fixed on the floor. “Why are we running?” he asked quietly, his voice was tinged with confusion and frustration. “Why are they after us?”

Wangnan’s heart sank at the question. He had known this moment would come—Viole was too smart not to notice that something was wrong. But he had hoped to delay it, to keep Viole in the dark for as long as possible, to protect him from the harsh truth of their situation.

“We don’t know for sure,” Wangnan lied, his voice carefully controlled. “It’s possible they’ve mistaken us for someone else. But we can’t take any chances. We need to be careful.”

Viole looked up at Wangnan, his eyes searching for answers that Wangnan couldn’t—or wouldn’t—give. “And you really think running is the best option?” he asked, his voice was laced with doubt.

“It’s our only option,” Wangnan replied firmly, holding Viole’s gaze. “We need to keep moving, to stay ahead of them. If we stop, we’re putting everyone at risk.”

Viole studied Wangnan’s face for a moment longer, as if trying to see through the lies to the truth beneath. But finally, he nodded, though the uncertainty was still clear in his eyes. “Alright,” he said quietly. “Let’s go.”

Relief washed over Wangnan, though it was tempered by guilt. He hated lying to Viole, but the truth was too dangerous, too painful. He had to protect him, even if it meant keeping him in the dark.

Horyang stepped forward, his presence a steadying force in the tense atmosphere. “We’ll watch your back,” he said, his voice calm and reassuring. “No matter what happens, we won’t let them get to you.”

Wangnan nodded gratefully. “Thank you,” he said sincerely. “I don’t know what we’d do without you.”

Horyang’s expression softened slightly, a rare glimpse of the man beneath the stoic exterior. “We’re in this together, Wangnan,” he said simply. “We’ll get through it together.”

With that, they gathered their few belongings and made their way out of the house. The night was dark, the moon hidden behind thick clouds, casting the island in deep shadows. The air was cool and still, the silence broken only by the soft rustling of leaves in the breeze.

They moved quickly and quietly through the forest, the path to the shore well-worn from years of use. Wangnan led the way, his senses heightened by the tension in the air. Every sound seemed amplified, every shadow a potential threat. But they couldn’t afford to be caught off guard. Not now.

When they reached the boat, Akraptor was already there with Goseng, Miseng, Prince, and Yihwa. The two younger members of their group were huddled together, their expressions a mix of fear and uncertainty. Wangnan’s heart ached at the sight of them—so young, so innocent, and now caught up in a danger they didn’t fully understand.

Wangnan knelt down in front of them, forcing a smile onto his face. “Hey,” he said gently, his voice was soft. “I know this is scary, but we’re going to be okay. Akraptor is going to take care of you, and we’ll all be safe soon.”

Miseng looked up at him with wide, tear-filled eyes. “But why do we have to leave?” she asked, her voice trembling. “Why can’t we stay here?”

Wangnan’s chest tightened at the question. How could he explain to her that their home was no longer safe, that they were being hunted by people who wouldn’t stop until they found what they were looking for? But he couldn’t burden her with that knowledge—not now.

“We just need to go somewhere safer,” Wangnan said, keeping his tone light and reassuring. “It’s just for a little while. Once things calm down, we’ll come back. I promise.”

Miseng nodded, though she still looked uncertain. Wangnan reached out and gently squeezed her hand, offering what little comfort he could. “You’re going to be just fine,” he said softly. “You’re in good hands with Akraptor.”

Goseng, who had been silent until now, stepped forward, her expression was serious. “We’ll take care of them,” she said firmly, her voice steady despite the fear in her eyes. “We’ll be okay.”

Wangnan smiled, his heart swelling with pride at her strength. “That’s the spirit,” he said, giving her a reassuring nod. “Stick together, and everything will be alright.”

Akraptor stepped forward then, his expression was grim. “We need to get going,” he said, his voice low. “The longer we stay here, the more danger we’re in.”

Wangnan nodded, though the thought of splitting up filled him with dread. But he knew Akraptor was right—they had no choice. They had to do whatever it took to keep the others safe.

“Take care of them,” Wangnan said quietly, his voice thick with emotion. “They’re counting on you.”

Akraptor met his gaze, his expression serious. “I will,” he promised. “And you take care of yourself. We’ll meet up when it’s safe.”

Wangnan nodded, though the uncertainty of when—or if—that would happen hung heavy in the air. He watched as Akraptor led the others onto the boat, his heart aching with every step they took away from him. But he knew it was for the best. They would be safer this way.

As the boat pulled away from the shore, Wangnan felt a deep sense of loss wash over him as he watched Akraptor, Miseng, Goseng, Yihwa, and Prince on the boat, waving. Wangnan understood that the island that had been their home for so long, that the fact that it may now be just a memory, a place they might never see again, ached their hearts. But there was no time to dwell on it. They had to keep moving.

Wangnan turned to Viole and Horyang, his resolve hardening. “Let’s go,” he said, his voice firm. “We need to put as much distance between us and this place as possible.”

They moved quickly, leaving the shore behind and disappearing into the dense forest. The path was uneven, the underbrush was thick, but they pressed on, driven by the need to stay ahead of their pursuers. The night was quiet, the only sounds the rustle of leaves and the occasional call of a night bird. But the silence was anything but peaceful—it was tense, filled with the unspoken fear that had been building for days.

As they walked, Viole remained silent, his expression was distant. Wangnan could feel the weight of his unasked questions, the doubt and suspicion that had been growing with each passing day. But there was nothing Wangnan could say to ease those doubts. He had to keep Viole in the dark, had to protect him from the truth that could shatter the fragile peace they had managed to hold on to.

After what felt like hours of walking, they finally stopped to rest. Wangnan sat down on a fallen log, exhaustion weighing heavily on him. The adrenaline that had been driving him forward was beginning to wear off, leaving him feeling drained and weary.

Viole sat down next to him, his gaze was fixed on the ground. The silence stretched between them, heavy and uncomfortable. Finally, Viole spoke, his voice was quiet but filled with a deep, underlying frustration.

“Wangnan,” he began, not looking up, “I know you’re hiding something from me.”

Wangnan’s heart skipped a beat, panic rising in his chest. He forced himself to remain calm, to keep his expression neutral. “What do you mean?” he asked, though he knew exactly what Viole was referring to.

Viole finally looked up, his eyes piercing as they met Wangnan’s. “This whole situation,” he said, his voice laced with suspicion. “The people after us, the way we’re running. It doesn’t make sense. There’s more to it than what you’re telling me.”

Wangnan swallowed hard, trying to think of a way to deflect Viole’s suspicions without outright lying to him. “Viole, I wish I could give you more answers,” he said carefully, choosing his words with caution. “But the truth is, we don’t have all the pieces yet. We’re still trying to figure out what’s going on, just like you are.”

Viole’s eyes narrowed slightly, as if he was weighing Wangnan’s words, trying to determine if he was being truthful. “And you really think this is just a mistake?” he asked, his tone skeptical. “That they’re after us by accident?”

Wangnan hesitated for a fraction of a second before nodding. “It’s possible,” he said, though the words felt like ash in his mouth. “We can’t rule anything out right now. But that’s why we have to be careful. We can’t take any chances.”

Viole stared at him for a long moment, and Wangnan could see the doubt and frustration swirling in his eyes. But eventually, Viole sighed, running a hand on his face in a gesture of resignation. “I just want to know the truth,” he said quietly, his voice tinged with a sadness that cut through Wangnan like a knife. “I want to understand what’s happening to us.”

Wangnan’s chest tightened with guilt, but he forced himself to stay composed. “I promise you, Viole,” he said, his voice filled with as much sincerity as he could muster, “we’re doing everything we can to find out the truth. And when we do, you’ll be the first to know.”

Viole nodded, though the sadness in his eyes didn’t fade. “Okay,” he said softly. “I’ll trust you, Wangnan. But please…don’t keep me in the dark.”

Wangnan felt a lump form in his throat, but he swallowed it down, giving Viole a reassuring smile. “I won’t,” he said, though the words felt hollow, knowing the truth he was hiding.

As they continued their journey, Wangnan couldn’t shake the feeling of unease that settled in his chest. Viole was growing more suspicious, more aware of the inconsistencies in the story they were feeding him. And Wangnan knew it was only a matter of time before the lies unraveled completely.

The days passed in a blur of movement and tension, the constant threat of danger hanging over them like a dark cloud. They traveled by night, resting during the day in whatever shelter they could find—a cave, an abandoned shack, the thick cover of trees. The island that had once been their sanctuary was now a hostile terrain, every shadow hiding a potential threat.

Horyang remained vigilant, his sharp eyes and heightened senses scanning their surroundings for any sign of danger. He rarely spoke, but his presence was a constant source of reassurance for Wangnan, a reminder that they were not alone in this fight.

Viole, however, grew more withdrawn with each passing day. The doubt and suspicion that had taken root in his mind festered, and though he tried to hide it, Wangnan could see the strain it was putting on him. The uncertainty of their situation, the lack of answers—it was all taking a toll.

The next morning, Akraptor carefully guided the small boat to shore, his eyes scanning the horizon for any sign of danger. The island behind him was still shrouded in early morning mist, a veil that offered little protection from the enemies lurking in the shadows. He had just taken Miseng, Prince, Goseng, and Yihwa to safety, far away from the chaos that had erupted, and now he was returning to meet Wangnan, Horyang, and Viole.

As he stepped onto the soft sand, Akraptor adjusted the heavy bag slung over his shoulder. It was a nondescript duffel, worn and weathered, yet it held an unsettling weight. The contents of the bag were known only to him, and for now, he intended to keep it that way. The fewer people involved, the better.

Wangnan was the first to spot him, relief washing over his features as he waved Akraptor over. "You made it back," Wangnan said, his voice laced with tension. "How are the others?"

"They're safe," Akraptor replied, his tone steady. "I left them in a secure location. They'll be fine."

Horyang and Viole emerged from the makeshift shelter they had set up the night before, their expressions weary but determined. Viole, in particular, seemed restless, his eyes darting between the trees as if expecting their pursuers to leap out at any moment.

"Why are we still running?" Viole asked, his frustration was barely concealed. "Shouldn't we confront them? If they’re mistaken, we can clear things up."

Wangnan quickly shook his head, his voice firm. "It's not that simple, Viole. They’re dangerous, and if we try to confront them, we could end up dead. We need to keep moving, stay ahead of them."

Viole frowned, clearly unsatisfied with the answer. "But running doesn't solve anything. We can't hide forever."

"We’re not hiding," Wangnan insisted, his tone growing defensive. "We’re just… being cautious. Trust me, this is the best way to handle it."

Akraptor watched the exchange silently, noting the subtle cracks in Wangnan's resolve. It wasn’t just fear driving him; it was something deeper, something he wasn’t telling Viole. As they packed up their belongings and prepared to move again, Akraptor could see the strain in Wangnan’s movements, the way his eyes flicked nervously from side to side as if searching for an answer that eluded him.

The day dragged on, a relentless cycle of movement and rest, always staying one step ahead of their unseen enemies. Every time they paused to catch their breath, Viole would look to Wangnan for answers, and each time, Wangnan would offer the same vague reassurances.

As evening fell and they found shelter in a small, abandoned cabin deep within the island’s forest, the tension between them was palpable. Viole, exhausted and frustrated, finally relented and settled down for the night, Horyang following suit. The two were soon asleep, their breathing was steady in the quiet of the night.

Wangnan, however, remained awake, his mind too restless to find peace. He sat near the entrance of the cabin, staring at Viole’s sleeping figure with a troubled expression on his face.

Akraptor approached him quietly, his large frame casting a shadow over Wangnan. “You’re lying to him,” Akraptor said bluntly, his voice low to avoid waking the others.

Wangnan looked up, startled, but quickly composed himself. “I’m doing what I have to do,” he replied, his voice firm but tinged with uncertainty.

“What you’re doing is dangerous,” Akraptor warned, his gaze steady. “Viole will eventually find out the truth, and when he does, it could destroy everything.”

Wangnan clenched his fists, his knuckles turning white. “I’m protecting him. If I have to lie to keep him safe, then I’ll do it. I’ll lie as many times as it takes.”

Akraptor sighed, the weight of his own words heavy on his shoulders. “Viole doesn’t belong to you, Wangnan. He doesn’t belong to any of us. You know that better than anyone.”

The truth in Akraptor’s words hit Wangnan like a punch to the gut, but he refused to back down. “I know,” he whispered, his voice barely audible. “But that doesn’t mean I’ll stop trying to protect him.”

Akraptor studied him for a moment, seeing the determination—and desperation—etched into Wangnan’s features. “Just be careful,” Akraptor finally said, his tone softening. “Lies have a way of catching up to you. And when they do, there’s no running from the consequences.”

Wangnan nodded slowly, the reality of their situation sinking in. “I know,” he repeated, his voice steadying. “But I don’t have any other choice.”

Akraptor didn’t reply, instead moving to sit by the entrance, keeping watch over their small group. The night was still, save for the soft rustling of leaves in the wind and the distant call of an owl. Wangnan remained where he was, staring out into the darkness, his mind racing with thoughts of the dangers that lay ahead.

He knew Akraptor was right. He was playing a dangerous game, one that could end in disaster if he wasn’t careful. But what else could he do? He couldn’t bear the thought of Viole being hurt, of the past that haunted him being uncovered. If lying was the only way to keep Viole safe, then that’s what he would do, no matter the cost.

The next few days passed in a blur of movement and tension. They continued to move from place to place, never staying long enough to be caught, but always aware that their pursuers were never far behind. Each day brought new challenges, new dangers, and new opportunities for Wangnan to feed Viole half-truths and reassurances.

But the strain of the deception was taking its toll. Viole’s frustration was growing, his trust in Wangnan wavering as the days dragged on with no end in sight. Even Horyang had begun to notice the cracks in Wangnan’s façade, his quiet observance taking in the subtle shifts in the group’s dynamic.

One night, as they settled into yet another temporary shelter, Wangnan found himself unable to sleep. He lay awake, his mind churning with thoughts of their situation, of the lies he had told, and the lies he would have to continue telling if they were to survive.

Akraptor noticed Wangnan’s restlessness and approached him. “You’re pushing yourself too hard,” he said quietly, his voice carrying a note of concern. “You can’t keep this up forever.”

“I have to,” Wangnan replied, his voice barely above a whisper. “I have to protect him.”

Akraptor shook his head, a deep frown creasing his brow. “At what cost? How far are you willing to go before you realize that protecting him doesn’t mean lying to him?”

Wangnan’s silence was answer enough. He knew Akraptor was right, but he couldn’t see another way. Not yet.

The next morning, as they prepared to move out once more, Viole approached Wangnan, his expression was serious. “We can’t keep running like this,” Viole said, his tone firm. “We need to face them, whoever they are. Hiding won’t solve anything.”

Wangnan forced a smile, trying to project confidence he didn’t feel. “We’re not hiding. We’re just being smart. Trust me, Viole, it’s better this way.”

Viole didn’t look convinced, but he nodded anyway, clearly weary of the endless evasion. “I hope you’re right,” he said quietly, before turning to help Horyang with the supplies.

As the group set out once more, Akraptor lagged behind slightly, his eyes on Wangnan. The weight of Wangnan’s choices was evident in the young man’s every movement, his shoulders hunched with the burden of his self-imposed responsibility.

As they trekked through the dense forest, the bag on Akraptor’s shoulder felt heavier with each step. He hadn’t told Wangnan, Horyang, or Viole what it contained, and he had no intention of doing so until the time was right. For now, they had to focus on staying alive, on staying ahead of their enemies.

But Akraptor knew that the time would come when Wangnan’s lies would unravel, when the truth would come crashing down around them. And when that time came, they would have to be ready to face the consequences.

The days continued to blur together, a relentless cycle of movement and evasion. Wangnan’s nerves were frayed, his mind a constant whirl of anxiety and guilt. He could feel the lies catching up to him, the weight of his deception growing heavier with each passing day.

One evening, as they settled into a new hiding spot, a small cave tucked away in the mountains, Viole approached Wangnan again, his expression more determined than ever.

“Wangnan, we can’t keep running like this,” Viole said, his voice steady. “We need to take a stand. We can’t hide forever.”

Wangnan’s heart sank, knowing that Viole’s patience was wearing thin. “I know, Viole. But it’s not safe to confront them. We’re outnumbered, outmatched. We need to be smart about this.”

Viole’s eyes narrowed, frustration was evident in his gaze. “And what happens when they catch up to us? What then?”

Wangnan swallowed hard, trying to keep his voice steady. “They won’t catch us, Viole. We’ll stay ahead of them.”

“For how long?” Viole demanded, his tone growing sharper. “How long are we supposed to keep running, Wangnan? Until they get tired? Until we drop from exhaustion?”

Wangnan opened his mouth to reply, but no words came out. He didn’t have an answer, not one that would satisfy Viole. The truth was, he didn’t know how long they could keep this up. He didn’t know how long his lies would hold.

Before Wangnan could muster a response, Akraptor stepped in, placing a firm hand on Viole’s shoulder. “We’ll keep moving as long as we have to,” Akraptor said, his voice calm and reassuring. “But we need to stick together, trust each other. That’s the only way we’ll make it out of this.”

Viole looked between the two of them, his frustration was simmering just beneath the surface. But he nodded, clearly reluctant to push the issue further. “Fine,” he said quietly. “But we can’t do this forever.”

As Viole turned away, Wangnan let out a breath he hadn’t realized he was holding. Akraptor gave him a knowing look, his eyes filled with unspoken concern.

“You need to tell him the truth, Wangnan,” Akraptor said quietly. “Before it’s too late.”

Wangnan shook his head, his expression pained. “I can’t, Akraptor. If he knew… if he knew what they were really after, he’d never forgive me.”

“And if he finds out on his own?” Akraptor countered, his tone firm. “What then?”

Wangnan didn’t have an answer. He knew that Akraptor was right, that the truth was bound to come out eventually. But he couldn’t bring himself to do it, not yet. Not while there was still a chance to protect Viole, to keep him safe from the darkness that threatened to consume them all.

As the days continued to pass, the group’s movements grew more desperate, their pursuers closing in with every step. Wangnan’s lies became more intricate, more convoluted, as he struggled to maintain the façade of control. But the strain was evident in his every action, his every word.

Viole, too, was growing weary of the constant evasion. His trust in Wangnan was slipping, replaced by a growing sense of unease. He knew something wasn’t right, that Wangnan was hiding something from him. But he couldn’t bring himself to confront Wangnan directly, not yet.

One night, as they huddled together for warmth in yet another temporary shelter, Viole couldn’t take it anymore. He turned to Wangnan, his eyes filled with a mix of frustration and desperation.

“Wangnan, I need to know the truth,” Viole said, his voice trembling slightly. “Why are we really running? What are they after?”

Wangnan’s heart pounded in his chest, the moment he had been dreading finally upon him. He could see the pain in Viole’s eyes, the fear that had been steadily growing with each passing day. And he knew that he couldn’t keep lying, not anymore.

But before he could speak, Akraptor stepped in, his voice was firm but gentle. “It’s not the right time, Viole. Trust us. We’re doing everything we can to keep you safe.”

Viole’s gaze shifted to Akraptor, his expression was a mix of confusion and anger. “Safe from what? From who?”

“From the people who want to hurt you,” Wangnan finally said, his voice barely above a whisper. “People who would do anything to get to you.”

Viole stared at him, shock and disbelief etched into his features. “But why? What have I done?”

“It’s not what you’ve done,” Wangnan replied, his voice trembling. “It’s who you are. They’re after you because of who you are.”

The truth hung heavy in the air, a weight that seemed to press down on all of them. Viole’s mind raced, trying to make sense of what he had just heard.

“Because of who I am?” Viole repeated, his voice barely audible. “But I don’t… I don’t understand.”

Wangnan’s heart ached at the confusion and pain in Viole’s voice. He wanted to protect him, to shield him from the truth for as long as possible. But he knew that the time for lies was running out.

“We’ll explain everything,” Wangnan said, his voice filled with a mixture of determination and sorrow. “But not now. Please, Viole, just trust us a little longer.”

Viole looked at him, his eyes were filled with tears. He nodded slowly, the weight of the situation crashing down on him. He didn’t know what to think, what to believe. But he knew one thing for certain: he couldn’t keep running from the truth forever.

As the group continued their journey, the atmosphere grew more tense, the weight of the unspoken truth hanging over them like a dark cloud. Viole’s trust in Wangnan was shaken, his mind plagued by doubts and questions that he couldn’t shake.

Wangnan, too, was struggling with the burden of his lies. He knew that he couldn’t keep deceiving Viole, not when the truth was so close to being revealed. But he couldn’t bring himself to face the consequences of his actions, not yet.

The night was cold, a chill that bit through the thin fabric of their makeshift shelter. Wangnan, Viole, Horyang, and Akraptor huddled together, seeking whatever warmth they could find as they drifted into a restless sleep. The past few days had been relentless, the group constantly on the move, evading the unseen enemies that pursued them. Exhaustion weighed heavily on their bodies, but sleep was a luxury they could scarcely afford.

Wangnan was the first to stir, his instincts prickling with unease. He opened his eyes to the pitch-black darkness around him, his heart pounding in his chest. Something was wrong. He could feel it in the air, a tension that had not been there before. He sat up slowly, careful not to wake the others, his ears straining to catch any sound that might explain his sudden sense of dread.

And then, it happened—a sharp crack, like the snapping of a twig, but much louder. The sound reverberated through the night, echoing off the trees. Before Wangnan could react, the first gunshot rang out, shattering the stillness of the night. The bullet whizzed past his head, embedding itself in the ground just inches from where he had been lying.

“Get up! We’re under attack!” Wangnan shouted, his voice cracking with panic.

The others woke with a start, their eyes wide with fear as they scrambled to their feet. Another gunshot rang out, followed by another, each one closer than the last. The attackers were closing in on them, and they had no idea who they were or what they wanted.

“What do we do?!” Wangnan cried out, his voice trembling. His mind raced as he tried to think of a way out, a way to protect Viole. The gunshots were getting louder, closer. He could see the muzzle flashes in the distance, illuminating the dark forest with brief bursts of light. “We need to protect Viole!” he shouted, more to himself than to anyone else. He knew that, above all else, he had to keep Viole safe.

Akraptor, who had been oddly silent up until now, suddenly sprang into action. He dropped the bag he had been carrying on his back and, with a swift motion, unzipped it, spilling its contents onto the ground. Wangnan, Viole, and Horyang all stared in shock as guns of various calibers and designs tumbled out, glinting ominously in the dim light.

“What the hell, Akraptor?” Wangnan gasped, his eyes wide as he took in the sight of the weapons.

“Grab one and start defending yourselves!” Akraptor barked, his voice hard and commanding. He picked up a sleek black handgun, expertly loading it before tossing another gun to Horyang. “We don’t have time to argue! Either you pick up a gun and fight, or you die here. Those are your options!”

Wangnan hesitated, his hand hovering over one of the guns. Everything in him screamed that this was wrong, that they shouldn’t be resorting to this. But when he looked around at the terrified faces of his friends, he knew they didn’t have a choice.

“Wangnan, we have to do this,” Horyang said firmly, gripping his weapon with a steady hand. “We can’t just stand here and wait to be slaughtered.”

Wangnan swallowed hard, his mouth dry as he finally picked up a gun. He turned to Viole, who was standing frozen, staring at the weapons on the ground. “Viole, take this,” Wangnan said, thrusting a gun into Viole’s hands. His voice softened, almost pleading. “But don’t use it unless you absolutely have to. Stay behind me, okay? I’ll protect you.”

But Viole wasn’t listening. The moment his fingers wrapped around the cold metal of the gun, a strange sensation washed over him. It was as if the weapon was an extension of his own body, something deeply familiar yet utterly foreign. His heart raced, fear mingling with a sense of eerie recognition that made his skin crawl.

“I… I don’t understand,” Viole murmured, his voice barely audible. He looked at the gun in his hand, feeling a shiver run down his spine. “Why does this feel… familiar?”

“We don’t have time for this!” Akraptor snapped, his patience wearing thin. “Let’s move, now!”

The four of them bolted from the shelter, the night air whipping against their faces as they fled into the dense forest. The gunfire continued to ring out behind them, each shot echoing through the trees like a death bell. They ran without a clear direction, driven by the primal instinct to survive.

Branches scratched at their faces and arms as they pushed through the underbrush, their breaths coming in ragged gasps. Wangnan glanced over his shoulder, his heart skipping a beat when he saw the dark figures pursuing them, their silhouettes barely visible in the shadows. There were too many of them, and they were gaining ground.

“We can’t keep this up,” Horyang panted, his face pale with exhaustion. “We need to find a way to lose them.”

“We’re running out of options,” Akraptor muttered, his eyes scanning the area for any possible escape route. “We need to—”

But before he could finish, Viole skidded to a stop, turning to face the direction they had come from. His sudden halt took the others by surprise, and they stumbled to a stop as well, confusion written on their faces.

“Viole, what are you doing? We have to keep moving!” Wangnan urged, grabbing Viole’s arm to pull him along.

“No,” Viole said, his voice trembling with emotion. He wrenched his arm free from Wangnan’s grip, tears welling up in his eyes. “I’m tired of running. I’m tired of watching you carry this burden alone, Wangnan. You’ve done everything to protect me, but I can’t just stand by and do nothing anymore. I want to help. I want to protect my family.”

Wangnan’s eyes widened in shock. “Viole, you don’t have to—”

“Yes, I do!” Viole shouted, tears streaming down his face. “I don’t remember anything about my past, but I remember the happiness we had on the island. And I can’t stand to see it taken away. If that means I have to fight, then I’ll fight!”

Akraptor exchanged a worried glance with Horyang, who nodded slightly. “Let him do it, Wangnan,” Akraptor said quietly. “He’s made up his mind. But we stay close, just in case.”

Wangnan’s heart ached as he looked at Viole, torn between the desire to protect him and the realization that Viole was right. With a heavy sigh, he relented, stepping back with Horyang and Akraptor to give Viole space.

“Just be careful,” Wangnan whispered, his voice thick with emotion. “Please, Viole.”

Viole nodded, his expression resolute. He took a deep breath, the gun in his hand feeling strangely comforting now. As the attackers drew closer, he felt something shift inside him, a part of him awakening that he didn’t even know existed.

When the first of the attackers broke through the trees, Viole moved without thinking. His body reacted on instinct, the gun in his hand firing with deadly accuracy. The man went down before he even had a chance to aim his weapon. The others followed in quick succession, each one falling to the ground as Viole dispatched them with unnerving precision.

Wangnan watched in stunned silence as Viole moved like a shadow, his movements fluid and graceful, yet terrifyingly efficient. It was as if he had done this a thousand times before, each shot hitting its mark with unerring accuracy. There was no hesitation, no fear—just a cold, calculated determination that left Wangnan both awed and horrified.

Viole’s mind was a whirlwind of emotions as he fought, each shot fired feeling both foreign and familiar. He didn’t understand how he was able to do this, how his body seemed to know exactly what to do. But he didn’t have time to question it. All he could think about was protecting the people he cared about, the family he had found with Wangnan, Horyang, Akraptor, Miseng, Prince, Goseng, and Yihwa.

One by one, the attackers fell, their bodies crumpling to the ground like ragdolls. The forest was eerily silent now, the only sound the ragged breaths of the four friends as they stood in the aftermath of the battle.

When the last attacker fell, Viole stood alone among the bodies, his chest heaving with exertion. He looked down at the gun in his hand, his fingers trembling as the reality of what he had just done began to sink in. The weight of it was almost too much to bear, the realization that he had taken lives, even in self-defense, was overwhelming him.

Wangnan, Horyang, and Akraptor approached cautiously, their expressions were a mix of concern and shock. Wangnan’s heart ached as he saw the tears still streaming down Viole’s face, his body trembling with the adrenaline and fear that still coursed through him.

“Viole…” Wangnan whispered, reaching out to touch his friend’s shoulder. But before he could say anything more, Viole collapsed to his knees, the gun slipping from his grasp as he sobbed uncontrollably.

“I didn’t want to… I didn’t want to kill them,” Viole cried, his voice choked with anguish. “But I had to… I had to protect you…”

Wangnan knelt beside Viole, pulling him into a tight embrace. “You did what you had to do, Viole,” he whispered, his voice thick with emotion. “You protected us. You saved us. And we’re going to get through this.”

Horyang and Akraptor stood nearby, their faces etched with sympathy. They knew there were no words that could ease the pain Viole was feeling, but they also knew that they couldn’t afford to stay here any longer. The gunshots would have undoubtedly drawn attention, and they needed to move before more enemies arrived.

“We need to go,” Akraptor said gently, his voice filled with a rare softness. “But we’ll do it together. As a family.”

Wangnan nodded, helping Viole to his feet. Viole’s legs were shaky, but he managed to stand with Wangnan’s support. The four of them began to move again, their pace slower, more cautious as they left the bodies behind and made their way deeper into the forest.

The night was still dark and cold, but there was a new determination in their hearts—a resolve to protect each other, no matter the cost. They had faced death together and survived, and that bond would only grow stronger as they continued their journey. As they walked, Wangnan glanced at Viole, who was still pale and trembling but no longer crying. He gave Viole’s hand a reassuring squeeze, offering him a small, encouraging smile.

“We’ll get through this, Viole,” Wangnan said quietly. “No matter what happens, we’ll get through it together.”

Viole looked at Wangnan, his eyes filled with gratitude and a deep, abiding sorrow. “Thank you, Wangnan,” he whispered, his voice barely audible. “For everything.”

Wangnan nodded, his heart was heavy with the weight of what they had all endured. But there was no time for regrets, no time to dwell on the past. They had to keep moving, keep surviving. Because in this world, that was all they could do—keep fighting, keep protecting each other, and hope that one day, they would find the peace they so desperately sought.

Chapter Text

“Alright, listen up,” Aguero began, his voice steady and commanding. “A few days ago, Asensio brought me some intel about a mission that requires our immediate attention. It involves a remote island—one that’s been off the grid for a long time. We don’t have much information about what’s happening there, but we do know it’s connected to FUG’s recent activities, and the client wants all the details you can get on the island.”

The mention of FUG caused a ripple of murmurs to spread through the group. Remembering their recent mission, it was hard to not think about what FUG may be up to these days. Aguero held up a hand to silence the room, his expression serious.

“We’ve been assigned to infiltrate this island, gather as much information as possible, and eliminate any key targets if necessary,” Aguero continued. “This is not going to be an easy mission. The island is isolated, and once you’re there, you’re on your own. No backup, no reinforcements.”

He paused, letting the gravity of his words sink in. “Endorsi, Hatz, Rak—I’m sending you three on this mission.”

Endorsi, who had been leaning back in her chair with an air of casual confidence, suddenly straightened up, her eyes narrowing. “Wait a minute, Aguero. You’re sending me to some remote island? With these two?” She jabbed a thumb in the direction of Hatz and Rak, her tone incredulous.

Rak, always ready to take a jab at Endorsi, grinned, showing off his sharp teeth. “What’s the matter, Princess? Afraid you won’t have your fancy clothes and soft beds on the island? Maybe you’ll have to rough it like the rest of us for once.”

Hatz chuckled, crossing his arms over his chest. “I think it’ll be good for you, Endorsi. A little fresh air, some good old-fashioned sword practice. Maybe you’ll even get a tan.”

Endorsi shot them both a glare that could melt steel. “Oh, please. Like you two could survive a day without me. I’m the one who keeps you both from getting yourselves killed.”

“Is that what you call it?” Shibisu piped up, a teasing smile on his face. “I thought it was just you complaining about everything.”

The room erupted into laughter, with Dan and Novick joining in on the teasing. “Yeah, Endorsi,” Dan added, his voice full of mock concern. “We’re all worried about how you’ll cope without your daily luxuries. Who’s going to make sure your hair stays perfect on that island?”

Elaine, who had been quietly observing the exchange, couldn’t help but smirk. “Maybe we should all chip in and buy her some portable beauty supplies.”

Endorsi threw her hands up in exasperation. “You’re all hilarious, really. But Aguero, I’m serious. Why us? Why me?”

Aguero met her gaze, his expression unreadable. “Because you’re the best suited for this mission, Endorsi. You’ve got the skills, the experience, and the adaptability we need. Hatz and Rak will back you up, but you’re the one who will lead this mission.”

Endorsi blinked, momentarily taken aback by Aguero’s directness. She wasn’t used to him being so straightforward about his decisions. It wasn’t that she doubted her own abilities—she knew she was more than capable. But the idea of being isolated on a remote island, away from the rest of the team, didn’t sit well with her.

“Are you sure about this?” she asked, her voice softer, more serious.

Aguero nodded, his gaze unwavering. “I am. I wouldn’t send you if I didn’t think you could handle it. This mission is crucial, Endorsi. We need to know what FUG is planning, and we need to stop them before they can act. I trust you to get the job done.”

For a moment, the room was silent, the weight of Aguero’s words hanging in the air. Endorsi’s expression softened slightly, and she nodded, her resolve hardening. “Alright, I’ll do it. But don’t think I won’t complain the whole way.”

Rak let out a booming laugh. “Wouldn’t expect anything less from you, Princess.”

Hatz grinned, nudging her with his elbow. “Just make sure you don’t slow us down.”

Endorsi rolled her eyes but couldn’t suppress a small smile. “You wish.”

Aguero allowed the banter to continue for a moment before clearing his throat, bringing the room’s attention back to him. “Now that that’s settled, let’s go over the details. The rest of you will be staying here, monitoring the situation and preparing for any fallout from the mission. Elaine, you’ll be in charge while I’m out.”

Elaine nodded, her expression was serious. “Understood.”

Aguero turned his attention to Hockney. “Hockney, I want you to keep an eye on the data feeds. If anything unusual comes up, I want to know immediately.”

“You got it,” Hockney replied, already mentally preparing for the long hours ahead.

“Dan, Novick, you’ll assist Elaine and Hockney. We need to be ready for anything.”

Dan gave a thumbs-up. “Consider it done.”

Novick nodded in agreement, his usual playful demeanor replaced by a more serious one. “We’ve got this, Aguero.”

Aguero’s gaze shifted to Ran and Shibisu. “And you two—stay alert. If anything goes wrong, I’ll need you to mobilize the rest of the team.”

Shibisu saluted, though the gesture was more playful than formal. “You can count on us.”

Ran simply nodded, his eyes already focused on the task ahead.

Aguero took a deep breath, his mind was already running through every possible scenario. The mission was risky, and the stakes were higher than ever. But he knew he could trust his team. They had faced impossible odds before and come out on top. This time would be no different.

“Alright,” Aguero said finally, his voice firm. “You all know your roles. Endorsi, Hatz, Rak—prepare to leave at dawn. The rest of you, get some rest. We have a long few days ahead of us.”

With that, the meeting was adjourned, and the group began to disperse, each member heading off to prepare for the tasks ahead. Endorsi lingered for a moment, her mind still processing everything that had been discussed. She glanced over at Aguero, who was already gathering up the mission files.

“Aguero,” she called out, her voice softer than usual.

He looked up, meeting her gaze. “What is it, Endorsi?”

She hesitated for a moment before speaking. “Thanks… for trusting me with this. I won’t let you down.”

Aguero’s expression softened, and he gave her a small nod. “I know you won’t.”

With that, Endorsi turned and left the room. The mission was dangerous, but she wasn’t going to back down. Not now, not ever. She had a job to do, and she was going to see it through to the end.

As the night wore on, the hideout slowly fell into a hushed stillness, the only sounds the occasional rustle of papers or the distant hum of machinery. In the quiet of his office, Aguero sat alone, his mind was focused on the mission ahead. He knew the risks, knew that sending Endorsi, Hatz, and Rak to that island was a gamble. But it was a gamble he was willing to take.

Because in the world they lived in, trust wasn’t given lightly. It was earned, forged in the fires of battle and hardship. And Aguero had faith in his team—faith that they would rise to the challenge, no matter what came their way.

The hours passed slowly, the night dragging on as the team made their final preparations. Endorsi spent the time sharpening her blades, her mind focused and clear. Hatz meditated, centering himself for the battle ahead. Rak, ever the warrior, went through a series of combat drills, his muscles rippling with each powerful movement.

By the time dawn broke, the three of them were ready. They gathered their gear, each one of them carrying the weight of the mission on their shoulders. But there was no hesitation, no doubt in their minds. They were going to that island, and they were going to get the job done.

Aguero met them at the entrance to the hideout, his expression unreadable as he looked at them one last time. “You know what to do,” he said, his voice firm. “Stay focused, stay together, and come back in one piece.”

Endorsi nodded, her grip tightening on the hilt of her weapon. “We will.”

Hatz simply gave a nod of agreement, his eyes steely with determination.

Rak let out a low growl, his eyes glinting with anticipation. “Let’s go hunt some prey.”

With that, they set off, the cold morning air biting at their skin as they made their way to the docks where their transport awaited. The journey to the island was a long one, the sea rough and unforgiving. But they were undeterred, their minds set on the mission ahead.

As they neared the island, the mood shifted, the tension rising as they prepared to disembark. The island loomed ahead of them, shrouded in mist and mystery. It was a place forgotten by time, hidden from the world—a perfect location for whatever secretive activities FUG was planning.

The boat came to a stop, and the three of them stepped onto the rocky shore, the sound of waves crashing against the cliffs filling the air. They exchanged a brief glance, a silent acknowledgment of the task before them.

“Stay sharp,” Endorsi whispered, her voice barely audible over the sound of the wind. “We don’t know what we’re walking into.”

Hatz nodded, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword. “Let’s move.”

They made their way inland, the thick forest closing in around them as they moved deeper into the island. The terrain was rough, the path uneven and treacherous, but they pressed on, their senses heightened, every sound and movement analyzed for potential threats.

As they moved, Endorsi couldn’t help but think back to the banter from the night before. The teasing, the jokes—they had all been a way to mask the underlying tension, the fear of what was to come. But now, in the cold light of day, there was no room for jokes. This was real, and the stakes were life and death.

They reached a clearing, and Endorsi signaled for them to stop. She crouched down, her eyes scanning the area for any signs of life. The island was eerily silent, the only sound the rustle of leaves in the breeze.

“Anything?” Hatz whispered, his voice low.

Endorsi shook her head. “Nothing yet. But we need to be careful. This place… it doesn’t feel right.”

Rak grunted in agreement, his eyes narrowed as he looked around. “There’s something off about this place. We need to find out what it is.”

They moved cautiously through the clearing, every step calculated and precise. The tension was thick in the air, each of them feeling the weight of the mission pressing down on them. They knew they were walking into unknown territory, and the uncertainty of what they might find was unnerving.

As they pressed on, they came across an old, dilapidated building, hidden amongst the dense foliage. It was clear that the building hadn’t been used in years, but there was something about it that made them stop and take notice.

“This could be it,” Endorsi murmured, her eyes narrowing as she studied the building. “We should check it out.”

Hatz nodded in agreement, already moving towards the entrance. Rak followed, his large frame tense and ready for action.

They entered the building, the air inside stale and musty. It was dark, the windows long since boarded up, and the only light came from the faint glow of their flashlights. The silence was oppressive, the sound of their footsteps echoing off the walls.

Endorsi took the lead, her senses were on high alert as they made their way through the narrow hallways. The building was larger than it appeared from the outside, with numerous rooms and corridors branching off in every direction.

“We need to find the main area,” Endorsi whispered, her voice barely audible. “Whatever FUG is hiding, it’s bound to be in there.”

They moved deeper into the building, the tension mounting with every step. The further they went, the more they could feel something was wrong—something dangerous lurking just out of sight.

Finally, they reached a large, metal door at the end of a corridor. It was heavily reinforced, and there were signs that it had been recently used. Endorsi signaled for them to stop, her heart pounding in her chest.

“This is it,” she whispered, her voice tight with anticipation. “Get ready.”

Hatz and Rak nodded, their weapons at the ready as Endorsi carefully opened the door. The metal groaned as it swung open, revealing a dark, cavernous room beyond. They stepped inside, their flashlights cutting through the darkness. The room was massive, filled with rows of machinery and equipment that looked far too advanced for such a remote location.

“What the hell is all this?” Hatz muttered, his eyes wide as he took in the sight.

Endorsi didn’t answer, her mind racing as she tried to piece together what they were looking at. It was clear that FUG had been using this island for something big—something dangerous. But what?

“We need to get as much information as we can,” she said, her voice firm. “Take pictures, gather data, anything that can tell us what they’re up to.”

They spread out, each of them moving quickly to document as much as possible. The room was filled with computers, files, and strange devices that none of them could identify. It was clear that whatever FUG was planning, it was far beyond anything they had encountered before.

As Endorsi rifled through a stack of papers, her heart skipped a beat when she saw a familiar name—Luslec. He was the Supreme Commander of FUG, and seeing his name on these documents as receiver confirmed their worst fears. This was more than just a remote hideout; it was a central hub for FUG’s operations.

“We need to get out of here,” Endorsi said urgently, shoving the papers into her bag. “We have enough. Let’s move.”

Hatz and Rak didn’t need to be told twice. They gathered what they could and quickly made their way back to the entrance. But as they reached the door, a loud alarm suddenly blared through the building, the sound echoing off the walls.

“Damn it!” Rak growled, his eyes narrowing in anger. “They know we’re here.”

Endorsi’s mind raced as she tried to think of a way out. “We need to get out, now! Back to the boat, move!”

They sprinted through the corridors, the sound of the alarm ringing in their ears. The building seemed to come alive, with lights flashing and the sound of footsteps echoing from behind them. They were being hunted.

“Keep moving!” Endorsi shouted, her heart pounding as they raced towards the exit.

They burst through the door and out into the open air, the cold wind hitting them like a wall. But there was no time to stop—they had to keep running. The boat was their only way off the island, and they needed to reach it before FUG’s forces caught up to them. As they ran, Endorsi could hear the sound of engines roaring to life in the distance. They were being chased, and the gap between them and their pursuers was closing fast.

“There!” Hatz shouted, pointing towards the dock where their boat was waiting.

They sprinted towards it, their muscles burning with the effort. But as they reached the dock, a group of FUG agents appeared, blocking their path.

Endorsi didn’t hesitate. She drew her weapon, her movements swift and precise as she engaged the enemy. Hatz and Rak followed suit, the three of them fighting with everything they had. The battle was fierce, the sound of clashing weapons and gunfire filling the air. But they were outnumbered, and more FUG agents were closing in from all sides.

“We need to get to the boat!” Endorsi shouted, her voice strained as she fought off another attacker.

Hatz nodded, his face grim as he slashed through the enemies in his path. “Go! We’ll cover you!”

Endorsi hesitated for a split second, but she knew they didn’t have a choice. She turned and sprinted towards the boat, her heart pounding as she reached it and jumped aboard. She quickly started the engine, her hands trembling as she prepared to cast off. But just as she was about to leave, she heard a shout from behind her.

“Endorsi!”

She turned to see Hatz and Rak running towards her, their faces determined as they fought off the last of the FUG agents.

“Come on!” Endorsi shouted, reaching out a hand to help them aboard.

They jumped onto the boat just as more gunfire erupted behind them. Endorsi gunned the engine, the boat lurching forward as they sped away, putting distance between themselves and the shore. 

After the harrowing mission on the island, Endorsi, Hatz, and Rak decided to take a moment to unwind. The adrenaline from their escape had begun to ebb, but Endorsi couldn't shake off the lingering feeling of unease that had settled in her chest the moment they had stepped onto the island. Something about the place still felt wrong, like an itch she couldn’t scratch. Despite successfully completing their mission and escaping from FUG’s clutches, there was a sense that their task was unfinished.

“We’ve got some time before we need to head back,” Endorsi said as she eyed the map of the island on her phone. “Let’s head into the main city, grab a drink or two, and figure out what’s been gnawing at me.”

Hatz looked at her, raising an eyebrow. “You think there’s more to this place than what we found?”

“I don’t know,” Endorsi admitted, her voice tinged with frustration. “It’s just a feeling. But I’m not about to ignore it.”

Rak grumbled in agreement. “If there’s prey still out there, we should find it. But first, I need food.”

Endorsi chuckled at that, but nodded. “Alright, let’s blend in. We can’t afford to attract attention.”

The three of them quickly found disguises in a small shop near the docks. Endorsi opted for a simple, yet elegant dress that allowed her to move freely while still fitting the local fashion. Hatz chose a plain but functional outfit, a plain black shirt, and jeans, that made him look like a casual traveler, but his sword had been concealed. Rak, after a bit of convincing, agreed to stay in his shrunken form and wore a loose, oversized shirt that made him look more like a kid tagging along with his older siblings than the formidable warrior he truly was.

As they walked through the bustling streets of the city, the three of them took in the sights and sounds. The city was a strange mix of old-world charm and modern chaos. Narrow cobblestone streets wound through towering buildings, while cars zipped past at breakneck speeds. Vendors hawked their wares in crowded marketplaces, and street performers entertained groups of tourists and locals alike. Despite the vibrant atmosphere, Endorsi couldn’t shake the feeling that something was off.

“This place is kind of chaotic,” Hatz remarked, dodging a group of rowdy teenagers on scooters. “Everyone’s in such a hurry.”

Rak sniffed the air, his eyes narrowing. “There’s something here… something that doesn’t smell right.”

Endorsi nodded, her eyes scanning the crowds. “We need to stay alert. Let’s keep moving.”

As they continued their stroll, the tension in the air seemed to grow thicker. The streets were becoming more crowded, the noise louder. Endorsi’s instincts were on high alert, every muscle in her body tensing as she tried to pinpoint the source of her unease.

Suddenly, a screech of tires shattered the air, and the three of them barely had time to react before a sleek, black car came hurtling down the narrow street, missing them by mere inches.

“What the hell!” Endorsi yelled, stumbling back as the car sped past, her dress catching on a piece of loose pavement and tearing. The dress, which had been pristine and stylish just moments before, now hung awkwardly, a large rip marring the fabric.

Hatz’s hand instinctively went to the hilt of his concealed sword as he turned to watch the car disappear around a corner. “That was too close. These people are crazy.”

Rak let out a growl. “That prey would have been crushed if not for my quick reflexes!”

Endorsi’s face twisted with anger as she looked down at her ruined dress. “Of all the nerve! That car nearly flattened us, and now my dress is ruined!” She fumed, brushing at the dirt on her torn clothing. “What kind of maniac drives like that?”

Before they could recover from the near miss, the sound of more screeching tires filled the air. Another car, followed by several more, tore down the same street in pursuit of the first. The lead car was a sleek, silver sports car, its engine roaring as it swerved dangerously close to the sidewalk, narrowly missing the pedestrians who scrambled to get out of the way.

Endorsi’s eyes narrowed as she watched the cars speed off into the distance. “That’s it. I’ve had enough of this.”

Hatz looked at her with a mix of concern and curiosity. “What are you thinking, Endorsi?”

Endorsi’s eyes glinted with determination as she smoothed out the remains of her dress. “I’m thinking those idiots need a lesson in manners. And we’re just the people to teach them.”

Rak bared his teeth, his fury was evident in his small form. “Hell yeah! Let’s hunt them down and show them what happens when you mess with us!”

Hatz, always the voice of reason, hesitated. “Are you sure it’s wise to get involved? We’ve already completed our mission. We should lay low until we leave the island.”

Endorsi shot him a sharp look. “You saw how they were driving, Hatz. They nearly killed us, and who knows how many others? I’m not just going to let them get away with that.”

Hatz sighed, knowing there was no stopping her when she was this fired up. “Alright, but we need to be careful. We can’t afford to draw too much attention.”

Endorsi smirked, her confidence was returning. “Don’t worry. We’ll handle this quickly and quietly. Besides, I still have that feeling… Maybe those cars are connected to something bigger.”

Without another word, the three of them dashed down the street, pursuing the reckless vehicle. They ran through the narrow alleyways, the sound of their footsteps echoing off the stone walls. As they rounded a corner, they spotted the car speeding towards the dense forest on the outskirts of the island. The pursuit had taken a sudden and unexpected turn.

Endorsi’s instincts flared. This wasn’t just a reckless driver—there was something more going on. “Why would they head into the forest?” she muttered under her breath, her brow furrowing. “They’re trying to hide from something... or someone.”

Hatz kept pace beside her, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword. "Whoever they are, they’re not alone. Look."

Up ahead, they saw more cars, all speeding in the same direction, their headlights piercing the darkness of the forest. The sound of engines roared in the distance, growing louder with each passing second.

As they reached the edge of the forest, the cars came to a sudden stop, and a group of armed men emerged from the vehicles. Without hesitation, the men began advancing toward the first car, weapons drawn, ready for a fight. It was clear that the situation was about to escalate.

Endorsi, Hatz, and Rak crouched behind a thick cluster of trees, watching the scene unfold. Endorsi’s grip tightened around the handle of her gun as she surveyed the men, her mind racing. "We’re being pulled into something big," she whispered. "But what is it?"

Rak’s eyes narrowed, his gaze focused on the men. "Doesn’t matter what it is. We crush them all!"

Hatz shook his head slightly, keeping his voice low. "We need to be careful. We don’t know who these people are or what they’re after."

Before they could decide on a plan, the men turned their attention towards the forest, clearly aware of their presence. Without warning, bullets started flying, whizzing through the trees and sending leaves scattering into the air. Instinct took over as Endorsi, Hatz, and Rak leaped into action.

Endorsi darted between the trees, her movements fluid and precise. She fired her gun with lethal accuracy, taking down two men before they could even react. Hatz, with his sword drawn, slashed through the underbrush, his blade a blur of motion as he deflected bullets and disarmed attackers. Rak, small but no less formidable, charged at the men with a ferocity that left them reeling, his fists pounding into their armor like a battering ram.

The forest erupted into chaos, the sounds of gunfire, clashing metal, and pained shouts filling the air. But even as they fought, Endorsi couldn’t shake the nagging feeling that there was more to this than a simple skirmish. There was a pull, an unseen force that seemed to draw her deeper into the fray.

Then, amid the chaos, something caught her eye. Not far from where they were fighting, she spotted two figures on the sidelines. They were huddled together, almost as if they were trying to stay out of the crossfire. The one lying on the ground was clearly injured, his yellow hair matted with blood. The other was kneeling beside him, his long brown hair partially obscuring his face as he clutched at his friend.

Endorsi froze. Something about the scene triggered a deep, unsettling feeling in her chest. Her instincts told her to keep fighting, to stay focused on the battle at hand, but her feet moved of their own accord, pulling her towards the two men. She ignored the warnings from Hatz and Rak, her mind singularly focused on the strange sense of familiarity that washed over her.

As she approached the men, the world around her seemed to blur, the sounds of the battle fading into the background. Her gaze locked onto the injured man with yellow hair. Despite the blood and dirt, she could see he was still conscious, his eyes wide with pain and fear.

But it was the other man, the one with the long brown hair, that made her heart stop. He was crying, his shoulders shaking with silent sobs as he desperately tried to tend to his friend. He looked up as Endorsi approached, his eyes filled with terror when he saw the gun in her hand.

Endorsi’s breath hitched in her throat. She knew that face.

“Bam?”

The word slipped from her lips before she could stop it, barely audible over the uproar of the battle. Endorsi couldn’t move. The world around her seemed to blur as she stared at the man kneeling just a few feet away. He had the same dark hair, the same eyes, the same presence. She knew it was him—knew it with every fiber of her being. But something was wrong. He was kneeling there, staring at her as if the name “Bam” meant nothing to him, as if it was foreign, something distant that he couldn’t grasp. It was as if she was staring at a ghost, a shell of the boy she once knew.

“Bam…?” she whispered once again, her voice was trembling, her throat was tight with disbelief. The word felt strange, like it was slipping out of her grasp as soon as she said it. The man flinched slightly at the sound, his eyes narrowing, but there was no recognition in his gaze—no warmth, no acknowledgment, nothing that reminded her of the Bam she had fought beside, laughed with, and… cared for.

Endorsi’s chest tightened, her heart was hammering wildly as she tried to make sense of what she was seeing. She wanted to scream, to yell at him, to demand that he remember her, that he remember himself. But the words caught in her throat, tangled in the knot of emotions that had risen within her. A part of her wanted to believe that this was some kind of trick, that maybe her mind was playing games with her because she missed him so much. But the more she looked at him, the more she realized that this was real. Terrifyingly, heartbreakingly real.

“No… This can’t be real,” she muttered under her breath, her voice was shaking. Her mind was a chaotic swirl of thoughts, each one more desperate than the last. Maybe she was dreaming. Maybe she’d wake up, and Bam would be there, just like he always was, with that gentle smile of his. But this wasn’t a dream. The cold wind that bit at her skin, the stench of blood in the air—everything was too vivid, too real.

Panic clawed at her chest, suffocating her, making it hard to breathe. The only way out of this nightmare, she decided, was to wake herself up. Without warning, Endorsi raised her hand and slapped herself across the face—hard. The force of the blow stung sharply, her skin burning as she felt the crack of her own strength. Blood welled up on her lip where her teeth had cut through, trickling down her chin.

The two men across from her gasped in shock, their eyes wide with alarm. The man she had called Bam stared at her in disbelief, his expression was one of confusion mixed with a sudden, wary caution. His muscles tensed, and for a moment, Endorsi thought he might lash out. 

“What are you doing?” he demanded, his voice was sharp, carrying an edge that sent a chill down her spine. “Are you trying to hurt yourself? Or are you planning to hurt us?” His tone was defensive, almost aggressive, so unlike the Bam she knew.

The harshness in his voice struck Endorsi like a physical blow. She had prepared herself for a lot of things, but not this. Not Bam—no, this stranger who looked like him—treating her as if she was a threat. Her mouth opened, but no words came out, her mind still reeling from the shock of it all.

Before she could respond, the yellow-haired man lying beside the man stirred, his eyes narrowing as he studied Endorsi. Recognition flickered across his face, though it was clear he was just as startled by her sudden appearance as she was by theirs. Slowly, painfully, he pushed himself to his feet, clutching his side where blood seeped through his fingers. “Wait Viole… I know her,” he said, his voice weak but certain. “You’re… Endorsi Zahard, aren’t you?”

Endorsi’s breath caught. The mention of her name, spoken so familiarly by someone she didn’t recognize, sent a shiver down her spine. She looked at him, her brow furrowing. “How do you know my name?”

The man winced, struggling to keep his balance. “We had an informant… He gave us intel on you,” he explained, each word was heavy with strain. “Your name, your face… I saw you in the picture.”

Endorsi blinked in surprise. What was he talking about? What picture? Why would they have her information? And who was this man who knew her name, who knew who she was? But even as she tried to make sense of it, her mind kept circling back to the one undeniable fact—Bam, or Viole as he called him, was right there. But he didn’t know her.

The yellow-haired man turned to Viole, gripping his arm to keep him steady. “Viole, relax,” he urged, his voice was gentler now, despite the pain he was clearly in. “She’s not our enemy.”

Viole’s eyes narrowed, doubt and suspicion etched into every line of his face. “Wangnan…. How can you be so sure?” he asked, his voice was cold, his gaze never leaving Endorsi.

Wangnan met Viole’s gaze, his expression resolute despite his exhaustion. “Because she’s your former comrade,” he said, his voice firm. “She was with you—before… before everything.”

Endorsi felt a pang in her chest as she listened to their exchange, the weight of the situation pressing down on her. Former comrade. The words stung, reminding her of all the time that had passed, of everything that had changed since they last saw each other. But what hurt more was the realization that Viole, this man who looked so much like Bam, didn’t seem to remember any of it. Any of them.

The tension in the air was thick, almost suffocating. Endorsi watched as Viole processed Wangnan’s words, his gaze flickering uncertainly between her and his companion. There was a moment of silence, a pause that stretched on for what felt like an eternity, before Viole finally spoke.

“A former comrade…” he repeated, his voice was quieter now, almost reflective. He looked at Endorsi, his expression was hard to read, a mix of suspicion, confusion, and something else—something deeper that she couldn’t quite place. “So… you knew me. Before.”

It wasn’t a question, but Endorsi nodded anyway, her throat was tight with emotion. “Yeah,” she managed to say, her voice trembling. “We… we were friends.”

The word felt heavy on her tongue, weighted with all the memories they shared, all the moments that had led them to this point. But as she spoke, she realized with a sinking feeling that Viole—Bam—didn’t seem to recognize any of it. There was no flicker of recognition in his eyes, no softening of his gaze. Just a cold, distant curiosity.

“I see,” he said quietly, almost to himself. There was a sadness in his voice, a hint of something that might have been regret, but it was buried deep beneath layers of confusion and uncertainty. He looked at her again, his gaze searching, as if trying to find something familiar in her face, something that could spark a memory. But whatever he was looking for, he didn’t seem to find it.

Endorsi felt her heart sink, the hope she had clung to slipping through her fingers like sand. This wasn’t the reunion she had imagined. It wasn’t the joyous, tearful moment she had dreamed of. It was cold, distant, and filled with a painful realization—Bam wasn’t Bam anymore. He was Viole, a stranger wearing the face of someone she once knew.

Before she could say anything else, Wangnan suddenly swayed on his feet, his face paling as the strength drained from his body. His eyes rolled back, and he collapsed, falling limp against Viole. “Wangnan!” Viole shouted, his voice panicked as he caught his friend, lowering him gently to the ground. His hands trembled as he checked Wangnan’s pulse, his expression tight with fear.

Endorsi watched, still frozen, as Viole frantically tried to tend to Wangnan’s wounds. She could see the panic in his eyes, the desperation in his movements. He was scared—scared of losing someone he cared about, just like she had been so many times before. And despite everything, despite the confusion, the fear, and the pain, something within her stirred. She couldn’t just stand there and do nothing. Not when someone was hurt. Not when Bam—no, Viole—needed help, even if he didn’t remember her.

Moving quickly, Endorsi crouched down beside Viole, her earlier shock giving way to determination. “Let me help,” she said softly, reaching for the bandages in Viole’s pack. “He’s bleeding badly. We need to stop it before he loses too much blood.”

Viole hesitated, his gaze flickering to her, still uncertain. But with Wangnan’s condition worsening, he nodded reluctantly, stepping aside to let her work. “Please… help him,” he murmured, his voice filled with a mix of fear and helplessness.

Endorsi didn’t waste any time. She worked quickly, her hands steady as she applied pressure to the wound, wrapping the bandages tightly around Wangnan’s torso. She could feel Viole watching her, his eyes filled with a mixture of hope and dread, as if he was afraid to let himself believe that Wangnan would be okay.

As she worked, Endorsi couldn’t help but steal glances at Viole, at the face she knew so well, yet seemed so foreign now. She could see the worry etched into his features, the way his hands trembled slightly as he hovered nearby, desperate to help but unsure of what to do. He was so different from the Bam she remembered—so much harder, colder, yet there was still something of the boy she knew buried deep within him. Something that made her want to reach out to him, to comfort him, even if he didn’t recognize her.

Just as she finished securing the bandages, two figures burst into the clearing—Hatz and Rak. Both of them skidded to a halt, their eyes widening in shock as they took in the scene before them. Hatz’s hand instinctively went to his sword, while Rak’s fists were clenched shut.

“Endorsi!” Hatz called out, his voice was filled with alarm. “What’s going on? Who are they?”

Endorsi looked up at her comrades, her chest tightening at the sight of them. She could see the confusion in their eyes, the way they were trying to make sense of what they were seeing. And she knew—knew that they would recognize him too.

“It’s…” she started, but the words caught in her throat. How could she explain this? How could she tell them that the person standing before them was both Bam and not Bam?

But she didn’t have to. The moment Hatz and Rak’s eyes fell on Viole, she saw the shock, the disbelief, the confusion that mirrored her own from earlier. Hatz’s hand fell away from his sword, his eyes widening in recognition. “Bam?” he whispered, his voice filled with a mixture of hope and dread.

Viole flinched at the name, his gaze shifting to Hatz and Rak, who were staring at him as if they had seen a ghost. “Who… are you people?” he asked, his voice was tense, defensive.

Rak’s eyes narrowed, his gaze locking onto Viole. “Turtle… what happened to you?” he growled, his voice low, dangerous. There was anger there, but also something else—something softer, filled with hurt.

Viole took a step back, his hand instinctively reaching for his weapon. “Stay back!” he warned, his voice was sharp. “I don’t know you. I don’t know any of you!”

Hatz and Rak both froze, their expressions turning from shock to confusion. Endorsi could see the pain in their eyes, the way they were struggling to understand what was happening. She knew that pain all too well—had felt it herself just moments ago.

“Bam…?” Hatz repeated, his voice trembling slightly. “Why don’t you remember your own name? Do you… do you remember anything?”

Viole’s eyes flickered with uncertainty, his grip on his weapon tightening. “I don’t know you,” he repeated, his voice colder this time, as if he was trying to convince himself as much as them. “I don’t know any of you.”

The words cut through Endorsi like a knife, sharp and painful. She saw the way Hatz’s shoulders slumped, the way Rak’s expression hardened with a mix of anger and sorrow. This was not the reunion any of them had imagined. This was not how they had hoped to find Bam.

For a moment, none of them knew what to say, how to respond to the harsh reality of what had happened to their friend. The silence that followed was heavy, filled with all the things they couldn’t bring themselves to say. But it was Viole who broke the silence, his voice quieter now, tinged with a sadness that matched their own.

“I’m… sorry,” he said, his gaze dropping to the ground. “But I don’t remember you. I don’t remember… anything.”

Endorsi felt her heart ache at his words, at the loss they all felt so keenly. She wanted to reach out to him, to tell him that it was okay, that they would find a way to help him remember. But before she could say anything, Wangnan stirred, groaning softly as he began to regain consciousness.

“Viole…” Wangnan mumbled weakly, his eyes fluttering open. He looked around, disoriented, before his gaze settled on Endorsi, Hatz, and Rak. “What… happened?”

Viole quickly knelt beside Wangnan, relief flooding his features as he saw his friend waking up. “You passed out,” he said, his voice filled with concern. “I was so worried… I thought…”

Wangnan gave a weak smile, his hand reaching up to pat Viole’s arm reassuringly. “I’m fine, Viole,” he said softly. “Thanks to you… and her.” He glanced at Endorsi, gratitude in his eyes.

Viole nodded slowly, his gaze flickering back to Endorsi, Hatz, and Rak. There was still uncertainty there, still doubt, but also a glimmer of something else—perhaps the faintest hint of trust. “Thank you,” he said quietly, his voice sincere.

Endorsi managed a small, sad smile. “We’re… we’re all just trying to survive,” she replied softly, her words carrying more weight than she intended.

The night was heavy with tension, the air was thick with the scent of the sea and the distant echoes of crashing waves. The small group had found a temporary refuge in an abandoned cabin nestled deep in the forest, hidden from prying eyes. The wooden structure was old and creaky, but it provided them with much-needed shelter. Inside, a dimly lit fire crackled softly, casting flickering shadows on the worn wooden walls.

Endorsi, Hatz, and Rak had decided to stay with Wangnan and Viole, knowing that danger could strike at any moment. People might continue coming after Wangnan and Viole, and they couldn’t afford to let their guard down. The weight of the situation hung over them like a dark cloud, each of them acutely aware of the stakes. They had no idea who their enemies were, or how many of them there might be, but one thing was certain: they needed to protect Bam—no, Viole—at all costs.

Wangnan sat quietly near the fire, his eyes fixed on Viole, who was engaged in a conversation with Hatz and Rak. Viole’s expression was neutral, almost indifferent, as if he wasn’t entirely convinced by what they were saying. His posture was tense, his gaze was distant, as though he was struggling to process everything that had happened. Hatz and Rak, too, were on edge, their words were careful, measured, as they tried to reassure Viole that he was among friends.

Endorsi watched them from a distance, her mind racing with questions. She knew that Wangnan held the answers she sought, but she didn’t want to push him. She could see the weariness in his eyes, the burden of secrets weighing heavily on him. Finally, she mustered the courage to approach him, sitting down beside him on the rough wooden floor.

Wangnan could sense Endorsi’s questions simmering just below the surface, but he didn’t wait for her to speak. Instead, he took a deep breath, preparing himself for a conversation he had been dreading.

“Five years ago,” Wangnan began, his voice barely above a whisper, “I found him on the seashore of this island. Viole, or Bam, as you know him. He was injured, unconscious, his clothes torn to shreds. I didn’t know who he was back then, but I could tell he’d been through hell.”

Endorsi’s eyes flickered with a mix of curiosity and concern. She had her suspicions, of course, but hearing it from Wangnan gave her a new perspective. She remained silent, letting him continue.

“I brought him to my family. He didn’t wake up for a whole week,” Wangnan continued, his voice heavy with the weight of the past. “And when he did, he didn’t remember anything. Not his name, not where he came from—nothing. He was like a blank slate, completely lost.”

Endorsi’s expression softened as she listened, her heart was aching for Bam. The thought of him alone, injured, with no memory of who he was, tore at her. But she kept her emotions in check, waiting for Wangnan to finish.

“I took care of him,” Wangnan said, his voice tinged with a mix of pride and sorrow. “My family wasn’t perfect, but we did our best to make him feel at home, to make him part of us. And he did fit in, eventually. He became one of us, and we loved him like he was our own.”

Endorsi glanced at Bam, her eyes were clouded with sadness. “But he started asking questions, didn’t he?” she asked softly. “About his past?”

Wangnan nodded, his shoulders sagging slightly. “Yeah. He started to doubt, to wonder who he really was. He spent more and more time alone, trying to figure it all out. I wanted to help him, to find out the truth, but no one knew who he was. And then… I started getting these cryptic messages, warnings, urging me to dive deeper on Viole’s past. That’s why we’re here, hiding.”

Endorsi sighed, her gaze never leaving Bam. “Five years ago,” she began, her voice wavering slightly, “Bam was with us, on that train before it exploded. We all saw how the train exploded right before our eyes. We were told he was dead. We were all devastated, but there was one person who never gave up, who never stopped searching for him.”

Wangnan furrowed his brow, trying to piece together the puzzle. “Who? Who was looking for him?”

Endorsi hesitated, unsure how to explain without revealing too much. She could see that Wangnan didn’t know about Aguero, about the bond that had been so strong between him and Bam. But as she looked at Bam, saw the emptiness in his eyes, she knew she couldn’t hold back.

“There was someone who valued Bam more than anyone else,” Endorsi said, her voice heavy with emotion. “They were closer than anyone could imagine. And now… if he finds out that Bam doesn’t remember anything, not even him… I don’t know how he’ll react.”

Wangnan’s eyes widened slightly, understanding dawning on him. He could feel the weight of Endorsi’s words, the deep pain hidden beneath them. Whoever this person was, they meant a lot to Bam, and now… now everything was different.

Endorsi fell silent, her thoughts swirling. She couldn’t help but wonder what Aguero would do when he found out. She didn’t even know how she would handle it. The situation was more complicated than she had ever imagined.

Before they could dwell on the conversation any longer, Hatz approached, his expression serious. “We can’t stay here much longer,” he said, cutting through the silence. “Our mission here is done, and Aguero could contact us at any moment. We need to be ready to move.”

The mention of Aguero’s name sent a ripple of tension through the group. As if on cue, the ground beneath them trembled violently, followed by a deafening explosion. The makeshift shelter they had been staying in was rocked by the blast, sending debris flying in every direction. Chaos erupted as everyone scrambled for cover.

Wangnan’s heart raced as he looked around frantically, his first thought being of Bam. “Bam!” he shouted, his voice lost in the chaos.

Rak, even in his shrunken form, had instinctively leaped toward Bam, shielding him from the worst of the explosion. But as the dust settled, it became clear that both Rak and Bam had been injured. Blood trickled down Bam’s face, and Rak’s small frame was battered, his usual boldness replaced with pain and concern.

Endorsi, Hatz, and Wangnan rushed to their side, panic gripping them. “We need to get out of here!” Endorsi yelled, her voice strained as she tried to lift Bam. “We can’t stay here—more bombs could be coming!”

Wangnan, his face pale with fear, shook his head. “No! We can’t just leave like this! Bam’s hurt, Rak’s hurt—we need to treat them first!”

“There’s no time, Wangnan!” Hatz snapped, his usually calm demeanor shattered by urgency. “If we don’t leave now, none of us will make it out of here alive!”

Endorsi’s eyes were fierce as she turned to Wangnan, her grip on Bam tightening. “Whether you like it or not, I’m taking Bam away from here. I’ve lost him once—I’m not losing him again!”

Wangnan’s hands trembled, torn between fear and determination. “But this is our home! We can’t just abandon everything!”

“Your home is gone, Wangnan!” Endorsi shouted, her voice cracking with the weight of her emotions. “And Bam—he belongs with us! He’s our family too, and I won’t let him stay here and get killed!”

Wangnan’s eyes filled with tears, torn between his loyalty to his home and his desire to keep Bam safe. “I know, but…”

“Wangnan,” Hatz interjected, his tone was gentle but firm. “We need to move. We can argue later, but right now, the priority is getting Bam and Rak out of here alive.”

The urgency in Hatz’s voice broke through Wangnan’s hesitation. He looked at Bam, saw the blood on his face, the way his eyes fluttered weakly, and made his decision.

“Fine,” Wangnan conceded, his voice trembling. “But we’re not leaving anyone behind.”

They moved quickly, supporting Bam and Rak between them as they navigated the crumbling shelter. The ground shook with more distant explosions, and the air was thick with smoke and debris. Every step felt like a struggle, the weight of their injured friends pressing down on them both physically and emotionally.

As they reached the edge of the shelter, Wangnan cast one last look back at the place he had called home for so long. The memories, the people—they were all tied to this place, and now it was being ripped away from him in an instant. But as he looked at Bam, at the people who had come to care for him, Wangnan realized that home wasn’t a place. It was the people you cared about, the ones you were willing to protect no matter the cost.

Endorsi, noticing his hesitation, squeezed his shoulder. “We’ll make it through this, Wangnan. We’ll keep him safe.”

Wangnan nodded, forcing himself to focus on what mattered now—surviving. “Yeah. Let’s get out of here.”

They moved as quickly as they could, the sounds of destruction growing fainter as they put distance between themselves and the shelter. But even as they escaped the immediate danger, the threat loomed large in their minds. Whoever had attacked them wasn’t going to stop, and they knew it was only a matter of time before they were found again.

As they reached a more secure area, Endorsi turned to Wangnan, her eyes burning with determination. “This isn’t over. Whoever did this, they’re not going to stop until they get what they want. We need to be ready for whatever comes next.”

Wangnan’s heart pounded in his chest, but he met Endorsi’s gaze with newfound resolve. “Then we’ll be ready. Whatever it takes, we’ll protect him.”

Hatz, his sword drawn and ready, nodded in agreement. “We’ve come this far. We’re not backing down now.”

Chapter Text

Endorsi, Hatz, and Wangnan scrambled off the island as soon as they could. Their journey back to the city was a blur, adrenaline pumping through their veins as they raced against time. The moment they reached the nearest hospital, they didn’t waste a second, admitting Bam and Rak immediately. It was only after the doctors took over that Endorsi had a chance to breathe, her chest heaving as she stepped outside to make a phone call. She pulled out her phone, her hands trembling as she dialed Aguero’s number. The night air was cold, but it did little to calm her nerves.

The phone rang, each tone amplifying her anxiety. Finally, after what felt like an eternity, Aguero picked up.

“Endorsi?” Aguero’s voice was calm, but there was an underlying tension.

“We found Bam,” Endorsi said, her voice cracking slightly. “We’re at the nearest hospital.”

She didn’t wait for a response before hanging up. The weight of the situation was too much to bear, and she needed to check on the others. She slipped her phone back into her pocket and hurried inside.

Wangnan was pacing anxiously in the waiting area, while Hatz sat quietly, his sword now concealed, his expression unreadable. The tension in the room was palpable. They were all waiting for news, for something that would tell them that everything would be okay. 

Endorsi joined them, sitting down beside Wangnan, who looked up at her with wide eyes. 

“Did you get through to him?” Hatz asked, his voice low but tinged with urgency.

“Yeah,” Endorsi replied, though her anxiety was clear in her voice. “But I only had time to tell Aguero that Bam’s here. I ended the call immediately because I don’t know how else to explain.”

Hatz nodded as he could see the worry in her eyes. Wangnan, who had been quietly observing them, couldn’t help but notice the way Endorsi’s expression changed when she spoke about Aguero. There was a sadness there, something deeper than just concern for Bam.

Before they could discuss it further, the doctor emerged from Bam's room, and all three of them immediately crowded around him, their questions overlapping as they demanded to know how Bam was doing.

“Please, calm down,” the doctor said, holding up a hand to stop the barrage of questions. “Your friend is stable. He suffered some injuries, but he’s going to be fine. He’s unconscious now, but we expect him to wake up soon. There’s a nurse in the room with him monitoring his condition.”

A wave of relief washed over them at the doctor’s words. Endorsi felt a weight lift off her shoulders, and she could see the same relief mirrored in Hatz and Wangnan’s faces.

“What about Rak?” Wangnan asked, his voice was tight with worry.

“His injuries are minor, thanks to his... well, his unique physiology,” the doctor said with a small smile. “He’ll be fine as well.”

Endorsi let out a breath she hadn’t realized she was holding. “Thank you,” she said softly, her voice filled with genuine gratitude.

As the doctor walked away, Hatz turned to Endorsi. “Did you tell Aguero everything?”

Endorsi nodded, though her eyes flickered with unease. “Yeah, I told him we’re at the hospital. But I didn’t get to say much else.”

Wangnan, on the other hand, was starting to feel the weight of the situation pressing down on him. He had no idea who this Aguero was, but from the way Endorsi and Hatz were acting, it was clear that he was someone important. 

Just as the tension in the room was starting to become unbearable, the sound of footsteps echoed down the hallway. Wangnan looked up, his heart skipping a beat as he saw a group of people approaching. They walked with a purpose, their presence commanding attention.

Endorsi and Hatz stood up as the group arrived, and Wangnan recognized some of the faces from the photograph he had seen given by the informant—the people who were with Bam on that train five years ago.

Aguero was at the forefront, his expression was unreadable, but there was a cold determination in his blue eyes that sent a shiver down Wangnan’s spine. He was dressed in a formal suit, the image of control and power. Elaine, Hockney, Ran, Shibisu, Dan, and Novick flanked him, each of them carrying an air of quiet menace that was impossible to ignore.

Wangnan suddenly felt incredibly small and insignificant in their presence. These were not ordinary people. There was something about them that was suffocating, a sense of danger that made the hairs on the back of his neck stand on end.

Endorsi and Hatz exchanged a glance before stepping forward to greet them. The questions came immediately, the intensity of their concern was evident in their voices.

Aguero’s gaze was particularly piercing, his eyes narrowing as he took in the scene. “Where is he?” Aguero asked, his voice was cold and demanding, though there was an undercurrent of something else—fear, perhaps, or even desperation.

Endorsi met his gaze, but Wangnan could see the struggle in her eyes. “He’s inside,” she said, her voice steady. “The doctor said he’ll wake up soon.”

The group exchanged glances, and Wangnan felt like an outsider in their presence, a stranger who didn’t belong. He could feel their eyes on him, their scrutiny almost suffocating. It was as if they were assessing him, trying to determine if he was a threat or if he knew more than he was letting on.

Hatz cleared his throat, drawing their attention away from Wangnan. “We found him on the island,” he explained, his voice was calm but firm. “He was with Bam. There were men after them and we happened to cross paths.”

Aguero’s eyes flashed with anger, though it wasn’t directed at Hatz. “What happened?” he demanded, his voice was low but laced with fury. “How did this happen?”

Endorsi opened her mouth to respond, but before she could say anything, Wangnan found himself speaking up. The words tumbled out of his mouth before he could stop them, driven by a need to explain, to make them understand.

“It was my fault,” Wangnan blurted out, his voice shaking. “I... I didn’t know who he was at first. But when I realized he was the—”

He faltered under their intense stares, their eyes boring into him with a weight that made it hard to breathe. There was something about them, something that made him feel small and insignificant, as if he was standing in the presence of something far greater than himself. The tension in the air was palpable, and Wangnan could feel the pressure building as they continued to stare at him. He wanted to explain, to tell them everything, but the words stuck in his throat. He had never felt so afraid, so exposed.

Before anyone could say anything more, the door to Bam’s room creaked open, and a nurse stepped out, looking slightly flustered. “He’s awake,” she announced, her voice cutting through the tension like a knife.

The effect was immediate. Every single one of them tensed, their attention snapping toward the door with an intensity that left Wangnan feeling even more on edge. Without thinking, Wangnan moved toward the door, his only thought being to see Bam, to make sure he was okay.

But he wasn’t alone. Aguero moved with him, their steps matching as they approached the door together. Wangnan could feel Aguero’s gaze on him, sharp and probing, but he was too focused on Bam to care. When their eyes met, there was a brief moment of mutual recognition, a shared understanding that this was about more than just Bam—it was about something deeper, something that neither of them could fully articulate.

But before either of them could say a word, the door opened wider, and Bam stepped out, his movements shaky but determined. The sight of him brought a wave of relief crashing over Wangnan, but that relief was quickly overshadowed by the deep pain he saw in Aguero’s eyes as Bam brushed past him without a second glance.

“Wangnan!” Bam’s voice was filled with concern as he reached out to him, his hand gripping Wangnan’s arm tightly. “Are you okay? Did they hurt you?”

Wangnan was stunned, his mind was reeling as he tried to process what was happening. Bam was standing right in front of him, looking at him with such concern, as if he was the one who needed protecting. Wangnan opened his mouth to respond, but the words wouldn’t come.

Aguero, who had been frozen in place, finally moved, his hand shooting out to grab Bam’s arm, his grip was firm but not painful. “Bam,” he said, his voice cracking with emotion.

Bam turned to him, his brow furrowing in confusion. “Who are you?” he asked, his voice filled with genuine bewilderment.

The question hit Aguero like a physical blow. His hand dropped from Bam’s arm, his heart shattering into a million pieces. The others watched in stunned silence, unable to process what they had just heard. Bam didn’t recognize him. He didn’t know who Aguero was.

Endorsi and Hatz looked away, unable to bear the sight of Aguero’s pain. They had known this was a possibility, but seeing it happen in front of them was something else entirely. Hockney and Elaine exchanged a glance, sensing that something had gone terribly wrong on that island. 

“What happened?” Elaine asked, her voice barely more than a whisper.

Endorsi sighed, her heart was heavy. “Bam… he’s lost his memories. He doesn’t remember any of us.”

The words hung in the air like a death sentence, and Aguero felt the last of his strength leave him. Bam, the person who had been his entire world, was standing right in front of him, but he was a stranger now. The realization was too much to bear.

Bam shifted uncomfortably, sensing the tension in the air but not understanding the reason behind it. “Wangnan, what’s going on? Where’s the alligator we were with?”

Wangnan swallowed the lump in his throat, trying to keep his voice steady. “Rak is fine, Viole. He’s recovering.” He hesitated, glancing at Aguero before continuing. “Maybe… maybe you should talk to that guy.”

Bam frowned, his gaze flickering to Aguero. “Why?”

Wangnan could see the fear in Bam’s eyes, the uncertainty. He didn’t want to force Bam into anything, but he knew that Aguero deserved a chance to talk to him. “It’s okay, Viole. I’ll be right outside if you need me.”

Bam looked hesitant, but Wangnan’s reassurance seemed to calm him slightly. After a moment of internal debate, he nodded. “Okay.”

Wangnan gave him a small, encouraging smile before stepping back, leaving Bam and Aguero alone in the room. The door clicked shut behind them, the silence that followed was thick and suffocating. Bam looked around nervously, unsure of what to do or say. He took a tentative step toward the bed, but his foot caught on the edge of the rug, and he stumbled.

Aguero moved on instinct, catching Bam before he could fall. He helped him back to his feet, his touch was gentle yet firm. “Careful,” he murmured, guiding Bam to the bed.

Bam sat down, still feeling unsteady, his heart was pounding in his chest. He glanced up at Aguero, his mind was racing. There was something about this man, something that made his chest tighten with a strange mix of emotions. But he couldn’t place it, couldn’t understand why he felt this way.

Aguero pulled up a chair beside the bed, sitting down with a sigh. He stared at Bam, taking in every detail, as if trying to memorize the face he had longed to see for so long.

The silence between them was deafening, stretching on as if neither knew how to break it. Aguero’s chest ached, the pain of seeing Bam so close yet so distant was almost unbearable. He could feel his composure slipping, the walls he’d built around his emotions over the years starting to crack. He looked at Bam, really looked at him, and saw the confusion and fear in those eyes that once held so much trust and warmth for him.

Bam was sitting stiffly on the hospital bed, his hands clenched into fists on his lap, eyes flickering between Aguero and the door as if contemplating an escape. Aguero could see the slight tremor in Bam’s hands, the way he was trying so hard to remain calm in a situation that was anything but pure tense.

Finally, Aguero couldn’t take it anymore. He heaved a sigh, the sound breaking the silence like a knife slicing through tension. “Bam,” he began, his voice soft, almost hesitant. “I… I know this is all really confusing for you right now. And I know you don’t remember me.” His words hung in the air, heavy with the weight of loss and longing.

Bam’s eyes darted to his eyes, wide and uncertain. There was something about Aguero’s voice, the way he said his name, that stirred something deep within him. It was a strange feeling, like a distant memory trying to resurface, but it was too faint to grasp. Bam’s heart ached, a dull throb that he couldn’t quite explain.

Aguero swallowed hard, gathering the courage to ask what he so desperately needed. “Can I…” He hesitated, his voice faltering for a moment. “Can I at least hold you, Bam? Just… just to make sure I’m not dreaming?”

Bam’s breath hitched. The request was so simple, so heartfelt, yet it made his chest tighten with anxiety. He didn’t understand why, but there was something in Aguero’s voice, something so sincere, that made him want to say yes despite his fear.

Seeing Bam’s hesitation, Aguero quickly added, “You don’t have to. I just…” He looked down, unable to meet Bam’s gaze. “Everything is so confusing right now, I know. But I need you to know that… I’m so glad you’re alive, Bam. I’m so sorry I wasn’t there to stand by your side all those years, even though I promised I would be.”

Bam’s heart clenched painfully at the raw emotion in Aguero’s voice. He didn’t understand why, but hearing those words made him want to cry. There was a deep sadness in his chest, something he couldn’t quite place. Without realizing it, tears started to well up in his eyes, blurring his vision. The emotion hit him like a wave, so sudden and intense that he didn’t have time to react.

Aguero noticed the tears and felt a pang of guilt and sorrow. He reached out, his hand trembling slightly as he moved it toward Bam. “Bam…” he whispered, his voice was barely audible.

Bam flinched when Aguero’s hand first touched his, instinctively pulling back. But there was something in the way Aguero looked at him, something that made him pause. The touch was gentle, hesitant, as if Aguero was afraid he might break him. It felt strangely familiar, yet at the same time, foreign.

Aguero froze when he saw Bam flinch, his heart sinking. “I’m sorry,” he said quickly, retracting his hand. “I didn’t mean to—”

“No,” Bam interrupted, surprising himself. His voice was shaky, but he forced himself to continue. “It’s okay. You can… you can hold me.”

Aguero looked at him, his eyes wide with surprise and something else—something that looked like hope. He hesitated for a moment, as if unsure whether he had heard Bam correctly. When Bam didn’t pull away, Aguero slowly, carefully, wrapped his arms around him.

The embrace was hesitant at first, as if both were testing the waters. But then, something in Bam’s chest loosened, and he found himself leaning into Aguero’s touch, seeking the warmth and comfort it offered. It felt… right, somehow.

Aguero tightened his hold, pulling Bam closer, as if he was afraid that Bam might slip away if he let go. The moment was filled with a mix of emotions—relief, sadness, longing—all tangled together in the simple act of holding each other. For Aguero, it was a moment he had dreamed of for so long, a moment that was both everything and nothing like what he had imagined.

“I missed you,” Aguero whispered, his voice thick with emotion. “Bam, I missed you so much.”

Bam didn’t know what to say. He could feel the sincerity in Aguero’s words, the depth of the emotion behind them. But he couldn’t remember, and that made him feel like he was betraying something important, something precious. The tears he hadn’t noticed before finally spilled over, and he buried his face in Aguero’s shoulder, letting the tears flow freely.

“It’s okay,” Aguero murmured, his hand gently running through Bam’s hair. “You don’t have to remember everything right now. Just… just let me hold you, just for a little while.”

Bam nodded against his shoulder, the movement was small and almost imperceptible. He didn’t understand why, but being in Aguero’s arms made him feel safe, made him feel like maybe everything would be okay, even if he didn’t have all the answers yet.

They stayed like that for a long time, neither saying a word, just holding onto each other as if the world outside didn’t exist. The room was quiet, the silence no longer suffocating but comforting, a bubble that shielded them from everything else.

Aguero didn’t want to let go. He was terrified that if he did, Bam would disappear again, like a fleeting dream that would dissolve with the morning light. But he knew he couldn’t hold on forever. Bam needed time, space to figure things out on his own.

Eventually, Aguero pulled back slightly, just enough to look at Bam’s face. Bam’s eyes were red and puffy from crying, his cheeks were damp with tears, but there was a softness in his expression, a vulnerability that Aguero hadn’t seen in a long time.

“Thank you,” Aguero said quietly, his voice barely above a whisper. “Thank you for letting me… have this.”

Bam wiped at his eyes, nodding slightly. “I’m sorry I don’t remember,” he said again, his voice filled with guilt.

“Don’t be,” Aguero replied, shaking his head. “It’s not your fault, Bam. You’ve been through so much… more than anyone should ever have to go through. Just… take your time. We’ll figure this out together.”

Bam nodded again, though he still felt uncertain. There was so much he didn’t understand, so much that didn’t make sense. But for some reason, he felt like he could trust Aguero, like there was something unspoken between them that went beyond words.

As the moments passed, Bam found himself relaxing more, the tension slowly draining away. He wasn’t sure what the future held, or how he would navigate the maze of his lost memories. But for now, he was content to stay in this moment, to let Aguero’s presence ground him. Aguero stayed by Bam’s side, sitting in the chair next to the bed, his hand resting lightly on Bam’s. He didn’t want to overwhelm Bam with too many questions or push him to remember things he wasn’t ready for. Instead, he just sat there, offering his silent support, letting Bam know that he wasn’t alone.

After a while, Bam’s exhaustion started to catch up with him. The events of the day, the emotional turmoil, and the weight of everything he couldn’t remember had drained him. His eyelids grew heavy, and he struggled to keep them open, but sleep was pulling him under.

Aguero noticed and smiled softly. “You should rest,” he said gently. “I’ll be here when you wake up.”

Bam nodded as he was too tired to argue. He allowed himself to sink back into the bed, his eyes closing as sleep took hold. The last thing he felt was the warmth of Aguero’s hand on his, a reassuring presence that eased him into sleep.

Aguero watched as Bam drifted off, his heart was swelling with a mixture of love and sorrow. He wished he could take away all of Bam’s pain, all the confusion and fear, but he knew it wasn’t that simple. All he could do was be there for him, to support him through this journey, no matter how long it took.

After a while, Aguero stood just outside Bam’s room, the soft glow from the corridor’s lights casting gentle shadows across the floor. The room behind him was filled with the comforting sounds of Bam’s steady breathing, a rhythm that marked the calm after a storm of emotion. His friends, who had gathered to support him through the ordeal, now surrounded him with expressions of worry and relief.

Elaine, her eyes reflecting a mix of exhaustion and concern, was the first to speak up. “So, how is he?” Her voice was steady, though it carried a note of fatigue.

“Is he okay?” Hockney asked, his voice trembling slightly.

“How’s Bam?” Shibisu followed up, his eyes scanning Aguero’s expression for any hint of reassurance.

Aguero gave a small nod, his face softening as he spoke. “He’s resting now. He’s exhausted but stable.” He glanced over at the others, noting their various states of relief.

Elaine, standing close by, looked at Aguero with a questioning expression. “Do you think he’ll be alright? I mean, with everything that’s happened…”

“Yeah,” Aguero replied, his tone reassuring. “He’s a strong one. He’ll pull through. We just need to give him some time.”

There was a collective sigh of relief, but it did little to dissipate the tension. The group began to talk among themselves, discussing the strange and surreal events that had led them to this moment. But Aguero’s attention was elsewhere. His icy blue eyes narrowed as they landed on Wangnan, who was standing at the edge of the group, looking out of place and uncomfortable.

Without a word, Aguero strode over to Wangnan, grabbed him by the collar, and dragged him out of the hospital. The sudden movement startled everyone, causing a ripple of panic. Endorsi, sensing the imminent confrontation, immediately followed them, her voice rising with concern.

“Aguero! What the hell do you think you’re doing?” she yelled, trying to catch up.

But Aguero was too furious to listen. His grip on Wangnan’s collar tightened as he shoved him against the wall outside the hospital, the cold night air biting into their skin. Wangnan winced in pain, but the shock of Aguero’s sudden aggression left him too stunned to react.

“What the hell were you thinking?” Aguero’s voice was low and dangerous, filled with barely contained rage. “Why did you hide Bam for so long? What’s your purpose? What’s your agenda?”

Wangnan struggled to catch his breath, his eyes were wide with fear. He had never felt like this before, and the intensity of Aguero’s gaze was terrifying. But before he could muster a response, Endorsi stepped between them, shoving Aguero back with surprising force.

“That’s enough, Aguero!” Endorsi snapped, her voice was sharp. “What do you think you’re doing? Beating him up isn’t going to help Bam!”

Aguero’s chest heaved with anger, but he didn’t push Endorsi aside. Instead, he glared at Wangnan, his expression filled with disgust. “He kept Bam away from us for five years, Endorsi. Five years! Do you have any idea what that did to him? What that did to all of us?”

Endorsi crossed her arms, refusing to back down. “And do you have any idea what Wangnan went through? He didn’t know who Bam was, and he certainly didn’t know about you. He didn’t have any ulterior motives, Aguero. He saved Bam’s life!”

Wangnan, still catching his breath, looked between Aguero and Endorsi, his heart pounding in his chest. “I—I didn’t know,” he stammered, his voice shaking. “I didn’t know who Viole really was. I just found him… and I helped him because he needed it. I had no idea about any of this.”

Aguero’s expression didn’t soften. He couldn’t shake the anger that burned inside him, the betrayal he felt at having Bam hidden away from him for so long. “You should’ve done something,” Aguero hissed. “You should’ve found out who he was, brought him back to us—back to me.”

Endorsi shot Aguero a warning glare. “Listen to yourself, Aguero! You’re not thinking straight. You’re so blinded by your anger that you’re forgetting the most important thing, that Bam is alive because of Wangnan. He didn’t have to help him, but he did. If it weren’t for him, who knows what could have happened to Bam?”

Wangnan, still reeling from the confrontation, swallowed hard and found the courage to speak up. “I know you’re angry, and I get it. But I didn’t hide Viole from you. I didn’t know you even existed. All I knew was that Viole needed help, and I did what I could.”

Aguero clenched his fists, the rage boiling just beneath the surface. He wanted to lash out, to make Wangnan understand the pain he had caused by keeping Bam away from them. But as he looked at Endorsi, who stood protectively between them, he realized that she was right. No amount of anger or violence would change what had happened. Bam was safe now, and that was what mattered.

Endorsi placed a hand on Wangnan’s shoulder, offering him a small, reassuring smile. “You did the right thing, Wangnan. You saved Bam’s life, and for that, we should all be grateful.”

Aguero’s jaw tightened, but he finally relented, stepping back and letting go of his anger, if only a little. He couldn’t bring himself to thank Wangnan, not yet. The bitterness was too fresh, the wound was too deep. Without another word, Aguero turned and walked away, leaving Endorsi and Wangnan standing in the cold night air.

Endorsi watched him go, her heart was heavy with a mix of sympathy and frustration. She knew how much Bam meant to Aguero, and she understood why he was so upset. But this wasn’t the way to deal with it. She turned back to Wangnan, who was still shaken from the encounter.

“Don’t take it personally,” Endorsi said softly. “Aguero… he’s been through a lot. We all have. Bam means everything to him, and finding out that he’s been gone for so long… it’s a lot to process.”

Wangnan nodded slowly, rubbing the back of his neck. “I get it. I do. But I never meant to hurt anyone. I just wanted to help.”

“And you did,” Endorsi assured him. “Bam’s alive because of you. That’s something no one can take away.”

Wangnan managed a small smile, though it was clear that the encounter had rattled him. “Thanks, Endorsi.”

Endorsi returned the smile before glancing in the direction Aguero had gone. “Just give him time. He’ll come around eventually.”

Wangnan nodded again, though he wasn’t entirely convinced. As they stood there in the cold, silent night, he couldn’t shake the feeling that this was only the beginning. Bam’s return had stirred up emotions that had been buried for years, and now that they were out in the open, there was no telling what would happen next.

Inside the hospital, Aguero walked down the sterile corridors, his thoughts racing. The anger he had felt toward Wangnan was still there, simmering just beneath the surface, but it was tempered by a deeper, more painful emotion. Bam’s condition, his memory loss, the way he had looked at Aguero like a stranger—it was all too much. The years of searching, the sleepless nights, the endless worry, and now this… it felt like a cruel twist of fate.

He found himself back outside Bam’s room, staring at the door. He wanted to go back in, to be by Bam’s side, but he couldn’t bring himself to do it. The thought of Bam looking at him with those empty eyes, not recognizing him, not remembering everything they had been through—it was too painful.

Aguero leaned against the wall, closing his eyes as he tried to steady his breathing. He had to keep it together, for Bam’s sake, for everyone’s sake. But it was hard—so damn hard. All he wanted was to see the Bam he remembered, the Bam who had been his closest friend, his confidant, his everything.

A gentle hand on his shoulder pulled him from his thoughts. He opened his eyes to see Hockney standing beside him, his expression filled with quiet concern.

“Hey,” Hockney said softly, “you don’t have to do this alone.”

Aguero sighed, running a hand through his hair. “I know. It’s just… this isn’t how it was supposed to be.”

“I know,” Hockney replied. “But Bam’s back. That’s what matters. We’ll figure out the rest, together.”

Aguero nodded, appreciating the sentiment, but the gnawing fear in his chest wouldn’t go away. “I just… I don’t know how to make this right.”

Hockney offered a small, reassuring smile. “You’ll find a way. You always do.”

With a heavy heart, Aguero nodded again, but his thoughts were far from resolved. He wasn’t sure what the future held, but one thing was certain: Bam’s return had changed everything, and nothing would ever be the same again.

As Aguero stood there, lost in thought, his friends began to gather around him once more. Elaine, Dan, Novick, Ran, and Shibisu joined Hockney, each of them offering silent support in their own way. They didn’t need to say anything; their presence was enough to remind Aguero that he wasn’t alone.

Endorsi and Wangnan returned to the group, the tension from earlier still lingering in the air but softened by the understanding that had been reached. Endorsi glanced at Aguero, giving him a nod of reassurance. Wangnan, still a bit shaken, kept his distance but didn’t shy away from the group.

The silence between them was heavy with unspoken emotions, but it was also a comfort. Despite everything they had been through—despite the anger, the fear, the confusion—they were still together, and that was something.

Finally, it was Shibisu who broke the silence, his voice was light and casual as he tried to lift the mood. “So, who’s up for some late-night snacks? I think we could all use a little pick-me-up.”

There were a few half-hearted chuckles, and even Aguero managed a faint smile. It was a small gesture, but it was enough to remind him that they would get through this, just as they always had. No matter what challenges lay ahead, they had each other, and that was something worth holding on to.

As the group slowly made their way to the hospital’s small cafeteria, Aguero lingered for a moment, glancing back at Bam’s room. He knew the road ahead wouldn’t be easy, but he also knew that he wouldn’t be facing it alone. With a deep breath, he turned and followed his friends, ready to face whatever came next—together.

When Bam woke up the next day, the first thing he noticed was how warm the sunlight felt on his face. The morning rays streamed through the window, casting a soft glow around the room. For a brief moment, everything felt peaceful, almost normal, but that tranquility was quickly interrupted by the unfamiliar sounds of chatter. As he opened his eyes, Bam found himself staring at a group of people he didn’t recognize. They were all gathered around his bed, smiling at him with a mixture of relief and joy. Some faces were familiar—he recognized Endorsi, Hatz, and the large, gruff figure of Rak, but the others were strangers to him.

Elaine, a girl with a sharp gaze and soft features, stood near the foot of his bed, holding a small basket of fruit. Next to her was a tall boy with white hair and a calm demeanor—Hockney, she later introduced him as. There was also a pair of boys who seemed to be bickering playfully. Two others stood by quietly, one with dark hair, Dan, and the other with a rebellious streak in his eyes, Ran. Despite the unknown faces, the atmosphere in the room was light and welcoming.

Bam’s mind raced, trying to make sense of the situation. The last thing he remembered clearly was hugging Aguero. Well, after that it was all a blur. He felt a pang of frustration at his fragmented memory, but before he could dwell on it, Elaine stepped closer, her voice gentle as she spoke.

“Don’t worry, Bam,” she said, her tone soothing. “There’s no rush. Take your time. We’re just happy you’re here.”

Hockney nodded in agreement. “Yeah, we’re all here for you, no matter what. You don’t need to push yourself.”

Bam looked at them, feeling a mix of confusion and gratitude. He wanted to say something, anything that could convey what he was feeling, but the words escaped him. Instead, all he managed was a quiet, “Thank you.”

The room filled with lighthearted conversations as the group tried to ease Bam’s confusion. They talked about everything and nothing—catching him up on little stories, joking about trivial things. 

Novick teased Rak about his intimidating presence. “You know, Rak, you’re supposed to be this tough guy, but you passed out just because of a little bomb. With those thick scales of yours, you probably didn’t even need to flinch.”

Rak growled, puffing out his chest in mock indignation. “I was conserving my energy to protect the turtle! You wouldn’t understand!”

The others laughed, enjoying the banter. Even Bam couldn’t help but smile a little, the humor lightening the tension he hadn’t realized he was holding.

But amidst the laughter, Bam’s thoughts kept drifting. He found himself scanning the room, searching for two people he hadn’t seen yet. He hesitated for a moment before finally asking, “Where… Where’s Wangnan? And… the guy with blue hair?”

The room quieted slightly at his question. Endorsi, who had been sitting close to Bam, reached out and brushed a lock of hair from his forehead. Her touch was comforting, but there was a slight tension in her voice as she answered. “They’re just out there talking. Don’t worry, they’ll be back soon.”

Bam nodded, but the feeling of unease lingered. He didn’t know why he felt so anxious about their absence, but it was there, nagging at the back of his mind. Still, he pushed the thought aside, trying to focus on the present.

Meanwhile, in the hospital’s cafeteria, Aguero and Wangnan sat across from each other at a small table. The air between them was thick with unspoken tension. Wangnan shifted uncomfortably, not sure what to expect. Aguero had called him down for this conversation, but hadn’t said much about what it would be about, leaving Wangnan to stew in his own thoughts.

Aguero’s expression was unreadable as he finally broke the silence. “I need you to tell me everything, Wangnan. Everything that happened on that island. Everything that happened during those five years before Endorsi, Hatz, and Rak found you.”

Wangnan blinked, surprised by the directness of Aguero’s request. He took a deep breath, feeling the weight of the question settle in. “You want to know about those five years?” he asked, his voice was a little shaky.

“Yeah,” Aguero replied, his tone was calm but firm. “I want to know everything—how you found Bam, what happened to him, and what led up to the moment when they found you.”

Wangnan nodded, collecting his thoughts. He didn’t know why, but he felt compelled to be honest. “It started when I found Viole or Bam, as you guys call him, washed up on the shore of the island where my family and I were living. He was badly injured, his clothes were torn, and he was unconscious. At first, I thought he was just some lost soul, so I brought him home and took care of him.”

He paused, remembering those early days. “It took a week before he woke up, and when he did, he had no memories. None at all. He didn’t know who he was, where he came from—nothing. My family and I taught him everything from scratch. We gave him a place to belong, and for a while, things were good. Those five years… they were some of the best years of my life. Viole… he brought so much happiness to our family.”

Aguero listened intently, his expression still was unreadable. Wangnan’s voice softened as he continued. “But as time passed, Viole started asking questions about his past. It was small things at first—why he knew how to do certain things, like fighting or handling weapons. Sometimes, he’d react instinctively to situations, like when we were in danger. His reflexes were… incredible. And then, there were the cryptic messages.”

“Messages?” Aguero asked, narrowing his eyes.

Wangnan nodded. “Yeah, strange messages. I received them for a long while. Strange messages, unknown senders. At first, I didn’t think much of it, but Viole started getting more and more restless. I did my best to help him figure out his past, but the usual methods I knew didn’t work. So, I started digging deeper… into the underworld.”

Aguero’s gaze hardened. “And that’s what led you to this mess.”

Wangnan swallowed, the memory of those dangerous dealings flashing through his mind. “Yeah… I thought I was doing the right thing, helping him find out who he was. But the deeper I dug, the more trouble I found. And then… then they came for him.”

Aguero’s jaw tightened. “Who came for him?”

Wangnan hesitated before answering. “People… people who knew about his past. People who wanted to take him back. We fought them off as best we could, but it was only a matter of time before they found us.”

Aguero’s voice was cold as he asked, “What about your family? What happened to them?”

“They’re safe,” Wangnan answered quickly, not wanting to dwell on the fear he had felt for them. “I made sure of that before everything went down.”

There was a long silence between them as Aguero processed everything Wangnan had said. The revelation hung in the air, heavy and ominous.

Wangnan, unable to stand the silence any longer, finally asked, “Who are you really? You don’t seem like one of the people Viole was with during the train explosion… and what really happened five years ago?”

Aguero’s eyes flickered with something unreadable. He knew what Wangnan was getting at, and there was no point in hiding the truth. “I was there,” Aguero said quietly, “I was sitting right beside Bam on that train. I’m the guy with the blond hair. And Bam… he’s not as normal as you think.”

Wangnan’s heart skipped a beat. “What do you mean?”

Aguero’s voice was low and serious. “Bam… Viole… whatever name you want to call him, he was once part of an assassin group under the Khun family. My family.”

The words hit Wangnan like a punch to the gut. He felt the ground shift beneath him as he tried to process what Aguero had just revealed. “An… assassin?” he repeated, disbelief coloring his voice. “Viole?”

“Yeah,” Aguero confirmed, his expression was somber. “But that life… it wasn’t really his choice. He was forced into it, just like so many others.”

Wangnan shook his head, trying to make sense of it all. “But… but he didn’t remember any of that. He was just… he was just Viole.”

Aguero sighed, a hint of sympathy in his eyes. “I know. And I appreciate what you did for him, Wangnan. You gave him a life, a home… something he wanted for so long before. But that’s over now.”

Wangnan felt a pang of fear at Aguero’s words. “What do you mean?”

“I mean,” Aguero said, his voice firm, “that Bam belongs here. With me. With us. He belongs in the world he came from, not in the one you tried to create for him. And no amount of protesting from you is going to change that.”

Wangnan’s fists clenched. “You don’t get it, do you? I’m not just going to stand by and let you take him away! He’s my friend!”

“And I’m his family,” Aguero shot back. The intensity in his voice was matched by the sharpness of his gaze.

Wangnan’s heart sank. He could see now that this wasn’t just a simple disagreement. Aguero wasn’t going to back down. The truth was harsh, and Wangnan knew deep down that he had no right to fight for Bam’s future.

Before he could say anything more, Aguero stood up, his expression softening slightly. “I’ll let you say your goodbyes, but after that… it’s over. Bam’s coming with us.”

With those final words, Aguero turned and walked out of the cafeteria, leaving Wangnan alone with his thoughts.

Chapter Text

Bam sat on his bed, his back resting against the headboard, staring absently at the ceiling. It had been a long day, filled with the usual conversation with the faces he’s getting quite used to, but something felt off. There was a tension in the air that he couldn’t quite place, a sense of impending change that gnawed at the edges of his thoughts.

His musings were interrupted by a soft knock on the door. Bam sat up, blinking in surprise. It was unusual for anyone to come by his room at this time of day. “Come in,” he called, his voice tinged with curiosity.

The door creaked open slowly, and Wangnan stepped inside. There was something different about him today, something that immediately put Bam on edge. Wangnan’s usually bright and cheerful demeanor was dimmed, replaced by an expression of quiet sadness. His eyes, usually filled with a mischievous glint, were downcast, as if weighed down by some invisible burden.

“Wangnan?” Bam’s brow furrowed in concern. “Is everything okay?”

Wangnan managed a small, half-hearted smile as he closed the door behind him. “Yeah, everything’s fine. I just… wanted to talk to you for a bit.”

Bam could tell that something was wrong, but he didn’t press. Instead, he nodded and motioned for Wangnan to sit down. Wangnan hesitated for a moment before taking a seat on the edge of the bed, facing Bam.

For a few moments, neither of them spoke. The silence hung heavy in the room, thick with unspoken words and lingering tension. Finally, Wangnan broke the silence, his voice soft and wistful. “You know, Viole, I’ve been thinking a lot lately. About everything we’ve been through together.”

Bam tilted his head slightly, trying to understand where this was coming from. “What do you mean?”

Wangnan looked down at his hands, fidgeting with the edge of his shirt. “I mean… all the time we spent on that island, with our family, Goseng, Miseng, Akraptor, Prince, Horyang, and Yihwa. Those were the best years of my life. We didn’t have much, but we had each other, and that was enough.”

Bam smiled at the memory. The island had been a peaceful refuge, a place where he had felt safe and cared for. Wangnan had been his rock during those years, a constant source of support and companionship. “They were good days,” Bam agreed quietly. “I’m glad we had them.”

Wangnan’s smile faltered, and he looked up, meeting Bam’s gaze with an intensity that took Bam by surprise. There was something in his eyes, something that spoke of deep sorrow and regret. “Viole… I’m happy that you’re surrounded by people who truly care about you now. People like Khun, Endorsi, and the others. They’ve been waiting for you for a long time.”

Bam’s heart skipped a beat, a sense of dread creeping in as he listened to Wangnan’s words. There was a finality to them that he didn’t like, a sense that something was coming to an end. “Wangnan… why are you saying all of this? What’s going on?”

Wangnan hesitated, his gaze wavering. For a moment, it looked like he might change his mind, might brush it off with one of his usual jokes. But then he took a deep breath and forced himself to speak. “Because, Viole… my duty is done. I brought you back to your family, back to the people who love you. Even though you haven’t regained all your memories yet, I’m sure Khun and the others will help you do that. They’re the ones who can really help you now.”

Bam’s breath caught in his throat as a wave of emotion crashed over him. He could feel his chest tightening, his eyes stinging with the threat of tears. Something was very, very wrong. “What are you talking about, Wangnan? Why does this sound like… like you’re saying goodbye?”

Wangnan smiled sadly, his eyes glistening with unshed tears. “Because I am, Viole. I think… this is where we say goodbye.”

Bam shook his head, disbelief and panic rising within him. “No. No, you can’t just leave. We’ve been through too much together. We’re a family, Wangnan! We stick together!”

“I wish it was that simple,” Wangnan said, his voice trembling with emotion. “But Viole, this… this is where you really belong… as Bam. With them. Not with me.”

“But you’re my friend! You’re my family!” Bam’s voice cracked as tears began to spill down his cheeks. “If it’s about staying, I’ll talk to Aguero. I’ll ask him to let you stay with us. He’ll listen to me, Wangnan, I know he will!”

Wangnan’s heart broke at the sight of Bam’s tears, but he knew he couldn’t let himself be swayed. This was the right thing to do, even if it hurt more than anything he had ever imagined. “Viole, this isn’t about what Khun or anyone else would say. This is about you finding your place, finding where you truly belong. And it’s not with me, living a simple life on some island. I was a fool to think that was enough for you.”

Bam was sobbing openly now, his tears falling onto the bedspread as he pleaded with Wangnan. “But I don’t care about any of that! I just want you to stay! Please, Wangnan, don’t leave me!”

Wangnan felt his own tears welling up as he stood up from the bed. He looked down at Bam, his vision blurred by the tears he was fighting to hold back. “I’m sorry, Viole. I wish I could stay, but I can’t. You need to move forward, to find out who you really are. And you can’t do that if I’m holding you back.” Wangnan pulled Bam into a tight embrace, holding him close as Bam sobbed against his chest. “I wish things could be different, Viole. I really do. But this is how it has to be.”

After a long moment, Wangnan gently released Bam. Bam looked up at him, his face tear-streaked and filled with anguish. “Wangnan, please…”

Wangnan forced a smile, though it was shaky and full of pain. “This isn’t goodbye forever, Viole. Maybe someday… we’ll see each other again. But for now, you need to stay here. You need to remember who you are.”

Before Bam could respond, Wangnan turned and walked toward the door. Bam jumped up, reaching out to grab him, to stop him, but Wangnan was faster. He stepped through the door and quickly closed it behind him, pressing his back against it to keep Bam from following.

“Wangnan! Don’t go!” Bam’s voice was muffled by the door, but Wangnan could hear the desperation in it, the raw pain. It took everything in him to stay where he was, to not turn around and go back inside.

As he stood there, holding the doorknob tightly to keep it closed, he could hear Bam’s sobs from the other side. Each one felt like a knife to the heart, but Wangnan knew this was the only way. He had done his part, and now it was time for him to let go, to let Bam find his own path.

After what felt like an eternity, Wangnan slowly released the doorknob and stepped back. His legs felt weak, and he had to lean against the wall for support. He wiped his eyes with the back of his hand, trying to compose himself before anyone saw him like this.

Just then, he noticed a few of the TFN members standing in the hallway, their expressions a mix of shock and confusion. They had clearly heard what had happened and were unsure of how to react. Wangnan forced a small smile, though it didn’t reach his eyes. “It’s okay,” he said quietly. “This… this is how it’s supposed to be.”

As he stood there, hearing Bam’s sobs grow quieter, Wangnan felt a deep ache in his chest. He knew this was the right thing to do, but that didn’t make it any easier. The TFN members, who had been lingering in the hallway, watched the scene unfold with a mixture of surprise and sadness. They hadn’t expected this, but Aguero had. He knew Wangnan would eventually have to say goodbye. He had seen it in Wangnan’s eyes earlier that day, the quiet resignation, the understanding that his part in Bam’s life was coming to an end.

Aguero approached Wangnan, who was still standing by the door, his hand gripping the doorknob tightly. “You did the right thing,” Aguero said quietly, his voice lacking its usual sharpness.

Wangnan didn’t respond at first. He simply nodded, his eyes fixed on the floor. Finally, he looked up at Aguero, his expression weary. “It doesn’t feel like it.”

Aguero’s gaze softened. “It never does.”

Wangnan released the doorknob and stepped back, wiping the tears from his eyes. “Take care of him, Khun. Please.”

“I will,” Aguero promised. “He’s in good hands.”

With one last glance at the closed door, Wangnan turned and walked away, his steps heavy with the weight of his decision. The TFN members watched him go, their expressions somber. They knew how hard it was to say goodbye, especially to someone like Bam, who had a way of worming his way into your heart.

The hospital room was eerily quiet that morning, the stillness unsettling Aguero as he approached Bam's room. He had visited every day, trying to be a familiar presence, trying to ease Bam back into the life he had forgotten. But with every visit, the wall between them grew thicker. Today, Aguero felt a tension in his chest as he gripped the door handle, hesitating for a moment before pushing it open.

Bam sat on the edge of his bed, staring blankly out the window. His body was there, but his mind seemed far away, lost in the shadows of memories he couldn't retrieve. The sun filtered through the blinds, casting soft streaks of light across his face, but it did nothing to brighten his expression. Aguero cleared his throat softly, stepping inside with a forced cheeriness.

"Good morning, Bam," Aguero greeted, his voice soft yet hopeful. "How are you feeling today? I spoke to Dan and the others earlier. They’re excited to see you. Endorsi said she’s planning a welcome-back dinner, even Rak’s enthusiastic about it."

He waited for Bam to respond, his words hanging in the air like a fragile thread. But Bam didn't turn from the window. His silence felt heavier than usual, more deliberate. Aguero's heart sank a little. He had been doing everything he could to help Bam reintegrate, but it was like talking to someone behind a wall of glass. Bam heard him, maybe even understood him, but there was always that distance—something deeper than just amnesia.

After what felt like an eternity of silence, Bam finally turned his head. His eyes met Aguero's, and the emptiness in his gaze sent a chill through Aguero’s chest. Bam’s face, usually so expressive and warm, was blank, save for a glint of something underneath—something simmering.

"Where’s Wangnan?" Bam asked, his voice quiet but laced with tension.

Aguero blinked, his pulse quickening. He had been avoiding this conversation, trying to dance around the subject ever since Wangnan had left. The truth was, Aguero had insisted Wangnan leave for Bam’s sake—for all of their sakes. But now, faced with Bam’s piercing gaze, he felt like the walls were closing in.

"He… he had to leave," Aguero said carefully, choosing his words with precision. "He thought it would be better this way. For both of you."

Bam’s eyes didn’t waver. There was no shift in his expression, no sign that the explanation had made any impact. Instead, Bam’s jaw clenched, and the silence stretched between them like a taut wire about to snap.

"You made him leave, didn't you?" Bam’s voice broke through the silence, fragile and accusatory. His hands were gripping the sheets tightly now, his knuckles white.

Aguero's breath hitched, and for the first time in a long while, he felt truly cornered. There was no easy answer to this, no quick fix with words or reassurances. He had orchestrated Wangnan’s departure, yes, but it had been necessary. At least, that’s what he had convinced himself of.

"It wasn’t like that, Bam. I… I thought it would be best for everyone. Wangnan and his family—they took care of you for five years, and I’m grateful for that. But…" Aguero’s voice faltered, feeling the weight of the truth pressing down on him. "You were always meant to be with us. With our friends. With me."

Bam’s hands trembled slightly as he held onto the sheets, his face twisting in confusion and hurt. "But I don’t remember you," Bam said, his voice cracking. "I don’t remember any of this—any of you."

Aguero felt a pang of guilt shoot through him. He had known this was coming, but nothing could have prepared him for the raw emotion in Bam’s voice. The person he had fought so hard to protect now looked at him like a stranger.

"And now Wangnan is gone. The only people I knew, the only ones who made sense to me—gone." Bam’s eyes shimmered with unshed tears, his voice rising in desperation. "Did you force them out of my life?"

Aguero flinched. The accusation cut deep, and for a second, he found himself speechless. He had expected Bam to struggle with the transition, but this level of anger, this sense of betrayal—it was too much.

"I didn't force him, Bam," Aguero whispered, his voice pleading. "I—"

But Bam cut him off, his voice trembling with barely restrained emotion. "You did! You sent him away! I know you did. He wouldn’t have left me, not like that. I barely said goodbye to him, and now he’s gone! How could you do that?"

Aguero’s heart raced, panic building as he tried to keep his composure. "Bam, I wish I could bring him back, but—"

"Wish?!" Bam snapped, his eyes flaring with an intensity that Aguero hadn’t seen before. "You wish, but you can’t. Isn’t that it, Aguero? You took him away because you didn’t want him here. You didn’t want me with them. You wanted me all to yourself!"

Aguero's throat tightened. He wanted to deny it, wanted to tell Bam that it wasn’t true. But how could he? There was truth to Bam’s words, even if he hadn’t meant it that way. Aguero had wanted Bam back in their world, back with their friends, and Wangnan and his family had become an obstacle to that. He had rationalized it, telling himself it was for Bam’s own good, but now, seeing the pain in Bam’s eyes, it felt hollow.

"It’s not like that…" Aguero's voice was barely audible, strained under the weight of his own guilt. "Bam, please, listen to me. I only wanted what was best for you. I—"

Bam's voice cracked as he interrupted again, this time softer, more vulnerable. "I don't even know what’s best for me anymore, Aguero. I don’t even know who I am."

The admission broke Aguero’s heart. He saw the tears welling up in Bam's eyes, threatening to spill over, and it tore at him. Every instinct screamed at him to fix this, to make it better, but he didn’t know how.

"I just want him back," Bam whispered, his voice hoarse. "I want Wangnan, and my family, and the life I knew. I want to feel like I belong somewhere."

Aguero took a tentative step forward, his hand reaching out, though he stopped just short of touching Bam’s arm. "I’m sorry, Bam," he said quietly, the sincerity in his voice palpable. "I’m so sorry. I thought I was doing the right thing by bringing you back to us. But I know now that it hurt you, and I wish I could change that."

Bam shook his head, wiping at his eyes angrily, trying to hold back the tears. "You can’t fix this, Aguero. You can’t bring them back."

The words hung between them like a final blow, and Aguero knew it was true. He had made his choice, and now they both had to live with the consequences. The silence returned, thick and suffocating, neither of them knowing how to bridge the gap that had opened up between them.

After a long pause, Bam exhaled shakily, his voice small and exhausted. "I just don’t understand why you had to push them away. They were the only ones I had."

Aguero lowered his gaze, unable to meet Bam’s eyes anymore. "I know," he whispered. "I know, and I’m sorry."

But the apology felt hollow in the face of Bam’s pain. Aguero wished he could say more, wished there was something, anything, that would make this right. But the truth was, there wasn’t. He had pushed Wangnan away, and now Bam was left feeling abandoned by the one person he still remembered.

For the first time in his life, Aguero felt truly powerless. No amount of strategy or intellect could fix this. It was a wound that words couldn’t heal.

Bam turned away from him, staring out the window again, his shoulders sagging with the weight of his own sadness. Aguero stood there for a moment, unsure of what to do, before finally stepping back toward the door. He opened it slowly, casting one last glance at Bam’s hunched figure.

"I’ll be back tomorrow," Aguero said quietly, though he wasn’t sure if Bam was even listening.

As the door closed behind him, Aguero leaned against the wall in the hallway, feeling the full weight of the situation crash down on him. He had always prided himself on being able to control the circumstances around him, to manipulate events in his favor. But now, for the first time, he realized that some things were beyond his control. He couldn’t bring Wangnan back. And he couldn’t erase the pain that decision had caused.

Inside the room, Bam sat alone, staring out at the world beyond the hospital window. The silence felt louder now, heavier. It pressed against his chest, filling the empty spaces that Wangnan had once occupied. He wanted to believe Aguero’s words, wanted to believe that there was some way this could be fixed. But deep down, he knew it couldn’t.

Not until Wangnan was back. Not until the only world he remembered felt whole again. And right now, that seemed farther away than ever.

The following morning, Aguero arrived at the hospital once again. This time, however, he wasn’t alone. Endorsi had insisted on coming along after sensing that things had taken a darker turn between him and Bam. Aguero had resisted at first, convinced he could handle it himself, but Endorsi wasn’t easily deterred. She could tell how much this was affecting Aguero, even if he refused to admit it.

As they entered the hospital room, Bam was in the same spot he’d been for days—sitting on the edge of the bed, staring out the window, his posture tense and distant. The light filtering in from outside did nothing to lift the gloom that seemed to follow him around.

"Good morning, Bam," Aguero greeted cautiously, his voice soft, trying not to trigger another outburst. He stepped forward, trying to appear calm, though the tension in the air was thick. "I brought Endorsi today."

Endorsi leaned casually against the doorframe, giving Bam a small wave. "Hey, Bam," she said lightly, her tone was less formal than Aguero’s. "Figured I’d drop by, keep this guy in check." She jerked her thumb toward Aguero, trying to inject some humor into the situation, but Bam didn’t react.

Instead, Bam turned his gaze from the window to Aguero. His eyes, usually so full of warmth and curiosity, were cold now, edged with anger and frustration. He didn’t even glance at Endorsi. Aguero exchanged a quick look with Endorsi, hoping she would pick up on the tension. Endorsi sighed internally but kept her smile steady, moving closer to Bam.

"So," Endorsi began, carefully navigating the conversation, "I know it’s been tough these past few days. A lot of changes, a lot of confusion, right? But we’re here to help you, Bam. And I know Wangnan—he wants you to get better. He wants you to focus on getting your memories back."

Bam stiffened at the mention of Wangnan, and his gaze hardened even further. He had been brooding over the departure since the day Wangnan had said his tearful goodbye, leaving him alone with people he no longer knew. He couldn’t understand it, couldn’t accept it.

"He wouldn’t have left," Bam said quietly, his voice strained. "Not if it weren’t for Aguero."

Aguero’s heart sank. It was the same accusation Bam had thrown at him the day before, and each time, it hurt more. He opened his mouth to respond, but Endorsi jumped in first.

"Bam, listen," she said, her voice was gentle but firm. "Wangnan didn’t leave because Aguero forced him out. He left because he thought it would help you. He wanted to give you the space to recover your memories."

Bam’s eyes flashed with anger as he shot up from his seated position. "That’s not true!" he snapped, his voice shaking with emotion. "He didn’t want to leave! He didn’t have to leave! I could still recover my memories with him by my side!"

Aguero stepped forward, his voice calm but edged with frustration. "Bam, you have to understand. Wangnan made his choice. He wanted to go because he thought it would be better for you, for everyone. You should respect that."

"I don’t care!" Bam yelled, his voice rising as he clenched his fists. "I don’t care what Wangnan wanted! I needed him here! He’s the only person I remember, the only one who feels real to me! And now he’s gone, and it’s because of you!"

Endorsi put a hand on Aguero’s shoulder, signaling him to step back. She took a breath, trying to diffuse the situation, knowing how volatile it had become.

"Bam," she said softly, moving closer, her expression sympathetic. "I know it feels like everything’s falling apart. But Aguero didn’t do this to hurt you. We’re trying to help. We want you to feel whole again, to recover everything you’ve lost."

But Bam wasn’t listening. His eyes were locked onto Aguero, filled with a mixture of betrayal and rage. "I hate you," Bam said, his voice trembling with barely controlled emotion. "I hate you for taking him away from me."

Aguero felt as if the ground had just been ripped out from under him. He stood there, stunned, the words cutting deeper than any wound he had ever experienced. He had been prepared for Bam’s anger, but hearing those words—I hate you—made it all too real. He opened his mouth to say something, anything, but no words came. His throat felt tight, his mind blank.

Endorsi’s eyes darted between the two, sensing how quickly things were unraveling. "Bam, you don’t mean that," she said quickly, stepping in between them. "You’re angry, and you’re hurting, but—"

"I don’t want to see him anymore!" Bam shouted, his voice raw with emotion. "I don’t want him here! I don’t want him anywhere near me!"

Aguero's chest felt like it was caving in. He took a step back, his mind racing. He had always been the one in control, the one with the answers, but now he was lost. Nothing he said seemed to reach Bam, and the more he tried, the more distant Bam became.

"Bam," Aguero said, his voice shaking despite himself, "please—"

But Bam wasn’t done. His eyes burned with tears now, though he was too angry to let them fall. "You always talk like you know what’s best for me. But you don’t. You don’t understand anything about how I feel. Wangnan was the only person who cared about me, and you pushed him away. I hate you for doing that."

The words echoed in the small hospital room, the weight of them pressing down on everyone. Endorsi glanced at Aguero, her heart breaking for him, but she knew Bam wasn’t in a place to listen right now.

"Bam," Endorsi tried again, her voice soft and soothing, "why don’t we just take a breath, okay? Let’s—"

But Bam cut her off, his voice low and trembling. "I’m leaving."

Before anyone could react, Bam stormed past them, heading straight for the door. Aguero’s eyes widened in panic. He reached out, desperate to stop him, but his hand froze in midair. The look on Bam’s face—the raw, unfiltered pain—paralyzed him.

"Bam, wait!" Aguero called after him, but it was too late.

Bam pushed the door open and walked out, leaving Aguero and Endorsi standing in the middle of the room, stunned. The door swung shut behind him, and the sound echoed in the sudden silence.

For a long moment, neither of them spoke. Aguero stared at the door, his mind racing, trying to make sense of what had just happened. His stomach twisted painfully, guilt and fear mixing into an unbearable knot. Bam hated him. Those words wouldn’t stop replaying in his head.

Endorsi finally broke the silence, her voice gentle but laced with concern. "He didn’t mean that, you know."

Aguero didn’t respond at first. His eyes remained fixed on the door, his thoughts tangled in the weight of Bam’s anger.

"Aguero," Endorsi said, stepping closer, her voice softening even more. "He’s just confused. He’s scared. He doesn’t really hate you."

Aguero let out a shaky breath, running a hand through his hair as he slumped into the nearest chair. "I pushed him too hard," he whispered, more to himself than to her. "I thought… I thought I was helping him, but I just made things worse."

Endorsi knelt beside him, her hand resting lightly on his arm. "You’re doing the best you can," she said softly. "This is all new to him. He’s lost, Aguero. But he’ll come around. He just needs time."

Aguero shook his head, his voice barely audible. "What if he doesn’t? What if I’ve ruined everything?"

Endorsi gave him a small, sad smile. "You haven’t. Trust me, Bam’s not the kind of guy to hold onto hate for long. He’s just hurt right now. Once he starts to see things clearly, he’ll understand why you did what you did."

Aguero wanted to believe her, but doubt clung to him like a shadow. He had always prided himself on his ability to think things through, to calculate the best course of action. But with Bam, everything felt out of control. He hadn’t anticipated how deep Bam’s connection to Wangnan ran, how much he would resist being torn away from the life he knew.

"I don’t know if I can fix this," Aguero admitted, his voice cracking slightly. "I don’t know if he’ll ever forgive me."

Endorsi squeezed his arm gently. "He will. You just have to give him some space. Let him process everything in his own time."

Aguero nodded numbly, though the knot in his stomach remained. "I hope you’re right," he muttered, his voice barely above a whisper.

Endorsi stood up, her expression softening as she looked at him. "Come on, let’s give him some time. We’ll figure this out, okay?"

Aguero hesitated for a moment, then slowly rose from the chair. As they left the room together, a heavy silence lingered between them, but Endorsi’s presence offered a small, fragile thread of hope.

Still, as Aguero walked down the hospital corridor, he couldn’t shake the image of Bam’s tear-filled eyes, or the sound of his voice saying those words. I hate you.

Another long day in the hospital was dragging by. Aguero stood just outside Bam's room, hands in his pockets, trying to focus on what the doctor was saying. His mind kept drifting back to Bam—how cold and distant he’d been these past few weeks. It didn’t matter what Aguero said or did. Bam’s indifference was like a wall he couldn’t break through.

“The tests came back clear,” the doctor was explaining. “There’s no physical reason for his memory loss, but the emotional trauma seems to be affecting his recovery. We’ll keep monitoring him, but you should prepare for him to be discharged in three days.”

Aguero nodded, trying to keep his expression neutral. He thanked the doctor, though the knot of anxiety in his chest only tightened. He wasn’t sure how much more of this he could take. Every day, he walked into that room hoping Bam would finally recognize him, or at least show some sign of the boy he used to be. But all he got was coldness, that hollow look in Bam’s eyes.

Aguero took a deep breath before pushing open the door to Bam’s room. The air inside felt heavy, weighed down by the unspoken tension that had been building for days. Bam sat propped up in bed, his back against the headboard, staring blankly at the wall. He didn’t even turn his head when Aguero entered.

"Hey," Aguero greeted softly, grabbing a chair and pulling it closer to Bam’s bedside. He tried to keep his voice steady, but there was an edge of uncertainty, of vulnerability, that slipped through. "I just spoke with the doctor. You’re going to be discharged in three days."

Bam didn’t respond. He continued to stare ahead, his expression unreadable, as if Aguero wasn’t even there. The silence hung between them like a weight.

Aguero swallowed hard, trying to hold back the frustration and pain that had been building up over the past weeks. He sat down in the chair beside Bam, folding his hands in his lap, trying to keep himself composed. He couldn’t afford to break down now—not when Bam needed him to be strong.

"Bam," Aguero began cautiously, "I know you don’t want to see me right now. I get that. But I had to be here for the doctor’s briefing. You need someone to look after you, especially after everything that’s happened."

Finally, Bam turned his head slightly, just enough to look at Aguero with those distant, hollow eyes. His voice, when he spoke, was cold. "I thought I made it clear I didn’t want to see you."

The words cut deep, but Aguero refused to let it show. He took a slow breath, steadying himself. "I know," he said quietly. "But I’m still here. Because I care about you, even if you don’t remember that right now."

Bam didn’t respond. He just looked away again, his face hardening with that same wall of indifference that had become all too familiar. Aguero felt the silence stretching out, suffocating him. He didn’t know how to reach Bam anymore. Every attempt seemed to push him further away.

But he couldn’t give up. Not now.

Aguero shifted slightly in his chair, leaning forward. He reached out, hesitating for just a moment, before gently taking Bam’s hand in his. Bam didn’t pull away, though there was no warmth in his response either. Still, Aguero felt a small flicker of hope. It was a fragile thing, buried beneath the layers of Bam’s anger and pain, but it was there.

"I’m sorry," Aguero whispered, his voice barely audible. He kept his gaze fixed on Bam’s hand, his thumb tracing small circles over Bam’s knuckles. "For everything. For pushing you, for not understanding how much you were hurting. I know I can’t undo what’s happened, but I want you to know… I’m here. No matter what."

For a long moment, Bam said nothing. He just stared down at their joined hands, his face still unreadable. But Aguero could see something flicker behind his eyes—something deeper, something he hadn’t let himself feel in weeks.

Aguero squeezed Bam’s hand gently, his own heart aching with the weight of everything left unsaid. "I would do anything for you, Bam. Anything. You just have to tell me what you want. If there’s something I can do to help… if there’s any way I can make this better…"

Bam’s lips trembled slightly, his eyes narrowing as he fought against the storm of emotions swirling inside him. It wasn’t that he didn’t feel anything—he did. There was something deep inside him that stirred whenever Aguero touched him, a faint echo of the connection they once shared. But it was buried beneath layers of confusion and loss, and the overwhelming pain of everything he had lost.

Bam finally spoke, his voice raw and quiet. "Then bring Wangnan back to me."

The words were a knife to Aguero’s chest. He felt his breath catch, his grip on Bam’s hand faltering for just a moment. He looked up, meeting Bam’s gaze, and the pain in those words cut deeper than anything Bam had said before.

"I…" Aguero struggled to find the right words, his throat tight. "Bam, I… I can’t bring him back."

Bam’s eyes filled with unshed tears, his jaw clenched as he tried to keep his emotions in check. "Then what’s the point?" he whispered, his voice breaking. "What’s the point of all of this? If I can’t have my family back, if I can’t have Wangnan… What’s the point of anything?"

Aguero felt the tears burning behind his own eyes, but he forced them back, refusing to let himself break down. He had to be strong for Bam, even if it felt impossible.

"I know you miss him," Aguero said quietly, his voice thick with emotion. "I know losing him… losing your family… it’s tearing you apart. And I can’t make that pain go away. But I’m still here, Bam. I’m still your family, even if you don’t remember. I’ll be here for you, no matter how long it takes. No matter how much you push me away."

Bam closed his eyes, a tear slipping down his cheek. "It’s not the same," he choked out. "It’s not the same without them. Without him."

Aguero’s heart broke as he watched Bam struggle with the weight of his loss. He wanted so badly to take that pain away, to fix everything, but there was no way to do that. No way to bring back what Bam had lost.

"I know," Aguero whispered, his voice barely audible. "I know it’s not the same. But you’re not alone, Bam. You still have me. And I’ll stay by your side, no matter what."

Bam’s hand tightened slightly in Aguero’s, and for the first time in weeks, Aguero felt the faintest glimmer of hope. It wasn’t much, but it was enough. Enough to keep holding on.

Aguero found himself standing in an alleyway a few blocks from the hospital, his breath coming in ragged gasps. He leaned against the damp brick wall, his fingers digging into his palms until he felt the sting of his own nails. The pain was a welcome distraction from the suffocating anguish that had been building inside him since the moment Bam had kept asking him about Wangnan over and over again.

His heart was screaming inside his chest, the pain threatening to tear him apart. Bam didn’t want him. Bam wanted Wangnan. The one person Aguero would do anything for, the person who mattered most to him, was slipping further away, consumed by a grief that Aguero couldn’t heal. It felt like drowning.

Without thinking, Aguero pulled out his phone and dialed a number. His fingers shook as he pressed the call button, bringing the phone to his ear.

“Asensio.” Aguero’s voice was hoarse when his brother picked up. He could hear the surprise in Asensio’s voice on the other end.

“A.A? What the hell—”

“I need you to find someone,” Aguero cut him off, his voice tight, barely holding back the desperation he felt.

“What? Who?”

Aguero closed his eyes, his chest heaving with the weight of what he was about to ask. “Find someone named Wangnan.”

There was a long pause on the other end. When Asensio finally spoke again, his voice was cautious. “A.A, what’s going on? Why are you—”

“Just find him!” Aguero snapped, his frustration bubbling over. He could feel himself unraveling, the tight grip he had on his emotions slipping further with every passing second. He didn’t care how irrational it sounded, how impossible the request was. All he knew was that Bam needed Wangnan, and Aguero would do anything—anything to keep Bam from disappearing into that abyss.

“Asensio,” Aguero’s voice softened, desperation seeping through the cracks. “Please. Just find him.”

There was a beat of hesitation before Asensio’s voice came through again, quieter this time. “Alright. I’ll see what I can do.”

Aguero ended the call before Asensio could ask more questions, his hand trembling as he lowered the phone.

He stayed in the alley for a while, staring blankly ahead, his mind reeling. Had he made a mistake? Was he really willing to chase after someone who took Bam away from him, just to ease Bam’s pain? The rational part of him screamed that this wouldn’t end well, but Aguero wasn’t thinking rationally. His emotions were in control, and all he could think about was Bam—how to save him, how to keep him from falling apart.

The sound of footsteps echoed through the alley, but Aguero didn’t move. He felt disconnected from everything around him, lost in the storm raging inside his head.

“Hey, you lost or something?” a gruff voice interrupted his thoughts. Aguero blinked, his eyes focusing on a group of thugs who had appeared, their predatory gazes locked on him. “You don’t belong here, pretty boy.”

Aguero stared at them blankly, his mind barely registering the danger. He didn’t care. In fact, a part of him welcomed the distraction, the chance to release the fury that had been building inside him for weeks. The pain that was clawing at his insides needed an outlet, and these thugs had no idea what they were about to provoke.

“I don’t have time for this,” Aguero muttered, his voice low and dangerous.

One of the thugs laughed, stepping closer with a sneer. “Oh, you’ll make time.”

In a flash, Aguero moved. His body acted on pure instinct, the rage that had been simmering beneath the surface exploding into action. His hand shot out, grabbing the thug by the throat and slamming him against the wall with a sickening thud. The other two barely had time to react before Aguero was on them, his movements swift and brutal. His fists connected with bone, and the satisfying crack of ribs breaking filled the air.

Aguero wasn’t thinking anymore. He was consumed by the fury, by the pain. Each strike was a release, each blow a way to numb the ache in his chest. The world around him blurred as he tore through the thugs with vicious efficiency, his breath coming in ragged gasps by the time the last one hit the ground.

Aguero stepped into the hideout, his body sagging with exhaustion, each step a heavier burden than the last. His usually sharp blue eyes, filled with confidence and calculation, were dulled with an emotion far more complex—dread and pain. The rest of the TFN gathered around the room, their initial relief at finding Bam alive now tempered by the weight of his memory loss. For five long years, they had believed Bam was dead, lost in the explosion on the train. But the cruel twist of fate wasn’t in his survival, it was in the fragments of his mind that had been left behind.

No one spoke as Aguero entered, but the heaviness in the air was palpable. They knew how much this was killing him—watching Bam, the person he was closest to, the one he fought so hard to find, look at him like a stranger.

Endorsi, leaning against the wall, was the first to break the silence. Her voice was unusually soft, a reflection of the tension hanging between them. "What's the update with Bam?" She sounded more cautious than curious, her eyes scanning Aguero's face for any sign of hope.

Aguero stopped mid-step, his back still turned to them. His hand instinctively clenched the door frame for support, his knuckles turning white. The room felt too small, too suffocating. He exhaled sharply before speaking. "I asked Asensio to find Wangnan."

The reaction was immediate. Every head in the room snapped toward Aguero in surprise. Endorsi's eyes widened as she pushed off the wall, incredulity flashing in her gaze. "You did what?"

Dan, who had been sitting on the edge of a chair, almost dropped his phone. "Wait, you asked Asensio to find Wangnan?" he repeated, as if he hadn’t heard right the first time.

"Why?" Hatz asked, his eyes narrowing in confusion. “You were the one who told Wangnan to leave Bam behind. You said it was for his own good.”

The room buzzed with disbelief. Rak crossed his arms, his usual intimidating presence softened by the concern evident in his expression. Elaine exchanged a confused glance with Hockney, who had been silently watching from the side.

"Yeah, why?" Endorsi stepped forward, her voice rising with frustration. "You were the first one to push Wangnan away. Why bring him back now?"

Aguero's head whipped around, his blue eyes flaring with an intensity that silenced the room instantly. His voice was low, but the rawness of his emotion was unmistakable. "Do you think I wanted to push him away? Do you think any of this was easy?" His fists clenched at his sides, his chest heaving with restrained fury. "Bam asks for him every time I see him. Every time he looks at me, it’s like I’m not even there. You think I don’t want to fix this? You think I have any idea how to help him when all he sees is someone else? Do any of you have a better suggestion?"

His words hung in the air, each one cutting deeper than the last. The group exchanged uneasy glances, taken aback by the sudden outburst. It was rare for Aguero to lose control like this, to let his emotions spill out so openly. He was always the calm strategist, the one who kept everything together. But now, the cracks were beginning to show.

Endorsi’s expression softened, the anger in her eyes fading as she took in the sheer weight of what Aguero was carrying. She stepped closer, her voice gentler this time. "I get that you're hurting, Aguero. We all are. But bringing Wangnan back… it’s not that simple. You know there are people still after Wangnan and his family because they helped Bam. If they find him again—if they find out he’s back with Bam—it could put them both in danger. That’s why you separated them in the first place."

Aguero turned away, pacing the room in frustration, running a hand through his hair. "I know that. But what am I supposed to do? Just watch Bam fall apart? He’s lost, Endorsi. He’s lost everything—his memories, his sense of who he is. Every time I go to see him, it’s like he’s not even there. If Wangnan is the only one who can bring him back, then I’ll take that risk."

Shibisu spoke up from the corner, his voice measured but sympathetic. "A.A, we get that you’re trying to help him. But maybe there’s another way. Wangnan… he knew that separating from Bam was the best thing for him. Maybe we just need to give Bam time, help him find his way back to you, to us."

The room fell silent again as Aguero stopped pacing, standing still with his back to them, shoulders tense. Endorsi stepped closer, her hand gently resting on his arm. "You can’t force this, Aguero. Bam has to come back on his own terms, not because we brought someone else into the equation. You have to be patient."

Aguero closed his eyes, his mind a whirlwind of frustration, pain, and uncertainty. He wanted to believe them, wanted to believe that Bam would eventually remember, that everything would fall back into place. But every time he saw Bam, saw the emptiness in his eyes, the doubt crept in again.

"Patient..." Aguero whispered, almost to himself. He let out a shaky breath and nodded, though it felt like admitting defeat. "I’ll try."

The next day, Aguero returned to the hospital, the familiar dread coiling in his chest as he stepped into Bam’s room. He wasn’t sure what to expect anymore. Each visit was a reminder of what they had lost, of the gaping hole in Bam’s memories where their friendship used to be. But today, something was different.

Bam was sitting up in bed, his gaze distant but not as vacant as it had been. Aguero sat down in the chair beside him, his movements careful, as if one wrong step could shatter the fragile peace between them. For a long moment, neither of them spoke, the silence heavy but not uncomfortable.

Aguero finally broke the silence, his voice tentative. “How are you feeling?”

Bam turned to him, his eyes flickering with recognition, though not the kind Aguero yearned for. “Better, I think,” Bam replied softly, his voice distant but not as empty as before.

Aguero nodded, the tightness in his chest easing just a fraction. He had expected Bam to ask about Wangnan the moment he walked in, like he always did. But the question never came. Bam didn’t mention Wangnan’s name, didn’t even hint at it. Aguero couldn’t help but feel a small flicker of hope, though he didn’t dare let it grow.

They talked about other things—small, inconsequential things. Aguero told him about the weather, about the others waiting for him back at the hideout. Bam listened quietly, nodding occasionally, but he seemed distant, as if his mind was somewhere far away. Aguero carefully avoided the topic of Wangnan, not wanting to break whatever fragile peace they had managed to find.

The truth was, Bam had grown weary of asking Aguero about Wangnan. Every time the words slipped from his lips, he felt a deep frustration building, a sense of futility gnawing at him. It was as though he was clinging to a shadow, desperate for something that would never return. Over time, the constant silence from Aguero, the unspoken reluctance, made Bam pause. He began to piece things together, memories of the island resurfacing, the danger he, Wangnan, Hatz, Endorsi, and Rak left, and the people who had hunted them down. The threat had always been there, lurking at the edges of his thoughts, and now it was clearer than ever—bringing Wangnan back would only reignite that danger.

Inwardly, Bam began to accept what his heart had been resisting. Aguero wasn’t keeping Wangnan away out of neglect, jealousy, or indifference; it was out of necessity, for both their sakes. Bam could see it now—the weight that Aguero carried, the calculated distance meant to shield him from more harm. And perhaps, Wangnan had understood that too. The decision to leave wasn’t out of abandonment or rejection but protection. The more Bam reflected on it, the more sense it made. Wangnan wouldn’t have left unless it was the only way to keep him safe, to find his own path, to recover his memories.

With this realization settling in, Bam slowly convinced himself that this was the right path, no matter how painful. Wangnan’s absence wasn’t a betrayal—it was an act of love, a sacrifice made to ensure Bam’s survival. The ache in his chest remained, but it softened with the understanding that Wangnan had done what he had to, for both of them. Bam told himself that this was how it had to be, that Wangnan’s departure was for his own good, even if it left a hollow space that nothing could quite fill.

Chapter Text

Days passed quietly after Wangnan’s departure, leaving a sense of emptiness in the air. Bam spent his last days in the hospital surrounded by the soft hum of medical equipment and the muted murmurs of passing nurses. Each day blurred into the next as he recovered, physically at least. But inside, he felt a deep ache—one that no medicine or rest could heal. The absence of Wangnan, his friend who had been his constant companion, weighed heavily on his heart.

The day of Bam’s discharge arrived, but it didn’t feel like a moment of celebration. Aguero was there to pick him up, his usually sharp eyes softened with concern. Bam noticed how Aguero tried to smile, to be the reassuring presence he had always been, but there was a shared sadness between them that neither knew how to address.

As they left the hospital, the silence between them grew thicker. Bam remained quiet, lost in his thoughts, replaying Wangnan’s final words over and over in his mind. He couldn’t shake the feeling of abandonment, of being left behind by someone who had been his anchor for so long. The small, persistent hope that his memories would return gnawed at him, making it hard to focus on anything else.

Aguero drove with a steady hand, stealing glances at Bam from time to time. He could see the turmoil in Bam’s eyes, the confusion, the pain. He wanted to say something—anything—to comfort him, but Aguero knew it wasn’t the right time. Aguero knew that once he mentioned Wangnan, there’s no telling that Bam’s outbursts would come back. Bam was still processing everything that had happened, and the last thing he needed was to be overwhelmed by more questions, more uncertainty.

The drive was long and winding, taking them through roads lined with trees that seemed to stretch on forever. Bam stared out the window, watching the scenery pass by without really seeing it. His mind was elsewhere, caught between the past he couldn’t remember and the present that felt so unfamiliar. The silence between him and Aguero wasn’t uncomfortable, but it was heavy with unspoken words, with emotions that neither of them were ready to confront.

Eventually, the car came to a stop, and Bam blinked, snapping out of his reverie. They were parked in front of a dense forest, the trees thick and towering, their leaves rustling softly in the afternoon breeze. Bam looked at Aguero, puzzled.

"Why are we here?" Bam asked quietly, his voice barely above a whisper.

Aguero offered a small smile, though it didn’t quite reach his eyes. "It’s for safety purposes," he explained, gesturing toward the trees. "This place is well-hidden. It’s a good spot for us to stay low for a while."

Bam nodded, accepting the explanation without much thought. He didn’t have the energy to question it further. He followed Aguero out of the car, his feet moving mechanically as they walked toward the forest. The ground beneath them was soft, covered in a thick layer of fallen leaves that crunched lightly with each step. The forest was peaceful, almost serene, but there was an underlying sense of isolation that made Bam feel even more alone.

After a short walk, they reached the hideout—a large, unassuming building nestled deep within the woods. It was designed to blend in with its surroundings, the walls covered in ivy and the roof partially hidden by the canopy above. As they approached, the door swung open, and a chorus of voices greeted them.

"Surprise!" The shout rang out, echoing through the trees.

Bam blinked in surprise, his gaze sweeping over the familiar faces of his friends—Elaine, Endorsi, Dan, Hatz, Hockney, Novick, Rak, Ran, and Shibisu. They were all there, smiling warmly at him, their eyes filled with genuine care. A banner hung above them, reading "Welcome Home, Bam!" in big, bold letters.

Endorsi was the first to step forward, her smile was bright and playful. "We figured you could use a little cheering up," she said, her voice full of energy.

Elaine nodded, her expression more subdued but just as sincere. "We’ve all been worried about you. We thought a small party might help lift your spirits."

Bam felt a wave of gratitude wash over him, but it was tinged with guilt. He appreciated the effort, the thoughtfulness behind it, but he wasn’t in the right state of mind to celebrate. The wound left by Wangnan’s departure was still too fresh, too raw.

"Thank you, guys," Bam said softly, his voice wavering slightly. "I really appreciate this… I do. But… I’m sorry, I don’t think I’m ready for a party right now."

Endorsi’s smile faltered, and Elaine’s eyes filled with understanding. "It’s okay, Bam," Elaine said gently. "We just wanted to make sure you knew we’re here for you, no matter what."

"Yeah," Shibisu added, trying to keep the mood light. "We’ve got your back, no matter how long it takes."

Aguero watched the exchange, his gaze flicking between Bam and their friends. He could see how much they cared about Bam, how much they wanted to help him heal, but he knew Bam needed time. This wasn’t something that could be fixed with a party or kind words.

"Let’s get you settled in," Aguero said, stepping forward. "You’ve got a room ready for you upstairs. You can rest there."

Bam looked at him, confused. "A room? But… How do I already have a room here? We’ve only known each other for a few days."

There was a brief silence before Shibisu answered with a teasing smile. "It’s part of the tradition," he said, glancing at Aguero. "Everywhere we go, there’s always a room ready for you. Just in case."

Bam didn’t know how to respond to that. The idea of having a place prepared for him, even in a hideout he had never seen before, felt both comforting and unsettling. It was as if they had known he would be with them all along, even before he did.

Aguero gently guided Bam toward the staircase. "Come on," he said softly. "Let’s get you settled."

They walked up the stairs together, the wooden steps creaking softly beneath their feet. The hallway was dimly lit, with a few small windows letting in slivers of sunlight. At the end of the hall, Aguero stopped in front of a door and pushed it open, revealing a cozy room with a large window that offered a view of the forest outside.

"This is your room," Aguero said, stepping aside to let Bam enter.

Bam walked in slowly, his eyes taking in the details of the space. The room was simple but comfortable, with a bed, a small desk, and a bookshelf filled with worn books. There were a few plushies scattered around the bed, and a soft rug on the floor. But what caught Bam’s attention the most was the picture frame on the windowsill.

He walked over to it, his hand trembling slightly as he picked it up. The picture inside was of him and Aguero, both of them smiling. Bam stared at the image, his heart tightening in his chest. He didn’t remember taking this picture, didn’t remember the moment it captured, but there was something about it that felt so familiar, so right.

Aguero watched Bam closely, noticing the way his expression softened as he looked at the picture. "If you need anything," Aguero said quietly, "we’re all here for you. Just let us know."

Bam nodded, still staring at the photo. "Thank you," he whispered, his voice barely audible.

Aguero gave him a small, reassuring smile before stepping out of the room, closing the door behind him. As the door clicked shut, Bam felt a wave of emotion wash over him. He set the picture frame back on the windowsill and sat down on the edge of the bed, his hands resting on his lap.

The room was silent, save for the faint rustling of leaves outside the window. Bam looked around, his gaze lingering on the plushies he didn’t remember owning, the books that looked well-worn and loved. He reached out and picked up one of the books, flipping it open to a random page. Scribbled notes filled the margins, the handwriting strikingly similar to his own.

Bam ran his fingers over the words, trying to recall when he might have written them, but his mind drew a blank. He felt a pang of frustration, the sense of loss was deepening. It was as if his past was just out of reach, teasing him with glimpses but never fully revealing itself.

His eyes returned to the picture on the windowsill, and he picked it up once more, studying the smiles on their faces. There was a warmth in that photo, a connection that he couldn’t quite place, but he knew it was important. It was as if the photo was trying to tell him something, to remind him of a bond he had forgotten.

Tears welled up in Bam’s eyes, and he blinked them away, not wanting to cry again. He had cried so much already—over Wangnan, over the memories he couldn’t reclaim, over the uncertainty of everything around him. But as he looked at that photo, a single tear slipped down his cheek.

"Who… am I?" Bam whispered to the empty room, his voice trembling with the weight of his question.

There was no answer, only the soft rustling of the leaves outside and the distant echoes of his friends downstairs. Bam held the photo close to his chest, as if it could offer some comfort, some clarity. But all it gave him was a sense of longing—for the memories he had lost, for the life he couldn’t remember. 

The soft glow of the evening sun filtered through the curtains of the common room, casting a warm light over the scattered remnants of a celebration that had been carefully planned but poorly attended. The decorations—balloons, streamers, and a hastily put-together banner that read "Welcome Home, Bam!"—still adorned the room, evidence of the effort put in by the team to make Bam feel at home. Plates of half-eaten snacks, untouched cupcakes, and empty soda cans littered the floor, remnants of a gathering that had fizzled out before it could truly begin.

Bam sat on the edge of his bed, staring at the walls of his room. The guilt weighed heavily on his chest, a dull ache that refused to go away. He had turned down Elaine and Endorsi's invitation to the surprise welcoming party they had organized for him, a party the entire TFN had helped put together. He knew they had meant well, and deep down, he appreciated the gesture. But when he had been faced with their eager faces, his heart had twisted in his chest. He couldn't bring himself to join them, not when he felt so lost, so out of place.

After all, how could he celebrate with them when he didn't even remember who they were?

The guilt gnawed at him, and no matter how hard he tried to push it aside, it lingered, a constant reminder of the distance between him and the people who clearly cared for him. Bam knew he should be grateful—he was grateful—but the confusion and fear that came with his lost memories made it difficult to fully embrace the kindness being offered to him.

He sighed, running a hand through his hair. The day had been overwhelming, from the moment he had woken up in the hospital to find Aguero by his side to the awkward conversation he had shared with the team when he first returned to the hideout. They had all been so happy to see him, so full of life and energy, and yet all Bam could do was sit there, feeling like an outsider in his own skin.

His mind drifted back to the welcoming party. He could still picture the way Elaine's face had lit up when she had first suggested the idea back in his hospital room, how Endorsi had jumped on board immediately, dragging the rest of the team into their plans. They had wanted to make him feel at home, to show him that he was still a part of their family, even if he couldn't remember them. And what had he done? He had shut them out.

His heart ached with regret.

He glanced at the door, the thought of going downstairs to check on them creeping into his mind. He knew they were probably still there, in the common room, cleaning up the mess they had made in anticipation of a party that had never really happened. Maybe he should go down there, apologize for being so distant, try to make things right. After all, they had gone to all that trouble for him—the least he could do was thank them.

With a deep breath, Bam pushed himself off the bed and walked over to the door. He hesitated for a moment, his hand hovering over the doorknob, before finally turning it and stepping out into the hallway. The house was quiet, the only sound coming from the soft murmur of voices coming from downstairs. He took a deep breath and started down the stairs, his footsteps barely making a sound on the wooden floor.

As he reached the bottom of the stairs, the voices grew louder, and he could make out the familiar tones of his teammates. They were bickering, as usual, their banter filling the room with a sense of normalcy that made Bam's heart ache with a strange mixture of longing and sadness. He paused at the entrance to the common room, peeking around the corner to see them all gathered together on the floor.

Elaine and Endorsi were arguing over something trivial, their voices raised in mock indignation as they pointed at each other accusingly. Hatz and Rak were locked in a heated debate over the best way to train for an upcoming mission, their faces serious even as they threw playful insults at each other. Hockney and Ran were sitting off to the side, deep in conversation about something Bam couldn't quite make out, while Shibisu, Dan, and Novick were huddled together, laughing at some inside joke.

And then there was Aguero, sitting on the couch, watching the chaos unfold with a small, amused smile on his face. He had changed out of his usual sharp attire and was now dressed in much more casual clothes—a loose shirt and shorts—that made him look more relaxed than Bam had ever seen him. It was a side of Aguero that Bam hadn’t seen, but it was strangely comforting.

Bam felt a pang of guilt as he watched them, knowing that they had all gone to such lengths for him, only for him to hide away in his room. He was about to turn around and leave when Shibisu suddenly looked up and spotted him standing in the doorway.

“Hey, look who finally decided to join us!” Shibisu exclaimed, a wide grin spreading across his face.

All eyes turned toward Bam, and he felt his cheeks flush with embarrassment. He opened his mouth to say something, but before he could get a word out, Shibisu had jumped up from his spot on the floor and grabbed Bam by the arm, dragging him into the room.

“Come on, Bam, don’t just stand there like a stranger! Get in here!” Shibisu said, his tone light and teasing.

Bam hesitated for a moment, feeling a bit overwhelmed by the sudden attention, but Shibisu’s infectious energy made it hard to resist. He allowed himself to be pulled into the room, and before he knew it, he was surrounded by the rest of the team, their voices overlapping as they welcomed him with open arms.

“Bam, it’s about time you came down!” Endorsi said, her voice was playful as she ruffled his hair. “We were starting to think you were going to hide up in your room all night!”

“Yeah, we were worried we scared you off with all our excitement,” Elaine added with a smile. “But we’re glad you’re here now.”

Bam smiled shyly, feeling a bit more at ease as he looked around at their friendly faces. “I’m sorry I didn’t come down earlier. I just… I didn’t know what to say.”

Aguero, who had been watching the interaction from the couch, stood up and walked over to Bam, placing a reassuring hand on his shoulder. “You don’t have to apologize, Bam. We understand that this is a lot to take in. We’re just happy you’re here with us.”

The warmth in Aguero’s voice made Bam’s heart swell with gratitude, and he found himself relaxing a little more. “Thank you, Aguero. I really appreciate everything you’ve all done for me. I’m sorry I’ve been so distant.”

Elaine waved off his apology with a grin. “Don’t worry about it, Bam. We get it. But now that you’re here, let’s make the most of it! We’ve still got plenty of food and drinks left, so why don’t you join us?”

Bam nodded, feeling a bit more comfortable as he allowed himself to be led over to the couch. The team quickly made room for him, and before long, he was surrounded by snacks and drinks, with everyone encouraging him to help himself. 

It was overwhelming at first—being the center of attention, having everyone fuss over him—but the warmth and friendliness of the team slowly began to put him at ease. They weren’t pushing him to remember anything or demanding that he fit into some role he couldn’t recall. They were simply happy to have him with them, and that was enough.

As the chatter continued around him, Endorsi suddenly clapped her hands together, drawing everyone’s attention. “Alright, since Bam is finally here, I think it’s time we properly introduce ourselves. He’s probably feeling a bit lost with all these faces, so let’s make sure he knows who we all are.”

There were murmurs of agreement from the group, and Bam felt a small wave of relief. He had been struggling to keep track of everyone, and the idea of getting to know them all a bit better was comforting.

Endorsi grinned and pointed to herself. “I’ll start! I’m Endorsi, in case you haven’t figured that out already. I’m pretty awesome, if I do say so myself. I’m great at hand-to-hand combat, and I’m not afraid to speak my mind. You’ll always know where you stand with me, Bam.”

Elaine rolled her eyes, but there was a fondness in her expression as she spoke next. “And I’m Elaine. We actually went into the same high school, with Hockney. I’m also the one who tries to keep everyone grounded when things get a little too crazy. So if you ever need someone to talk to, I’m here.”

Hatz, who had been watching the introductions with a serious expression, spoke up next. “I’m Hatz. I specialize in swordsmanship, and I’m always working to improve my skills. I take my training seriously, but I’m also here to support my teammates. If you ever need help with anything, don’t hesitate to ask.”

Rak, who had been sitting next to Hatz, let out a loud laugh. “And I’m Rak! I’m the strongest one here, no doubt about it! If you need muscle, I’m your guy. Just don’t get on my bad side, and we’ll get along just fine.”

Bam couldn’t help but smile at Rak’s enthusiasm, feeling a bit more relaxed as the introductions continued.

Hockney, who had been quietly observing the group, spoke up next. “I’m Hockney. Well, like what Elaine told you, we’re actually classmates in high school and have been very good friends. I’m also the strategist of the team, and I’m always thinking ahead. I may not be the strongest fighter, but I make up for it with my brain. If you ever need advice or someone to talk strategy with, I’m your guy.”

Ran, who had been lounging casually on the floor, gave a lazy wave. “I’m Ran. I don’t talk much, but I’ve got your back, Bam. Just let me know if you need anything.”

Shibisu, who had been grinning the whole time, chimed in next. “And behold! Shibisu is my name, adaptability is my game! I’m good at adapting to different situations, and I’ve always got a plan up my sleeve. If you need someone to keep things light and fun, I’m your guy.”

Novick, who had been sitting quietly next to Shibisu, finally spoke up. “I’m Novick. I’m good at close combat and quick thinking. I don’t say much, but I’m always watching out for my teammates. If you ever need someone to rely on, I’m here.”

Finally, Dan, who had been sitting off to the side, stood up and gave Bam a small smile. “I’m Dan. I’m still new to the team, but I’m good at support roles and keeping everyone safe. I’m the fastest one out here after all. I may not have been around as long as the others, but I’ll do my best to help out however I can.”

Bam listened intently as each of them introduced themselves, taking in their names and their roles within the team. Despite his initial apprehension, he found himself warming to each of them, their personalities shining through in their brief introductions. It was clear that they all cared deeply about each other and that they wanted him to feel like he belonged, even if he couldn’t remember them.

As the introductions came to an end, Aguero stepped forward, his expression was soft as he looked at Bam. “And you already know me, but I’ll say it again—I’m Aguero. I’m the leader of this group, and I’ll do everything I can to make sure you’re safe and taken care of. We’re all here for you, Bam, so don’t be afraid to lean on us.”

Bam nodded, feeling a warmth in his chest at Aguero’s words. Despite the confusion and the uncertainty that still lingered, there was something comforting about knowing that he wasn’t alone. These people—his teammates, his friends—were here for him, and that was enough for now.

The evening continued on with the team falling back into their usual banter, the atmosphere light and relaxed. Bam found himself smiling more, laughing at their jokes and joining in on their conversations. The tension that had been weighing on him since he woke up in the hospital slowly began to lift, replaced by a sense of belonging that he hadn’t felt in a long time.

As the night wore on, Bam’s initial shyness melted away, and he found himself becoming more comfortable around the team. They made him feel welcome, like he was part of something bigger, something that mattered. And even though he still couldn’t remember his past, he began to realize that maybe that didn’t matter as much as he thought it did.

Because in this moment, surrounded by his teammates, Bam felt like he was finally home. And for the first time since he had woken up in that hospital bed, he allowed himself to hope that maybe, just maybe, everything was going to be okay.

The warmth of the team’s camaraderie lingered in the air, and as the night continued, Bam couldn’t help but feel a growing sense of connection with them. They had accepted him without hesitation, welcoming him back into their lives as if nothing had changed. And while Bam still struggled with the void left by his lost memories, he began to realize that he didn’t have to face it alone.

As the conversation continued to flow, the team shared stories and memories, each one adding another piece to the puzzle that was Bam’s past. They talked about missions they had gone on together, challenges they had faced, and the bonds they had formed along the way. Bam listened intently, soaking in every detail, trying to piece together the life he had once lived.

At one point, Dan leaned over and gave Bam a reassuring smile. “You know, Bam, you don’t have to remember everything all at once. We’re here for you, and we’ll help you through this. Just take it one step at a time.”

Bam nodded, feeling a swell of gratitude for Dan’s understanding. It was a relief to know that he didn’t have to rush to regain his memories, that he could take his time and rely on the support of his team.

As the night began to wind down, Bam found himself feeling more at ease than he had in a long time. The tension that had been gnawing at him all day had finally begun to fade, replaced by a sense of belonging that he hadn’t realized he had been missing. The team had accepted him with open arms, and for the first time, Bam allowed himself to accept their kindness in return.

Eventually, the group began to disperse, with some members heading off to bed while others lingered a bit longer to finish their conversations. Bam found himself sitting on the couch next to Aguero, who had been quietly observing the team throughout the evening.

Aguero turned to Bam, his expression was thoughtful. “How are you feeling, Bam? It’s been a long day.”

Bam took a moment to consider the question before answering. “I’m… I’m okay. I mean, I’m still a little overwhelmed, but I’m glad I came down. It was nice to spend time with everyone.”

Aguero nodded, a small smile tugging at the corners of his lips. “I’m glad you did too. You don’t have to go through this alone, Bam. We’re all here for you, no matter what.”

Bam felt a warmth in his chest at Aguero’s words, a sense of reassurance that he hadn’t realized he needed. “Thank you, Aguero. I really appreciate it.”

Aguero’s smile widened, and he reached out to ruffle Bam’s hair in a gesture that was both affectionate and playful. “You’re part of this team, Bam. And whether you remember it or not, we’re not going anywhere.”

Bam chuckled softly, feeling a sense of peace settle over him. It was a feeling he hadn’t experienced in a long time, and he found himself clinging to it, hoping that it would last.

As the night continued to unfold, Bam remained on the couch with Aguero, the two of them quietly enjoying each other’s company. The noise and laughter of the team filled the room, creating a comforting background noise that lulled Bam into a state of contentment. For the first time since his memory loss, he felt like he was exactly where he was meant to be.

And as he sat there, surrounded by his teammates, Bam realized that maybe, just maybe, he didn’t need to remember everything to find his place in the world. Because here, with these people who had welcomed him with open arms, he had found a new beginning.

Bam stood silently in front of a mirror, staring at his reflection. His eyes traced the unfamiliar lines of his face, the tousled hair that fell slightly over his eyes. It was strange, looking at himself and feeling a disconnect, like he was seeing a stranger in the mirror. No memories surfaced, no recollections of who he was before all of this. All that remained was a sense of loss, like he was grasping at something that kept slipping away. 

The door creaked open, and Bam glanced over to see Hatz enter the room, holding a pair of scissors. "Aguero thought it might be a good idea for you to get a fresh start," Hatz said, offering a small, encouraging smile. "A haircut might help with that. Plus, I'm the one who usually takes care of Aguero's hair, so I thought I could do the same for you."

Bam nodded, appreciating the gesture. He looked back at his reflection, trying to decide what he wanted. "I don’t really know what suits me," he admitted quietly.

Hatz stepped closer, eyeing Bam's hair thoughtfully. "How about something simple? You can choose a length that feels comfortable."

Bam hesitated. Before he could decide, Ran, who had been leaning against the wall observing, chimed in. "Why not go for shoulder length?" Ran suggested, his voice was casual, though there was a slight edge to it. "That’s how you had it when I first saw you, back when you’re in high school."

Bam’s eyes widened in surprise, turning to look at Ran. "You saw me when I was in high school?"

Ran seemed to freeze for a moment, his usual confidence faltering. He cleared his throat and nodded, averting his gaze slightly. "Yeah, I did. But it was nothing special," he added quickly, not wanting to delve into the details of that encounter. It was a memory he wasn’t particularly fond of—seeing Bam under such distress back then, when Maschenny had confronted him. Ran knew it wasn’t the time to share that story, so he kept it vague.

Bam, sensing Ran’s discomfort, didn’t press further. Instead, he turned back to Hatz. "Shoulder length sounds good," he said, his voice a little more certain now. "Let’s do that."

Hatz nodded, taking his time to carefully trim Bam’s hair. The scissors made quiet, rhythmic snips as locks of hair fell to the floor. Ran watched silently, his thoughts drifting back to that high school memory, but he quickly pushed it aside, focusing on the present.

When Hatz was done, Bam’s hair fell neatly just above his shoulders. Hatz stepped back, admiring his work with a nod of approval. "Looks good," he said, offering Bam the mirror. "What do you think?"

Bam examined his reflection, running a hand through his newly cut hair. "It feels… different," he said slowly, a faint smile tugging at the corners of his mouth. "Thank you, Hatz."

"No problem," Hatz replied, a small smile on his face as well. "Why don’t you show the others? I’m sure they’ll want to see."

Bam nodded, still adjusting to his new look. As he left the room, he felt a mix of emotions—uncertainty, but also a strange sense of familiarity, like he was getting closer to something he couldn’t quite grasp.

He made his way to the common room where Dan, Elaine, Endorsi, Hockney, and Shibisu were gathered, chatting among themselves. As soon as Bam entered, all eyes turned to him, and the room fell silent for a moment.

Endorsi was the first to react, breaking into a wide smile. "Bam! Look at you," she exclaimed, walking over to him. "You look great with that haircut!" She ruffled his hair playfully, a teasing glint in her eyes.

Bam blinked, momentarily frozen as a flash of something familiar passed through his mind. The way Endorsi touched his hair, the tone of her voice—it triggered a sensation, a memory buried deep within. He suddenly heard a voice, sounding just like Endorsi’s, echo in his mind. You look like a wild man with that hair! But you’re still adorable as ever!

Without thinking, Bam repeated the words aloud, his voice was soft but clear. "You look like a wild man with that hair… but you’re still adorable as ever."

The room went dead silent. Endorsi’s hand stilled in Bam’s hair, her eyes widening in shock. She stared at him, her heart skipping a beat. The others exchanged looks, equally stunned.

"Bam," Endorsi began, her voice unsteady. "Where… where did you hear that?"

Bam shook his head slowly, confusion clouding his expression. "I… I don’t know. It just came to me. It feels like I’ve heard it before… like you said it to me, but I don’t remember where or when."

Endorsi felt a lump form in her throat. She remembered exactly when she had said those words. It was the first time she had seen Bam after a year of being apart—after Bam and Aguero had to go into hiding at a hilltop cottage. The reunion had been emotional, and those were the exact words she had blurted out upon seeing him. She had never forgotten that moment, and hearing Bam repeat those words now, despite his memory loss, sent a wave of emotion crashing over her.

"It… it’s just something I used to say," Endorsi managed to say, her voice trembling slightly as she forced a smile. "I guess it stuck with you somehow."

Bam looked at her, sensing the depth of emotion behind her words even if he couldn’t fully grasp it. "It feels… important," he murmured, his brow furrowing as he tried to piece together the fragments of his lost memories.

Elaine stepped forward, placing a comforting hand on Bam’s shoulder. "Maybe it’s a sign that your memories are still there, just waiting to come back," she said gently. "You’ll remember in time."

Shibisu, who had been watching quietly, nodded in agreement. "Yeah, Bam. Don’t rush it. We’re all here for you, no matter what."

Bam looked around at them—Endorsi, Elaine, Shibisu, Hockney, Dan. They all had expressions of concern and care, and for the first time in a while, Bam felt a sense of belonging. Even without his memories, there was something here, something real.

He gave them a small, grateful smile. "Thank you, all of you."

The tension in the room eased, and Endorsi ruffled his hair again, this time with a laugh. "Well, just don’t go forgetting us again, okay?" she teased, though her eyes were still shining with unshed tears.

Bam laughed softly, nodding. "I’ll try not to."

For the next few minutes, they all chatted, making lighthearted jokes and complimenting Bam’s new look. The earlier tension slowly dissolved into warmth and camaraderie. But as they talked, Bam couldn’t shake the feeling that there was more—more memories, more moments hidden in the depths of his mind, waiting to resurface.

Meanwhile, Aguero, Novick, and Rak were out in the city, gathering supplies. The day was drawing to a close, the sun casting long shadows over the streets as they made their way back to the hideout. Aguero had been quiet for most of the trip, his mind was preoccupied with thoughts of Bam. Even though Bam was physically recovering, Aguero knew that the emotional and mental scars ran much deeper. The memory loss was a burden that weighed heavily on all of them, but especially on Bam.

As they approached the hideout, Aguero glanced up at the windows, wondering if Bam was settling in, if he was starting to feel more at ease. He wanted to be there for Bam, to help him through this, but he also knew that some things couldn’t be rushed.

Once they returned, the group in the common room eagerly filled them in on Bam’s new haircut and the strange moment they had all witnessed. Aguero listened intently, his sharp mind piecing together what had happened.

"He remembered something," Endorsi said quietly, still shaken by the experience. "I don’t know how, but he did."

Aguero’s expression remained thoughtful, though a flicker of hope sparked within him. "It’s a good sign," he said, trying to reassure them. "Even if it’s just fragments, it means his memories aren’t completely gone."

Rak grunted in agreement, crossing his arms. "The turtle’s strong. He’ll get through this."

They all nodded, determined to support Bam no matter what. The night passed peacefully, with everyone retiring to their rooms, though Aguero found himself lingering outside Bam’s door for a moment longer. He could hear the soft rustle of movement inside, and for a brief moment, he wondered if he should knock, if he should check on Bam. But he decided against it, knowing that Bam needed space. With a quiet sigh, Aguero turned and walked away, leaving Bam to his thoughts.

Inside, Bam sat on his bed, running his fingers through his newly trimmed hair. The memory of Endorsi’s words still echoed in his mind, along with the faint, elusive feeling of something just out of reach. He knew they were all trying to help him, and he appreciated it deeply. But the emptiness, the lack of memories, was like a shadow that loomed over everything, reminding him of what he had lost.

The night air was cool, carrying with it the faint scent of pine from the surrounding forest. Bam’s mind was a whirlpool of thoughts, memories that felt just out of reach, leaving him restless. Every time he closed his eyes, he felt the pull of something—or someone—calling to him from the darkness. With a soft sigh, Bam swung his legs over the side of the bed and stood up. If sleep wouldn’t come, maybe a walk would help clear his mind.

The hideout was silent, the others having long since retired for the night. As Bam walked through the darkened halls, he found his feet leading him to the balcony. It was a place of quiet solace, where he could gaze out over the trees and lose himself in the expanse of the night sky. But as he stepped out onto the balcony, he was surprised to find that he wasn’t alone.

Aguero stood near the railing, bathed in the soft light of the moon. His blue hair shimmered faintly in the darkness, and his blue eyes were focused on the horizon, deep in thought. He didn’t move when Bam approached, but there was a subtle shift in his posture that told Bam he had been noticed.

“Aguero?” Bam’s voice was soft, almost hesitant. “You can’t sleep either?”

Aguero turned slightly, his gaze meeting Bam’s. He nodded, his expression unreadable. “Yeah, something like that.”

For a moment, neither of them said anything. The silence between them was comfortable, familiar in a way that Bam couldn’t quite explain. He found himself studying Aguero’s face, tracing the lines of his sharp features, the way the moonlight softened the edges of his usual stoic expression. There was something almost serene about him, a stark contrast to the sharp-tongued man Bam had gotten to know again.

Aguero’s eyes flicked to Bam’s hair, a small smile tugging at the corner of his lips. “I like the haircut,” he remarked casually, the compliment laced with an ease that was rare for him.

Bam felt a flush creep up his neck, his hand instinctively reaching up to touch his hair. It was shorter than he was used to, a change he hadn’t been entirely sure about. “Oh, this? Ran suggested it. He said it was how I used to wear it in high school.”

Aguero’s smile widened, a glint of something like amusement in his eyes. “Yeah, I know. Ran’s always had opinions about things like that.” He paused, his gaze softening. “But it suits you, Bam.”

Bam’s cheeks warmed at the compliment, and he looked away, feeling suddenly shy. “Ran mentioned it wasn’t a special meeting,” he mumbled, trying to downplay the significance of what Ran had told him.

“I figured as much,” Aguero replied, his voice was quiet. “But I’m glad you told me anyway.”

The silence that followed was filled with unspoken words, lingering memories, and a connection neither fully understood. Bam found himself watching Aguero, taking in every detail—the way his hair fell over his forehead, the way his eyes seemed to reflect the light of the stars, the way his lips moved when he spoke. It was as if Bam was trying to memorize every feature, every expression, as if he was afraid that, somehow, this moment might slip away.

Aguero shifted, glancing at Bam out of the corner of his eye. “I’ve been thinking,” he said, his tone was more serious now. “We should probably move to another hideout soon. This place has served us well, but it’s only a matter of time before someone finds us here. With your condition and everything, it’s of utmost importance, but we’re not going anywhere without you.”

Bam nodded absently, but his mind was elsewhere. He wasn’t really listening to Aguero’s words; instead, he found himself focusing on the way Aguero’s lips moved as he spoke. The words seemed to blur together, echoing in his mind— we’re not going anywhere. It was as if those words had been said before, in a time and place he couldn’t quite grasp. The more he listened, the more familiar it all felt, as if he had heard that exact phrase, in that exact voice, countless times before.

That’s when it hit him.

It was Aguero. It had always been Aguero.

Aguero noticed the change in Bam’s expression, his brow furrowing in concern. “Bam?” he asked softly, taking a step closer. “What’s wrong?”

Bam blinked, shaking his head as if to clear the haze. “It’s… it’s nothing,” he replied quickly, forcing a small smile. He didn’t know how to explain what he was feeling, didn’t know how to put into words the weight of the memories that were beginning to resurface. Instead, he buried it, hoping Aguero wouldn’t press further.

Aguero didn’t push, sensing Bam’s reluctance. Instead, he leaned back against the railing, letting the silence stretch between them once more. But the quiet didn’t last long. Bam’s mind was still churning, still filled with questions, with the need to understand. He couldn’t keep it in any longer.

“Aguero,” Bam began hesitantly, his voice barely above a whisper. “What… what really happened on the train five years ago? What led us to this point? I… I need to know everything.”

Aguero’s expression tightened, his eyes clouding with a mix of emotions. For a long moment, he didn’t say anything, as if he was weighing his words carefully. When he finally spoke, his voice was low, filled with a heaviness that Bam hadn’t heard before.

“It’s a long story,” Aguero said, his gaze distant as he recalled the events of the past. “You and I… we were close. Too close for my family’s liking. The Khun family… we’re not like other families, Bam. We’re assassins, born and raised to live in the shadows, to carry out the dirtiest work for those who can afford it. My father, my older sister—they didn’t approve of our friendship. They saw you as a threat, a weakness that could be exploited.”

Bam listened intently, his heart aching at the pain in Aguero’s voice. He could see the way Aguero’s hands clenched into fists, the way his jaw tightened as he spoke about his family. It was clear that this wasn’t easy for him to talk about, that these memories were as painful for Aguero as they were confusing for Bam.

“They tried to separate us,” Aguero continued, his voice growing colder. “My father… he orchestrated events, made sure to create situations that would drive us apart. But we were stubborn. We fought back, clung to each other despite everything. And our friends—Elaine, Hockney, Endorsi, Hatz, Rak, Shibisu—they stood by us. They became our family, our strength. We thought we could withstand anything as long as we were together.”

Aguero’s eyes darkened, a shadow passing over his face. “But then… something happened. Something that changed everything. My sister… she did something unforgivable. It was the final straw. I couldn’t stay—couldn’t continue to live under the Khun family’s thumb. So, we ran. You and I… we went into hiding. We lived in a small cottage on a hilltop for a year. It was the happiest we had ever been, just the two of us, away from all the chaos, all the danger.”

Bam felt a pang of longing at Aguero’s words, a deep yearning for the life they had once had. He could almost picture it—the peaceful days in that cottage, the quiet moments they must have shared, the sense of safety and warmth that had eluded him for so long.

“But,” Aguero’s voice wavered slightly, the pain in his eyes intensifying, “the underworld caught up with us. They always do. The train… it was supposed to be our escape, our way of maintaining distance from the people hunting us. But it went wrong. Horribly wrong.”

Bam’s breath hitched as he saw the way Aguero’s expression crumbled, the way his hands shook as he relived the memories. “The train exploded,” Aguero said, his voice barely above a whisper. “We got separated in the chaos, and when we saw the debris crashing into the ocean, I thought… I thought I had lost you forever. I couldn’t accept it, Bam. I couldn’t believe that you were gone. I searched everywhere, tore apart everything and everyone who stood in my way, trying to find you. But… there was nothing. Just silence, just… emptiness.”

Aguero let out a bitter laugh, the sound tinged with sorrow. “I drove our friends crazy back then. They tried to help, tried to pull me back from the edge, but I couldn’t let go. I couldn’t give up on you. I was convinced that you were still out there, that you were still alive. And now… here you are.”

Bam felt a lump form in his throat as he listened to Aguero’s story. The weight of it all was almost too much to bear—the sacrifices, the pain, the desperation that Aguero had endured. All because of him. Bam’s chest tightened, and he found himself asking the question that had been gnawing at him ever since Aguero started speaking.

“You really went through all of that… just because of me?”

Aguero’s eyes widened slightly at the question, his expression shifting from sorrow to shock. He stared at Bam, as if trying to decipher the meaning behind the words. It was clear to Aguero that Bam didn’t fully understand, that the memories he had lost were still a barrier between them. But Aguero knew, deep down, that he couldn’t blame Bam for that. He smiled softly, the tension in his posture easing as he reached out and gently touched Bam’s cheek, his fingers brushing against his skin with a tenderness that made Bam’s heart ache.

“Don’t underestimate yourself, Bam,” Aguero said, his voice filled with a warmth that Bam hadn’t heard before. “You’ve always been my light. The one thing that kept me going, even when everything else felt hopeless.”

Bam felt a rush of emotion at Aguero’s words, his eyes stinging with unshed tears. He didn’t know what to say, didn’t know how to respond to the depth of Aguero’s feelings. All he could do was nod, his voice too choked to speak.

Aguero’s hand lingered on Bam’s cheek for a moment longer before he let it fall to his side. The silence between them was thick with unspoken words, with emotions that neither of them could fully articulate. Bam’s mind was spinning, trying to process everything Aguero had told him, everything he had just learned. He couldn’t imagine what it must have been like for Aguero, living through all of that pain, all of that loss, all for the hope that one day they would find each other again.

But now, as they stood together on that balcony, with the stars shining above them and the world quiet around them, Bam felt a sense of peace that he hadn’t felt in a long time. Despite everything, despite the hardships and the pain, they were here. Together.

Chapter Text

The sun hung low in the sky over the hideout. Inside, the members of TFN were scattered, each engaged in their own activities. It was a rare moment of quiet, a brief respite from the chaos that usually defined their lives.

Ran was by the front door, readying himself to head out and meet Asensio. He was halfway through tying his shoelaces when Elaine appeared, holding out a small lunch box. “Ran, take this with you,” she said, her tone leaving no room for argument.

Ran glanced up, slightly annoyed. “Elaine, I’m not a kid. I don’t need you packing my lunch like I’m going on a field trip.”

Elaine rolled her eyes, thrusting the box closer to him. “Just take it. You always forget to eat when you’re out, and then you come back starving and grumpy. It’s for your own good.”

Ran hesitated, eyeing the lunch box as if it were an unnecessary burden. He opened his mouth to argue, but the look on Elaine’s face told him he’d better not push his luck. With a resigned sigh, he took the box and shoved it into his bag. “Fine. But only because you’re so persistent.”

Elaine smirked. “You’ll thank me later.”

Without another word, Ran left the hideout, the door clicking shut behind him. Elaine watched him go before turning her attention back to the quiet interior of the hideout.

In the back of the hideout, Novick and Rak were working on repairs, their banter echoing through the walls. Novick wiped sweat from his brow as he examined the work they’d done so far. “Hey, Rak, pass me that wrench.”

Rak grunted, handing it over. “This place is falling apart. We need to fix it up before it crumbles around us.”

“Yeah, well, if certain people didn’t blow holes in the walls during training, we wouldn’t have to do this,” Novick retorted, his tone was light despite the complaint.

Rak chuckled. “Maybe we should charge them for the repairs. Make ‘em think twice before going all out.”

Novick laughed, shaking his head as he tightened a bolt. “Good luck with that.”

Meanwhile, in the common room, Hockney was absorbed in his own project, tinkering with a device that had wires and gears splayed out across the table. His focus was intense, eyes narrowed as he connected different parts and made adjustments. It was moments like these that he found peace, losing himself in the mechanics and design, allowing his mind to drift away from the weight of their world.

Not far from him, in the main area, Hatz and Shibisu were engaged in a fierce board game, the stakes high as they played with a level of intensity that belied the simplicity of the game. Every move was calculated, every decision scrutinized. The loser would have to face the wrath of the winner—a smack so hard it would sting for hours.

“Your move, Hatz,” Shibisu taunted, leaning back in his chair with a confident grin.

Hatz scowled, eyes darting across the board as he contemplated his options. “Don’t get cocky, Shibisu. One wrong move, and I’ll crush you.”

“Big talk from someone who’s about to lose,” Shibisu teased, though there was a hint of nervousness in his voice.

They continued their game, their concentration so intense that they barely noticed the outside world.

Outside the hideout, Endorsi and Dan were sparring in the clearing, their movements swift and precise as they trained together. Bam sat nearby, watching them with a mix of admiration and unease. Ever since he’d learned more about his past and the truth behind the group he was now a part of, he couldn’t shake the discomfort that settled in his chest. It was hard to reconcile the kind, caring people he had come to know with the cold-blooded killers they were reputed to be.

But then again, Bam thought, he wasn’t innocent either. He’d killed their attackers back on the island, acting on instinct rather than reason. The memory of it still haunted him, even as he struggled to grasp who he really was, who he had been.

His thoughts were interrupted when Elaine came over, sitting down beside him on the grassy patch. “Aguero said he’s just going outside for a bit,” she said, glancing at Bam. “He’ll be back soon.”

Bam nodded, though the words did little to ease the strange emptiness he felt whenever Aguero wasn’t around. There was something comforting about Aguero’s presence, a steady anchor in a sea of uncertainty. Now, with him gone, even if just for a while, Bam felt a bit lost.

“You’ve been quiet today,” Elaine remarked, her tone was gentle. “Is everything alright?”

Bam hesitated, unsure how to put his thoughts into words. “I don’t know… I’m still trying to make sense of everything. It’s like… there’s this huge puzzle, and I’m missing all the important pieces.”

Elaine nodded, understanding was evident in her eyes. “I get it. It’s not easy to learn all these things and not remember any of it. But you don’t have to rush into anything. It’s okay to take your time.”

Bam appreciated her words, but there was still a nagging feeling of inadequacy that he couldn’t shake. “I just… I feel like I should be doing something. But I don’t even know what that is.”

“You were a really good archer,” Elaine offered, a small smile on her face. “You had impressive reflexes too. Maybe… you could join us for training? It might help you get back into the swing of things.”

Bam considered her suggestion, his brow furrowing. “I’m not sure… I mean, what if I can’t do it anymore? What if I’m not who I used to be?”

Elaine shook her head, her voice was firm but kind. “You’re still you, Bam. Even if you don’t remember, your body does. Those skills don’t just disappear. They’re a part of you, whether you realize it or not.”

Bam didn’t respond right away, watching as Endorsi and Dan continued their sparring not far from where they sat. The two of them moved with a practiced grace, their training evident in every motion. Bam couldn’t help but wonder if he had once been like that—confident, capable, and sure of himself.

Just as he was lost in thought, something unexpected happened. Dan’s knife, thrown with a bit too much force, went off course. It sliced through the air, heading straight for where Bam and Elaine were sitting.

Endorsi’s shout cut through the air. “Bam, Elaine, watch out!”

But before Endorsi or Dan could reach them, something inside Bam clicked. Without thinking, he grabbed a short rod that was propped up near the doorway and, still seated, swung it in a swift, precise arc. The rod connected with the knife, sending it spinning harmlessly away into the grass.

For a moment, there was stunned silence. Dan stopped in his tracks, eyes wide with disbelief. “Bam… hey, that was incredible!”

Endorsi, who had been sprinting towards them, skidded to a halt, her expression a mix of shock and admiration. “Bam, your reflexes… they’re still there. That was… you didn’t even hesitate!”

Bam stared at the rod in his hand, his heart pounding in his chest. He hadn’t planned it, hadn’t thought about it at all. His body had just moved on its own, reacting instinctively to the danger.

Elaine placed a hand on his arm, her eyes soft with reassurance. “See? I told you. Those skills haven’t faded, Bam. You’ve still got it.”

Bam wasn’t sure what to say. He felt a strange mix of relief and fear—relief that he hadn’t lost his abilities entirely, but fear of what that meant. If his body still remembered how to fight, how to defend, then what else was buried deep within him, waiting to resurface?

Dan walked over, picking up his knife from where it had landed. “Sorry about that, Bam. I didn’t mean to throw it at you.”

“It’s okay, no harm done,” Bam replied, though his voice was distant. The realization of what he had just done was still sinking in.

Endorsi crossed her arms, her usual playful smirk returning. “Looks like you’ve still got some fight left in you, Bam. Maybe you should consider joining us for training after all.”

Bam looked at her, then at Elaine, and finally down at the rod in his hand. The idea of training with them, of honing skills he didn’t even fully remember having, was both daunting and strangely appealing. Maybe it was time to stop holding back, to start figuring out who he was by actively engaging with the parts of himself that still seemed to know what to do.

“I’ll think about it,” he said finally, though there was a hint of resolve in his voice that hadn’t been there before.

Elaine smiled, standing up and offering her hand to him. “Good. Because I think you’ll surprise yourself.”

Bam took her hand and stood, feeling a bit steadier now. He wasn’t sure where this journey of rediscovery would take him, but for the first time, he felt a flicker of determination. If there was a chance to reclaim the pieces of his past that still lingered in his muscle memory, then maybe he owed it to himself to try.

Aguero moved through the grand corridors of his father's estate with a sense of purpose. The towering walls adorned with ancient relics seemed to close in on him as he approached the grand chamber, a place he both loathed and respected. The summons from Eduan had come as no surprise, the timing felt almost inevitable, given the storm of events that had been brewing. His mind raced with the questions he had, but he kept his composure, his expression was as cold and calculating as ever.

As he reached the massive doors of the grand chamber, they swung open with an eerie silence, revealing the vast, dimly lit room beyond. The first thing that struck him was the presence of the komodo dragons, their eyes glowing in the shadows, following his every move as he entered. Their gaze was almost as piercing as his father's, a reminder of the danger that always lurked in the presence of Eduan. Aguero walked with steady steps towards the throne where his father sat, his gaze unwavering despite the weight of the moment.

Eduan observed his son with an expression that was unreadable, his eyes narrowing slightly as Aguero took his seat in the chair before him. The silence between them was thick, laden with unspoken words and past grievances. Finally, Eduan broke the silence.

"Aguero," Eduan's voice echoed through the chamber, deep and authoritative, "I trust you are aware of the recent meeting with Lyborick."

Aguero leaned back in his chair, crossing his arms over his chest. "I am," he replied, his tone sharp. "If you’re wondering about my take on it, it was just a waste of time. Lyborick spent most of it trying to undermine me, throwing around accusations and questioning my capabilities. If anything, he only proved how incompetent and jealous he is."

Eduan studied Aguero for a moment, his gaze was lingering on his son's face. There was something different about him, a sharpness that hadn't been there five years ago. Aguero was no longer the same young man who had once looked up to his father with a mixture of awe and resentment. Now, there was a hardened resolve in his eyes, a steely determination that both intrigued and unsettled Eduan. But he wouldn’t say it aloud; he wouldn’t give Aguero the satisfaction.

"I see," Eduan finally said, his tone was even. "Lyborick's concerns are irrelevant then. I trust you’ve already dealt with him in your own way."

Aguero nodded, though he knew better than to let his guard down. "Handled," he said simply, his voice carrying a subtle edge.

Eduan shifted slightly on his throne, his eyes still locked on Aguero. "And what about Maria?" he asked, his voice taking on a more measured tone. "I understand she made a critical decision recently that involved your team."

Aguero's expression darkened at the mention of Maria. "Yeah," he said, his voice low. "Maria insisted on bringing someone into my group—someone who’s working for FUG. She said it was your approval that led her to push Michelle, or Rachel, into joining our recent mission. That mistake almost cost us everything. We were infiltrating one of FUG’s bases, and if things had gone slightly differently, we might not have made it out."

Eduan’s expression remained impassive, though there was a flicker of something in his eyes. "I’ve already dealt with Maria regarding that matter," he said after a moment. "You won’t have to worry about her interference again."

Aguero felt a surge of anger rise within him, but he kept it in check. "That’s not enough, dad," he said, his voice firm. "You need to stop meddling with my team. If you want me to succeed you, then you need to trust me to handle things on my own. I won’t be your puppet, and I won’t let anyone compromise what I’ve built."

Eduan regarded Aguero with a contemplative gaze, as if weighing his son’s words carefully. The silence that followed was heavy, and for a moment, it seemed as though Eduan might challenge him. But then, the older man leaned back slightly in his throne, his expression shifting to one of mild amusement.

"You’ve grown, Aguero," Eduan said, a hint of pride lacing his words. "You’re no longer the boy who once questioned everything I did. You’ve become a man, one who understands the weight of leadership."

Aguero remained silent, his eyes narrowing slightly as he waited for his father to continue. He wasn’t interested in compliments or praise; he wanted answers..

Eduan’s tone shifted as he spoke again, this time more personal, more probing. "There’s something else that has reached my ears," he said, his gaze sharpening. "Word has spread in the underworld about the appearance of a lone survivor from a train explosion five years ago. Tell me, Aguero, is that survivor who I think it is?"

Aguero’s heart skipped a beat at his father’s words. He hadn’t expected Eduan to bring this up so directly. For a moment, he simply stared at his father, memories of that fateful day flooding back into his mind. The pain of losing Bam, the rage he’d felt when he’d discovered who was behind it, and the emptiness that had consumed him ever since. It had all been part of Maschenny’s grand plan, a plan to separate them, to keep Bam away from him. 

Aguero’s jaw tightened as he struggled to contain his emotions. When he finally spoke, his voice was cold and distant. "Yeah," he said, his words laced with bitterness. "It’s Bam. And does that concern you?"

Eduan’s expression didn’t change, but there was an almost imperceptible shift in the atmosphere, a tension that hadn’t been there before. "There’s a bounty on his head," Eduan said, his voice was calm, almost casual. "Placed by someone unknown. It’s a considerable amount, enough to attract attention from every corner of the underworld."

Aguero’s eyes blazed with fury at the revelation. "If you’re worried," he said, his voice was low and dangerous, "don’t be. I won’t hesitate to kill anyone who tries to hurt Bam, even if it means killing my own family members."

For a brief moment, Eduan remained silent, his expression inscrutable. Then, to Aguero’s surprise, a small smile tugged at the corner of his father’s lips. "Very well," Eduan said, his voice filled with satisfaction. "That’s exactly what I wanted to hear."

Aguero narrowed his eyes, his mind racing as he tried to decipher his father’s intentions. Eduan’s approval was unexpected, almost unsettling. It was as if his father was pleased to see him embrace the ruthlessness that had long been a hallmark of the Khun family.

"I’ve always known you had it in you," Eduan continued, his voice carrying a note of pride. "You’ve finally learned what it means to be a Khun. Power, strength, and the willingness to do whatever it takes to protect what’s yours. That’s what will make you a worthy successor."

Aguero remained silent, his thoughts a swirling storm of emotions. He had spent years resenting his father, hating him for what he had done, for the pain he had caused. But now, standing before him, he couldn’t deny the truth in Eduan’s words. He had changed, he had grown, and in doing so, he had become more like his father than he’d ever wanted to admit.

But unlike Eduan, Aguero knew what he was fighting for. It wasn’t just power or control; it was something deeper, something far more personal. Bam. The one person who had brought light into his life, who had made him believe that there was something more than the cold, calculating world of the Khun family. Bam was the reason he fought, the reason he would stop at nothing to protect what mattered to him.

Eduan’s smile widened slightly as he watched the turmoil play out on Aguero’s face. "You’ve made your choice," he said softly. "But remember, Aguero, in this world, there are always consequences. The path you’ve chosen will not be an easy one."

Aguero met his father’s gaze with unwavering resolve. "I know," he said firmly. "But I’m ready to face whatever comes my way. I won’t let anyone take Bam from me again. I won’t let anyone hurt my friends. Not you. Not Maschenny. Not Maria. Not anyone."

Eduan nodded, a flicker of approval in his eyes. "Very well," he said, his tone final. "Then go, Aguero. Continue to lead your team, protect what’s yours, and prove to the world that you are the rightful heir to the Khun legacy."

Aguero rose from his chair, his heart pounding in his chest. As he turned to leave, he could feel the eyes of the komodo dragons on him once more, their gaze following him as he made his way out of the chamber. But this time, he didn’t feel the same weight of fear or uncertainty. He had made his decision, and there was no turning back.

As he walked down the long corridors, Aguero couldn’t help but think about the conversation that had just taken place. Eduan’s words echoed in his mind, a mixture of pride and warning. He had always known that the path he had chosen would be fraught with danger, but now, more than ever, he was determined to see it through.

When Aguero finally stepped out into the cool night air, he took a deep breath, allowing himself a moment to clear his mind. The stars above seemed to twinkle with a renewed sense of purpose, as if they too understood the gravity of what was to come. As long as Bam was safe, as long as he was by Aguero’s side, nothing else mattered. He would do whatever it took, make whatever sacrifices were necessary, to ensure that Bam remained out of harm’s way.

With a renewed sense of determination, Aguero began to make his way back to the hideout, where his team awaited him. He knew that the challenges ahead would be difficult, but he was ready. He had to be. For Bam, for himself, and for the legacy he was destined to inherit.

As he moved forward, the weight of the Khun legacy bore down on him, but he carried it with pride, knowing that he was no longer just a boy trying to prove himself to his father. He was a leader, a protector, and soon, the head of one of the most powerful families in the underworld. And nothing, not even Eduan, would stand in his way.

Aguero then made his way through the city, the glow of streetlights casting long shadows on the pavement. As he moved through the winding streets, he pulled out his phone and sent a quick message to Asensio and Hachuling, instructing them to meet him immediately.

The city eventually gave way to the thick forest that surrounded the area near their hideout. The cool night air rustled the leaves above, and the soft sounds of nocturnal creatures filled the silence. Aguero’s senses were sharp, honed by years of training, and he soon picked up on the presence of his brothers before they even came into view.

Without turning around, he spoke into the darkness. “You can come out now.”

Asensio and Hachuling emerged from the shadows, their footsteps barely audible on the forest floor. They exchanged a glance, both of them knowing that Aguero had likely sensed them the moment they entered the forest.

“You’re as sharp as ever, A.A,” Asensio remarked, a smirk playing on his lips.

Hachuling chuckled softly. “We didn’t want to show up uninvited. Figured it was best to wait for your signal.”

Aguero nodded, his expression serious. “I appreciate that. It’s been a long day.”

As the three of them continued through the forest, the conversation naturally shifted to the topic that had been on all of their minds: Bam.

“So, Bam’s alive,” Asensio began, his tone careful. “Five years of thinking he was gone, and now... he’s back.”

Hachuling nodded, his expression thoughtful. “It’s strange, seeing him again. It feels... surreal. Almost like we’re in a dream.”

Aguero didn’t respond immediately, his eyes focused on the path ahead. His emotions were a complicated mix of relief, guilt, and a fierce protectiveness that had only grown stronger over the years. Finally, he spoke, his voice quiet but firm. “He’s been through a lot. We all have. But we need to focus on what’s important—keeping him safe and figuring out what comes next.”

The forest began to thin as they approached the hideout, and soon enough, the familiar structure came into view. As they neared the entrance, the soft hum of voices reached their ears.

The three brothers entered the hideout, and the warmth of the common room greeted them. The members of TFN were scattered around, each absorbed in their own activities. Bam was on the couch, flanked by Elaine and Hockney, who were laughing softly as they reminisced about their high school days.

“Remember that time you completely destroyed that archery target during practice?” Elaine was saying, a rare smile on her usually stoic face. “Coach Yu was so impressed, he couldn’t stop talking about it for weeks.”

Bam chuckled, leaning back on the couch. “I think I just got lucky with that shot. Besides, Hockney told me you were the one who could ride my motorcycle like it was an extension of yourself. I’m pretty sure half the school had a crush on you because of that.”

Hockney adjusted his glasses, smiling at the memory. “And don’t forget how you both used to drag me out of the library every chance you got. I was such a nerd back then.”

Elaine’s smile softened. “We loved you for it, Hockney. You were always the one keeping us on track.”

Across the room, Endorsi was flipping through a magazine, her attention half on the conversation and half on the pages in front of her. Dan and Novick were playing a card game at the table, occasionally tossing banter back and forth, while Hatz was sharpening his sword in the corner. Rak sat by the window, staring out at the night sky, his usual stoic demeanor softened by the presence of his friends.

Shibisu, who was lounging on another couch, noticed the arrival of Aguero, Asensio, and Hachuling. He raised an eyebrow, his curiosity piqued. “What brings you two to our humble hideout?” he asked, his tone was light but with a hint of curiosity.

Before Asensio or Hachuling could respond, Dan spoke up, a grin on his face. “I bet it’s a mission. Something big, right?”

Aguero shook his head, a small smile tugging at the corners of his mouth. “No mission. I just wanted them to see Bam.”

At the mention of Bam’s name, the entire room seemed to shift its focus. Asensio and Hachuling’s eyes immediately found Bam, and for a moment, they were both stunned into silence. It was one thing to hear that he was alive, but to see him here, in the flesh, after believing him to be dead for so long, was a different experience altogether.

Ran, who had been leaning against the wall near the door, pushed off and walked over to join his brothers. He stood beside them, his gaze flicking between Bam and the others. The tension in the room was palpable, but it was a tension born out of shock and relief, rather than fear.

“Bam,” Aguero called out, drawing Bam’s attention away from his conversation with Elaine and Hockney. “I’d like you to meet Asensio and Hachuling again. They’re my brothers.”

Bam looked at Aguero, then at Asensio and Hachuling. He repeated their names softly, as if trying to commit them to memory. “Asensio... Hachuling...”

Endorsi, never one to let a moment pass without adding her two cents, nudged Bam playfully. “They’re all brothers, you know. Aguero, Ran, Asensio, and Hachuling. A terrifying family reunion, if you ask me.”

Bam nodded with a thoughtful expression on his face. As he looked at Ran, he couldn’t help but think about how he had never really noticed the similarities between him and Aguero before. The way they carried themselves, their sharp intellects, even their stubbornness—they were clearly cut from the same cloth.

Asensio, sensing the heaviness in the room, decided to lighten the mood. He leaned back on the couch and grinned at Aguero. “You know, A.A looked like a mad dog five years ago, running around trying to find you. He was relentless. We all thought he was going to tear the whole world apart just to get you back.”

Aguero’s face turned a shade of pink that was rare for him, and he opened his mouth to protest, but before he could, the room erupted in laughter. The founding TFN members—Elaine, Endorsi, Hatz, Hockney, Rak, and Shibisu—joined in the banter, their voices overlapping as they chimed in with their own memories.

“Remember that time Aguero nearly took down an entire group on an island because he thought they had information on Bam?” Hockney said, grinning.

“And don’t forget how he refused to sleep or eat properly until we had a solid lead,” Endorsi added, her eyes sparkling with amusement. “He was a nightmare to deal with.”

Elaine nodded, her usually reserved demeanor softening as she recalled those days. “He didn’t stop until he was absolutely sure that he’d exhausted every possible lead. It was... intense.”

Dan and Novick, who had been watching the exchange with wide eyes, finally felt comfortable enough to join in. “Sounds like Aguero really does care about Bam,” Dan remarked, his tone was teasing.

Novick, always one for dry humor, smirked. “He must have had his reasons. Maybe he just really hates losing people.”

Aguero, now thoroughly embarrassed, ran a hand through his hair in an attempt to regain his composure. “Alright, alright, enough. You’re all making me sound like a lunatic.”

Hachuling laughed, clapping Aguero on the back. “You were a lunatic, but it was for a good cause. Bam’s here now, and that’s all that matters.”

The room settled into a comfortable silence after the laughter died down, everyone falling into their own thoughts. Bam looked around at the faces surrounding him, each one familiar, each one holding memories of a time he was still trying to piece together. Despite the gaps in his memory, he could feel the warmth and camaraderie in the room, a feeling that was both comforting and disorienting.

Ran, who had been quiet for most of the conversation, finally spoke up. “It’s good to have you back, Bam,” he said simply, his voice carrying a sincerity that touched Bam deeply.

Bam nodded, offering a small smile in return. “It’s good to be back.”

Dan looked at Aguero with a smirk. “So, did you really go through all that trouble just to show us Bam?”

Aguero shrugged, a faint smile on his lips. “It was important for me that you all meet him. We’ve all been through a lot, and it’s good to have everyone together.”

The night was silent, the stillness punctuated only by the occasional rustle of leaves outside the hideout. Inside, the darkness wrapped around Bam like a suffocating blanket as he tossed and turned in his bed. His mind was not at ease. Shadows lurked in the corners of his dreams, morphing into terrifying shapes that seemed all too real. 

Suddenly, the shadows coalesced into the image of a young woman with long blue hair, her smile was twisted and menacing. Her eyes bore into Bam’s soul, sharp and gleaming with an evil intent that sent a shiver down his spine. Her aura was suffocating, a heavy presence that filled the air with malice. She reached out to him, her fingers elongating into claws, nails as sharp as blades, aiming straight for his heart. Bam tried to move, tried to scream, but his body was frozen in place. The fear gripped him so tightly that he could barely breathe. 

“Stay away!” Bam wanted to shout, but the words wouldn’t come out. The woman’s smile widened, her lips curling into a grotesque grin that made Bam’s skin crawl. He could feel her cold breath on his face, the stench of death clinging to it. Just as her claws were about to pierce his chest, Bam woke up with a jolt, gasping for air. 

His heart pounded against his ribs as he sat up in bed, drenched in cold sweat. The nightmare had felt so real, as if the woman was truly there, right beside him, ready to end his life. Bam’s breaths came out in ragged pants, his chest heaving as he struggled to calm down. But the fear lingered, gnawing at the edges of his mind, refusing to let go. 

He glanced toward the window, hoping to find some comfort in the familiar view of the forest. But tonight, even the forest seemed sinister, the trees casting long, eerie shadows that danced across the moonlit ground. The tranquility he usually found in nature was nowhere to be seen. Instead, the sight of the dark, dense woods only heightened his anxiety. 

Bam ran a trembling hand through his sweat-dampened hair, trying to steady his breathing. But the ache in his chest wouldn’t go away. He felt suffocated, trapped by the lingering dread of his nightmare. It wasn’t just a bad dream; it was something more. The image of the woman felt connected to the gaps in his memory, to the pieces of his past that remained shrouded in darkness. 

As the seconds ticked by, Bam realized that he wouldn’t be able to sleep again tonight. The fear gnawed at him, and he knew he couldn’t face it alone. He needed someone to talk to, someone who could help him make sense of this haunting vision. One name came to mind—Aguero. 

Without another thought, Bam slipped out of bed and quietly opened his door, careful not to make any noise. The hallway was dimly lit, the shadows clinging to the walls like ghosts. Bam hesitated for a moment, glancing back at his room as if debating whether to return. But the thought of that nightmare—of those sharp claws reaching for him—pushed him forward. He couldn’t stay in that room alone. 

He tiptoed down the hallway, heading toward Aguero’s room. It was located at the first floor, end of the corridor, away from the main activity areas, offering a quiet retreat from the rest of the hideout. Bam’s footsteps were soft against the wooden floor, but the silence of the night made every sound seem louder, more ominous. 

As he reached Aguero’s door, Bam’s nerves got the better of him. What if Aguero gets angry about being woken up at this hour? What if he thought Bam was being ridiculous for letting a nightmare scare him like this? Bam’s hand hovered over the door, his heart racing again, but this time for a different reason. 

Taking a deep breath, Bam finally gathered his courage and knocked softly on the door. The seconds stretched out, each one feeling like an eternity. Just as Bam was about to turn away, the door creaked open, revealing Aguero, his hair disheveled and his eyes heavy with sleep. 

Aguero blinked, his gaze sharpening as he took in Bam’s flustered expression. “Bam?” he murmured, his voice was husky with sleep. “What’s going on? It’s… what time is it?” He glanced over his shoulder at the clock on his nightstand. “Two in the morning?”

Bam shifted awkwardly, suddenly feeling foolish for disturbing Aguero so late. “I’m sorry, Aguero. I didn’t mean to wake you. I just… I couldn’t sleep. I had a nightmare, and I didn’t know who else to talk to.”

Aguero’s expression softened, the initial irritation of being woken up fading away. “A nightmare, huh?” he said quietly, stepping aside to let Bam in. “Come on in. Let’s talk about it.”

Bam hesitated, then nodded gratefully and stepped inside. Aguero’s room was as neat and orderly as always, a reflection of his meticulous nature. The bed, however, was unmade, the sheets rumpled from where Aguero had been sleeping. The faint glow of a small lamp illuminated the room, casting a warm light that contrasted with the cold darkness outside. 

Aguero motioned for Bam to sit on the bed as he sat beside him. Bam settled down, the tension in his shoulders slowly easing as he felt the warmth of Aguero’s presence. 

“So, tell me about this nightmare,” Aguero said, his tone was calm and reassuring. 

Bam took a deep breath, trying to steady his voice. “It was… a woman. She had long blue hair and this… horrible smile. Her nails were like claws, and it felt like she wanted to kill me. I couldn’t move or scream. It was like I was trapped.”

Aguero’s eyes narrowed slightly as he listened, his expression thoughtful. “Long blue hair, you say?” he murmured, almost to himself. He didn’t say it out loud, but Bam noticed the way Aguero’s face darkened, as if the description had struck a chord.

Bam nodded, his hands clenching the fabric of his pajama pants. “It felt so real, Aguero. Like she was really there, trying to hurt me. And the worst part is… I feel like I know her. Like she’s connected to my past somehow.”

Aguero didn’t respond immediately, his mind racing with possibilities. He had a strong suspicion about who Bam had seen in his dream, but he wasn’t sure if he should confirm it. If Bam was seeing Maschenny in his nightmares, it could mean that his suppressed memories were starting to resurface. But he didn’t want to alarm Bam any more than he already was. 

After a moment, Aguero placed a hand on Bam’s shoulder, squeezing it gently. “Nightmares can be powerful, Bam, especially when they dredge up things from the past. But they’re just dreams. They can’t hurt you.”

Bam looked down at his hands, still trembling slightly. “I know, but… it didn’t feel like just a dream. It felt like a warning. Like something terrible is going to happen.”

Aguero could see the fear in Bam’s eyes, and it stirred something protective in him. He didn’t want Bam to carry this burden alone. “You don’t have to face this by yourself, Bam. Whatever it is, we’ll figure it out together.”

Bam’s gaze lifted, meeting Aguero’s eyes. The sincerity in Aguero’s words brought him a sense of relief he hadn’t realized he needed. “Thank you, Aguero. I just… I didn’t know who else to turn to.”

Aguero gave him a small smile, his hand still resting on Bam’s shoulder. “You can always come to me, no matter what time it is.” 

For a moment, the two of them sat in silence, the quiet hum of the night filling the room. Bam’s fear had subsided somewhat, but the thought of returning to his dark, empty room still made his chest tighten. Aguero seemed to sense this, his perceptive nature picking up on the lingering tension in Bam’s posture.

“You know,” Aguero began, his tone was casual, “it might be a good idea if you stayed here tonight. Just to make sure you don’t have any more nightmares.”

Bam’s eyes widened in surprise. “Stay here? With you?” The suggestion caught him off guard, and he felt a blush creeping up his neck. The thought of sharing a bed with Aguero was… embarrassing, to say the least. 

Aguero chuckled softly, noticing Bam’s flustered reaction. “Don’t overthink it, Bam. It’s not that strange. Remember how we used to sleep together back at the hilltop cottage years ago? It’s the same thing.”

“I… I guess you’re right,” Bam mumbled, his embarrassment clear in his voice. He felt silly for making such a big deal out of it, especially when Aguero seemed so nonchalant about the whole thing.

Aguero smiled reassuringly and patted the spot beside him on the bed. “Come on, Bam. It’s late, and you need to rest. Just lie down and try to relax.”

With a hesitant nod, Bam slid under the covers, lying on his side facing away from Aguero. His body was tense at first, his mind racing with thoughts of how awkward this felt. But then he heard the soft rustle of the sheets as Aguero settled in beside him, and the warmth of his presence began to soothe Bam’s nerves.

“Better?” Aguero asked quietly, his voice close enough that Bam could feel the vibrations through the bed.

“Yeah… better,” Bam replied, his voice barely above a whisper. The tension slowly melted away, replaced by a sense of calm he hadn’t felt since waking up from that nightmare. The darkness no longer seemed so terrifying, not with Aguero by his side.

Aguero reached out and gently placed a hand on Bam’s arm, offering silent reassurance. “You’re safe here, Bam. I won’t let anything happen to you.”

Bam closed his eyes, letting the comfort of Aguero’s words and the steady rhythm of his breathing lull him into a sense of security. “Thank you, Aguero,” he murmured, his exhaustion finally catching up to him. Within minutes, his breathing evened out as he drifted off to sleep.

Aguero lay awake for a little while longer, staring up at the ceiling as he listened to Bam’s steady breaths. He couldn’t shake the unease that had settled in his chest. The description Bam had given of the woman in his nightmare was too familiar to ignore. If Maschenny was truly the one haunting Bam’s dreams, it meant that she had a hold on him even from afar. And that was dangerous.

But for now, Aguero pushed those thoughts aside. What mattered most was that Bam was here, safe and sound. Aguero knew he would do whatever it took to keep it that way, even if it meant facing the demons of Bam’s past head-on.

The first light of dawn crept through the curtains, casting a soft glow over the room. Aguero stirred, his eyes fluttering open as he felt the warmth of the sun’s rays on his face. For a moment, he simply lay there, listening to the peaceful rhythm of Bam’s breathing beside him. It was rare to see Bam so relaxed, his usual worries and burdens seemingly lifted in sleep. A faint smile tugged at Aguero’s lips as he quietly slipped out of bed, careful not to disturb his friend. The house was still and silent as Aguero made his way to the kitchen. He moved with practiced ease, setting the kettle on the stove and preparing his morning tea. The simple routine was calming, a brief moment of tranquility before the day’s chaos inevitably began.

As the water heated, Aguero leaned against the counter, lost in thought. Last night’s conversation with Bam weighed on his mind. The nightmare Bam had described still lingered in his thoughts, a haunting reminder of the dangers that lurked in their shadows. Aguero knew they needed to move quickly, to stay ahead of those who would stop at nothing to find them. But for now, he allowed himself to enjoy this quiet moment, the calm before the storm.

The sound of footsteps approaching snapped Aguero out of his reverie. He turned to see Endorsi, Dan, and Shibisu entering the kitchen, their expressions still heavy with sleep but brightening as they greeted each other.

“Good morning, Aguero,” Endorsi yawned, stretching her arms above her head. “Up early as usual, I see.”

“Morning,” Aguero replied with a nod, pouring hot water over the tea leaves. “I figured I’d get a head start on the day.”

“Lucky for us,” Shibisu said with a grin, rubbing the sleep from his eyes. “We can always count on you to be the responsible one.”

Dan chuckled as he grabbed a glass of water. “Yeah, no kidding. But, hey, speaking of last night, did anyone else hear something weird? Like someone walking around upstairs?”

Endorsi raised an eyebrow. “What do you mean, Dan? You think we’ve got ghosts or something?”

“Not exactly,” Dan replied, scratching the back of his head. “It was probably nothing. I just heard footsteps on the stairs around midnight, but I figured I was just hearing things. So I went back to sleep.”

Aguero couldn’t help but smile at Dan’s words. “You weren’t hearing things, Dan. That was Bam.”

Endorsi and Shibisu exchanged surprised glances. “Bam?” Shibisu echoed. “Why would Bam be up at that hour?”

“He had a nightmare,” Aguero explained calmly, taking a sip of his tea. “He couldn’t go back to sleep and needed someone to talk to, so he came to my room. He’s still asleep in there now.”

Dan smirked, leaning against the counter. “Damn, Aguero, you’re really never gonna let him go now, are you?”

Instead of feeling embarrassed, Aguero met Dan’s gaze with a determined expression. “You’re right. I’m not going to let him go—none of us will. We’ve all waited a long time for this, and I’m not a fool anymore. I won’t make the same mistake I did before.”

Endorsi crossed her arms, nodding in agreement. “About time you figured that out, Aguero. We’re all behind you on this.”

“Yeah,” Shibisu added, a serious note in his voice. “Bam’s part of this group. He’s not just some kid we’re protecting—he’s family. And we stick together.”

Dan’s expression softened as he looked around at his friends. “You know, I’m really glad I made the decision to join TFN. We’re more than just a group—we’re a family.”

A warm silence settled over them as they shared a moment of unspoken understanding. Each of them knew the weight of that word—family—and what it meant in their world. It was a bond forged not just by blood, but by loyalty, trust, and shared experiences.

As the morning wore on, the rest of the group began to stir. One by one, they gathered in the common room, their usual banter filling the air as they prepared for the day ahead. Aguero watched them, a sense of pride swelling in his chest. This was his team—his family—and he would do whatever it took to protect them.

Once everyone had gathered, Aguero cleared his throat, drawing their attention. Bam, now awake and looking more rested, sat beside Elaine on the couch. Rak, as usual, occupied the largest chair, while Endorsi, Shibisu, Hatz, Novick, and Ran spread out across the room.

“Listen up, everyone,” Aguero began, his tone was serious but calm. “We need to talk about our next move. It’s only a matter of time before FUG operatives track us down here, so we can’t stay in this location much longer.”

Ran, who had been lounging casually in his seat, straightened up at Aguero’s words. “So, where are we heading this time?” he asked, a hint of curiosity evident in his voice.

Aguero smiled, a glint of mischief in his eyes. “I know a place that should be out of reach, even for FUG. It’s remote, secure, and has plenty of space for training.”

The others exchanged puzzled looks, trying to guess where Aguero had in mind. “Out of reach, huh?” Shibisu mused. “Sounds promising, but where exactly is this mystery location?”

Aguero’s smile widened. “You’ll see soon enough. For now, just trust me—it’s the perfect spot for what we need.”

“Sounds like you’ve got it all figured out, Aguero,” Hatz said, crossing his arms. “But what about supplies? Moving a group this size isn’t exactly easy.”

“Already taken care of,” Aguero replied smoothly. “We’ll pack up what we need and leave the rest. We’re not planning on coming back here, so there’s no point in carrying extra baggage.”

Novick, who had been quietly observing the conversation, finally spoke up. “And what about the training you mentioned? Are we expecting trouble?”

Aguero’s expression grew more serious. “We need to be prepared for anything. FUG won’t stop until they get what they want, and that means they’ll come after us with everything they’ve got. We can’t afford to be caught off guard.”

Elaine, who had been listening intently, nodded in agreement. “Aguero’s right. We’ve already faced them once, and it was close. We need to be stronger, better prepared.”

Hockney placed a reassuring hand on Elaine’s shoulder. “And we will be. Whatever it takes, we’ll be ready.”

Rak pounded his fist into his palm, his eyes gleaming with determination. “I’ll crush anyone who dares to come after us! Just point me in the right direction!”

Endorsi chuckled, amused by Rak’s enthusiasm. “Save some of that energy for the actual fight, Rak. We’ll need it.”

The room buzzed with a renewed sense of purpose. They all knew the risks, the dangers that lay ahead, but they also knew they weren’t facing them alone. Together, they were a force to be reckoned with.

As the meeting came to an end, Aguero glanced around at his friends, his gaze lingering on each of them. “We move out tomorrow morning,” he said firmly. “Make sure you’re ready.”

With that, the group dispersed, each member heading off to prepare for the journey ahead. As Bam stood to leave, Aguero caught his arm, holding him back for a moment.

“Bam,” Aguero said quietly, his voice filled with a rare note of vulnerability. “I just want you to know… whatever happens, I’m here for you. We all are.”

Bam’s eyes softened, a small smile playing on his lips. “I know, Aguero. And I’m here for you too. We’re in this together, no matter what.”

The rest of the day passed in a blur of activity. The group worked in tandem, packing supplies, checking gear, and ensuring everything was in order for the move. There was a sense of urgency in their movements, a shared understanding that time was running out. But despite the pressure, there was also a strange sense of calm, a quiet confidence that they were ready for whatever lay ahead.

As night fell, the house grew quiet once more. Aguero found himself standing by the window, gazing out at the darkened landscape. His mind was racing with thoughts of what was to come, of the challenges they would face. But beneath the worry, there was also a flicker of hope—a hope that, this time, things would be different.

A soft knock on the door interrupted his thoughts. He turned to see Bam standing in the doorway, his expression hesitant. “Can I come in?”

“Of course,” Aguero replied, stepping back to let Bam enter. “Everything okay?”

Bam nodded, though there was a hint of uncertainty in his eyes. “Yeah, I just… I wanted to thank you. For last night, and for everything.”

Aguero felt a warmth spread through his chest at Bam’s words. “You don’t have to thank me, Bam. I’m just doing what any friend would do.”

“But it means a lot to me,” Bam insisted, his voice soft. “I’ve always felt like I had to carry everything on my own, but you… you’ve shown me that I don’t have to.”

Aguero’s heart ached at the sincerity in Bam’s voice. He reached out, placing a hand on Bam’s shoulder. “You’re not alone anymore, Bam. You have all of us. And no matter what happens, we’ll face it together.”

Bam’s eyes glistened with emotion as he nodded, a faint smile on his lips. “Thank you, Aguero. That means more to me than you know.”

The morning light filtered through the dense canopy of trees, casting dappled patterns on the forest floor. The air was crisp, cool with the lingering chill of the night, and filled with the earthy scent of dew on leaves. Bam, Aguero, and the rest of the TFN moved quietly through the forest, each of them carrying supplies and bags packed with essentials for their journey. The atmosphere was calm, almost serene, but tinged with an underlying tension that no one dared to voice.

They had been walking for hours, the thick forest around them growing denser with each step. The towering trees, their branches intertwined like a living maze, seemed to close in on them, muffling the sounds of the outside world. It was as if the forest itself was guarding its secrets, holding its breath as the group made their way deeper into its heart. The only sounds were the crunch of leaves underfoot and the occasional rustle of branches disturbed by a passing breeze.

Aguero led the way, his steps were sure and confident despite the unmarked path. Behind him, Bam followed closely, his gaze sweeping the surroundings with a mixture of curiosity and unease. The others trailed behind, their usual banter subdued by the oppressive silence of the forest. Despite the tension, there was a familiarity in their camaraderie that kept the mood light. Dan and Ran exchanged playful jabs, their banter a welcome distraction from the long trek. Endorsi and Shibisu shared a quiet conversation, their voices barely audible over the rustling leaves. Rak, true to his nature, grumbled about the uneven terrain, his complaints punctuated by Hatz’s calm reassurances.

Yet, despite the camaraderie, no one mentioned the hideout they were heading to. It was as if the very thought of it was too delicate to touch, too sacred to speak of aloud. Everyone knew that Aguero had a plan, but the details remained a mystery to most. They trusted him, of course—they always did—but the silence that hung over them was thick with unspoken questions and the weight of old memories.

As they continued to walk, Bam couldn’t shake the nagging sense of déjà vu that had settled in his chest. The trees, the path, even the way the light filtered through the leaves—it all felt familiar in a way he couldn’t quite place. He furrowed his brow, trying to grasp the fleeting memories that danced just out of reach.

“Aguero,” Bam called out, his voice breaking the silence that had settled over the group.

Aguero glanced back, a faint smile playing on his lips. “What is it, Bam?”

“This place…” Bam hesitated, searching for the right words. “It feels kind of familiar, like I’ve been here before. But I can’t remember when or why.”

Aguero’s expression softened, his eyes glinting with something that could have been relief—or perhaps hope. “You might be onto something, Bam,” he said cryptically. “Just keep going. Maybe it’ll come back to you.”

Bam nodded, though the uncertainty in his eyes remained. He couldn’t explain it, but there was something about this forest that tugged at the edges of his memory, something he couldn’t quite grasp. The others had noticed his unease, but they didn’t press him for answers. Instead, they continued walking, their pace steady, their destination drawing ever closer.

The hours passed in a blur of trees and shadows. The forest seemed endless, its depths shrouded in mystery, but the path they followed was clear, as if it had been laid out just for them. Every so often, Bam would glance at Aguero, hoping for some clue, some hint of where they were headed. But Aguero remained tight-lipped, his focus fixed on the path ahead.

It wasn’t until Bam saw a flicker of light in the distance that his heart skipped a beat. He froze, his eyes locked on the small glimmer that shone through the trees like a beacon. Something about that light stirred a deep, buried memory within him, something warm and comforting.

Without thinking, Bam broke into a run, his feet carrying him toward the light with a speed and urgency that surprised even him. “Bam! Wait!” Elaine called out, her voice filled with concern. “Be careful!”

Hockney’s voice followed, echoing her worry. “Bam, slow down!”

But Bam barely heard them. The light ahead seemed to pull him forward, drawing him closer with each step. A smile spread across his face, unbidden, as a feeling of joy bubbled up inside him. He couldn’t explain it, but he knew— he knew —that this place was important, that it held a piece of his past.

Aguero, sensing Bam’s excitement, quickened his pace, urging the others to follow. “Come on,” he said, a note of urgency in his voice. “Let’s not lose him.”

The group picked up their pace, their previous weariness forgotten as they chased after Bam. As they neared the light, the dense forest began to thin, the trees parting to reveal a clearing bathed in the soft glow of the morning sun. And there, standing at the edge of the clearing, was Bam, his eyes wide with wonder.

He turned to face the others as they caught up, his expression a mixture of awe and disbelief. “I remember this place!” Bam said, his voice trembling with emotion. “I don’t know how, but I do! I’ve been here before!”

Aguero’s smile was small but genuine as he stepped forward, placing a hand on Bam’s shoulder. “You’re right, Bam,” he said softly. “You have been here before. This is the hilltop cottage.”

“The hilltop cottage…” Bam repeated, his voice barely above a whisper. “We lived here, didn’t we?”

Aguero nodded, his gaze distant as he recalled those days. “We did. For a year, this was our home. We trained here, fought here, and grew stronger together. It was a time when we were all just trying to figure out our place in the world.”

Endorsi stepped forward, a wistful smile on her lips. “We were like a family back then, weren’t we? Before everything got so complicated.”

Rak grunted in agreement, his usual gruffness softened by the memories. “And now we’re back. Seems like fate, doesn’t it?”

Bam’s eyes scanned the clearing, taking in every detail as if seeing it for the first time. The cottage was just as he remembered it—a quaint, cozy structure nestled at the top of the hill, surrounded by a garden that had long since overgrown. The stone pathway leading up to the front door was cracked and weathered, but still intact, and the windows gleamed in the sunlight, reflecting the sky above.

“This place…” Bam’s voice wavered as he struggled to find the right words. “It feels like… coming home.”

Aguero’s smile widened, a rare look of genuine happiness crossing his features. “That’s exactly why we’re here, Bam. I wanted to bring you back to a place that might help you remember who you are—who we all are.”

Bam looked at Aguero, gratitude shining in his eyes. “Thank you, Aguero. I don’t know how to repay you for this.”

“You don’t need to repay me, Bam,” Aguero replied, his voice was gentle. “We’re in this together. I just thought… maybe coming back here would help you piece things together. I didn’t want to push you, but I also didn’t want you to feel lost anymore.”

Elaine, who had been quietly observing the exchange, stepped forward, her expression thoughtful. “So that’s why you chose this place, Aguero. You wanted to help Bam regain his memories.”

Aguero nodded. “Yeah. I told the others about the hilltop cottage, but I wanted it to be a surprise for Bam. I knew this place held a lot of significance for him, even if he didn’t remember it right away.”

Endorsi crossed her arms, a teasing smirk on her lips. “So, what’s the plan now, Aguero? Are we going to relive the good old days, or is there more to this than just nostalgia?”

“There’s definitely more to it,” Aguero said, his tone was serious. “This place isn’t just a walk down memory lane. It’s strategically isolated, hard to find, and has everything we need to train and prepare. FUG won’t be able to reach us here—not easily, at least.”

Hatz nodded in approval. “It’s a solid plan. We’ll have the space and time we need to get stronger, and we’ll be off FUG’s radar.”

“Exactly,” Aguero agreed. “We’ll train hard, build our defenses, and get ready for whatever comes next. This isn’t just about hiding—it’s about making sure we’re prepared for the battles ahead.”

Ran leaned against a nearby tree, his usual aloofness replaced by a rare moment of introspection. “We’ve been through a lot, but we’ve always managed to pull through. If this place can help us do that again, then I’m all for it.”

Shibisu, who had been quietly listening, finally spoke up, his tone thoughtful. “It feels right, being back here. Like everything’s come full circle.”

Bam looked around at his friends, his heart swelling with a mixture of pride and gratitude. These people—they weren’t just his allies or comrades. They were his family, his team, and they had always stood by him, no matter the odds.

“Thank you, everyone,” Bam said, his voice filled with emotion. “I don’t know what the future holds, but I’m glad I have all of you by my side.”

Shibisu grinned, clapping Bam on the back. “We’re all in this together, Bam. Whatever happens, we’ll face it as a team.”

Elaine smiled softly, her eyes were warm with affection. “And no matter what, we won’t let anything tear us apart.”

Aguero, feeling the weight of responsibility settle on his shoulders, looked at Bam and the others with determination in his eyes. “Then it’s settled. We’ll make this place our base, our sanctuary. We’ll train harder than ever before, push ourselves to our limits, and make sure that when the time comes, we’re ready to face whatever challenges lie ahead.”

The group nodded in agreement, a sense of purpose uniting them. The path ahead wouldn’t be easy, but they were no strangers to hardship. They had faced countless battles, endured pain and loss, but they had always come out stronger. This time would be no different.

As they stood there, the morning sun casting long shadows across the clearing, Bam felt a sense of peace settle over him. The memories of the hilltop cottage, once lost to time, were slowly returning, filling the gaps in his past. And with those memories came a renewed sense of hope, a belief that no matter what happened, they would find a way to overcome it—together.

Aguero, seeing the resolve in Bam’s eyes, knew that he had made the right choice. This place, this moment, was the beginning of something new—a chance to rebuild, to strengthen their bonds, and to prepare for the challenges that lay ahead.

With a final glance at the cottage, Aguero turned to the group and said, “Let’s head inside. We’ve got work to do.”

As they made their way toward the cottage, the forest around them seemed to exhale, as if releasing the tension it had held. The air felt lighter, the path ahead clearer, and for the first time in a long while, the group felt a sense of hope—a belief that, despite everything they had been through, they could still find a way to build a future worth fighting for.

Inside the cottage, the air was filled with the faint scent of wood and dust, the memories of their time here lingering in every corner. The rooms, though small and simple, held a warmth that welcomed them home. As they unpacked their belongings and settled in, the tension that had gripped them during their journey began to ease, replaced by a sense of camaraderie and purpose.

In the kitchen, Rak set down his heavy bag with a grunt, eyeing the space with a critical gaze. “This place could use some work,” he muttered, already thinking about the repairs and improvements he could make.

Hatz, always practical, began organizing their supplies, setting up a makeshift inventory system to ensure they had everything they needed. “We’ll need to restock soon,” he noted, glancing at Aguero. “But for now, we should have enough to get by.”

Elaine and Hockney explored the cottage, their eyes taking in every detail as they reacquainted themselves with the place they had once called home. “It’s smaller than I remember,” Elaine mused, a smile tugging at her lips. “But it’s still cozy.”

Endorsi examined the layout with a keen eye. “We’ll need to set up defenses, just in case. We can’t afford to let our guard down.”

Shibisu, always the optimist, clapped his hands together with a grin. “We’ll make it work. It’s not much, but it’s ours.”

Bam, standing in the center of the room, took it all in—the familiar faces, the comforting surroundings, the sense of belonging that had been missing for so long. He felt a warmth in his chest, a quiet happiness that he hadn’t felt in years.

Aguero, watching Bam from across the room, felt a surge of pride and relief. This place, this moment—it was everything he had hoped for. Bam was starting to remember, to reconnect with the past that had been stolen from him, and it was all happening naturally, without force or pressure.

Chapter Text

The morning sun was barely up over the hilltop cottage when Endorsi, already full of energy, dragged Bam out of bed and towards the front yard. It was the first official day of Bam’s training since his return to the group, and Endorsi was determined to make it count. Bam, still rubbing the sleep from his eyes, stumbled along as she pulled him outside.

“Come on, Bam!” Endorsi urged, a smirk playing on her lips as she noticed his sluggish movements. “You can’t keep sleeping in when we’ve got work to do.”

Bam blinked at her, still trying to shake off the last remnants of his drowsiness. “Endorsi, it’s barely dawn. What are we doing?”

“Your training, obviously,” she replied, rolling her eyes. “Did you think we’d let you off the hook just because you’ve been through a lot? No way, Bam. You’re back with the team now, and it’s time to get you back in shape.”

They came to a stop in the middle of the yard. Elaine, Hatz, and Shibisu were already inside the cottage, working on some parts of the improved weapons, while Novick, Dan, Hockney, Ran, and Aguero loitered outside, not far from where Endorsi and Bam now stood.

“Training?” Bam repeated, a hint of uncertainty in his voice. He looked down at his hands, then back up at Endorsi. “But... I don’t really know what to train for. I’m not even sure what I can offer to the group anymore.”

Endorsi placed a hand on her hip, her expression softening slightly. “Bam, you’re more useful than you think. You’ve always been. We just need to reignite those skills and reflexes of yours that have been buried for too long.”

Bam frowned, still unsure. “But what if—”

“No what ifs,” Endorsi cut him off firmly. “You’re going to be fine, trust me. I trained you once before, didn’t I? We’ll just pick up where we left off.”

Meanwhile, the others were listening in on the conversation. Dan glanced over at Aguero and the rest, raising an eyebrow.

“Can Endorsi really train Bam?” Dan asked, skepticism clear in his voice. “I mean, I know she’s tough, but she doesn’t exactly strike me as the most patient person in the world.”

Hockney, who had been quietly observing, smiled slightly at the comment. “Endorsi was actually Bam’s trainer way back, six years ago, when Bam, Elaine, and I first joined the group. She may be relentless, but she knows what she’s doing. The three of us really learned a lot from her.”

Dan’s eyebrows shot up in surprise. “Seriously? I didn’t know that.”

Novick, who was leaning against a tree, nodded in agreement. “Endorsi’s tough, but she’s good at what she does. Bam couldn’t be in better hands.”

Ran folded his arms over his chest, watching as Endorsi continued to talk to Bam. “She’ll push him, but that’s exactly what he needs.”

Aguero, who had been quietly listening, simply nodded, his eyes never leaving Bam. He knew how important this training was, not just for Bam’s skills, but for his confidence. Bam had been through so much, and Aguero was determined to help him regain his strength, both physically and mentally.

Endorsi, meanwhile, had pulled out a crossbow and his own bow before handing it to Bam. His own bow, familiar yet foreign in his hands, felt heavier than he remembered.

“We’ll start with this,” Endorsi said, her tone leaving no room for argument. “It’s been a while since you used it, but I’m sure it’ll come back to you. We’re heading to the forest for some target practice.”

Bam hesitated for a moment, then nodded. “Alright. I’ll do my best.”

As Endorsi led Bam towards the edge of the forest, she called out to Aguero, a teasing grin on her face. “Don’t worry, Aguero! I’ll bring him back in one piece.”

Aguero chuckled softly, shaking his head. “Just make sure you do.”

The others watched as Bam and Endorsi disappeared into the trees, their conversation fading into the distance. Dan turned to Hockney, still curious.

“So, Endorsi really trained all of you back then?” Dan asked.

Hockney nodded. “Yeah, she did. It wasn’t easy, but we all came out stronger because of it. Bam especially. He’s always had a natural talent, but Endorsi pushed him to be even better.”

Ran looked thoughtful for a moment before speaking up. “It’s good that she’s doing this. Bam needs to remember who he is, what he’s capable of.”

Aguero silently agreed, his gaze lingering on the spot where Bam and Endorsi had disappeared. Bam had been lost for so long, both physically and mentally. Now that he was back, it was crucial for him to regain his strength and confidence. And Aguero knew that Endorsi was the right person to help him do just that.

As they waited for Bam and Endorsi to return, the group fell into a comfortable silence, each lost in their thoughts. Aguero, however, couldn’t shake the feeling of anticipation. This was just the beginning of Bam’s journey to reclaiming himself, and Aguero was determined to be there every step of the way.

In the thick, silent expanse of the forest, Endorsi’s eyes scanned the surroundings with the sharpness of a hawk. The trees stretched high into the sky, their branches intertwining to form a canopy that filtered the sunlight into scattered patches on the forest floor. The air was crisp, filled with the scent of pine and damp earth, and somewhere in the distance, the call of a lone bird echoed through the trees. 

“You know, Bam,” Endorsi began, breaking the silence, “when we first started training together all those years ago, you were a lot like this. Unsure of yourself, hesitant. But you grew out of that. You became someone strong, someone we all relied on.”

Bam looked at her, his brow furrowed. “I don’t remember any of that.”

Endorsi sighed, but there was no frustration in her tone, only understanding. “I know you don’t. But that doesn’t mean it’s gone. It’s still inside you, buried deep. We just need to dig it out again.”

Bam’s grip on the crossbow tightened. “What if I can’t?”

“You can,” Endorsi said firmly. “You’ve done it before, and you can do it again. It’s not about what you remember, it’s about who you are. And I know who you are, Bam. You’re one of the strongest people I’ve ever met.”

Bam nodded, though there was a hint of uncertainty in his eyes. “I think so. But… what exactly are we doing out here?”

A small smile tugged at the corner of Endorsi’s lips. “We’re going to see just how much you really remember,” she said, stepping closer to him. “We’re going to do some skill integration drills. It’s not just about whether you can hit a target; it’s about how well you can do it under pressure, while moving, dodging, and adapting to the situation around you.”

Bam’s brow furrowed slightly. “So, like… archery practice?”

Endorsi’s smile widened. “Not just archery. We’re going to integrate everything—your reflexes, agility, your strength. I want to see how you react when you’re pushed to your limits.”

Bam glanced around the forest, his gaze lingering on the trees and the shadows between them. “How many targets are there?” he asked, trying to gauge the scope of the challenge.

“Many,” Endorsi replied simply, her tone almost teasing. “Let’s just say, you’ll have your hands full. Now, go ahead and get started. The first target could be anywhere.”

Bam took a deep breath and nodded, his hand instinctively going to the bow strapped to his back. He hadn’t used it much since losing his memories, but the feel of it in his hand was strangely familiar, comforting even. As he nocked an arrow and began to move through the forest, Endorsi watched him closely, her eyes following his every movement.

For the first few minutes, Bam moved cautiously, his eyes scanning the trees for any sign of movement. The forest was eerily silent, the only sound being the rustle of leaves beneath his feet. But then, out of the corner of his eye, he caught a flash of movement—a target, a small wooden disc, zipping through the air between the trees. Without thinking, Bam drew back the bowstring and released the arrow. It soared through the air with a whistle, striking the target dead center before it could disappear into the foliage.

“Good,” Endorsi called out from behind him. “But don’t stop moving. There’s more where that came from.”

Bam nodded, adrenaline beginning to course through his veins as he pressed forward. Another target appeared, then another, each one moving faster and in more erratic patterns than the last. Bam’s arrows flew with precision, striking each target with a confidence that surprised even him. His body moved on instinct, his feet finding purchase on the uneven forest floor as he dodged and weaved between the trees. The world around him seemed to slow, his focus narrowing to the movement of the targets, the feel of the bow in his hand, the rush of the wind as the arrows left his string.

But then the targets started to come faster, appearing from unexpected angles, and Bam found himself struggling to keep up. He missed one, then another, his breath coming in short gasps as he tried to regain his rhythm. His muscles ached, his mind racing to keep track of the targets as they zipped through the air.

“Don’t think so much!” Endorsi’s voice cut through his thoughts like a knife. “You’re overcomplicating it. Trust your instincts.”

Bam gritted his teeth, forcing himself to push through the fatigue. He adjusted his stance, focusing on the rhythm of his movements rather than the targets themselves. He moved with the flow of the forest, letting his body guide him rather than his mind. And slowly, his accuracy began to return. He hit one target, then another, until finally, he was moving through the forest with the same fluid grace he had once known.

After what felt like an eternity, Endorsi called out for him to stop. Bam lowered his bow, his chest heaving as he tried to catch his breath. Sweat dripped down his brow, and his muscles burned with exertion, but there was a sense of satisfaction deep within him.

Endorsi approached him, her expression unreadable as she looked him over. “Not bad,” she said finally, a hint of approval in her voice. “But you’re still holding back.”

Bam frowned, wiping the sweat from his forehead with the back of his hand. “Holding back?”

“You’re still trying to think your way through it,” Endorsi explained. “You need to stop overanalyzing every move. Your body knows what to do—you just have to let it happen. Trust yourself, Bam.”

He nodded slowly, understanding what she meant. His mind was still clouded with doubts and questions, but his body… his body remembered. He just needed to stop fighting it, to let go of the fear that had been holding him back.

Endorsi seemed to sense his resolve, and she nodded in approval. “Good. We’ll take a short break, then we’ll move on to the next phase.”

As if on cue, Elaine appeared from the trees, carrying a small basket of food. She approached them with a smile, setting the basket down on a flat rock. “Thought you two might be hungry,” she said, her voice was light and cheerful.

Bam smiled gratefully as he sank down onto the ground, his legs trembling slightly from the exertion. “Thanks, Elaine.”

Elaine nodded, handing him a piece of bread and some fruit. “You’re doing great, Bam. Endorsi doesn’t say it, but she’s impressed.”

Endorsi shot Elaine a mock glare, but there was no real heat behind it. “Don’t go putting words in my mouth,” she said, though there was a hint of a smile on her lips.

Elaine laughed softly, sitting down beside them as they ate in comfortable silence. The food was simple, but it was enough to restore some of Bam’s energy. As he chewed on the bread, his mind drifted back to the training, to the way his body had responded almost instinctively to the drills. It was like a part of him had been awakened, a part that had been buried deep for so long.

After a few minutes, Endorsi stood up, brushing crumbs from her hands. “Alright, break’s over. Time to get back to work.”

Bam nodded, pushing himself to his feet. His muscles still ached, but there was a fire burning within him now, a determination to push himself further, to reclaim the skills he had lost.

“What’s next?” he asked, his voice steady despite the lingering fatigue.

Endorsi’s expression grew serious as she looked him over. “Combat training,” she said simply. “We’ve reawakened your reflexes and your agility, but now we need to focus on your combat techniques. You’ve got incredible physical strength and speed, Bam—skills that were honed through years of training. But those skills are useless if you can’t control them.”

Bam’s brow furrowed in concentration. “What do you mean?”

“I mean that raw power isn’t enough,” Endorsi explained. “You need technique, precision, control. You used to be an athlete, right? You trained your body to peak physical condition, but that was just the foundation. Now, we’re going to build on that foundation.”

She stepped back, assuming a fighting stance. “Combat basics and technique. We’re going to start with the fundamentals—strikes, stances, footwork. Once you’ve got those down, we’ll move on to more advanced techniques. But first, I want to see what you remember.”

Bam nodded, falling into a stance that felt both familiar and foreign at the same time. His muscles tensed, his mind focusing on the task at hand. Endorsi circled him slowly, her eyes sharp as she observed his form.

“Good,” she said, nodding in approval. “Now, let’s see how you handle a strike.”

She moved quickly, throwing a punch towards his midsection. Bam reacted on instinct, his hand coming up to block the strike with surprising speed. But Endorsi was faster, her other hand already coming around in a follow-up strike that Bam barely managed to deflect.

“Not bad,” she said, stepping back. “But you’re still hesitating. You need to commit to your movements, Bam. Don’t second-guess yourself.”

Bam nodded, adjusting his stance. They continued to spar, Endorsi guiding him through the basic strikes and counters, correcting his form and pushing him to move faster, to react quicker. The forest around them seemed to fade away, the only sounds being the thud of their feet on the ground and the sharp cracks of their strikes meeting.

As they moved through the drills, Bam began to feel a rhythm, a flow to his movements. His body remembered the techniques, the way his muscles needed to move, the timing of each strike and counter. It was like a dance, a familiar routine that had been ingrained in him long ago.

Endorsi pushed him harder, increasing the speed and intensity of their sparring. Bam’s strikes became more confident, his movements more fluid as he adapted to her attacks. Sweat dripped down his face, his breath coming in short bursts, but there was a fierce determination in his eyes.

After what felt like hours, Endorsi finally called a halt. Bam lowered his fists, his chest heaving as he tried to catch his breath. His muscles burned with exertion, but there was a sense of satisfaction deep within him, a feeling that he was beginning to reclaim the skills he had lost.

Endorsi nodded in approval, her expression softening slightly. “You’re doing well, Bam. Better than I expected. But we’ve still got a lot of work to do.”

Bam nodded, wiping the sweat from his brow with the back of his hand. “I’m ready,” he said, his voice steady despite the exhaustion he felt.

Endorsi smiled, a rare expression of genuine warmth. “Good. Because we’re just getting started.”

As nightfall settled over the hilltop cottage, the once-vibrant forest turned into a tranquil expanse of dark silhouettes against a star-studded sky. The last remnants of daylight faded, casting the world in shades of deep blue and black. Endorsi and Bam emerged from the forest, their silhouettes framed by the soft glow of the moonlight. Bam, exhausted from the grueling day of training, stumbled slightly as he made his way toward the cottage.

He collapsed onto the grass near the doorstep, his body spreading out in a sprawling, relaxed position. The day had been intense—filled with drills and exercises that had pushed him to his limits. Despite his fatigue, Bam’s eyes remained open, gazing up at the sky. The cool evening air was a welcome relief, soothing his overworked muscles.

Endorsi looked down at Bam with a satisfied smile. “Well, that was a productive day, wasn’t it?” she said, her tone was carrying both exhaustion and approval.

Bam barely shifted his head to look at her, a faint smile tugging at his lips. “Yeah, productive . That’s one way to put it.” His voice was tinged with both weariness and a hint of humor.

Endorsi chuckled softly, the sound blending with the whispers of the night. “I’ll leave you here to enjoy the night sky. I’m going to freshen up.” With a final pat on Bam’s shoulder, she headed inside the cottage, her footsteps fading into the distance.

As the door closed behind her, Aguero stepped out of the cottage, drawn by the sight of Bam sprawled out on the grass. He approached quietly, careful not to disturb the peaceful moment Bam was enjoying. Aguero settled down beside him, the grass crunching slightly under his weight. For a moment, they both lay there in silence, gazing up at the sky.

The moon, full and bright, cast a silvery light across the landscape. Bam’s arms were splayed out to his sides, his fingers grazing the blades of grass. He seemed lost in thought, his eyes following the gentle movement of clouds across the moon’s surface. Aguero watched him, a small, affectionate smile playing on his lips.

“Still awake, I see,” Aguero said softly, his voice blending with the calm of the night.

Bam turned his head slightly, giving Aguero a tired but genuine smile. “I can’t believe I used to do this kind of training years ago. It must’ve felt torture back then.”

Aguero’s laughter was low and warm. “Oh, come on. It’s just been a day. There’s more where that came from.”

Bam’s eyes widened in mock disbelief. He tilted his head to look at Aguero fully, his expression was a mix of incredulity and exhaustion. “Really? More?”

The look on Bam’s face made Aguero laugh more heartily. “Yep, really. We’ve only scratched the surface. You’ve got a lot to catch up on, and it’s not going to get any easier.”

Bam groaned, his head sinking back into the grass. “Great. Just what I wanted to hear. I’m already sore, and you’re telling me there’s more coming?”

Aguero’s laughter continued, his eyes crinkling at the corners as he looked at his friend. “You’ll get used to it. And besides, it’ll all be worth it in the end. You’ll see.”

Bam sighed, though his smile remained. “I hope you’re right. Right now, I’m just trying to stay awake long enough to enjoy the stars.”

They lay there in companionable silence, the cool breeze rustling through the trees. The stars above were a silent witness to their conversation, the moon casting its gentle glow over them. For a while, the only sounds were the distant calls of nocturnal creatures and the occasional rustle of leaves.

Aguero broke the silence, his voice thoughtful. “You know, it’s good to see you back in action. I know it’s been tough, but you’re doing great. The old skills are coming back.”

Bam turned his head slightly, meeting Aguero’s gaze. “Thanks. It’s been rough, but I appreciate the support. It’s nice to know I haven’t lost everything.”

“You haven’t,” Aguero assured him, his voice firm with conviction. “You’ve got a lot of potential, Bam. It’s just a matter of unlocking it. And I’m here to help you with that.”

Bam nodded, the sincerity in Aguero’s voice settling over him like a comforting blanket. “I know. I’m grateful for that. It’s just hard sometimes, you know?”

Aguero placed a hand on Bam’s shoulder, giving it a reassuring squeeze. “I know it is. But you’re not alone in this. We all have your back, and we’ll get through it together.”

Bam took a deep breath, letting the calming presence of the night wash over him. The exhaustion was palpable, but so was a sense of renewed hope. He was back with his friends, training hard, and working to reclaim his place in their world. The road ahead was uncertain, but at least he wasn’t facing it alone.

As the minutes ticked by, the night continued its slow progression toward dawn. The stars above remained constant, a reminder of the vastness of the universe and the small yet significant place they all held within it. Bam and Aguero lay there, their conversation drifting off as the silence of the night wrapped around them.

Eventually, Aguero stood up, stretching slightly before turning to Bam. “Well, I think it’s time for us to get some rest. We’ve got another big day ahead.”

Bam nodded, pushing himself up from the grass with some effort. “Yeah, you’re right. I’ll head inside soon.”

Aguero smiled, clapping Bam on the back. “Good. And remember, as tough as it gets, just keep pushing forward. You’re doing great.”

With a final nod, Aguero headed back toward the cottage. Bam watched him go, the warmth of Aguero’s encouragement lingering with him. As he slowly made his way inside, the night’s chill seemed less biting, and the weight of his exhaustion felt a little lighter.

The hilltop cottage, bathed in the soft light of the moon, stood as a beacon of hope and determination. Inside, the quiet hum of activity continued as the team prepared for another day of challenges. For Bam, the journey was just beginning, but with his friends by his side, he felt a renewed sense of purpose and determination.

As he finally collapsed into bed, the day’s training played over in his mind. The soreness in his muscles was a reminder of how far he had come and how much further he still had to go. But with the support of Aguero and the rest of the team, he felt ready to face whatever lay ahead. The stars outside the window seemed to shine a little brighter, reflecting the newfound resolve within him.

And so, under the watchful gaze of the moon and stars, Bam drifted off to sleep, the promise of tomorrow’s challenges mingling with the comfort of knowing he was not alone on this journey.

Few days have passed since Bam began his training under Endorsi. The following day dawned crisp and cool, the perfect setting for the intense training that awaited TFN. The atmosphere was charged with a mix of excitement and apprehension as Endorsi outlined the details of the mini-competition she had proposed to Aguero. Everyone in the group knew that Endorsi didn’t do things by half-measures, and today was no exception. Capture and Deliver, as the competition was called, would test not only their physical abilities but also their strategic thinking and teamwork. The stakes were high, not just for bragging rights, but for honing the skills that could mean the difference between life and death in the missions to come.

Endorsi stood in the middle of the group, her arms crossed, exuding confidence. "Alright, listen up," she began, her voice carrying an edge of authority that immediately commanded attention. "The rules are simple: Each team has to deliver a flag to a designated spot on the field while protecting your own item from being captured by the other team. You’ll all be wearing collars with targets on them. When you’re hit by a dart, the collar emits a signal, and you’re out. Points will be awarded for successful hits and deliveries. No other weapons are allowed—just the darts provided."

She paused, letting the rules sink in before continuing. "We’ve split into two teams. Team one: Dan, Elaine, Hatz, Shibisu, and Rak. Team two: Hockney, Bam, Novick, Ran, and me. Aguero will be the referee since it wouldn’t be fair for one team if he joined in. But he’d still be wearing a collar, you know, additional points if he suddenly showed up."

Aguero, who had been watching the proceedings with an unreadable expression, nodded slightly. "I’ll make sure no one cheats," he said, his tone half-serious, half-joking. "And remember, this is still training. Learn from your mistakes and work together."

The teams gathered, whispering amongst themselves as they strategized. On team one, Elaine took the lead, her analytical mind already forming a plan. "We need to focus on defense first," she said. "Shibisu, Rak, you’ll guard the flag. Dan, Hatz, and I will go on the offensive. We need to move quickly and take them by surprise."

Rak grinned, cracking his knuckles. "They won’t know what hit ’em."

On team two, Endorsi was no less focused. "Bam, you stick with me. Hockney, you’re our eyes. Novick and Ran, you’re on defense. We’ll move fast and take them out before they can even think about grabbing our flag."

Bam nodded, feeling a familiar thrill of anticipation. This wasn’t just about the competition; it was about pushing himself, about seeing how far he could go. The past few days of training with Endorsi had reignited something in him, a spark of the warrior he had once been. Now, it was time to see if that spark could become a flame.

The whistle blew, and the teams sprang into action. Team one moved swiftly through the trees, using the dense foliage to their advantage. Elaine led the way, her senses sharp as she scanned the surroundings for any sign of the other team. Shibisu and Rak hung back, guarding the flag with unwavering focus.

Meanwhile, team two had split up as planned. Endorsi and Bam moved quickly, darting between trees and using the terrain to stay hidden. Hockney trailed slightly behind, his sharp eyes scanning the area for any movement. Novick and Ran stayed near their base, ready to defend their flag with everything they had.

As they moved through the forest, Bam couldn’t help but feel a sense of déjà vu. This wasn’t the first time he had been in a situation like this, and the familiarity of it brought a strange comfort. He glanced at Endorsi, who was focused and determined, her movements precise and calculated. She had been the one to bring him back into this world, to remind him of who he was, and now he was determined not to let her down.

Suddenly, a rustling sound caught Bam’s attention. He raised a hand, signaling for Endorsi to stop. They crouched low, listening intently. The sound was faint, but it was enough to tell them that someone was nearby. Endorsi nodded at Bam, indicating that they should move forward cautiously.

As they crept closer, they spotted Hatz and Dan moving through the trees, their expressions focused. Bam’s heart raced as he realized they were heading straight for the flag. Endorsi caught his eye and mouthed, "Now."

In one fluid motion, Bam and Endorsi sprang into action. Bam took aim with his dart and fired, hitting Dan squarely on the collar. The collar emitted a beep, and Dan cursed under his breath as he realized he was out. Hatz spun around, ready to fight, but Endorsi was already on him, her movements swift and precise. She dodged his attack and fired her dart, hitting him just below the collar.

"Nice try," Endorsi said with a smirk as Hatz’s collar beeped. "But you’ll have to do better than that."

Bam couldn’t help but grin. This was the kind of training he had missed, the thrill of the fight, the rush of adrenaline. It felt good to be back in action, to feel like he was part of something bigger than himself.

With Hatz and Dan out of the game, Bam and Endorsi quickly made their way to the flag. They grabbed it and started back toward their base, moving quickly but cautiously. They knew the other team would be on high alert now, and they couldn’t afford to let their guard down.

As they approached the clearing where their base was located, Bam felt a sudden sense of unease. Something wasn’t right. He glanced at Endorsi, who seemed to sense it too. She slowed down, her eyes scanning the area.

"Stay sharp," she whispered. "They’re probably waiting for us."

Sure enough, as they stepped into the clearing, they were met with a barrage of darts. Bam reacted instantly, ducking and rolling to the side as the darts whizzed past him. Endorsi was right behind him, her movements fluid and graceful as she dodged the incoming attacks.

Hockney, who had been guarding the base, joined in, firing back at the attackers. Novick and Ran also appeared, providing cover as Bam and Endorsi made their way to the delivery spot. The field had turned into a chaotic battleground, with darts flying in every direction.

Just as Bam was about to reach the delivery spot, a figure appeared in front of him, blocking his path. It was Aguero. His expression was calm, almost bored, but Bam knew better than to underestimate him. Aguero wasn’t just testing him; he was challenging him, pushing him to see how far he had come.

"You didn’t think it would be that easy, did you?" Aguero asked, his voice laced with amusement.

Bam’s grip tightened on the flag. "I knew you’d show up," he replied, his tone steady.

Aguero smirked. "Let’s see if you can get past me."

The two of them circled each other, the tension in the air palpable. Bam knew this wouldn’t be easy. Aguero was fast, precise, and ruthless. But Bam had learned a lot in the past few days, and he was determined to prove himself.

Aguero moved first, striking with a speed that was almost impossible to follow. Bam barely had time to react, but he managed to dodge the attack, rolling to the side and coming up in a crouch. He fired his dart, but Aguero was already gone, moving with a fluid grace that made it look effortless.

"You’ll have to do better than that," Aguero taunted, his voice echoing through the trees.

Bam didn’t respond. He was focused, his mind racing as he tried to anticipate Aguero’s next move. He knew he couldn’t match Aguero in speed or skill, but he had something else—his instincts. He had always been able to think on his feet, to adapt to any situation, and now was no different.

As Aguero moved in for another attack, Bam did something unexpected. Instead of dodging, he stepped forward, closing the distance between them in an instant. Aguero’s eyes widened in surprise, but it was too late. Bam fired his dart at point-blank range, hitting Aguero squarely on the collar.

Aguero’s collar beeped, signaling that he was out. For a moment, there was silence as everyone processed what had just happened. Then Aguero chuckled, shaking his head in disbelief.

"Well done, Bam," he said, his tone genuinely impressed. "I didn’t see that coming."

Bam allowed himself a small smile. "I’ve learned from the best."

With Aguero out of the way, Bam quickly made his way to the delivery spot and planted the flag. The whistle blew, signaling the end of the game. Cheers erupted from team two as they celebrated their victory, while team one groaned in frustration.

As the teams gathered, Aguero addressed them, his tone serious. "This was more than just a game. It was a chance for you all to see where you stand, to learn from each other, and to improve. Remember what you’ve learned today, because the real battles will be much harder."

Endorsi clapped Bam on the shoulder, grinning. "You did great, Bam! I knew you had it in you."

Bam smiled back, feeling a sense of pride and accomplishment. For the first time in a long time, he felt like he was where he belonged, doing what he was meant to do.

The competition had been intense, but it had also been exactly what they needed. It pushed them, challenged them, and brought them closer together as a team. And as they stood there, catching their breath and reflecting on the day’s events, they all knew that this was just the beginning. The real challenges were still ahead, but they were ready. Together, they could face anything.

As the sun began to set, the team started to disperse, tired but satisfied. Bam lingered for a moment, looking out at the field where they had just fought. He felt a hand on his shoulder and turned to see Aguero standing beside him.

"You did well today," Aguero said, his voice softer than before. "You’re getting stronger, more confident."

Bam nodded, feeling a warmth spread through him at the praise. "Thanks, Aguero. It means a lot coming from you."

Aguero’s gaze was steady as he looked at Bam. "Just remember, Bam. Strength isn’t just about physical power. It’s about knowing when to fight and when to step back. It’s about protecting the people you care about."

Bam met Aguero’s eyes, understanding the deeper meaning behind his words. "I’ll remember that."

Aguero gave him a small, almost imperceptible smile before turning to leave. "Get some rest. Tomorrow’s another day of training."

Bam watched him go, feeling a sense of resolve settle in his chest. He knew that the road ahead wouldn’t be easy, but he also knew that he wasn’t alone. He had Aguero, Endorsi, and the rest of TFN by his side. And with them, he could face whatever challenges came their way.

As he made his way back to the base, Bam couldn’t help but feel a sense of hope. For the first time in a long time, he felt like he was truly part of something, like he had a purpose. And he was determined to hold on to that feeling, no matter what.

The morning air was crisp, carrying with it the scent of pine and earth as the sun slowly rose over the hilltop. The members of TFN were already well into their routines, each focused on their tasks. Bam and Endorsi sat outside the hilltop cottage, their legs crossed and their eyes closed, deep in meditation. The quiet of the morning was punctuated only by the occasional rustling of leaves and the distant sound of a bird singing its morning song.

Bam inhaled deeply, feeling the cool air fill his lungs. He tried to clear his mind, focusing on the sound of the wind and the warmth of the sun on his face. Meditation was a new part of his training, something Endorsi had suggested to help him center his thoughts and strengthen his resolve. It was difficult at first—Bam's mind often wandered, drifting to thoughts of his friends, his past, and the uncertain future ahead of him. But he was getting better at it, learning to push aside distractions and focus on the present moment.

Not far from them, Aguero sat on a large rock, his eyes occasionally drifting over to Bam. His expression was unreadable, but there was a tension in his posture, as if he was ready to spring into action at any moment. He had been like this ever since they started this phase of Bam's training—always nearby, always watchful. It was as though he felt the need to protect Bam, even during moments of peace like this.

The rest of the team was scattered across the hilltop, each engaged in their own activities. Hockney was hunched over a workbench, his fingers deftly adjusting a piece of equipment. Novick and Shibisu were with him, assisting where they could, while Rak, in his larger form, was instructing Elaine in the use of a spear. Dan and Ran had gone into the city earlier that morning to pick up supplies for Hockney's latest project. Off to the side, Hatz was practicing a new sword technique, his movements were precise and controlled.

As the morning stretched on, Bam and Endorsi eventually decided to take a break. Bam stretched his arms above his head, feeling the muscles in his back and shoulders loosen. Endorsi did the same, letting out a satisfied sigh as she relaxed. Aguero, seeing them stir, walked over and sat down beside them on the grass.

"You’re getting better at this," Aguero said, his tone was casual but with a hint of pride. He looked at Bam, who smiled shyly in response.

"It’s not as easy as I thought it would be," Bam admitted. "But I’m trying."

"That’s all that matters," Aguero replied, leaning back on his hands. The three of them sat in comfortable silence for a moment, enjoying the peacefulness of the hilltop. Then, Endorsi broke the silence with a question that had been on her mind.

"So, Bam," she began, turning to look at him, "What was life like on that island with Wangnan and his family?"

Bam’s eyes lit up at the mention of Wangnan, a soft smile spreading across his face. "It was really good. Wangnan’s family is very welcoming," he said, his voice warm with fond memories. "Goseng, she’s a really good cook and like a good aunt to everyone. Prince and Miseng, they banter a lot, but you can tell they really love each other. They’re siblings, after all. Wangnan... he’s an amazing photographer, you should see the pictures he takes. Akraptor, though he looks serious, he’s also a great cook. And Horyang—he’s quiet, but he’s a good listener and gives great advice. Yihwa... she complains a lot because she’s a grade school teacher, but you can tell she loves her students."

Endorsi and Aguero listened intently, noting the fondness in Bam’s voice as he spoke of his friends, his family on the island. There was a warmth to his descriptions that suggested these people meant a lot to him. 

Aguero glanced at Endorsi, his expression was thoughtful. “It sounds like they were like a family to you,” he said, his tone gentle.

Bam nodded, his gaze turning reflective. “They were. They took me in when I had nowhere else to go. They showed me what it meant to belong.”

Aguero, noticing the slight hesitation in Bam’s demeanor, decided to gently probe. “Do you miss Wangnan?”

Bam’s eyes shifted away, a hint of conflict crossing his features. He felt a pang of guilt, as though admitting his feelings might betray his current commitments. 

Aguero’s understanding gaze met Bam’s, offering silent reassurance. “It’s okay to be honest, Bam,” Aguero encouraged. “You don’t have to hide your feelings.”

Bam took a deep breath, his shoulders relaxing slightly. “Yes, I do miss Wangnan. A lot.” The confession came with a mixture of relief and sadness, but also a deep yearning.

Aguero’s expression softened. “I’m sure he misses you too. But I promise you, Wangnan and his family are safe. They’re taken care of.”

Bam’s smile was faint but genuine. “Thank you. That means a lot to me.”

Aguero continued, his voice filled with sincere conviction. “You need to be strong, Bam. When you finally see Wangnan again, you want him to see someone who’s grown and who can face challenges head-on. You’ve come a long way, and I believe in you.”

Bam’s smile grew a little wider, the reassurance from Aguero settling his conflicted thoughts. "I will," he promised, feeling a renewed sense of determination.

With that, the conversation shifted back to the present. Endorsi stretched once more before getting to her feet. "Alright, time to get back to it," she said, offering Bam a hand to help him up.

"Let’s give Bam some space to focus," Aguero suggested, gesturing towards the cottage. "We can continue our conversation inside."

Endorsi nodded in agreement, and together they walked towards the cottage, leaving Bam to continue his meditation alone. As they stepped inside, the warmth of the interior was a welcome contrast to the cool morning air outside. Aguero settled into a chair by the window, watching Bam through the glass, while Endorsi leaned against the wall, arms crossed.

After a moment, Endorsi broke the silence. "Do you really think it’s okay to use Wangnan as Bam’s motivation?" she asked, her tone was curious but slightly concerned.

Aguero’s gaze remained on Bam as he answered. "It’s no big deal. Bam needs that motivation right now."

Endorsi studied Aguero for a moment, noticing the subtle tension in his posture. "But aren’t you worried that it might make things harder for him later on?"

Aguero finally turned to face her, his expression unreadable. "Of course I’m worried," he admitted, his voice quiet but firm. "But Wangnan has been with Bam for such a long time. I should be thankful to him, for being there for Bam when I couldn’t be."

There was a weight in Aguero’s words that Endorsi couldn’t ignore. She tried to lighten the mood, offering a small smile. “I get that. But sometimes, putting too much focus on a single motivation can be overwhelming. Humans are solitary creatures, after all. It’s important to find strength within oneself.”

Aguero’s eyes narrowed slightly as he considered her words. "Solitary?" he echoed, his voice carrying a hint of disbelief. "How can humans possibly be solitary creatures when the dip of every neck and the curve of every palm is almost sculpted to hold a face in it?"

Endorsi was stunned into silence, not expecting such a profound response. She opened her mouth to say something, but no words came out. Aguero’s words hung in the air, a reminder of the deep connections that bind people together, no matter how much they might try to stand alone.

After a moment, Endorsi let out a soft sigh, acknowledging the truth in Aguero’s statement. "You’ve got a point there," she conceded, her voice was softer now. "But you’re still worried about him, aren’t you?"

Aguero didn’t answer right away, his gaze drifting back to Bam outside. "I am," he finally admitted. "But I trust him. I trust that he’ll find his own way, even if it’s not the path I would have chosen for him."

Endorsi nodded slowly, understanding the depth of Aguero’s concern. "He will," she said confidently. "Bam’s stronger than any of us give him credit for."

The two fell into a comfortable silence, each lost in their own thoughts. Outside, Bam continued his meditation, his mind clearer now after the conversation with Aguero. He focused on his breathing, letting go of the doubts and fears that had plagued him earlier. He knew that he wasn’t alone, that he had people who cared about him, who believed in him. And that knowledge gave him the strength to push forward, to keep fighting, no matter what challenges lay ahead.

The day continued in a steady rhythm, with each member of TFN working on their tasks. Hockney’s latest project was coming together with the help of Novick and Shibisu, who offered suggestions and handed him tools as he worked. Rak’s booming voice could be heard across the hilltop as he guided Elaine through another set of spear drills, his enthusiasm unflagging despite the long hours of training. Hatz’s sword clashed against the air as he practiced, his focus unwavering.

As the sun climbed higher in the sky Dan and Ran returned from the city, their arms full of the supplies Hockney had requested. They were greeted with a mixture of relief and teasing from the others, who were glad to see them back safely. Rak, in his shrunken form, had taken charge of the kitchen along with Elaine and Shibisu. The three of them worked together, their banter and laughter filling the air as they prepared a meal that was sure to satisfy the hungry group.

“Rak, pass me the spices,” Elaine called out, her hands busy chopping vegetables.

“Why do I have to do all the hard work?” Rak grumbled, but there was no real annoyance in his voice. He grabbed the spice jar with his oversized hands and handed it to Elaine, who flashed him a quick smile.

“Because you’re the best at it,” Shibisu teased as he stirred a pot on the stove. “And because none of us want to risk burning the food like last time.”

Rak huffed, puffing out his chest with pride. “Of course, I am.”

As the scent of cooked food wafted through the air, the rest of the team set up a long table outside the cottage. The sky above was a deep, inky blue, dotted with stars that seemed to twinkle just for them. The evening breeze was gentle, carrying with it the promise of a peaceful night. The table was quickly set, chairs arranged around it, and plates and utensils laid out with care. There was a sense of anticipation, a collective desire to enjoy the meal they had all worked toward in their own ways.

When everything was ready, the group gathered around the table. Aguero, Bam, Dan, Elaine, Endorsi, Hatz, Hockney, Novick, Rak, Ran, and Shibisu all took their seats, with Aguero and Bam ending up next to each other as they so often did. The conversation flowed easily, punctuated by laughter and the clinking of utensils against plates. They talked about everything from the day’s events to old memories, their voices mingling with the sounds of the night.

“This is so good, Elaine!” Novick exclaimed between bites. “You’ve outdone yourself.”

Elaine grinned, pleased with the compliment. “I can’t take all the credit. Shibisu and Rak helped too.”

“Yeah, yeah,” Shibisu waved a hand dismissively. “But we all know Elaine’s the real talent here.”

Rak, who was busy devouring his food, merely grunted in agreement.

As the meal progressed, Bam found himself increasingly absorbed in the lively discussions around him. The warmth of the camaraderie, the shared stories, and the genuine affection between everyone made him feel a deep sense of belonging. He glanced over at Aguero, who was quietly listening to a debate between Endorsi and Ran about the best way to track someone in the city. Aguero’s expression was calm, his usual sharp wit ready to jump into the conversation at any moment.

It was then that Bam noticed a small crumb on Aguero’s cheek, likely from the piece of bread he had just bitten into. Without thinking, Bam reached out and brushed the crumb away, his fingers gently touching Aguero’s skin. “You’ve got something there,” Bam said, his voice was casual, almost as if the action had been second nature.

The gesture was so sudden and so unexpected that it brought the entire conversation at the table to a halt. Every pair of eyes turned toward Bam and Aguero, the silence that followed filled with surprise. Aguero, usually unflappable, blinked in surprise, clearly caught off guard. Bam, only then realizing what he had done, felt a rush of heat flood his cheeks. He quickly withdrew his hand, flustered by the attention.

“I—uh, sorry,” Bam stammered, his voice was a little higher than usual. “It was just… muscle memory, I guess. I felt like I’d seen you with a crumb on your face before, but I don’t know when or where…”

Shibisu, always the opportunist when it came to teasing, leaned forward with a grin. “Oh, you don’t need to explain, Bam. We all saw what happened.”

The group erupted into laughter, the tension from the moment dissolving into amusement. Even Aguero, who was rarely the subject of such teasing, couldn’t help but smile slightly, though his eyes still held a hint of confusion.

Elaine, always quick to add fuel to the fire, chimed in, her tone was playful. “I’m surprised we’re not used to this by now. With how close you two are, it’s only natural, right? I mean, Endorsi does call you ‘lovebirds’ for a reason.”

Bam’s blush deepened, his eyes widening as he looked around the table for some kind of escape. His gaze landed on Aguero, silently pleading for some support or at least a denial of Endorsi’s nickname. But Aguero, instead of rescuing Bam, simply raised an eyebrow and remained silent, the corners of his mouth quirking up in the slightest hint of a smirk.

Endorsi, never one to miss a chance to tease, leaned back in her chair, her arms crossed over her chest as she observed the scene with a satisfied grin. “Honestly, it’s kind of cute. Your clinginess to each other sometimes makes the rest of us a little jealous.”

“That’s true,” Hatz added, nodding thoughtfully. “You two are practically inseparable.”

More laughter ensued, and even though the teasing was all in good fun, Bam couldn’t help but feel more embarrassed. He glanced at Aguero again, half-expecting him to brush off the comments. But when Aguero met his gaze, there was an unspoken understanding in his eyes, a reassurance that made Bam’s flustered state soften slightly.

“Fine, fine, enough about us,” Bam muttered, trying to steer the conversation away from himself. “Let’s just enjoy dinner.”

But Shibisu wasn’t about to let him off the hook so easily. “Oh, come on, Bam. You can’t just drop a moment like that and expect us to move on!”

“Yeah, seriously,” Ran added with a wide grin. “It’s not every day we see A.A get flustered. I think we should savor it.”

Aguero finally decided to intervene, his voice calm but carrying a note of finality. “Alright, that’s enough. Let’s give Bam a break. We’ve had our fun.”

The group collectively sighed, though the amused smiles remained on their faces as they returned to their meals. Bam shot Aguero a grateful look, but he couldn’t help noticing the slight twinkle in Aguero’s eyes, as if he had enjoyed the teasing just as much as everyone else.

As the evening went on, the conversation drifted to lighter topics. They discussed the day’s training, with Rak boasting about how quickly Elaine was picking up spear techniques, while Elaine tried to downplay her progress with a modest shrug. Hockney shared some of his thoughts on the latest modifications he was making to their gear, his quiet voice drawing the group’s attention with its careful precision. Ran and Dan joked about the various characters they had encountered in the city, each story was more outlandish than the last.

All the while, the night deepened around them, the stars above growing brighter against the darkening sky. The air was filled with the comforting sounds of contentment—clinking plates, soft laughter, and the occasional burst of banter. It was moments like these that reminded them all of the strength of their bond, forged through shared experiences, both difficult and joyous.

As the meal wound down, the group began to clear the table, their movements easy and unhurried. The conversations continued, more subdued now but no less engaging. Bam, still a little flustered from the earlier teasing, found himself standing next to Aguero as they gathered the dishes.

“Thanks for saving me back there,” Bam said quietly, glancing at Aguero out of the corner of his eye.

Aguero looked at him, his expression unreadable for a moment before softening into something close to warmth. “You handled it just fine on your own,” he replied, his tone was light.

Bam smiled, feeling a little more at ease. “Still, I appreciate it. I don’t know why I did that… It just felt like I’d done it before.”

Aguero’s gaze turned thoughtful, as if considering Bam’s words. “Maybe you have,” he said after a pause. “Some things stick with us, even if we don’t remember the details.”

There was a quiet understanding between them, a sense of something unspoken but shared. Bam nodded, accepting Aguero’s explanation. It was enough for now, enough to keep him from overthinking the strange familiarity of the moment.

As they finished cleaning up, the group began to disperse, some heading inside while others lingered outside to enjoy the cool night air. The stars above were like scattered diamonds, twinkling brightly against the vastness of the sky. Bam found himself drawn to the sight, his thoughts wandering back to the earlier conversation and the unexpected feelings it had stirred within him.

Endorsi, who had stayed outside with Aguero, joined Bam, standing beside him as they both gazed upward. “You know,” she said, her voice was carrying a teasing edge, “we weren’t really joking about being jealous. You and Aguero really do have something special.”

Bam glanced at her, surprised by the sincerity in her tone. “We’re just… close friends,” he said, though even as he spoke the words, he realized how inadequate they felt.

Endorsi chuckled softly. “Sure, if that’s what you want to call it. But I think there’s more to it than that. And I think you know it too.”

Chapter Text

The past few days had passed in a blur of exhaustion and determination as Bam followed Endorsi's training regimen. She pushed him hard, harder than he expected, but he could see the results slowly taking shape. His muscles ached in ways they hadn’t before, a constant reminder of how much he still had to learn. It was late afternoon when he finally returned to his room after another grueling session, his clothes clinging to his sweat-drenched skin. He peeled off his shirt, eager to change into something clean and dry. But as he caught a glimpse of his reflection in the mirror, he paused, his attention snagged on the sight of the scar on his chest.

The jagged line stretched across his skin, just above his heart, stark against the pale flesh. Bam frowned as he traced the scar with his fingertips, the memory of how he got it eluding him. Ever since he lost his memories, that scar had been a mystery. He remembered asking Wangnan about it, but Wangnan had no idea either. 

Staring at the scar now, Bam felt a strange pull, a tugging sensation deep in his chest as if something was trying to claw its way to the surface. His reflection seemed distant, hazy around the edges. For a moment, the room felt too quiet, the air too still, as if the world was holding its breath. Then, in the silence, the fragments began to appear—flashes of images and sounds that were both familiar and foreign.

A young woman with long blue hair, her face twisted with anger. The same woman, her eyes cold and merciless as she stared down at him. The feeling of terror, the sharp pain, and then… darkness. Bam’s heart raced as the images swirled around him, faster and faster, until they blurred into an incomprehensible mess. He could hear voices, faint at first, but growing louder, more insistent. They were voices he should know, voices that should mean something, but they slipped through his fingers like sand.

He closed his eyes, willing himself to remember, to make sense of the chaos in his mind. The voices grew clearer, more distinct, and then, amid the confusion, he heard a single word, a name that resonated through him like a shockwave.

Maschenny.

Bam’s eyes snapped open, the images fading as quickly as they had come. The room was quiet once more, but that name echoed in his mind, lingering like the aftertaste of something bitter. He didn’t know why, but he knew it was important. He needed to find Aguero. Maybe he could help make sense of it all.

He pulled on a fresh shirt, barely noticing the fabric against his skin as he hurried out of his room. His mind was racing, filled with questions he couldn’t yet articulate. All he knew was that he had to talk to Aguero, and he had to do it now.

Aguero was lounging in the living room with the others when Bam entered. The group was scattered around, taking a break from their various activities. Dan and Elaine were chatting quietly, while Endorsi and Hockney were engaged in some sort of playful argument. Rak and Ran were sprawled on the couch, half-listening, while Hatz and Shibisu sat nearby, each lost in thought. It was a rare moment of calm for all of them.

Bam walked straight up to Aguero, his expression intense. “Aguero, do you know anyone named Maschenny?”

The room fell silent at his words, the lighthearted atmosphere dissolving in an instant. Aguero’s eyes widened in shock, and a flicker of fear crossed his face. “Maschenny?” he repeated, his voice tight. “Where did you hear that name?”

Bam hesitated, unsure of how to explain what had just happened. “I… I heard it while I was in my room. I was looking at my scar, trying to remember where I got it, and then suddenly, I heard that name. It just… it resonated with me.”

Dan, who had been listening quietly, furrowed his brow in confusion. “Scar? What scar?”

Without a word, Bam reached for the hem of his shirt and pulled it off, revealing the scar that marred his chest. Everyone stared at it, their expressions ranging from surprise to concern. The sight of it seemed to bring the gravity of the situation crashing down on them all.

“Do you know where I got this?” Bam asked, his gaze fixed on Aguero. There was a desperation in his voice, a need for answers that he could no longer ignore.

Aguero looked away, his expression troubled. He seemed to struggle with himself, torn between wanting to protect Bam and the burden of truth he had carried for so long. But before he could respond, Endorsi spoke up, her voice solemn.

“Six years ago,” she began, her tone lacking its usual playfulness, “Aguero’s cousin, Kiseia, tried to kill you. She stabbed you in the heart with a stiletto dagger. You survived, but the scar never faded.”

Bam’s breath caught in his throat as the words sank in. “She… she tried to kill me?” he whispered, the shock evident in his voice. He had always known his past was shrouded in mystery, but hearing something so violent and personal shook him to his core.

Aguero winced at Bam’s reaction, guilt flashing in his eyes. “It’s true,” he admitted quietly, finally meeting Bam’s gaze. “Kiseia was ordered to kill you, but you somehow survived. That scar is the only physical reminder of what happened.”

For a moment, Bam couldn’t speak, couldn’t think. The revelation left him reeling, struggling to reconcile this new piece of his past with the person he was now. But even as he tried to process it, another question rose to the surface, one that wouldn’t be ignored.

“And Maschenny?” Bam pressed, his voice trembling slightly. “Who is she?”

Aguero’s expression darkened, his eyes hardening as he heard the name again. “Maschenny is… Ran and I’s older sister.”

The words hit Bam like a punch to the gut, knocking the breath out of him. The older sister Aguero had mentioned once, the one who had done something unforgivable—that had been Maschenny. And the woman in his nightmare, the one with the cold eyes and blue hair, that had been her too. The pieces clicked into place with terrifying clarity, and for a moment, Bam felt like the ground had been ripped out from under him.

The silence in the hilltop cottage was heavy and oppressive, pressing down on Bam like a weight. The truth had hit him like a freight train, shattering the fragile understanding he thought he had. Everything he knew was upended, and his mind struggled to process it all. Aguero had finally revealed the full extent of the darkness that surrounded them—the truth about his family, about the danger that lurked in every shadow. It was too much, too overwhelming. Bam wanted to speak, to ask a million questions, but the words were trapped in his throat, tangled up with the fear and confusion that churned inside him.

Before Bam could gather his thoughts, a deafening explosion ripped through the night, shaking the cottage to its very foundations. The blast was so powerful that it threw him off balance, sending him stumbling back. Dust and debris rained down from the ceiling, and the walls groaned as if they might collapse at any moment. Bam’s heart lurched in his chest, adrenaline flooding his veins as the shock of the explosion jolted him into action.

“Get down!” Aguero shouted, his voice cutting through the chaos like a blade. His first instinct was to protect Bam, and he moved without hesitation, grabbing Bam by the arm and pulling him to the ground just as another explosion rocked the building. The sound was deafening, reverberating through the walls like thunder.

Bam’s mind raced as he tried to make sense of what was happening. This wasn’t an accident. They were under attack. The realization hit him like a punch to the gut, and fear clamped down on his chest like a vice. He turned to Aguero, his eyes wide with panic, but Aguero’s expression was focused, his gaze sharp as he scanned the room for threats.

“Everyone, move!” Shibisu’s voice rang out, authoritative and steady despite the chaos. “Get your weapons and get out! We’re under attack—no holding back!”

The urgency in Shibisu’s command snapped the others into action. Dan, Elaine, Endorsi, Hatz, Hockney, Novick, Rak, Ran, and Shibisu themselves grabbed their weapons, moving with the speed and precision that came from years of training and experience. Bam reached for his crossbow, his hands trembling as he loaded it, his thoughts still a tangled mess of fear and disbelief.

Aguero was already on his feet, his expression cold and determined. He glanced at Bam, his eyes hard. “Stay close to Endorsi,” he ordered, his voice low and tense. “She’ll have your back. I’ll be fine on my own.”

Bam opened his mouth to protest, to insist that they stick together, but before he could say anything, Aguero was already moving toward the door, his movements swift and purposeful. Bam watched him go, a knot of worry tightening in his chest. The memory of their conversation still lingered in his mind, the weight of the truth pressing down on him. But there was no time to dwell on it now—they were in danger, and they had to fight back.

Endorsi appeared at his side, her chakrams gleaming in the dim light. “Come on,” she urged, her voice steady. “We need to get out of here and clear the area. Stay close to me.”

Bam nodded, swallowing down his fear as he followed her out of the cottage. The night outside was dark and foreboding, the moon hidden behind thick clouds that cast the forest in deep shadows. The air was thick with tension, the scent of smoke and burning wood hanging heavy in the air. The forest surrounding the cottage was eerily silent, as if holding its breath, waiting for the battle to unfold.

As soon as they stepped outside, they could see the devastation the explosions had caused. The ground was littered with debris, the trees scorched and splintered from the blasts. And in the shadows, moving through the underbrush with deadly intent, were the attackers. They were clad in dark clothing that blended seamlessly with the night, their faces obscured by masks. It was clear that they were professionals, trained and coordinated, and they had come prepared.

“They’re trying to flush us out,” Endorsi muttered, her eyes narrowing as she scanned the forest. “We need to spread out and take them down before they can box us in.”

Bam nodded, gripping his crossbow tightly as they moved deeper into the trees. His heart was pounding in his chest, his pulse racing with adrenaline. He could hear the distant sounds of battle—shouts, the clash of steel, the crack of gunfire—as the others engaged the attackers. The darkness seemed to close in around them, the shadows thick and oppressive, but Bam forced himself to stay focused, to push past the fear gnawing at him.

A sudden movement to his left caught his attention, and he spun around, raising his crossbow just as an attacker lunged at him. He fired without thinking, the bolt striking true and sending the man crashing to the ground. His hands were shaking, his breath coming in short, sharp gasps as he tried to steady himself. This was no ordinary fight—these people were out for blood, and they wouldn’t stop until they had what they came for.

“Keep moving,” Endorsi urged, her voice sharp with urgency. She moved with deadly grace, her chakrams spinning through the air as she dispatched another attacker. “We can’t let them surround us.”

Bam nodded, forcing his legs to move, to keep pace with her as they weaved through the trees. The forest was a labyrinth of shadows and twisted branches, the darkness playing tricks on his eyes. Every rustle of leaves, every snap of a twig set his nerves on edge, his senses heightened by the adrenaline coursing through him. But no matter how hard he tried to focus on the fight, his thoughts kept drifting back to Aguero. Was he safe? Was he fighting alone? The thought of Aguero being overwhelmed by attackers sent a jolt of fear through him, but he quickly pushed it aside. He couldn’t afford to be distracted now.

“Stop worrying about him,” Endorsi snapped, her voice cutting through his thoughts. She didn’t look at him, her gaze fixed on the path ahead as she parried another attack. “Aguero can take care of himself. Right now, you need to focus on keeping yourself alive.”

Bam swallowed hard, nodding again. She was right—he had to stay focused. But it wasn’t easy. The fear, the worry—it was all there, simmering just beneath the surface, threatening to spill over at any moment. He took a deep breath, trying to steady himself as they continued forward.

The battle was intense, the attackers relentless in their pursuit. Bam and Endorsi fought side by side, their movements synchronized as they took down enemy after enemy. But as the fight dragged on, it became clear that they were outnumbered. The attackers kept coming, wave after wave, pushing them deeper into the forest. The situation was growing more desperate by the minute, and Bam could feel the strain in his muscles, the exhaustion setting in.

“We need to split up,” Endorsi said suddenly, her voice tight with strain. “There are too many of them—we’ll cover more ground if we go our separate ways.”

Bam hesitated, his instincts screaming against the idea of splitting up. But Endorsi was right—they couldn’t keep fighting like this. They needed to take down as many of the attackers as possible before they were overwhelmed.

“Be careful,” he said, his voice laced with worry.

“You too,” Endorsi replied, her expression softening for just a moment. “We’ll meet back here once it’s over.”

With that, they went their separate ways—Bam heading east, Endorsi heading west. The forest seemed to close in around him as he moved deeper into the darkness, his crossbow at the ready. Every sense was on high alert, every shadow a potential threat. The tension in the air was palpable, the silence broken only by the distant sounds of battle.

Bam pushed forward, his focus razor-sharp as he scanned the area for any sign of the attackers. The forest was a maze of twisted trees and tangled underbrush, making it difficult to navigate. But he kept moving, determined to clear as many of the attackers as he could. He couldn’t let fear slow him down—not now.

But as he moved through the darkness, his thoughts kept drifting back to Aguero. The memory of their conversation was still fresh in his mind, the weight of the truth pressing down on him. Aguero’s revelation had changed everything, and Bam couldn’t shake the feeling that things would never be the same. He had trusted Aguero with his life, and now he knew just how dangerous that trust could be. But even now, with everything he had learned, Bam couldn’t bring himself to doubt Aguero. Despite the darkness that surrounded him, despite the danger that loomed over them, Aguero had always been there for him, always protected him. And Bam knew he would do whatever it took to protect Aguero in return.

Meanwhile, Endorsi moved through the western part of the forest, her chakrams at the ready. The darkness was thick here, the trees towering overhead like sentinels. She could hear the distant sounds of battle, but they were growing fainter as she moved further away from the others. Her instincts told her that the worst was yet to come, that the true danger was lurking just beyond her sight.

As she moved deeper into the forest, a familiar chill crept down her spine. There was something about this place, something that set her on edge. The air was heavy with tension, the silence oppressive. And then, out of the corner of her eye, she saw a figure leaning against a tree, half-hidden in the shadows. Endorsi froze, her heart skipping a beat as she stared at the figure. It was too dark to make out the details, but there was something unsettlingly familiar about the way they stood, the way they seemed to be watching her.

The figure stepped forward, emerging from the darkness with a slow, deliberate grace. Endorsi’s breath caught in her throat as the figure came into view, her heart pounding in her chest. It was a woman—tall, with short, blue hair that glinted in the faint light. She wore a black coat that billowed around her like a shroud, and her eyes gleamed with a cold, calculating light.

“It’s been a while, Endorsi Zahard,” the woman said, her voice smooth and chillingly familiar.

Endorsi’s blood ran cold. She knew that voice. She knew those eyes. It was a face she had hoped never to see again, a face that had haunted her nightmares for years.

“Kiseia,” Endorsi breathed, her voice barely above a whisper. The name tasted like poison on her tongue, bringing with it a flood of memories she had tried so hard to bury. Kiseia Khun, Aguero’s cousin—the woman who had nearly killed Bam six years ago. The woman responsible for the scar that marred his chest, a permanent reminder of the night everything had gone horribly wrong.

Kiseia’s lips curved into a cruel smile. “I’m glad to see you remember me,” she said, her tone mocking. “I was worried that you might have forgotten our little encounter.”

Endorsi’s grip tightened on her chakrams, her knuckles turning white. Fear and anger warred within her, the memories of that night crashing down on her like a tidal wave. She wasn’t able to do anything to protect Bam, to keep him safe from Kiseia’s grasp, but she had failed. Bam had nearly died that night, and the guilt of that failure had haunted Endorsi ever since.

“What do you want?” Endorsi demanded, forcing the words out past the lump in her throat. Her voice was steady, but her heart was racing, her mind spinning with a thousand possibilities. Kiseia wouldn’t be here unless she had a reason, and whatever that reason was, it couldn’t be good.

Kiseia’s smile widened, a flash of white teeth in the darkness. “Isn’t it obvious? I’m here to finish what I started all those years ago. You should know better than anyone that loose ends need to be tied up.”

Endorsi’s heart clenched, a cold knot of fear settling in her stomach. She had known this day would come, had always known that Kiseia would return to settle the score. But knowing didn’t make it any easier to face her now, not when the memories of that night were still so raw.

“I won’t let you hurt him,” Endorsi said, her voice trembling with barely restrained fury. The thought of Bam lying broken and bleeding again, of Kiseia’s knife cutting into his flesh—it was unbearable. She had sworn to protect him, and she wasn’t going to let Kiseia take him away from her, not again.

Kiseia laughed, the sound cold and sharp like the edge of a blade. “You think you can stop me? You couldn’t even protect him last time. You were too weak then, and you’re too weak now.”

Endorsi’s jaw clenched, anger surging through her. She wouldn’t let Kiseia get inside her head, wouldn’t let her words shake her resolve. She had grown stronger since that night, had trained harder, fought harder. She wouldn’t let Kiseia walk away unscathed this time.

“I’m not the same person I was back then,” Endorsi said, her voice low and fierce. “And I’m not alone.”

Kiseia’s eyes gleamed with amusement. “Oh? You think your little friends can save you? How adorable.”

Endorsi didn’t flinch, didn’t waver. She had fought too hard to let fear take hold of her now. “We’ll see who’s left standing.”

The tension between them crackled in the air, thick and suffocating. The forest seemed to hold its breath, the shadows closing in around them as they faced each other. Endorsi’s heart pounded in her chest, her mind racing with a thousand thoughts. But one thing was clear—this was a fight she couldn’t afford to lose.

Kiseia’s smile faded, replaced by a look of cold determination. “Let’s see if you’ve really gotten stronger, Endorsi,” she said, her voice dripping with venom. “But don’t expect me to go easy on you this time.”

With that, Kiseia lunged, her movements quick and deadly. Endorsi barely had time to react, raising her chakrams to deflect the attack. The force of the blow sent a jolt through her arms, but she held her ground, refusing to be pushed back. The clash of metal echoed through the trees as they exchanged blows, each strike more vicious than the last.

Endorsi fought with everything she had, her chakrams a blur of motion as she parried and countered. But Kiseia was relentless, her attacks precise and ruthless. It was like fighting a shadow—every time Endorsi thought she had the upper hand, Kiseia would slip away, her movements fluid and unpredictable.

But Endorsi wasn’t the same girl she had been six years ago. She had faced death, fought battles she had never imagined, and she had come out stronger for it. She wouldn’t let Kiseia intimidate her, wouldn’t let her past mistakes define her. She was a warrior, and she would fight with everything she had to protect the people she cared about.

The battle raged on, the forest around them echoing with the sound of clashing blades. Every muscle in Endorsi’s body burned with exertion, but she pushed through the pain, refusing to give up. She could see the hatred in Kiseia’s eyes, the twisted satisfaction she took in every strike, every wound she inflicted. But Endorsi wouldn’t let her win. She couldn’t.

Finally, with a fierce cry, Endorsi swung her chakrams in a wide arc, forcing Kiseia back. She took a step forward, pressing the attack, her movements fueled by determination and anger. But just as she thought she had the upper hand, Kiseia’s hand shot out, grabbing Endorsi’s wrist in a vice-like grip.

“Not bad,” Kiseia said, her voice cold and mocking. “But still not good enough.”

Before Endorsi could react, Kiseia twisted her arm, sending a searing pain shooting through her shoulder. Endorsi cried out, her chakrams slipping from her grasp as Kiseia forced her to the ground, pinning her beneath her weight.

Endorsi struggled, her heart pounding in her chest as she tried to break free. But Kiseia’s grip was too strong, her eyes glinting with cruel satisfaction as she leaned in close, her breath hot against Endorsi’s ear.

“You’re a fool, Endorsi,” Kiseia whispered, her voice filled with venom. “You should have stayed out of this. Now, you’ll pay the price.”

Endorsi’s vision blurred with pain, but she refused to give in, refused to let Kiseia win. She wouldn’t let her take away everything she had fought for, everything she had struggled to protect. Summoning the last of her strength, Endorsi twisted beneath Kiseia, driving her knee into her side with all the force she could muster.

Kiseia let out a gasp of pain, her grip loosening just enough for Endorsi to break free. With a fierce cry, Endorsi shoved her off, scrambling to her feet as she reached for her chakrams. But Kiseia was quick, too quick, and before Endorsi could react, she was on her again, her blade flashing in the dim light.

Endorsi barely had time to block the strike, her chakrams clashing against Kiseia’s blade with a sharp clang. The force of the blow sent a jolt through her arms, but she held firm, refusing to back down. She couldn’t afford to lose this fight—not when so much was at stake.

The battle raged on, each strike more desperate than the last. Endorsi could feel her strength waning, the exhaustion creeping into her limbs, but she pushed through it, driven by the need to protect Bam, to stop Kiseia once and for all.

But Kiseia was relentless, her attacks growing more vicious, more determined. She had come here with a purpose, and she wouldn’t stop until she had what she wanted. And as the fight dragged on, it became clear that Kiseia was toying with her, wearing her down, waiting for the perfect moment to strike.

Finally, with a swift, brutal movement, Kiseia disarmed Endorsi, sending her chakrams flying out of reach. Endorsi stumbled back, her heart racing with fear as she realized she was defenseless. Kiseia advanced on her, a cold smile playing on her lips as she raised her blade, ready to deliver the final blow.

Kiseia’s lips curled into a smile, cold and cruel, as she raised her blade, poised to deliver the final blow. “It’s over, Endorsi,” she said, her voice dripping with malice. “You never stood a chance.”

But Endorsi wasn’t done yet. She had faced death too many times to be afraid of it now, and if she was going down, she was going to make sure Kiseia didn’t walk away unscathed. With a fierce determination, Endorsi pushed past the pain, her eyes locking onto Kiseia’s with a defiant glare.

As Kiseia brought her blade down, Endorsi lunged forward, sacrificing her own safety for a chance to strike. The blade cut deep into her right arm, just below her shoulder, and a sharp, searing pain tore through her flesh. She bit back a cry of agony, refusing to give Kiseia the satisfaction of hearing her scream. Blood dripped down her arm, soaking into her clothes, and the force of the blow ripped the armband she had been wearing, exposing the skin beneath.

Kiseia’s eyes widened in surprise as she noticed the tattoo on Endorsi’s arm, the inked symbol stark against her pale skin. “So, you’re the number four in TFN?” Kiseia sneered, her voice laced with disdain. “You’re still pretty weak to be holding that number.”

Endorsi’s lips curled into a smile, and then she laughed—short, sharp bursts of sound that echoed through the trees. It was a laugh that sent chills down Kiseia’s spine, a sound that was more terrifying than any scream. Endorsi’s laughter was raw, unhinged, as if she had finally lost her mind. Kiseia took a step back, thrown off by the unexpected reaction. This wasn’t how things were supposed to go. Endorsi was supposed to be begging for her life, not laughing in the face of death.

“What’s so funny?” Kiseia demanded, her voice wavering slightly. But before she could make sense of the situation, Endorsi disappeared from sight, vanishing as if she had been nothing more than a shadow.

Kiseia barely had time to react before Endorsi reappeared, moving with a speed and precision that shouldn’t have been possible given her injuries. Endorsi’s hand shot out, grabbing Kiseia by the head with a grip so strong it felt like a vice. Kiseia’s eyes widened in shock, her breath catching in her throat as she realized just how much power Endorsi still had left. Before she could do anything to defend herself, Endorsi slammed Kiseia’s head into the ground with enough force to shake the earth beneath them.

The impact sent a jolt of pain through Kiseia’s skull, leaving her dazed and disoriented. She lay there on the ground, stunned and unable to comprehend what had just happened. How could Endorsi still be standing? How could she still have this much strength after everything she’d been through? It didn’t make any sense. Kiseia’s mind raced, overthinking every possibility, every scenario. She had been so confident, so sure of her victory, but now… now she felt something she hadn’t felt in a long time. Fear.

Endorsi loomed over her, her eyes gleaming with a manic light, her smile twisted and cruel. She was a sight to behold—covered in blood, her own and Kiseia’s, with wild eyes that gleamed with something dark and unrelenting. There was no mercy in her gaze, no hesitation. Kiseia felt a shiver run down her spine as she realized just how dangerous Endorsi truly was.

“The hierarchy in TFN doesn’t equate to our skill levels,” Endorsi said, her voice cold and mocking. “You should know that better than anyone.”

Kiseia’s fear spiked as Endorsi’s foot came down on her face, the force of the blow nearly breaking her nose. The pain was excruciating, but it was the humiliation that stung the most. Endorsi was taunting her, showing her just how powerless she was, how easily she could be crushed. Kiseia’s mind whirled with a mix of anger and fear, but she couldn’t let herself be defeated. Not like this.

With a snarl, Kiseia swung her blade wildly, aiming for Endorsi’s legs, but her movements were clumsy, driven more by desperation than skill. Endorsi moved with a fluid grace, evading each strike with ease, her body twisting and turning in ways that seemed almost inhuman. She tumbled and rolled, her flexibility allowing her to dodge every attack with a precision that left Kiseia breathless.

Endorsi’s taunts echoed in Kiseia’s ears, a constant reminder of how outmatched she was. “Is that all you’ve got?” Endorsi sneered, her voice laced with derision. “I expected more from someone who thought she could take me down.”

Kiseia’s frustration grew with each failed attempt, her swings becoming more erratic, more desperate. But no matter what she did, she couldn’t land a hit. Endorsi was too fast, too agile, and the longer the fight dragged on, the more it became clear that Kiseia was losing. Her confidence had been shattered, replaced by a growing sense of dread. How had it come to this? How had she gone from being the hunter to being the one hunted?

Finally, Endorsi made her move. She tumbled toward Kiseia, her movements a blur of motion, and before Kiseia could react, Endorsi’s legs wrapped around her neck, squeezing with a strength that took Kiseia’s breath away. Kiseia’s hands clawed at Endorsi’s legs, trying to break free, but it was no use. Endorsi’s grip was like iron, unyielding and merciless.

For a moment, Kiseia’s world narrowed to the pain, the crushing pressure around her throat, the black spots dancing at the edges of her vision. She couldn’t breathe, couldn’t think. All she could do was struggle, but even that was becoming more and more difficult as the seconds ticked by. Her body was betraying her, growing weaker with every passing moment. 

In a final, desperate attempt, Kiseia tried to swing her blade one last time, but her strength was gone, her movements sluggish and ineffective. Endorsi’s grip tightened, and with a sickening crack, Kiseia’s neck snapped, the sound echoing through the silent forest like a gunshot.

Endorsi released her hold, letting Kiseia’s lifeless body slump to the ground. The battle was over, the air thick with the scent of blood and sweat. Endorsi stood over her fallen opponent, breathing heavily, her body trembling with exhaustion. The adrenaline that had fueled her had begun to fade, leaving her feeling drained and hollow. But despite the pain, despite the wounds that covered her body, she felt a deep, primal satisfaction. Kiseia was dead. The threat was gone.

Endorsi let out a shaky breath, wiping the blood from her face with the back of her hand. Her mind was a whirlwind of thoughts, emotions she couldn’t quite process. She had won, but it had come at a cost. The wound on her arm throbbed, a sharp reminder of just how close she had come to losing. She glanced down at the torn armband, the tattoo on her skin still visible in the dim light. It was a symbol of her rank, her place in the world she had fought so hard to survive in. But it was more than that—it was a reminder of the sacrifices she had made, the lives she had taken, the enemies she had defeated.

The fight with Kiseia had been a harsh reminder that strength wasn’t just about power or skill. It was about resolve, about the will to survive no matter what. And in that moment, Endorsi knew that she had what it took to survive, to keep fighting no matter how many enemies stood in her way. She was more than just a number, more than just a rank in TFN. She was a warrior, and she wasn’t going to let anyone take that away from her.

But even as she stood there, victorious, a part of her couldn’t help but feel the weight of what she had done. Killing Kiseia had been necessary, but it had also been brutal, savage in a way that left Endorsi feeling both exhilarated and disturbed. She had tapped into something dark, something that lurked deep within her, and it scared her. But she couldn’t dwell on it, not now. There would be time to process it later, to come to terms with what she had become.

Aguero moved through the dark, secluded landscape with the ease of a predator. His breath was steady, his eyes scanning the shadows for any sign of movement. He had been dispatching attackers one after another, each one more skilled than the last, but none of them were a match for him. His mind, however, was not entirely focused on the enemies before him. Instead, it was torn between the battle at hand and the nagging worry for Bam, who was somewhere out there, facing his own threats.

He needed to end this. Aguero’s pace quickened, his eyes narrowing as he honed in on the source of the attack. There was a mastermind behind this assault, someone pulling the strings, and Aguero was determined to find out who. He dodged another ambush, swiftly eliminating the assailants with a flurry of precise strikes. Their bodies fell silently to the ground, and Aguero didn’t spare them a second glance. His mind was racing, piecing together the fragments of information he had gathered. Who could have orchestrated such a large-scale attack in this secluded location? Who would dare challenge the Khun family so openly?

He could sense Endorsi’s presence nearby, her bloodlust palpable in the air. It was a fierce, determined energy, different from her usual playful malice. This time, she was fighting to win. Aguero could only hope that Bam was safe, that he was doing everything in his power to protect himself. Bam was strong, stronger than most people gave him credit for, but that didn’t stop the fear from creeping into Aguero’s heart. If anything happened to Bam… Aguero shook the thought away, refusing to entertain it. He had to believe that Bam would be alright, that he would reach him in time.

Suddenly, Aguero’s sharp instincts picked up something—movement in the shadows. He stopped abruptly, his body tense as he scanned the area. He wasn’t alone. Someone was there, watching him, waiting for the right moment to strike. Aguero’s hand tightened around the hilt of his blade, ready to defend himself.

Then he heard it, a voice he hadn’t heard in a while, dripping with a familiar mixture of condescension and affection. “How are you doing, my little brother?”

Aguero froze, his blood running cold. He didn’t want to believe it, but there was no mistaking that voice. Slowly, he turned, and there she was, stepping out of the shadows with the same confident stride she always had. Maschenny. And behind her, another figure he had hoped he wouldn’t see—Maria.

“What are you doing here?” Aguero’s voice was low, laced with a mixture of shock and growing anger.

Maschenny’s lips curled into a wicked smile, one that sent a shiver down Aguero’s spine. “What do you mean, you don’t know?” she asked, her tone mocking.

Aguero’s mind raced as the pieces began to fall into place. The bombing, the attackers, the location—they were all connected. It was all because of Maschenny. She had orchestrated this entire ordeal. The realization hit Aguero like a cold wave, making his heart pound in his chest. If Maschenny was here, it could only mean one thing: she knew about Bam. She knew he was alive.

The thought made Aguero feel like he was losing his grip on reality. The idea of Maschenny knowing about Bam’s survival, of her being here to finish what she started five years ago, was enough to drive him to the brink of madness.

“You…” Aguero’s voice was barely a whisper, his bloodlust beginning to rise, thick and palpable in the air. “You were behind this. You sent them all here.”

Maschenny didn’t deny it. She simply watched him with that same wicked smile, her eyes gleaming with amusement. “It took you long enough to figure it out.”

Aguero’s hands trembled with the intensity of his rage, but he forced himself to stay calm, to think clearly. He couldn’t let his emotions cloud his judgment, not now. But the sight of Maschenny standing there, so smug, so pleased with herself, made it nearly impossible.

“I should have known,” Aguero spat, his voice shaking with barely contained fury. “I should have known you’d come after him.”

Maschenny’s expression didn’t change, but there was a flash of something in her eyes—something dark and dangerous. “Oh, little brother, you always did underestimate me.”

Aguero’s patience snapped. He lunged forward, his blade aimed directly at her heart. But before he could land the blow, Maria stepped in between them, her arms spread wide to shield Maschenny. “Aguero, please, stop!”

For a split second, Aguero hesitated, his blade hovering just inches from Maria’s chest. But then the image of Bam, vulnerable and in danger, flashed through his mind, and his hesitation vanished. He couldn’t afford to stop, not now, not when Bam’s life was on the line.

“Stop!” Maria’s voice was trembling, her eyes pleading. “Please, don’t do this, Aguero.”

But Aguero’s mind was made up. Whoever threatened Bam’s life had to be punished, even if it meant tearing his own family apart. He shoved Maria aside with a force that sent her sprawling to the ground, his focus solely on Maschenny. His blade gleamed under the pale moonlight as he charged forward, his movements fueled by unbridled anger.

Maschenny barely flinched as Aguero attacked, her own blade meeting his with a deafening clang. The impact sent a shockwave through the air, the force of their clash causing the ground beneath them to tremble. Maschenny was a top assassin, one of the best in their family, and she was more than capable of holding her own against Aguero. But Aguero was driven by something far more dangerous than skill—he was driven by the desire to protect the one person who meant everything to him.

Their battle was a blur of motion, each strike more vicious than the last. Aguero’s blade cut through the air with deadly precision, his attacks fueled by a relentless determination to end Maschenny once and for all. But Maschenny was no less formidable. She moved with the grace and speed of a seasoned assassin, her counterattacks swift and brutal. She wielded a combination of weapons—a gun, bombs, and a blade—each one a deadly extension of her lethal intent.

Aguero gritted his teeth as he blocked a barrage of gunfire, his blade deflecting the bullets with practiced ease. He couldn’t afford to let his guard down for even a second. Maschenny was a master of manipulation, and she was using every trick in the book to break his resolve.

“You’re doing all this for a friendship with that boy?” Maschenny’s voice was laced with contempt as she launched a bomb in his direction. Aguero dodged it just in time, the explosion sending debris flying in all directions.

Aguero’s eyes blazed with fury as he countered her attack, his blade slicing through the air with deadly accuracy. “You don’t know anything, Maschenny,” he spat, his voice filled with venom. “I’m not a child anymore who would follow you blindly. I have a mind of my own, and I won’t let you control me!”

Maschenny’s eyes narrowed, her expression darkening. “You’re sacrificing everything, betraying your family, betraying me—the one who raised you—all for what? A friendship with that boy? You’ve lost your mind, Aguero.”

Aguero’s response was immediate, his voice filled with conviction. “He’s not just some boy! He’s my dear friend! Stop defining friendship as less than romance! Stop defining romance as better than friendship! Bam makes me happy. Bam makes me feel loved despite everything I’ve been through, despite everything I’ve done. And I would do anything to keep him happy and safe!”

His words only fueled Maschenny’s fury. She lashed out with a series of rapid strikes, her blade moving with deadly precision. But Aguero was relentless, his determination unshakable. He parried her attacks with expert skill, his movements fluid and powerful. He could feel the weight of the battle bearing down on him, but he refused to back down. Not when Bam’s safety was on the line.

The fight raged on, each blow more savage than the last. Blood stained the ground as both siblings sustained injuries, but neither was willing to yield. Maschenny’s manipulation was a constant, insidious force, trying to worm its way into Aguero’s mind, to break his spirit. But Aguero’s resolve was stronger than ever. He wasn’t just fighting for himself; he was fighting for Bam, for the life they could have together.

Maschenny’s eyes burned with anger as she realized that Aguero wouldn’t be swayed. “You’re willing to kill your own blood for him? For that boy?” she hissed, her voice filled with disbelief.

Aguero’s response was cold and resolute. “If it means protecting Bam, then yes. I would kill you.”

He launched a final, devastating strike, his blade aimed straight for Maschenny’s heart. But at the last moment, he hesitated. The family code echoed in his mind, a haunting reminder of the one rule that had been drilled into him since birth—family is off-limits when it comes to killing. His blade stopped inches from Maschenny’s chest, his breath ragged as he fought to regain control.

Maschenny’s eyes widened in shock, her breath coming in short, ragged gasps. She had expected Aguero to kill her, had seen the resolve in his eyes. But now, standing on the precipice of death, she realized that Aguero had spared her—just barely.

Aguero’s voice was a low growl as he lowered his blade, his eyes blazing with fury. “Consider yourself warned, Maschenny. I know it was you who caused the train explosion five years ago. You nearly took everything from me then, but I won’t let you do it again. The only reason you’re alive right now is because of the fucking family code. But if you ever come after Bam again, I won’t hesitate to finish what I started.”

Maschenny stared at Aguero, her face pale, her eyes wide with shock. She had underestimated her brother, had thought him weak, easily manipulated. But now, standing before him, she saw the truth. Aguero was no longer the child who had looked up to her with adoration and trust.